[Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

PHYSICS
STUDY PACKAGE
PART - I
A COMPLETE TEXTBOOK FOR CLASS - XI

Brilliant
STUDY CENTRE
PALA
Mutholy Campus, Ph: 04822 - 206100, 206800
Arunapuram Campus, Ph: 04822 - 212415, 210949, 216975
Ernakulam - Ph: 0484 - 2665080, 2665090

[Link]., email: brilliantstudycentre@[Link]

1
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

BLANK

2
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

CONTENTS

1. Physical World and Measurements --------------------------------------------------------------05

2. Kinematics------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------27

3. Laws of Motion-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------95

4. Work, Energy and Power ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 144

5. Motion of Systems of Particles and Rigid Body --------------------------------------- 189

6. Gravitation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 238

7. Properties of Bulk Matter --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 276

8. Thermodynamics ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 347

9. Behaviour of Perfect Gases and Kinetic Theory of Gases ----------------------- 379

10. Oscillations and Waves ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 412

3
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

BLANK

4
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

CHAPTER - 01
PHYSICAL WORLD AND MEASUREMENTS

Physical Quantities:
The quantities which can be measured by an instrument and by means of which we can describe the laws of
physics are called physical quantities. eg. length, velocity, acceleration, force, time, pressure, mass, density etc.
Physical quantities are of three types
Fundamental or Basic quantities Derived Quantities Supplementary Quantities

1. Fundamental (Basic) Quantities are the elementary quantities which covers the entire span of physics. Any
other quantities can be derived from these. All the basic quantities are independent of each other. General
Conference on Weights and Measures, chose seven physical quantities as basic or fundamental.

Length (L) Time (T) Mass (M) Temperature Electrical Luminous Amount of
(K) current (A) Intensity(Cd) substance (mol)

Basic quantities are used to derive all other physical quantities. Area, velocity, density, specific heat capacity,
resistance etc.

Area Velocity Density

2. Derived Quantities
Physical quantities which can be expressed in terms of basic quantities(M, L, T----) are called derived quantities.

displacement ML
i.e, Momentum P = mv = (m) =  M1L1T 1 is the dimensional formula of momentum.
time T
The powers of the basic quantities are called dimensions.
3. Supplementary quantities:
Besides seven fundamental quantities two supplementary quantities are also defined. They are
Plane angle (The angle between two lines) and Solid angle
UNITS :
To measure a physical quantity and express its measurement we need a ‘standard’ of the quantity. This chosen
standard is called unit of the physical quantity.

5
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

The magnitude of a physical quantity is given by

M  nU
where n = numerical value of the measured quantity.
U = unit of the quantity.
Suppose mass of a body = 20 kg = 20 × 1 kg = 20000 × 1 g
 n1U1  n 2 U 2

Here M  n1U1  n 2 U 2 = constant.

Smaller the unit, greater will be the numerical value.
Classification of units
1. Fundamental or base units - The units of fundamental quanities are called base units. In SI there are
seven base units.
2. Derived Units- The units of derived quantities are called derived units. (force- newton, frequency- Hz, etc.)
3. Supplementary Units - The units of supplementary quantities are called supplementary units(angle- radian,
solid angle- steradian)

4. System of Units - FPS, CGS, MKS and SI are used

 CGS system: In this system length, mass and time are expressed in cm, gram, and second respectively.

 FPS system: In this system length, mass and time are measured in foot, pound and second respectively

 MKS system: In this system length, mass and time are expressed in metre, kilogram and second respectively.

SI Units :

In 1960, (General Conference on Weights and Measures) decided the standard units, known as SI units. This
is divided into seven base units, and 2 supplementary units. Base units are - metre, kg, s, ampere, kelvin,
mole, candela and supplimentary units are radian and steradian.
4. SI units of derived Quantities :

displacement (metre)
Velocity =
time  sec ond  . So unit of velocity is m/s

change in velocity m / s m
Acceleration =   2
time s s
6. Prefix :
Suppose distance between Kota and Jaipur is d = 3000 m. So d = 3 × 1000 m
= 3 km (here ‘k’ is the prefix used for 1000 (103);
Suppose thickness of a wire is 0.05 m
d = 0.05 m  5  102 m  5cm (here 'c'is the prefix used for(102 ))

6
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

DIMENSIONS
Dimensions of a physical quantity are the powers to which the base quantities are raised to represent the
quantity.
2. Dimensional equation: The equation obtained by equating a physical quantity with its dimensional formula
is called a dimensional equation.
e. g. [v] = [M0L1T–1]
Finding Dimensions of Various Physical Quantities:
Height, width, radius, displacement etc. are a kind of length. So we can say that their dimension is [L]
Area = Length × Width
So, dimensions of area is [Area] = [L] × [L] = [L2]
For circle, Area = r 2

[Area] =    r 2  = [1][L2] = [L2]

1. DIMENSIONS OF ANGULAR QUANTITIES
Angle ()
Arc
(Angular displacement)  
radius
Arc L
      M 0 L0 T 0  (Dimensionless)
radius L

   1   M 0 L0T 1 
Angular velocity ( )    
t t T  

2. DIMENSIONS OF PHYSICAL CONSTANTS :

Gravitational Constant :
m1 r m2
Fg Fg

If two bodies of mass m1 and m 2 are placed at r distance apart, both feel gravitational attraction force,
whose value is,
Gm1m 2
Gravitational force Fg =
r2
Where G is a constant called Gravitational constant.

 Fg  
 G  m1  m 2 
 r 2 

M1L1T 2 
 G  M  M 
 L2 
G   M 1L3T 2
7
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

3. SOME SPECIAL FEATURES OF DIMENSIONS:

Principle of homogeneity of dimensions
Suppose in any formula, (L+  ) term is coming (where L is length). As length can be added only with a
length, so  should also be a kind of length.

So      L 
Rule No. 1 : One quantity can be added / subtracted with a similiar quantity only and give rise to the
similar quantity.

Rule No. 2 : Consider a term sin   

Perpendicular
Here  is dimensionless and sin   is also dimensionless.
Hypotenuse
4. USES OF DIMENSIONS:
1. To check the correctness of the formula :
If the dimensions of the L.H.S and R.H.S are same, then we can say that this eqn. is atleast dimensionally
correct. So this equation may be correct. (Homogeneity of dimensions)

mv 2
e.g. A formula is given : centrifugal force, Fe =
r

 m   V 2   M   LT 1 
2

Dimension of L.H.S is [F] = [M1L1T-2]. For R.H.S is   M1L1T  2

r  L
So this eqn. is atleast dimensionally correct. Thus we can say that this equation may be correct.
2. To convert a physical quantity from one system of units to another .
Convert SI unit of force - Newton, to CGS unit (dyne)
F = M1L1T–2
1 1 2 1 1 2
 M1   L1   T1   Kg   m   s 
n=             = 1000 × 100 × 1 = 105, 1N = 105 dynes
 M 2   L2   T2   g   cm   s 
3. To derive the correct relationship between different physical quantities
Homogeneity of dimensions enable us to derive relation between physical quantities, if the dependent quantities
are known
Derive the equation for period of a satellite
The period of the satellite may depend on gravitational constant G, mass of the earth m and orbital radius r
[T] = [G]a[M]b[R]c
 M o Lo T1    M  a L3a T 2a  [M b ]  Lc  = M–a+b L3a+c T–2a

1
1 = –2a, a = 
2

8
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

1
0 = b – a, b =  ;
2
3
0 = 3a + c c= 
2
1 1 3
 
T  G 2M 2R 2 ;

R3
T  2
GM
Example 1: In a system if units of force F, acceleration A and time T are taken as fundamental units, then the
dimensional formula of energy is

Solution: Energy  ML2 T 2    F  A   T    MLT 2   LT 2   T   M a La  b T 2a  2b  c

a b c a b c

i.e., a = 1, a + b = 2, c – 2b – 2a = – 2
 b = 1 and c = 2 i.e., [FAT T2]
LIMITATIONS OF DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS:
• Dimensional analysis doesn’t give any information about the constants in the equation.
• This method is useful only when a physical quantity depends on other quantities by multiplication and power
relations. (i.e., f = xa yb zc)
It fails if a physical quantity depends on sum or difference of two quantities (i.e.f = x + y – z)
1 2
i.e., we cannot get the relation, S = ut + at from dimensional analysis
2
• This method will not work if a quantity depends on another quantity as sine, cosine, logarithmic or exponential
relation. The method works only if the dependence is by power functions.
• Dimensional analysis will work only if the quantity depends only on three parameters, not more than that.
1. ERRORS IN MEASUREMENT
a) Let us use a cm. scale: We will measure length = 4 cm.

0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Although the length will be a bit more than 4, but we cannot say its length to be 4. 1 cm or 4.2 cm. It can
measure upto cms accuracy only, so we’ll say that its least count is 1 cm.
To get a closer measurement, we have to use a more minute scale, that is mm scale
b) Let us use a mm. scale: (a scale on which mm. marks are there)

0 1 2 3 4 5

9
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

We will measure length l = 4.2 cm., which is a more closer measurement. We cannot say it is to be 4.21, or
4.22, or 4.20 as this scale can measure upto 0.1 cm (1mm) only, not closer than that. It can measure upto
0.1 cm accuracy. Its least count is 0.1 cm.
Max uncertainty in l can be = 0.1 cm; Max possible error in l can be = 0.1 cm
Measurement of length = 4.2 cm. has two significant figures; 4 and 2, in which 4 is absolutely correct, and
2 is reasonably correct (Doubtful) because uncertainty of 0.1 cm is there.
To get a more closer measurement we can use Vernier callipers : (which can measure more closely, upto
0.01 cm)
Then we’ll measure length l = 4.23 cm which is a more closer measurement.
It can measure upto 0.01 cm accuracy
Least count = 0.01 cm
Measurement of length = 4.23 cm. has three significant figures ; 4, 2 and 3, in which 4 and 2 are absolutely
correct, and 3 is reasonably correct (Doubtful) because uncertainty of 0.01 cm is there.
d) When we use a Screw Gauge : (which can measure more closely, upto 0.001 cm)
we will measure length l = 4.234 cm.
Max possible uncertainty (error) in l can be = 0.001 cm
length = 4.234 cm. has four significant figures:

4, 2, 3 and 4

absolutely absolutely absolutely Reasonably

correct correct correct correct
e) When a microscope is used :
Let length l = 4.2342 cm.
Max possible uncertainty (error) in l can be = 0.0001 cm
length = 4.2342 cm. has five significant figures; 4, 2, 3, 4, and 2
3. LEAST COUNT
We have studied that no measurement is perfect. Every instrument can measure upto a certain accuracy;
called least count.
4. PERMISSIBLE ERROR
Error in measurement due to the limitation (least count) of the instrument, is called permissible error. From mm
scale  we can measure upto 1 mm accuracy (least count = 1mm). From this we will get measurement like
l = 34mm, Max permissible error (l) = 1mm
But if from any other instrument we get l = 34.5mm then max permissible error(l) = 0.1mm
and if from a more accurate instrument, we get l = 34.527mm then max permissible error (l) = 0.001mm =
place value of last digit.
Maximum permissible error in a measured quantity is the least count of the measuring instrument and if nothing
is given about least count, then maximum permissible error is the place value of the last digit.
Other Types of Errors
1. Error due to external causes:
These are the errors which arise due to reasons beyond the control of the experimentalist, e.g., change in
room temperature.
10
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

2. Instrumental errors:
As a result of the imperfection, the measurements with the instrument cannot be free from errors. Zero errors
in vernier calipers, and screw guage, backlash errors etc.
3. Personal or chance error:
The effect of the chance errors on the result can be considerably reduced by taking a large number of observations
and then taking their mean.
b) Absolute Error:
The magnitude of the difference between the mean value of the quantity and the individual measurement value
is called the absolute error of the measurement. The absolute error in an individual meaured value is:
a1  a 2  .....a n
a n  a mean  a n where amean =
n
The arithmetic mean of all the absolute errors is taken as the final or mean absolute error.

 n 
 a  a 2  a 3         a n ;   a i 
  i1 
1
a mean  a mean
n n
we can say (amean – amean)  a  (amean + a mean )
c) Relative and Percentage Error
Relative error is the ratio of the mean absolute error to the arithmetic mean,
a mean
Relative error = a
mean

When the relative error is expressed in percentage, it is called the percentage error
a mean
Thus Percentage error = a × 100%
mean

Example 2 : The length and width of a rectangular plate are 16.30  0.05 cm and 13.80  0.05 cm respectively,,
calculate the area of the plate and also find the uncertainty in the area.
Solution: l  16.30  0.05  cm; l  0.05 cm

b  13.80  0.05 cm; b  0.05 cm  A  16.30  13.80  224.94

 l   0.05   b   0.05 
Relative error in l       Relative error in b    
 l   16.30   b   13.80 

 A   l   b   0.05   0.05   1.50 

 Relative error in area   A    l    b    16.30    13.80    224.94   0.0067
           
 A  0.0067  224.94  1.50
Percentage error in area = 0.0067 × 100% = 0.67%
 Area of the plate   224.94  1.5 cm or  224.94  0.67%  cm
2 2

11
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Example 3 : The period of oscillation of a simple pendulum in the experiment is recorded as 2.63s 2.56s, 2.42s,
2.71s, and 2.80s. Find the average absolute error.
2.63  2.56  2.42  2.71  2.80
Solution: Average value = = 2.62s
5
Now T1  2.63  2.62  0.01

T2  2.62  2.56  0.06

T3  2.62  2.42  0.20

T4  2.71  2.62  0.09

T5  2.80  2.62  0.18

Mean absolute error
T1  T2  T3  T4  T5 0.54
=  0.108  0.11s
5 5

The initial and final temperatures of water as recorded by an observer are  40.6  0.2  C and
o
Example 4 :

 78.9  0.3
o
C . Calculate the rise in temperature with proper error limits.

Solution: 1   40.6  0.2  C , 2   78.3  0.3 C

o o

Rise in temperature,   2  1  78.3  40.6  37.7 o C

    1  2     0.2  0.3  0.5o C

Hence, rise in temperature =  37.7  0.5  C

o

5. SIGNIFICANT FIGURES
In a measured quantity, significant figures are = Figures which are absolutely correct + The last uncertain
figure
1. Common rules of counting significant figures:
Rule 1 :
All non-zero digits are significant
i.e. 123.56 has five S. F.
Rule 2 :
All zeros occuring between two non-zero digits are significant
i.e. 1230.05 has six S.F.
Rule 3 :
Zeros to the right of the decimal are significant if there is a non zero digit before the decimal point. If there is
no non zero digit before the decimal point ,the zeros adjacent to the right of the decimal point are not
significant.
Number of S. F. is always conserved, change of units cannot change S.F.

12
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

Suppose measurement was done using mm scale, and we get l = 85mm (Two S.F.)
If we want to display it in other units,
8.5 × 104 m  85mm  8.5cm  0.085m  8.5 × 10–5 km
All should have two S.F.
Examples

Number No. of SF Number No. of SF

3.0800 5 0.003005 4
0.00418 3 3.200 × 109 4
7.09 × 105 3 250 2
91600 3 78000,0000 2
0.0101 3
0.000800 3

ALGEBRAIC OPERATIONS WITH SIGNIFICANT FIGURES

In addition and subtraction, the final result should retain as many decimal places as there in the number with the
least decimal places.
eg: 24.36 + 0.0623 + 256.2 = 280.62223
It is to be rounded off to 1 decimal place.
 The result is 280.6
In multiplication and division, the final result should retain as many significant figures as there in the original
number with least significant digits.
eg: 2.80 × 4.5039 = 12.61092
It is to be rounded off to 3 significant figures.
 the result is 12.6.
Rules of Rounding off
If removable digit is less than 5 (50%) ; drop it
Round off
47.833 47.8
till one decimal place
If removable digit is greater than 5 (50%), increase the last digit by 1.
Round off
47.862 47.9
till one decimal place
Illustration I. The mass of a box is 2.3kg. Two marbles of masses 2.15g and 12.39g are added to it. Find the total
mass of the box to the correct number of significant figures.
Ans: Total mass = 2.3 + 0.00215 + 0.01239 = 2.31kg
Corrected total mass = 2.3kg

13
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

QUESTIONS

LEVEL - I

1. Dimensional formula for the angle of contact is

1) [M–1L–1T0] 2) [ML1T–1] 3) [M0L0T–1] 4) [M0L0T0]
2. Turpentine oil is flowing through a tube of length l and radius r. The pressure difference between the two ends

P  r2  x2 
of the tube is P; the viscosity of the oil is given by   where v is the velocity of oil at a distance
4vl
x from the axis of the tube. From this relation, the dimensions of viscosity  are

1)  M 0 L0 T 0  2)  MLT 1  3)  ML2 T 2  4)  ML1T 1 

3. The time dependence of a physical quantity is given by P  P0 exp  t 2  [Where  is a constant and t is
time.] The constant 
1) is dimensionless 2) Has dimensions [T–2] 3) Has dimensions [T2] 4) Has dimensions of P
4. A vernier calliper has its main scale of 10cm equally divided into 200 equal parts. Its vernier scale of 25
divisions coincides with 12mm on the main scale. The least count of the instrument is
1) 0.020cm 2) 0.002cm 3) 0.010cm 4) 0.001cm
5. The dimensional formula for hole mobility in a semiconductor is
1) [M–1L0T2A] 2) [M–1L2T–2A] 3) [ML–2T–2A] 4) [ML–2T–2A]
6. In a vernier calliper, N divisions of vernier scale coincide with(N–1) division of main scale (in which one
division represents 1mm). The least count of the instrument in cm should be

1 1
1) N 2) N – 1 3) 4)
10N N –1
7. A number (X) which represents the age of the universe depends upon universal gravitational constant (G),
speed of light (c) mass of electron (me), mass of proton (mp) elementary charge(e) and permittivity of free
space( 0 ); then taking X  e4me–2mp–1, the equation becomes

e4 0 4e4 e2 e4
1) X  2) X  2 2 3 3) X  2 2 2 3 4) X  2 2
0 m e m p c 2G me mp c G 0 me m p c G  0 m e m p c 3G

8. The time period T of a small drop of liquid due to surface tension depends on density  , radius r and surface
tension S. The relation is
1
1) T  r 3 / S 2 2) T = rS 3) T = r / S 4) T = S / 
 

ml 2
9. Given that m = mass, l = length, t = time and i = current. The dimensions of are the same as that of
t 3i
1) electric potential 2) electric field 3) inductance 4) capacitance
14
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

aBC
10. A wave is represented by y = a sin  At  Bx  C  , where A, B, C are constants. The dimensions of are
A
same as those of
1) length 2) mass 3) time 4) none of these

A C
11. Force F is given in terms of time t and distance x, by F = AsinCt + BcosDx. The dimensions of and are
B D
1) M0L0T0, M0L1T–1 2) MLT–1, M0L–1T 3) M0L0T0, M0L–1T1 4) M0LT–1, M0L0T0
12. A thin copper wire of length l metre increases in length by 2% when heated throught 10oC. What is the
percentage increase in area when a square copper sheet of length l metres is heated throught 10oC?
1) 4% 2) 8% 3) 16% 4) none
RT v/RT
13. Given that P  e . The dimensional formula of  is same as that of
Vb
1) V 2) P 3) T 4) R
14. In C.G.S. system, the magnitude of the force is 100 dynes. In another system where the fundamental physical
quantities are kilogram, metre and minute, the magnitude of the force is
1) 0.036 2) 0.36 3) 3.6 4) 36
15. ‘Pascal second’ is a unit of
1) Energy 2) Young’s modulus 3) Stress 4) Coefficient of Viscosity
16. An object is moving through a liquid. The viscous damping force acting on it is proportional to its velocity. The
dimensions of constant of proportionality are

1) ML1T 1 2) MLT 1 3) M 0 LT 1 4) ML0 T 1

17. If L, C and R denote the inductance, capacitance and resistance respectively, the dimensional formula for
C2LR is

1) ML2 TI0 2) M 0 L0 T 3I0 3) M 1L2 T 6 I 2 4) M 0 L0 T 2 I0

18. If the velocity of light (c); gravitational constant (G) and Planck’s constant (h) are chosen as fundamental units,
then the dimensions of mass in new system are
1/2 1/ 2 1/2
1) c . G .h 2) c1/2 G1/ 2 h 1/ 2 3) c1/2 .G 1/ 2 .h1/ 2 4) c 12 G1/ 2 h1/2

a a  t2
19. The dimensions of in the equation P  where P is the pressure, x is the distance and t is the time are
b bx

1) MT 2 2) M 2 LT 3 3) ML3T 1 4) LT 3
20. Which of the following group have different dimensions?

1) Potential difference, EMF, voltage 2) Pressure, stress

3) Heat, energy, work done 4) Dipole moment, electric flux, electric field
15
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

21. Which of the following quantities are dimensionless? (Symbols have their usual meaning.)

I2 GP  vr 
1) 2) 3) 4)
mvr T  I

b
22. The velocity v of a particle at time t is given by v  at  , where a, b and c are constants. The dimensions
tc
of abc are

1) L2 T 2 2) L2 T 1 3) LT 2 4) L2 T 1
23. The circular divisions of the given screw gauge are 50. It moves 0.5 mm on main scale in one rotation. The
diameter of the ball is

1) 2.25 mm 2) 2.20 mm 3) 1.20 mm 4) 1.25 mm

24. Consider an expanding sphere of instantaneous radius R whose mass (M) remains constant. The expansion is
such that the instantaneous density    remains uniform throughout the volume. The rate of fractional change

 1 d 
in density   is also constant. The velocity (v) of any point on the surface of the expanding sphere is
  dt 
proportional to
1
1) R 2/3 2) R 3) R3 4)
R
25. Which two of the following five physical parameters have the same dimensions?
(a) energy density (b) refractive index (c) dielectric constant (d) Young’s modulus (e) magnetic field
1) a and d 2) a and e 3) b and d 4) c and e
26. During an experiment with a metre bridge, the galvanometer shows a null point when the jockey is pressed at
40.0 cm using a standard resistance (R) of 90  , as shown in the figure. The least count of the scale used in
the metre bridge is 1 mm. The unknown resistance (X) is

1)  60  0.15   2) 135  0.56   3)  60  0.25   4) 135  0.23 

16
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

27. A student measures the thickness of a human hair by looking at it through a microscope of magnification 100.
He makes 20 observations and finds that the average width of the hair in the field of view of the microscope is
3.5 mm. The thickness of hair is
1) 0.035 mm 2) 0.04 mm 3) 0.35 mm 4) 0.40 mm
28. A vernier calipers having 1 main scale division = 0.1 cm is designed to have a least count of 0.02 cm. If n be
the number of divisions on vernier scale and m be the length of vernier scale, then
1) n = 10, m = 0.5 cm 2) n = 9, m = 0.4 cm 3) n = 10, m = 0.8 cm 4) n = 10, m = 0.2 cm
29. The number of minutes in one hour is 60 and number of seconds in one hour is 3600 then their orders of
magnitude respectively are
1) 101, 102 2) 102, 104 3) 102, 103 4) 101, 104

LEVEL - II

 2ct   2x 
1. The equation of the stationary wave is y  2A sin   cos  
     
Which of the following statements is wrong?
1) The unit of ct is same as that of  2) The unit of x is same as that of 

2c 2x c x
3) The unit of is same as that of 4) The unit of is same as that of
 t  
2. In an experiment the angles are required to be measured using an instrument. 29 divisions of the main scale
exactly coincide with the 30 divisions of the vernier scale. If the smallest division of the main scale is half-a-
degree (= 0.5o), then the least count of the instrument is
1) one minute 2) half minute 3) one degree 4) half degree

3. The energy of a system as a function of time t is given as E  t   A 2 exp  t  , where   0.2 s 1 . The
measurement of A has an error of 1.25%. If the error in the measurement of time is 1.50%, the percentage
error in the value of E(t) at t = 5 s is
1) 3 2) 4 3) 5 4) 6
4. The mass of the liquid flowing per second per unit area of cross section of the tube is proportional to px and vy
where p is the pressure difference and v is the velocity then the relation between x and y is
1) x = y 2) x = –y 3) y2 =x 4) y = –x2
1

The PE of a particle varies with distance x as U = Ax

2
5. where A & B are constants. The dimensional formula
x2  B
for A × B is
7 11 5 9
1) ML T2 2
2) ML T
2 2
3) ML T
2 2
4) ML T 2
2

6. If frequency F, velocity v, and density D are considered fundamental units, the dimensional formula for momentum
will be
1) DvF2 2) Dv2F–1 3) D2v2F2 4) DV4F–3
17
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

7. Planck’s constant h, speed of light c and gravitational constant G are used to form a unit of length L and a unit
of mass M. Then the wrong relation(s) is(are)

1) M  c 2) M  G 3) L  h 4) L  G
8. The order of magnitude of 0.00701 is
1) –2 2) –1 3) 2 4) 1
9. A person measures the depth of a well by measuring the time interval between dropping a stone and receiving the
sound of impact of the stone with the bottom of the well. The error in his measurement of time is T  0.01 second,
and he measures the depth of the well (L) to be 20 metres. Take the acceleration due to gravity (g) as 10 ms–2 and
 L 
the velocity of sound as 300 ms–1. Then the fractional error   in the measurement is close to
 L 
1) 0.2 % 2) 5 % 3) 1 % 4) 3 %
10. If c(the velocity of light) g (the acceleration due to gravity), and P (the atmospheric pressure) are the fundamental
quantities in MKS system, then the dimensions of length will be same as that of
c c c2
1) 2) 3) Pcg 4)
g P g
11. The length l, breadth b, and thickness t of a block of wood were measured with the help of a measuring scale.
The results with premissible errors (in cm) are
l = 15.12  0.01, b = 10.15  0.01, and t = 5.28  0.01
The percentage error in volume up to proper significant figures is
1) 0.28% 2) 0.35% 3) 0.48% 4) 0.64%
12. The moment of inertia of a body rotating about a given axis is 12.0kg m in the SI system. What is the value of
2

the moment of inertia in a system of units in which the unit of length is 5cm and the unit of mass is 10g?
1) 2.4 × 103 2) 6.0 × 103 3) 5.4 × 105 4) 4.8 × 105
13. The percentage errors in the measurement of mass and speed are 2% and 3%, respectively. How much will be
the maximum error in the estimation of KE obtained by measuring mass and speed?
1) 5% 2) 1% 3) 8% 4) 11%
14. The diameter of a cylinder is measured using a vernier callipers with no zero errors. It is found that the zero of
the vernier scale lies between 5.10 cm and 5.15 cm of the main scale. The vernier scale has 50 divisions,
equivalent to 2.45 cm. The 24th division of the vernier scale exactly coincides with one of the main-scale
divisions. The diameter of the cylinder is
1) 5.112 cm 2) 5.124 cm 3) 5.136 cm 4) 5.148 cm

15. Given that Y = asin t  bt  ct 2 cos t. The unit of abc is same as that of

1) y 2) y/t 3) (y/t)2 4) (y/t)3

16. The potential difference across a wire is measured with a voltmeter having least count 0.2 volt and the current
in the wire is measured with an ammeter having least count 0.1 amphere. The following readings were obtained.
Voltmeter reading (V) = 6.4 vol. Ammeter reading (I) = 2.0 ampere. Find the value of the resistance of the
wire with maximum permissible error. Also find the maximum percentage error.
1)  3.2  0.3 , 80% 2)  3.2  0.3 , 18% 3)  3.2  0.3 , 8% 4)  3.2  0.8 , 18%
18
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

17. The force F is given in terms of time t and displacement x by the equation
F = A cos Bx + C sin Dt

D
Then the dimensions of are
B
1) M0L0T0 2) M0L0T–1 3) M0L–1T0 4) M0L1T–1
18. To find the distance d over which a signal can be seen clearly in foggy conditions, a railways engineer uses
dimensional analysis and assumes that the distance depends on the mass density  of the fog, intensity
(power/area) S of the light from the signal and its frequency f. The engineer finds that d is proportional to
S1/n. The value of n is:
1) 3 2) 4 3) 5 4) 6

  s  a  s  b  s  c  
1/2

19. The radius of a circle inscribed in any triangle whose sides are a, b, c is given by r   
 s 
abc
where s  . Check this formula for dimensional consistency.
2
1) Consistent 2) Inconsistent 3) data is insufficient 4) none of these
20. A circular railway track of radius r is banked at angle  so that a train moving with speed v can safely go round
rg
the track. A student writes: tan   . Why this relation is not correct?
v2
i) Equality of dimensions does not guarantee correctness of the relation
ii) Dimensionally correct relation may not be numerically correct
iii) The relation is dimensionally incorrect
1) (i) and (ii) 2) (ii) and (iii) 3) (iii) and (i) 4) (i), (ii) and (iii)
21. The period of revolution (T) of a planet moving round the sun in a circular orbit depends upon the radius (r) of
the orbit, mass (M) of the sun and the gravitational constant (G). Then T is proportional to
1) r1/2 2) r 3) r3/2 4) r2
22. The variation of object distance (u) and image distance (v) for a lens is shown in figure. The focal length of the
lens will be (Take du = dv = 0.1 cm)

1)  5.0  0.05  cm 2)  5.0  0.10  cm 3)  0.05  0.05  cm 4)  0.05  0.10  cm

19
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

23. Which of the following is dimensionless?

v2 v2g vg
1) 2) 3) 4) v2rg
rg r r
24. A physical quantity is given by X  M a Lb T c . The percentage error in measurement of M, L and T are
,  and  respectively. Then, the maximum % error in the quantity X is

a b c   
1) a  b  c 2) a  b  c 3)   4)  
   a b c
25. If P represents radiation pressure, c represents speed of light and Q represents radiation striking unit area per
second, then non-zero integers x, y and z such that Px Qy cz is dimensionless, are
1) x = 1, y = 1, z = – 1 2) x = 1, y = –1, z = 1
3) x = –1, y = 1, z = 1 4) x = 1, y = 1, z = 1
26. Time period T of a simple pendulum may depend upon mass of the bob m; length of the simple pendulum l and
g, the acceleration due to gravity, ie, T  m a l b g c , the values of a, b and c are

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1)  , 0, 2) , 0,  3) 0,  , 4) 0, ,
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
27. The side of a cube measured by vernier scale is 10 division on main scale and first division of vernier scale
coincides with main scale division. The mass of cube is 2.732 g. Assume that vernier caliper is zero error free.
Find the density of the cube
1) 2 g cm–3 2) 2.6 g cm–3 3) 2.65 g cm–3 4) 2.65165 g cm–3
28. The external and internal diameters of a hollow cylinder are measured to be  4.23  0.01 cm and

 3.89  0.01 cm . The thickness of the wall of the cylinder is

1)  0.34  0.02  cm 2)  0.17  0.02  cm 3)  0.17  0.01 cm 4)  0.34  0.01 cm
29. L, C and R represent physical quantities- inductance capacitance and resistance respectively. The combination
which has the dimensions of frequency is

1 R 1 R 1 C
1) and 2) and 3) 4)
RC L RC L LC L

1 T
30. The frequency (n) of vibration of a string is given as n = , where T is tension, and l is the length of the
2l m
vibrating string, then the dimensional formula for m is
1) MLoTo 2) M1L–1T0 3) M0L0T0 4) M0L1T1
31. Each side of a cube is measured to be 5.402cm. The total surface area and the volume of the cube in appropriate
significant figures are
1) 175.1cm2, 157cm3 2) 175.1 cm2, 157.6cm3 3) 175cm2, 157cm3 4) 175.1cm2, 157.639 cm3
32. The order of 230 is approximately
1) 5 2) 9 3) 15 4) 30
20
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

KEY WITH HINTS

LEVEL - I
1. 4 Angle is dimensionless

P.  r 2  x 2   ML1T 2   L2 
2. 4    ML1T 1
4vl  LT   L 
1

3. 2 P  P0 exp  t 2  ;     T 2   M 0 L0 T 0 ;   M 0 L0 T 2 ; Dimension is T

–2

4. 2 MSD = 0.050, VSD = 0.048

LC = 0.05 – 0.048 = 0.002 cm

drift velocity v  LT   AT 
1

5. 1  h   =   M 1L0 T 2 A 
electric field E  MLT 
2

1MSD 1mm 1
6. 3 NVD = (N –1)SD; V. C. = least count = 1 SD – 1 VD or LC =   cm
N N 10N

 T    IT 
x y z
X  Ke 4 m e2 m p1  G    0   c 
x y z 4
7. 4 M 2 M 1  M 1L3T 2   M 1L3T 4 I 2   LT 1 

e4
Solving x = –1, y = –2 and z = –3  x = ε 2 m 2 m c3 G
0 e p

T   ML3  Lb  MT 2   M a  c L3a  b T 2c

a c
8. 1 T  a r bSc ;

1/ 2
1 3 1  r 3 
Solving a  , b  and c    Tk 
2 2 2  S 

ml2 ML2 ML2 T 2 work

9. 1 3
 3   = Electric Potential
ti TA AT charge

10. 3 y  a sin  At  Bx  C  ; As sin  is dimensionless, therefore, a = y = [L]

1 1 1 1 aBC L
Also, A =  ; B =  , C is dimensionless     T   time
t T x L A 1
L 
T
11. 1 F = AsinCt + BcosDx
As sin and cos are dimensionless, therefore A and B both, have dimensions of force [MLT–2].

A C L
   M 0 L0 T 0  ;     M 0 L1T 1 
B  D T 

21
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

A l
12. 1 As area = length2  × 100 = 2  100  2  2%  4%
A l

13. 2 As power of exponential is dimensionless,  V  RT  PV .  P.

2
n 2 M1L1T12 n 2  gm   cm  sec. 
14. 3  2 ;     ; n2 = 3.6
n1 M 2 L 2 T2 100  kg   m  minute 

15. 4 Pascal × second = Pressure × time  ML1T 2  T   ML1T 1 

dV MLT 2 1
again, F  A .   2
. 1   ML1T 1 
dx L T

 F   MLT 
2

16. 4 F  Kv  K      1 
  ML0T 1 
 v   LT 

17. 2  L    ML2T 2 A 2  ,  C   M 1L2T 4 A 2  ,  R    ML2T 3A 2 

C2LR   M 0 . L0 .T3 .A 0    M 0 L0 T 3 I0 

Let  m   K.c x G y h z ;
x y 2
18. 3 [m]   LT 1  .  M 1L3T 2  .  ML2 T 1 

1 1 1
Comparing x  , y   , z   [Mass in new system] = c1/2 .G 1/ 2 . h1/ 2
2 2 2

a  t2 a 1 t2
19. 1 P  . 
bx b x bx

a 1   t2  a   1  a 
 b.x  ;  ML T            MT 
1 2 2
[Pressure] =  .  . Also [Pressure] =
b x        
b L b

20. 4 Dipole moment, p = qa; So its dimensions [p]   M 0 L1T 0 Q1 

 
Electric flux    E . ds ;    M1L3T 2Q 1  ; Electric field  E]   M L T Q  
1 1 3 1

vr  ML   LT   L 
3 1

21. 3    M o Lo T o 
  ML1T 1 

22
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

b
22. 2 v  at  ; As c is added to t,  c   T 
tc

 LT 1   b   LT 1 
at   LT  or, a    LT 2  ;   b    L
1

 
T T   
 abc  LT 2  L  T  L2T 1
5  0.5
23. 3 Zero error =  0.05 mm
50
25  0.5
Actual measurement = 2  0.5   0.05  1  0.25  0.05  1.20 mm
50

4 3 4  dR  4 3 d dR R d
M R   constant  3R 2     R 0  
3 dt  v  R
24. 2
3 3  dt  3 dt dt
2
 Work done  MLT .L
25. 1 
[Energy density]    3
  ML1T 2 
 Volume  L

 Force  l  MLT L
2

[Young’s modulus] = [Y]     .   ML1T 2 

 Area  l
2
L L
26. 3 For balance with unknown resistance X,
X l
  X  60 
R 100 cm  l ;

X  l l
    X   60  0.25 
X l 100cm  l

Observed width 3.5

27. 1 Real width = Magnification width  100

m m
28. 3 L.C. = 1 MSD – 1 VSD  0.02  0.1    0.08 cm; m = 0.8 cm and n = 10.
n n
29. 3 102, 103
LEVEL - II

c LT 1 x L
1. 4  ,  both are not equal
 L  L

Value of main scale division 1 1 1o 1o

2. 1 Least count  No. of divisions on vernier scale  MSD     1 min
30 30 2 60

23
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

3. 2 E  t   A 2 e t  ------(1);   0.2s 1

dE 2dA
  dt -------(2)
E A

dt dt
 1.5% , t = 5 s   1.5% ; dt = 7.5%
t 5
dE
From (2)   2 1.25   0.2  7.5   2.5  1.5   4%
E

M x y
4. 2  px vy ; ML2 T 1   ML1T 2   LT 1  ; x = 1, –x + y = –2, –2x – y = –1
At
y = –1, x = –y
1

ML2T–2 = AL2 OR A = ML2 T 2 ;

2 7 11
5. 2 Dimension of x2 = L2, B = L2; A × B = ML 2 T 2
L

P  mv  F x v y D z ; MLT   F v D 
1 x y z
6. 4

Equating the powers we get, z = 1; y = 4 ; x=–3  P  F3 v 4 D1

hc hG
7. 2  h    ML2 T 1  ,  c    LT 1  , G    M 1L3T 2  ; M
G
, L
c3

8. 1 7.01 103  10  103  102  order is  2

2L L T 1 1 L 150 T
9. 3 T  ;      100%   100%  1%
g v L 2gL v L 8 L

c 2 L2 T 2
10. 4    L
g LT 2

 0.01 0.01 0.01 

11. 2 percentage error in volume is     100  0.35%
 15.12 10.15 5.28 
a b c
m  L  T 
12. 4 n 2  n1  1   1   1  for moment of inertia = ML2T0
 m 2   L 2   T2 
2
 1kg   1m   1 s   1000   100 
2
n 2  12.0       = 12.0    1  12.0 100  400 = 4.8 × 105
 10g   5cm  1
 s  10  5 

1 E m 2 V
13. 3 KE = E = mv 2 ;  100  100   100 = 8%
2 E m V
24
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

14. 2  Diameter = MS + VC × LC = (5.10 + 24 × 0.001) cm = 5.124 cm

15. 4 y  a sin t  bt  ct 2 cos t

3
y y y y y
a = y, b = ,c= ; a bc  y  2   
t t2 t t t

V
16. 3 From Ohm’s law, the resistance of the wire is given by R 
I

R V I
The maximum proportionate error in R is    R  0.08125  R  0.26
R V I

R  R   3.2  0.3 ohm .

R
The maximum percentage error = 100  8%
R

D 1 1
17. 4 Since Bx and Dt are dimensionless, [D] = T–1, [B] = L–1;    L T
B
18. 1 d   x Sy f z -------(1)

 L   ML3 
x y z
 MT 3  T 1 

1
x  y  0 –3x = 1; –3y – z = 0 x 
3

1
y z = –1 d  1/3 S1/3 f 1
3
Comparing the term S we get n = 3

  s  a  s  b  s  c  
1/ 2
abc
19. 1 As s  , L.H.S. = s = [L]; R.H.S =   = [L]
2  s 

rg L  LT 
2

tan   2   1   M 0 L0T 0 
20. 1
 LT 
2
v 1

 Formula is dimensionally correct. But the relation is not correct because of (i) and (ii).

Take T  r a M b G c ; T   L   M   M 1L3T 2  equating the powers of M, L and T

a b c
21. 3

3
a= ie, r3/2
2

25
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

22. 1 Here, u = –10 cm, v = 10 cm, f = ?

1 1 1 1 1 1 df dv du
From       f  5.0 cm;  2   2  2
f v u 10 10 5 f v u
Max. error (df) in focal length is given by
df dv du 0.1 0.1 0.2
    
f 2 v 2 u 2 102 10 2 100
0.2 2 0.2  25
df  f   0.05cm  f   5.0  0.05 cm
100 100
2
v2  LT 1  v2
23. 1  ; is dimensionless.
rg  L   LT 2  rg

24. 1 X M L T
X  M a Lb T c ;  100  a  100  b  100  c  100
X M L T

 Percentage error in X  a  b  c

M1L2 T 2
25. 2  P  M1L1T 2 ;  c  M 0 L1T1 ; Q  L2 T1
 M1T 3

PC
PxQycz is dimensionless if x + y = 0 and – x + z = 0;  is a constant
Q

l
 T    M1 
a b c
26. 4  L1   L1T 2  ; a = 0, b = 1/2, c = –1/2; T  2
g
27. 3 The side of cube, l = 10 mm + 1 × VC
Mass M 2.732
 Density   3  g cm 3  2.65165g cm 1 ; Density = 2.65 g cm–3
10.110 
3
Volume l 1

28. 3 t  R1  R 2 ; t  R1  R 2 ;  t  t    0.17  0.01 cm

29. 1

1 T 1 MLT 2
30. 2 M 2 2 ; M  2
. 2
 M1L1T 0
4l n L T
31. 4 Surface area of a cube = 6a2 = 175.1
Volume = a3 = 157.639
32. 2 230  1.07  109 ; order is 9

26
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

CHAPTER - 02
KINEMATICS

A. RECTILINEAR MOTION

Mechanics is the branch of Physics which deals with the motion of bodies or particles in space and time.
Position and motion of a body can be determined only with respect to other bodies. Motion of the body involves
position and time.
Mechanics is divided into statics, kinematics and dynamics. Statics deals with the study of forces and their
effect on objects at rest.
Kinematics deals with the study of motion, regardless of the causes producing it
Dynamics deals with the study of motion which includes the causes of motion.
1. Objects in Motion and Rest
Rest: An object is said to be at rest if its position does not change with time with respect to its surroundings
eg: A stone on the floor.
Motion: An object is said to be in motion if it changes its position with time, with respect to its surroundings.
eg: a bird flying in air, A train moving on rails etc.
2. Rectilinear motion or Translatory motion
Rectilinear motion is that motion in which a particle or point mass body is moving along a straight line (one
dimensional) .
eg: A body slipping along the inclined plane is in translatory motion.
3. Displacement and Distance
Distance is the actual path length covered by a moving particle or a body in a given interval of time, while
displacment is the change in position vector. ie., a vector joining initial to final position.
 
Consider a particle at A moving to C along a path ABC. Its initial and final position vectors are r1 & r2 . The
  
distance travelled is the actual path ABC while the displacement is  r  r2  r1
For straight line motion, modulus of displacement = distance travelled. Displacement  distance travelled.
Displacement is a vector quantity and distance travelled is a scalar quantity.
 
 r  r2  r1
C B
r2 r

A
r1

27
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Velocity and Speed

When a particle is in motion its position vector r changes either in magnitude or in direction or both. When
we find the time rate of change of position vector r we get velocity and when we find the time rate of change of
distance we get speed.
Average speed & Average velocity
The average speed of a particle in a given time interval is defined as the ratio of total distance travelled to the
total time taken.
Average velocity is defined as the ratio of total displacement to the total time taken average speed
total distance D
= 
total time t

total displacement r r2  r1
average velocity = Vav = 
total time t t

Instantaneous Velocity & Instantaneous Speed

The magnitude of speed at any instant of time is known as instantaneous speed.

s ds
Instantaneous speed = lim = where s is the distance travelled in time t.
t 0 t dt

r
Instantaneous velocity of a particle is the velocity of the particle at an instant vav 
t
 
 r dr
Instantaneous velocity v = lim 
t 0
t dt

 
dr dr ds
Magnitude of the velocity is v =   ie, It is equal to the instantaneous speed at time t
dt dt dt

Example 1 : It was known at the Newton’s time that the position with respect to the point of release of an object
(particle) in gravity varies with time as y = 4.9 t2. Find the velocity of the particle at the end of time t = 2s.
dy d
Solution: Using the calculus formula, v 
dt
or , v 
dt
 4.9 t 2  ; or, v = 4.9 × (2t); or, v = 9.8 t

when t = 2, v = 9.8 × 2 = 19.6 m/s

Uniform Velocity
If the velocity of a particle remains constant as time passes, it is moving with uniform velocity and the body is
in uniform motion. If the velocity changes with time the body is accelerated.
ACCELERATION
The Acceleration is the rate of change of velocity. So Acceleration is also a vector.
28
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

Average Acceleration is the ratio of change in velocity in a certain time interval to the time interval.

 
v 2  v1
av 
t 2  t1
 
 v dv
Instantaneous Acceleration, is the acceleration of a body at a certain instant of time. a  lim 
t 0 t dt
v
v is the change in velocity between the time t and t + t ie, is the average acceleration
t
As t  0 , this average acceleration become instantaneous acceleration.
Example 2: A motor cyclist moves due east with a speed of 10 m/s. He changes the direction of velocity to north
keeping the speed constant during a time interval of 10 s. Find (a) change in velocity (b) average acceleration
(c) change in speed.
 
Solution: a) Moving to east v1  10 ˆi and moving to north v2  10 ˆj
  
 
Then change in velocity v  v 2  v1  10 ˆj  10 ˆi m / s | v |  10 2 m / s

v 10  j  i  ˆ ˆ
ˆ ˆ
b) Average Acceleration a av     j i m / s 2

t 10

| a av |  2 m / s2
c) Change in speed u  | v2 |  | v1 |  10  10  0

Motion in a Straight Line

When the motion of a particle is constrained along a straight line, let us assume it moves along x - axis.

dx dv d  dx  d 2 x
The velocity v = . The Acceleration a =   
dt dt dt  dt  dt 2

dx
If is positive, the direction of velocity is along positive x - axis and it is negative along the negative x - axis.
dt
dv dv
Similarly if is positive the acceleration is along the positive x axis and if is negative, the acceleration is along
dt dt
the negative x - axis. The magnitude of v is speed.

29
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Motion with uniform velocity

For a particle moving along x - axis with uniform velocity u, starting from the point x = x1 at t = 0, then at a time
t, its position and velocity are given by x(t) = x1 + ut , v(t) = u and a(t) = 0. Since the velocity is a constant, v- t graph
is a horizontal line and a-t graph conicides with time axes since a = 0 at all times.
v

t
Motion with constant acceleration
Suppose the body is having a constant acceleration a and at t = 0, the velocity is u and at t = t, the velocity is v
dv
Then  a , or dv = adt
dt
v t

 dv   adt ; v  u  a  t 0 ;
t
v – u = at,   u  at --------- (1)
u 0

v
vav
t t t
u v + v0
2
s   dv    u  at  dt ; s =  udt   at dt
0 0 0

t
1 2
s = ut + at --------(2)
2

1 2
from (1) v2 = (u + at)2 = u2 + 2uat + a2t2 = u2 + 2a(ut + at ) = u2 + 2as -------(3)
2

1 2
v = u + at; s = ut + at ; v2 = u2 + 2as
2
Distance travelled by the body in the nth sec is = Distance travelled by the body in n secs – distance travelled
by it in (n – 1)secs

 1 1
ie Sn = u + a  n    u + a (2n –1) -------(4)
 2 2

30
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

Kinematics of freely falling bodies

When a body moves under the action of earth’s gravitational field alone, the body is said to be freely falling.
The acceleration of a freely falling body varies inversely with square of the distance of the body and the centre of
earth.
For a body projected up, the velocity, and displacement are considered as positive. For downward projection
the velocity and displacement are negative. The acceleration of the particle is directed downwards, a = –g.
Position-time graph of uniform motion in one dimension
The position-time graph of an object in a uniform motion in one dimension is a straight line AB, inclined to time
axis as shown in figure. Here, the position coordinates of the object at the instants t = 0, t1 and t2 respectively are x0,
x1 and x2. Let C and D be the two points on the position - time graph corresponding to instants t1 and t2. Draw CC1,
CC2, DD1 and DD2, perpendicular on time axis and position axis, as shown in figure.

Then, t 2  t1  OD1  OC1  C1D1  CE

and x 2  x1  OD 2  OC 2  C 2 D 2  ED

x 2  x1 ED
 Velocity of the object, v  t  t  CE  tan   slope of position-time graph.
2 1

Thus, velocity of an object in a uniform motion is equal to the slope of position-time graph with time axis.
Velocity - time graph in uniform motion
Consider an object moving with a uniform velocity v along a straight line towards the right of origin O, hence,

v is positive. The velocity-time graph of the object is a straight line AB parallel to time axis.
If the object is moving towards the left of origin, the velocity-time graph is again a straight line parallel to time
axis but lies below the time axis, which has been shown by dotted line A' B', in. figure.

Displacement of a moving object can be calculated by velocity-time graph.

OA  C1C  D1D  v and OC1  t1 and OD1 = t2.

31
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Therefore, displacement of the object in time interval (t2 – t1) = uniform velocity × time interval

 v  t 2  t1   C1C   OD1  OC1   C1C  C1D1  area CC1D1D

Non-uniform motion
An object is said to be in non-uniform motion if it undergoes unequal displacements in equal intervals of time,
however small these intervals may be.
In non-uniform motion, the velocity of object is
(i) Variable velocity. An object is said to be moving with a variable velocity, if either its speed or its direction of
motion or both change with time.
(ii) Average velocity of an object is equal to the ratio of change in position or displacement to the time interval
 t  , in which the displacement occurs, i.e.,

diplacement x
Average velocity, v  time interval  t

Velocity-Time graph of a uniformly accelerated motion.

Consider an object moving with uniform acceleration ‘a’ along a straight line. Let u be its initial velocity of
motion.

(a) Acceleration: At points A & B, Let v1 and v2 be the velocities of the object at times t1 and t2 respectively. Then,
v 2  v1 OB2  OA 2 A 2 B2 CB
v1  OA 2 ; v 2  OB2 ; t1  OA1 and t 2  OB1 . Acceleration: a  t  t  OB  OA  A B  AC =
2 1 1 1 1 1

slope of straight line AB.

Thus, acceleration of an object in a uniformly accelerated motion in one dimension is equal to the slope of the
velocity - time graph with time axis.
(b) Distance travelled in a given time interval

 v1  v 2 
Distance travelled = average velocity × time interval      t 2  t1 
 2 

1
  A1A  B1B   A1B1 = area of trapezium AA1B1B.
2

32
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

B. VECTORS

Physical quantities are of two types: Scalars and Vectors

Scalar Quantities : The physical quantities which have only magnitude but no direction, are called scalar quantities
or scalars. e.g., Mass, length, time, etc.
The scalars can be added, subtracted, multiplied and divided by ordinary laws of algebra.
Vector quantities or vectors
The physical quantities which have magnitude as well as direction are called vectors. e.g., Displacement, velocity,
force, acceleration, etc.
Vectors cannot be added, subtracted, multiplied and divided by ordinary laws of algebra, but follows the laws
of vector Algebra.
Representation of a Vector
A B
5 cm
A vector can be represented by a straight line with an arrow head. The length of the line represents the magnitude
of the vector and the arrow head shows the direction of the vector. The starting point of arrowed line is called the

origin of the vector and the end of the arrowed line is called head of the vector. A vector is represented as F , where
F is the force.
1. Negative vector : A vector is said to be negative of a given vector if its magnitude is the same as that of the
given vector but direction is opposite to that of it.

A
–A

2. Equal vectors : Two vectors are said to be equal if they have same magnitude and direction regardless of the
position of their initial points.

A
B
A=B

3. Co-initial vectors : Those vectors which have got the same initial point are co-initial vectors.
D
A
B

d a
b E
e

c
C

33
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

4. Collinear vectors : Vectors which are either along the same line or along parallel lines irrespective of their
magnitudes and directions are collinear vectors.

5. Coplanar vectors : Vectors which are parallel to the same plane or lying in the same plane are coplanar
vectors.
Y

O X
6. Unit vector : A unit vector of the given vector is a vector of unit magnitude and has the same direction as that
of the given vector. It has no units, dimensions and signifies direction only.

 a
Unit vector of a is written as â and is given by â  
|a|

In Cartesian coordinates, ˆi, ˆj, kˆ are the unit vectors along x-axis, y-axis and z-axis respectively..
7. Null vector or zero vector : A vector of zero magnitude is known as zero or null vector. Its direction is not

defined. It is denoted by 0
Multiplication of a Vector by a Real Number

The multiplication of a vector A by a real number n becomes another vector nA .
A A

2A 2A
(a) (b)
Multiplication of a Vector by a Scalar
 
When a vector A is multiplied by a scalar S, it becomes a vector SA , whose magnitude is S times the
   
magnitude of A and it acts along the direction of A . The unit of SA is different from the unit of vector A .
Resultant vector
The resultant vector of two or more vectors is defined as that, single vector which produces the same effect as
is produced by individual vectors together. It is to be noted that the nature of the resultant vector is the same as that
of the given vectors.
Addition of vectors
  
Let PQ and QS are the vector displacements of a particle. Then the final displacement of the particle is PS .
S

N
R
3m W E

 S
P Q
4m
34
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

 
The magnitude of PS equal to = 42  32 = 5m and angle  , the direction of displacement of PS is due north
of east. This shows that the vectors cannot be added by simple laws of algebra.
     
The displacement PS is the sum (or resultant) of displacements PQ and QS i.e. PQ  QS  PS
         
PQ, QS and PS are represented by A, B and R respectively, then A  B  R . Here R is called resultant
 
of two vectors A and B
LAWS OF VECTOR ADDITION
(1) Vectors of the same nature alone can be added eg. a force vector cannot be added to velocity vector, but
can be added to force vector only.
(2) Vector addition is commutative. It states that the sum of the vectors remains the same in whatever order they
may be added ie., A  B  B  A
A
AB
B = B
B A

A
(3) Vector Addition is Associative : It states that the sum of the vectors remains the same in whatever, grouping
  
they are added i.e., A  B  C  A  B  C 
S
C

Q
B  C 
A
A  B
B

O A P
Example 1 : Resolve a weight of 10 N in two directions which are parallel and perpendicular to a slope inclined at
30o to the horizontal.
Solution: Component perpendicular to the plane

3
W  W cos 30o  10   5 3 N and component parallel to the plane
2
1
W  W sin 30o  10     5 N
2

35
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

(i) Triangle law of vectors

It states that if two vectors acting on a particle at the same time are represented in magnitude and direction by
the two sides of a triangle taken in an order, their resultant vector is represented in magnitude and direction by
the third side of the triangle taken in the opposite order.

Magnitude of R
 
Let the two vectors A and B , inclined at an angle  , be represented by OP and PQ of OPQ act on a
particle at the same time. Then, the resultant R is represented by the third side OQ of triangle, taken in
opposite order.

In right angled triangle ONQ, we have

OQ 2  ON 2  NQ 2 or OQ 2  OP  PN 2  NQ 2 or

R 2  A  B cos    B sin  
2 2

i.e., R  A 2  B 2  2AB cos  ------------(3)


Direction of R
Let the resultant R make an angle  with the direction of A . Then from right angled triangle QNO.

QN QN B sin 
tan     ------(4)
ON O P  PN A  B cos 
(ii) Parallelogram law of vector addition
Let the two vectors A and B , inclined at angle  be acting on a particle at the same time.


Let they be represented in magnitude and direction by two adjoining sides OP and OS of parallelogram OPQS,
drawn from a point O. According to parallelogram law of vectors, their resultant vector R will be represented

by the diagonal OQ of the parallelogram.

36
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

Magnitude and direction of R

Draw QN perpendicular to OP produced. In the above Fig.
OP = A, OS = PQ = B, OQ = R and  SOP   QPN  
Proceeding as discussed above, in the case of triangle law of vector addition, the magnitude and direction of
resultant vector R will be given by

R  A 2  B2  2AB cos  -----------(5)

B sin 
and tan  
A  B cos  ----------(6)
Lamis’ theorem


 C


Lami’s theorem states that if three forces acting at a point are in equilibrium, then each force is proportional to
the sine of the angle between the other two forces. Let A, B and C be three forces acting at a point on a body
making angles ,  and  with each other,,

A B C
Then  
sin  sin  sin 
SUBTRACTION OF VECTORS
   
Subtraction of vector B from a vector A is defined as the addition of vector  B (negative of vector B ) to
    
vector A . Thus A  B  A  (  B).
   
If the angle between A and B is  , then the angle between A and  B is 180 o    .

 
A  B  A 2  B2  2AB cos 

Properties of vector subtraction : The important properties of vector substraction are as follows:
   
Vector substraction does not follow commutative law. AB  BA
     
Vector substraction does not follow associative law. 
A  BC  A B C  
37
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

RESOLUTION OF A VECTOR
The process of splitting up a vector into two or more vectors is known as resolution of a vector. The vectors into
which a given vector is split are known as component vectors.
Rectangular components of a vector in a plane :

 
Let vector A makes an angle  with x-axis as shown in the figure. Then, A  Ax ˆi  Ayˆj
Here, A x  A cos  and A y  A sin 
1
Ay
or A   A  A  and tan  
2 2 2
 A  A  A (cos   sin ) ;
2 2 2 2 2
x y .
x y
Ax
Rectangular components of a vector in a space :


Let ,  and  are the angles between vector A and the x, y and z-axes, respectively as shown in the figure.
Then

A  A x ˆi  A y ˆj  Az kˆ
Here, A x = A cos  , A y  A cos, A z  A cos 

The magnitude of vector A is A  Ax  Ay  Az
2 2 2

Ax A A
cos   ; cos   y ;cos   z
A A A
cos 2   cos 2   cos 2   1

Where cos , cos, and cos  are called the direction cosines of the vector A .
PRODUCT OF TWO VECTORS
The Product of two vectors can be of two types

(A) Scalar product or dot product of two vectors . (B) Vector or cross product of two vectors
38
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

SCALAR PRODUCT OR DOT PRODUCT

     

The dot product or scalar product of two vectors A and B represented by A.B read A dot B is defined as 
 
the product of the magnitudes of A and B and the cosine of the angle between them.
 
A.B  AB cos 
Properties of scalar product
Scalar product is commutative.
   
A. B  B.A
Scalar product is distributive.
      
 
A. B  C  A.B  A.C

Scalar product of a vector with itself gives square of its magnitude.

    1

A. A  AA cos 0o  A 2 or 
A  A. A  2

Scalar product of two perpendicular vectors is zero.

 
A.B  ABcos 90o  0

Example 2: Find the angle between two vectors A  2i  j  k and B  i  k .

 2   1   1 1   1

2 2 2 2 2
Solution: A  A   6; B B   2

  
A  B  2i  j  k  i  k = (2) (1) + (-1) (-1) = 3

AB 3 3 3
Now, cos         30o
AB 6 2 12 2
CROSS PRODUCT OR VECTOR PRODUCT
 
The cross product or vector product of two vectors A and B is a vector
        
C  A  B (read A cross B) . The magnitude of A  B is defined as the product of the magnitudes of A and B
  
and the sine of the angle between them. The direction of the vector C  A  B is perpendicular to the plane
    
containing A and B such that A , B and C form a right handed system.
 
A  B  A B s in  nˆ
 
where n̂ is a unit vector indicating the direction of A × B .

39
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Two rules for determining the direction of the cross product:

 
(i) Right hand thumb rule : Curl the fingers of your right hand from A to B . Then the direction of the erect
 
thumb will point in the direction of A  B .

 
(ii) Right hand screw rule : Hold a right hand screw with its axis perpendicular to the plane containing A and B .
   
Now, turn the screw from A to B . The direction of advance of the screw gives the direction of A  B .

Properties of vector product

   
Vector product is anticommutative. A  B   B  A
      
Vector product is distributive.  
A BC  AB AC

Vector product of two perpendicular vectors is equal to the product of the magnitudes of the
given vectors, the direction being perpendicular to the plane of the given vectors.
 
A  B  ABsin 90 nˆ  ABnˆ
o

Applying the result to unit vectors, we get

ˆi  ˆj  kˆ , ˆj kˆ  ˆi, kˆ  ˆi  ˆj Similarly, ˆj  ˆi   k,
ˆ kˆ  ˆj   ˆi, ˆi  kˆ  ˆj

Example 3: Show that the vector A  ˆi  ˆj  2kˆ is parallel to a vector B  3iˆ  3jˆ  6kˆ .
Solution: A vector A is parallel to another vector B if it can be written as A = mB

   
1 1
Here, A  ˆi  ˆj  2kˆ  3iˆ  3jˆ  6kˆ or A  B
3 3

1
This implies that A is parallel to B and magnitude of A is times the magnitude of B.
3
40
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

C. PROJECTILE MOTION

Projectile: Any object that is given an initial velocity and that subsequently follows a path determined by the
gravitational force acting on it and by the frictional resistance of the atmosphere is known as a projectile. A missile
shot from a gun is an example of a projectile. The path followed by a projectile is known as its trajectory. Projectile
motion is a two dimensional motion. For a projectile the air resistance has no effect on the projectile motion. The
effect due to rotation of earth and curvature of the earth is [Link] acceleration due to gravity is constant in
magnitude and directed downwards.
The motion of a projectile is a combination of two linear motions perpendicular to each other.

i) one along horizontal direction and ii) the other along vertical direction.

Consider a particle at rest lying on a horizontal plane (x-y) having coordinates x, y as shown in the figure.
Now, a force parallel to x-axis is acting on the particle. The x coordinate will change and y will remain unchanged.

Initial velocity u and acceleration are is resolved along horizontal direction, and vertical direction.
Component along x axis  u x  u cos  . Component along y axis  u y  u sin 

Acceleration along x axis = 0 = ax. Acceleration along yaxis = –g = ay.

A Projectile projected Horizontally from a Height h with Velocity u

u x

vx = u
h v
vy = gt

41
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Horizontal component of velocity, v x  u , remain constant throughout the motion.

Vertical component of velocity of projectile at any time t is v y  gt ------(1)

Velocity of the projectile at any time t is   v 2x  v 2y  u 2  g 2 t 2 ------(2)

vy gt 2gh
This velocity makes an angle  with the horizontal. Then, tan    
vx u u

2h
Time taken by the projectile to reach the ground is . ------(4), It does not depend on velocity of
g
projection.

2h
Horizontal range, x = u ------(5)
g

g 2
Equation of trajectory is y  x ------(6)
2u 2

Velocity of the projectile on striking the ground  u 2  2gh ------(7)

A projectile projected with velocity u at an angle θ with the horizontal

y
vy
v
v = ucos
u vx

usin H

x
ucos R

1 2
x  u cos t and y  u sin t  2 gt

gx 2
Equation of trajectory is y  x tan   ------(8)
2u 2 cos 2 

This is of the form of y  ax  bx 2 . So path of the projectile is a parabola.

Velocity of the projectile at any time t is

v  v 2x  v 2y  (u cos ) 2  (u sin   gt)2  u 2  g 2 t 2  2gtu sin 

vy u sin   gt
This velocity makes angle  with horizontal. Then tan  =  ------(9)
vx u cos 

42
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

Maximum Height

y
vy = 0
B
vx = ucos 
u
H Maximum height corresponds to B At B, v y  0,
 y = 0 at C and A
A x
C
R

 u sin  
2
u 2y u 2 sin 2 
0   u sin    2gH ; H  
2
v  u  2a y y ;
2
y
2
y ------(10)
2g 2g 2g
Maximum height depends only on the vertical component of initial velocity.
Time of flight (T)
Case 1
If the flight completes in the horizontal plane of projection, then the time of flight is the time when y-component
of displacement (y) becomes zero.
y

vy = 0
u B vx = ucos
H y = 0 at C and A
x
A C
R

1 1
Time to go from A to C; At C, y = 0; y  u yt  ayt2 ; 0  u y t  gt 2
2 2

2u y 2u y
t  0(corresponds to position A) or t ; Time of flight T 
g g

1 1 2u sin 
y  uyt  a yt2 , 0  (u sin ) t  gt 2 ; Time of flight T  ------(11)
1)
2 2 g
Time of ascending motion is equal to the time of descending motion and magnitude of y-component of velocity
at the same height in ascending as well as in descending motion are same but directions are opposite.
Range

 2u sin  
AC  R  u cos  T T  
 g 

43
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

u cos  2u sin  2u 2 sin  cos  u 2 sin 2

R   ------(15)
g g g

u2
For maximum range :   45 , o R max 
g

R max
In this situation H  ------(16)
4
We get the same range for two angles of projection  and (90o –  ) but in both cases maximum heights
attained by the projectiles are different.
If R = H

u 2 sin 2 u 2 sin 2 
  tan   4    tan 1 4
g 2g
Range can also be expressed as

u 2 sin 2 2u sin u cos  2u x u y

R   ------(17)
g g g
Simplest form of projectile (flight finishes in the horizontal plane of projection)

2u sin  2u y
Time of flight T   ------(18)
g ay

u 2 sin 2 2u x u y
Horizontal range R   ------(19)
g ay

u2
Maximum horizontal range R max  for   45o ------(20)
g

u 2 sin 2   u y 
2
u2
Maximum height H   ----(21) Greatest height H max  for   90o ---(22)
2g 2a y 2g

Some Important Relations

Relation between maximum range and maximum height.

u2
Range is maximum when   45 , R max o 
g

u2 u 2 R max
Height is maximum when   90 , H max   H max  
2g 2g 2
44
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

At the top most point the velocity is u cos  . When it strikes the horizontal again the velocity becomes u again.
The speed is minimum at the highest point  u cos  .

4
In projectile motion, if the range R is n times the maximum height H, i.e., R = nH, then tan   . If R = H,
n
n = 1, then   tan 1  4   76o . If R = 4H, n = 4 then   tan 1 1  45o

Two bodies projected with angles 1 and 2 reach the same maximum height then their velocities are in the ratio

 sin 2 
 
 sin 1 

If the two bodies projected with angles, 1 and 2 have the same range then the ratio of initial velocities =

 sin 22 / sin 21 

At the highest point,

1 1 1
 PE H   PE max  mgH  mg  u 2 sin 2  / 2g  ;  KE H   KE min  2 mv 2  2 mv2H  2 mu 2 cos 2 

1  PE 
  tan 
2
 TE  mu 2 ; 
2  KE H
Example 1: A ball is thrown with a velocity of 20 ms-1 at an angle of 30o above the horizontal from the top of a
building 15 m high. Find (take g = 10 ms-2)
a) the time after which the ball hits the ground.
b) the distance from the bottom of the building at which it hits the ground.
c) the velocity with which the ball hits the ground.
d) the maximum height attained by the ball above the ground.

Solution:

The horizontal and vertical components of initial velocity are

45
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

a) u x  20cos 30o  10 3 ms 1 ; uy = 20 sin 30o = 10 ms-1 (vertically upwards)

Horizontal acceleration ax = 0 and vertical acceleration ay = -10 ms-2 (vertically downwards)
Vertical displacement S = -H = -15 m.
Since the vertical and horizontal motions are independent of each other, for vertical motion.

1 1
S  u y t  a y t 2 , –15  10t   10  t 2 ; t = – 1s or 3 s
2 2
Since t = –1 s is not possible, the ball will strike the ground at point C after 3 seconds.

b) Horizontal range R  OC  u x t  10 3  3 = 30 3 m

c) Horizontal velocity at C is v x  u x  10 3 ms 1 .

Vertical velocity at C is v y  10  10  3  20 ms 1

The negative sign shows that the ball is moving downwards.

10 3 
2
  20   10 7 ms 1
2
Resultant velocity v  v2x  v 2y 

v x 10 3 3  3
tan        tan 1   with the vertical.
vy 20 2  2 

20 sin 2  30 o 
H   
u 2 sin 2  2

d) Maximum height attained above the ground is hmax= h + H   15  20 m

2g 2  10

Example 2: A hunter aims his gun and fires a bullet directly at a monkey on a tree. At the instant the bullet leaves the
barrel of the gun, the monkey drops. Will the bullet hit the monkey. Substantiate your answer with proper
reasoning.

Solution: Let the monkey stationed at A, be fired with a gun from O with a velocity u at an angle  with the
horizontal direction OX. Draw AC, perpendicular to OX. Let the bullet cross the vertical line AC at B after
time t and coordinates of B be (x, y) w.r.t. origin O.

OC x
 t 
u cos  u cos  ----------(i)

In  OAC, AC  OC tan   x tan  ----------(ii)

46
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

Clearly CB = y = the vertical distance travelled by the bullet in time t.

Taking motion of the bullet from O to B along Y axis we have y 0  0, y  y, u y  u sin , a y  g, t  t
1 2 1 1
As, y  y 0  u y t  a y t  y  0  u sin  t   g  t 2  u sin  t  gt 2 ----------(iii)
2 2 2
 AB  AC  BC  x tan   y

 x 1 
 x tan    u sin   gt 2   1 gt 2 [from (i)]
 u cos  2  2
1 2
The bullet will pass through the point B at a vertical distance gt below point A.
2
1 2
The distance through which the monkey falls vertically in time t  gt  AB .
2
So the bullet strikes the monkey.

D. RELATIVE MOTION

When two objects A and B are moving with different velocities, then the velocity of one object A with respect
to another object B is called relative velocity of object A with respect to B. Relative velocity is defined as the time
rate of change of relative position of one object with respect to another.
Expression for relative velocity.
Consider two objects A and B, moving with uniform velocities vA and vB along parallel straight tracks in the same
direction. Let x0A and x0B be their displacements from the origin at the instant t = 0. If at any time t, xA and xB are the
displacements (distances) of the two objects with respect to the origin of the position axis, then for the object A,

x A  x 0A  v A t ------------(1)

and for the object B, x B  x 0B  v B t ------------(2)

Subtracting the above equations we have x B  x A   x 0B  x 0A    v B  v A  t ------------(3)

Where, x 0B  x 0A  x 0 , initial displacement of object B with respect to object A at t = 0

x B  x A  x , relative displacement of object B with respect to object A at time t.

x  x0
Thus the relation (3) can be written as x  x 0   v B  v A  t or  v B  v A ------------(4)
t

Here L.H.S. of relation (4) gives the time rate of change of position of object B with respect to object A.

 relative velocity of object B with respect to object A . v BA  v B  v A  velocity of object B – velocity of

object A.

47
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Determination of relative velocity

When two objects A and B are in relative motion, the relative velocity of object A with respect to object B can
be obtained by imposing equal and opposite velocity of B on both A and B, so that B is brought to rest. The resultant
of two velocities of A gives the relative velocity of object A with respect to object B.
 
Consider the following examples. Let vA and v B be the uniform velocities of the objects A and B, where vA> vB.
(i) When the two objects are moving along parallel straight lines in the same direction i.e., angle
between them is 00

vA – vB vA vA +(– vB)
A A A
vB – v B vB At rest
Fig.1
B B B
(a) (b) (c)
Fig.1(a) shows that both the objects A and B are moving towards the right. To find the relative velocity of

object A with respect to B, superimpose velocity  vB on both the objects A and B. Due to which in Fig.1(c)
   
the object B is brought to rest and the velocity of object A becomes v A  vB i.e., v A  v B . Hence relative
velocity of object A with respect to B is given by
  
v AB  v A  v B
Since v AB , vA and v B all are in the same direction, we can write

v AB  v A  v B ------------(5)
Thus if two objects are moving in the same direction, the magnitude of relative velocity of one object with
respect to another is equal to the difference in magnitude of two velocities.
(ii) When the two objects are moving along parallel straight lines in opposite directions
i.e., angle between them is 1800.

vA + vB vA vA +(+vB)
A A A
– vB – vB + vB At rest
B Fig.2
B B
(a) (b) (c)

Fig.2 shows that the object A is moving towards the right and object B is moving towards the left (-vB). To find
the relative velocity of object A with respect to B, superimpose velocity vB on both the object A and B as in
Fig.2(b). Due to which, in Fig.( 2)(c), the velocity of object B become zero i.e., the object B is brought to rest
   
and the velocity of object A becomes v A  vB  i.e., v A  v B . Therefore, the relative velocity of object A with
respect to object B is given by
  
v AB  v A  v B ------------(6)

48
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

Thus if two objects are moving in opposite directions, the magnitude of relative velocity of one object with
respect to other is equal to the sum of the magnitude of their velocities.
(iii) When the two objects are moving at an angle
 
Let  be the angle between the directions of motion of the objects A and B, moving with velocities vA and v B
as shown in Fig.(3),

Q R Q

vAB
vA
vA


Fig.3
 P' (180o – )  P
O P –vB O vB
–vB

 

 
Where, vA  OQ and vB  OP . To find the relative velocity of object A with respect to B, superimpose

   
velocity B   OP  on both the objects A and B. Due to which the object B is brought to rest and object A
 v
 
 
possesses two velocities vA along OQ and vB along OP', inclined at an angle 1800   . The relative velocity of
object A with respect to B is the resultant of velocities vA and vB acting at an angle 180
0
  , which will be 
represented by the diagonal OR of the parallelogram OQRP’, according to parallelogram law of vectors.
In magnitude, the relative velocity of A with respect to B is given by

vAB  v 2A  vB2  2v A v B cos 1800    v 2A  v 2B  2v A v B cos  ------------(7)

 
If v AB makes an angle  with the direction of vA then

v B sin 1800    v B sin 

tan   
v A  v B cos 180   
0
v A  v B cos  ------------(8)

Relative Motion of Trains.

Two trains of lengths l1and l2 are moving with speed v1and v2 in opposite directions on parallel tracks.
Crossing starts when their heads are parallel to each other.

v1
A
l2
v2 B
We can easily find distance travelled by them x1 = v1t and x2 = v2t if the time of crossing is known. For this, let
us fix our reference frame on A.

A
t sec later v2
B B  vBA = v1+ v2
vBA v1
l1 + l2 t=0

49
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

It does not matter who moves faster, when moving from opposite directions, the other speed will always
appear to be faster to us since the magnitude of our velocity is getting added to theirs.

 Relative distance covered, SBA = vBAt; SBA  l1  l2 and v BA  v1  v 2

l1  l2
 t ------------(16)
v1 +v 2

If the two trains are moving along the same direction, the time taken to overtake one over the other is

l1  l2
t ------------(17)
v1 -v 2

Applications of relative motion

1. Rain-man-umbrella problems

Here rain is falling at a certain speed vr with respect to the ground at an angle  with respect to vertical. A
person standing/running in a particular direction would be needed to be protected by properly directing the axis
of the umbrella.

In such situation, since the man is supposed to hold the umbrella, we would fix our reference frame into the
person.

Case -I : Man running against rain

v  v sin 
Clearly, tan  v cos  ------------(18)
m r

Case -II : Man running with the rain

vm  vr sin 
tan 
vr cos  ------------(19)

50
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

Here again 3 situations may arise-

2. Crossing of river.
Let d be the width of a river which is flowing at speed vr and vsr be the velocity of a swimmer in still water. The
swimmer would have moved with this velocity but since the river is flowing, the actual velocity of swimmer will
 
be the vector sum vsr  vr .
x
t = t
A B
d vr
vsr
vs

t = 0 vr
So, if the person tries to reach A, he reaches B, due to the drift further created by the river flow. The motion
along the two mutually perpendicular directions take place independently, i.e., the motion along x-axis is not
influenced by forces acting along y-axis. So we split the motion into two directions.
i) Along the length of the river. ii) Perpendicular to the length of the river.
As clear from the velocity diagram, the component vsr sin  will enable the person to cross the river, hence the
time of crossing
vsr vs
 vsr sin 

vr
vsr cos 
d
t  ------------(20)
vsr sin 

While the component (vr + vsr cos  ) will enable the person to drift along the length of river. Hence drift
x  (v r  vsr cos ) t ------------(21)

Using these two equations whatever is asked can be found out.

51
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Special cases:
I. Minimum time of crossing:

d
Since, t  v sin  , so to keep t  t min , a minimum. sin  = maximum   = 90o
sr

So, the person should try to swim perpendicular to the direction of the river flow.

x
t = tmin

d vr
vsr
vs
t = 0 vr

d d
 t min  ------------(22) and hence drift x  v r v ------------(23)
vsr sr

II. Shortest Path

The person should try to swim such that the resultant velocity becomes perpendicular to the river flow.

t = t

vr
vsr vs = vsr sin 

vsr cos  vr
t=0

vr vsr2  v2r
vr  vsr cos   cos   vs  vsr sin   vsr .  vsr2  v 2r ------------(24)
vsr ; vsr

d
t 
v  v 2r ------------(25)
2
sr

Example 1: To a man walking at the rate of 3 km/h the rain appears to fall vertically. When he increases his speed
to 6 km/h it appears to meet him at an angle of 45o with vertical. Find the speed of rain.
Solution: Let î and ˆj be the unit vectors in horizontal and vertical directions respectively..

52
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

Let velocity of rain vr  aiˆ  bjˆ (i)

Then speed of rain will be v r  a 2  b 2 (ii)

In the first case vm = velocity of man  3iˆ ;  v rm  v r  v   a  3 ˆi  bjˆ

It seems to be in vertical direction. Hence, a – 3 = 0 or a = 3
In the second case vrm   a  6  ˆi  bjˆ  3iˆ  bjˆ ; This seems to be at 45o with vertical.; Hence, b  3

 3   3 
2 2
Therefore, from Eq. (ii) speed of rain is v r   3 2 km / h

E. CIRCULAR MOTION

Circular Motion
When a particle moves in a plane such that its distance from a fixed (or moving) point remains constant then
its motion is called as the circular motion with respect to that fixed (or moving) point. That fixed point is called the
centre and the distance is called the radius.
Kinematics of Circular Motion
Variables of Motion
(a) Angular Position
The angle made by the position vector with given line (reference line) is called the angular position. Circular
motion is a two dimensional motion or motion in a plane.

Suppose a particle P is moving in a circle of radius r and centre O.

The position of the particle P at a given instant may be described by the angle  between OP and OX. This
angle  is called the angular position of the particle. As the particle moves on the circle its angular position 
changes. Suppose the point rotates an angle  in time t.
(b) Angular Displacement
Angle rotated by the position vector of the moving particle with some reference line is called angular
displacement. It is dimensionless and has proper unit (SI unit) radian while other units are degree or revolution
2rad = 360o = 1rev
21
If T is the period and ‘f’ the frequency of a uniform circular motion av   2f -------(2)
T

53
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

d) Angular Acceleration 
(i) Average Angular Acceleration

Let 1 and 2 be the instantaneous angular speeds at times t1 and t2 respectively, then the average angular
2  1 
acceleration  av is defined as  av  t  t  t ------- (4)
2 1

(ii) Instantaneous Angular Acceleration

It is the limit of average angular acceleration as t approaches zero, i.e,

 d d d d
a  lim    ------- (5)
t  0 t dt dt d d
It is also an axial vector with dimension [T–2] and unit rad s–2
If  = 0, circular motion is said to be uniform

d d d 2 
As   ,   ------- (6)
dt dt dt 2
i.e, second derivative of angular displacement with respect to time gives angular acceleration.
Relation Between Linear Speed and Angular Velocity

 d
  lim 
t  0 t dt

d d 2 
The rate of change of angular velocity is called the angular acceleration (  ). Thus,   
dt dt 2

The linear distance PP travelled by the particle in time t is s = r

s  ds d
or lim = r lim or r or v  r ------- (7) Here, v is the linear speed of the particle.
t0 t t  0 t dt dt

dv d
Differentiating again with respect to time, we have a t  r or a t  r ------- (8)
dt dt

dv
Here, a t =is the rate of change of speed (not the rate of change of velocity). This is called the tangential
dt
acceleration of the particle.

54
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

Relations Among Angular Variables

These relations are also referred as equations of rotational motion and are-

1 2
  0  t ------ (17)  = ω0 t + t ----- (18) 2  02  2 ----- (19)
2
These are valid only if angular acceleration is constant and are analogous to equations of translatory motion, ie,

1 2
v = u + at; s = ut + at and v2 = u2 + 2as
2
Dynamics of Circular Motion
In circular motion or motion along any curved path, Newton’s law is applied in two perpendicular directions
one along the tangent and the other perpendicular to it i. e. towards centre. The component of net force along the
centre is called centripetal force. The component of net force along the tangent is called tangential force.

dv mv2
Tangential force  Ft   ma t  m  mr ; Centripetal force  FC   m r 
2

dt r
Example: A small block of mass m, is at rest relative to a turn table which rotates with constant angular speed  .
The friction between the block and the table may provide the necessary centripetal force.

mv2
  N  mg ----------(21)
r

Motion in a Vertical Circle

Consider the motion of a small body (say stone) tied to a string and whirled in a vertical circle. If at any time the
body is at angular position , as shown in the figure, the forces acting on it are the tension T in the string along the
radius towards the centre and the weight of the body mg acting vertically downwards.

mv2 mv2
Applying Newton’s law towards centre, T  mg cos   or T=  mg cos 
r r

55
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

The body will move on the circular path only if Tmin > 0(as if Tmin  0) the string will slack and the body will fall
down instead of moving on the circle.) So for completing the circle, i.e. looping the loop, the minimum tension in the
mv2H
string T = 0    180  .
o
 mg  0 ie, v H  gr ---------- (27)
r
Now applying conservation of mechanical energy between highest point H and lowest point L.

1 1 1 1
mg  2r  mv 2H  mv 2L ; 2mgr  mrg  mv 2L ; 5mgr  mv 2L ; v L  5rg
2 2 2 2

i.e, for looping the loop, the minimum velocity at lowest point must be v L  5gr ---------- (28)

In case of motion in a vertical plane, the tension is maximum at lowest position and in the above case of looping
the loop Tmax = 6 mg --------- (29)

Motor Car moving over a convex bridge

The motion of a car over a convex bridge AB is the motion along the tangent of a circle AB. The centripetal force is
provided by the difference of weight mg of the car and the normal reaction R of the bridge.

mv 2 mv 2
mg  R  or R  mg  -------- (30)
r r
Clearly, R  mg ,i,e,. the weight of the moving car is less than the stationary car..

If R  mg , the car will move along the track and if R  mg , the car will be detached from the bridge

Tension in an oscillating simple pendulum

For a simple pendulam oscillating the speed of the bob is v when the string makes an angle  with the vertical.
The forces acting on the bob are:

O


mg sin 
mg cos
mg
56
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

(a) The tension T (b) The weight mg

mv 2
As the bob moves in a vertical circle of radius L with centre at O, a centripetal force of magnitude is
L
mv 2
required towards O. This force will be provided by the resultant of T and mg cos  . Thus, T  mg cos  
L
 v2 
or T  m  g cos   L  -------- (31)
 
Circular Turning on Roads
When vehicles go through turnings, they travel along a nearly circular arc. There must be some force which will
produce the required centripetal acceleration. If the vehicles travel in a horizontal circular path, this resultant force is
also horizontal. The necessary centripetal force is being provided to the vehicles by following three ways;
 By friction only By banking of roads only  By both friction and banking of roads.
By Friction Only
Suppose a car of mass m is moving at a speed v in a horizontal circular arc of radius r. In this case, the
necessary centripetal force to the car will be provided by the force of friction f acting towards the centre.

mv2
Thus, f 
r
Further, limiting value of f is N or f L  N  mg  (N = mg)

mv 2 mv2
Therefore, for a safe turn without sliding,  f L ----- (32) i.e.,  mg or v  rg ----- (33)
r r
Here, two situations may arise. If  and r are known to us, the speed of the vehicle should not exceed
v2
rg and if v and r known to us, the coefficient of friction should be greater than .
rg
By Banking of Roads Only
Friction is not always reliable at circular turns if high speeds and sharp turns are involved. To avoid dependence
on friction, the roads are banked at the turn so that the outer part of the road is some what lifted compared to the
inner part.

Applying Newton’s second law along the radius and in the vertical direction

mv 2 v2
N sin  = and N cos   mg , then tan   or v  rg tan  -------- (34)
r rg

57
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Centrifugal Force
When a body is rotating in a circular path and when the centripetal force vanishes, the body would leave the
circular path. To an observer A who is not sharing the motion along the circular path, the body appears to fly off
tangentially at the point of release. To another observer , who is sharing the motion along the circular path (i.e., the
observer  is also rotating with the body which is released), it appears to , as if it has been thrown off along the
radius away from the centre by some force. This inertial force is called centrifugal force.

mv 2
Its magnitude is equal to that of the centripetal force =
r
Centrifugal force is a fictitious force which has to be applied as a concept only in a rotating frame of reference
to apply Newton’s law in that frame.

FBD of the ball w.r.t non inertial frame rotating with the ball.
Suppose we are working from a frame of reference that is rotating at a constant angular velocity  with respect
to an inertial frame. If we analyse the dynamics of a particle of mass m kept at a distance r from the axis of rotation,
we have to assume that a force mrreact radially outward on the particle. Only then we can apply Newton’s laws
of motion in the rotating frame. This radially outward pseudo force is called the centrifugal force.
Example1: A small body is allowed to slide on an inclined frictionless track from rest position as shown in figure.
What must be the minimum height, so that body may successfully complete the loop?

Solution: Consider the body inside the loop at position  as shown in figure. Then for its circular motion:

mv2 mv 2
R  mg cos   ; or R   mg cos 
r r
So, R will be min, when cos   min  1 , i.e.,   180o

 mv 2H 
(i.e., at highest point). So, if vH is the velocity of the body at highest point R min    mg
 r 

Now in order to ‘loop the loop’ body should not loose contact with the track any where so that R min  0

58
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

 mv 2H 
   mg  0 ; i.e., v H  gr [as m is finite] ------------(i)
 r 
Now, applying conservation of mechanical energy between points A and H
1 2
0  mgh  mv 2H  mg  2r  ; i.e., h  2r  v H ------------(ii)
2 2g

 r 5 5
Substituting the value of vH from Eqn. (i) in (ii); h  2r    , i.e., h  r ; So, h min    r
 2 2 2
Example 2: A tube of length L is filled completely with an incompressible liquid of mass M and closed at both ends.
The tube is then rotated in a horizontal plane about one of its ends with a uniform angular velocity  . Find the
force exerted by the liquid at the other end.
Solution: In rotational motion the angular velocity remains same for all points so the force required for the circular
motion of element shown in figure,

 M 
i.e., dF   dx  x2 ;
M
dF   dm  x2 [as F  mr 2 ]; as dm  L dx 
L 

M 1
So, F   L0   2 x dx    M2 L
L 2

59
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

QUESTIONS
LEVEL - I
1. A body starts from rest and moves with acceleration a0. After t0 it moves with constant velocity for further time
t0 and then retards with 2a0. What is the average velocity for the complete motion?

7a 0 t 0 7a 0 t 0 7a 0 t 0
1) a0t0 2) 3) 4)
3 10 4
2. From a certain height the ball is given velocity v0 upward. When it hits the ground the velocity is 3v0. Find the
average speed for the complete motion.

v0 5v 0 4v 0 3v0
1) 2) 3) 4)
4 4 5 4
3. There are two balls. A and B at the same level. A is thrown up with 20m/sec. After 1 sec, ball B is thrown with
40m/sec, after how much time the two balls cross each other?
1) 1 sec 2) 2 sec 3) 1.5 sec 4) 3 sec
4. During the first 18 min of a 60 min trip, a car has an average speed of 11ms . What should be the average
–1

speed for remaining 42min so that car is having an average speed of 21 ms–1 for the entire trip?
1) 25.3ms–1 2) 29.2ms–1 3) 31ms–1 4) 35.6ms–1
5. Water drops fall at regular intervals from a tap 5m above the ground. The third drop is leaving the tap, the
instant the first drop touches the ground. How far above the ground is the second drop at that instant. (g =
10ms–2)
1) 1.25m 2) 2.50m 3) 3.75m 4) 4.00m
6. A ball is thrown vertically upwards from the ground and a student gazing out of the window sees it moving
upward past him at 10ms–1. The window is at 15m above the ground level. The velocity of ball 3s after it was
projected from the ground is [Take g = 10ms–2]
1) 10m/s, up 2) 20ms–1, up 3) 20ms–1, down 4) 10ms–1, down
7. A body X moves with an initial velocity 10ms–1 and acceleration 2ms–2. Simultaneously another body Y
starting from rest and moves with acceleration 3ms–2. X and Y will have the same velocity after an interval of
time.
1) 5s 2) 3s 3) 4s 4) 10s
8. Two bodies of masses m1 and m2 are let fall freely from heights h1 and h2 respectively. The ratio of time taken
by the bodies to fall through these heights is

h1 h 12 h1
1) h 2) 2 3) 4) h1h2
2 h2 h2

9. Two particles A and B start simultaneously from a point P with velocities 20ms–1 and 30ms–1 respectively. A
and B move with acceleration equal in magnitude but opposite in direction. When A overtakes B at Q, its
velocity is 30 m/s. The velocity of B at Q is
1) 5ms–1 2) 10ms–1 3) 15ms–1 4) 20ms–1

60
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

2 2
10. The displacement y(in metre) of a body varies with time t(in second) as y =  t  16t  2 . The body comes
3
to rest in a time
1) 8s 2) 10s 3) 12s 4) 16s
11. The maximum and minimum magnitude of the resultant of two given vectors are 17 units and 7 units respectively.
If these two vectors are at right angles to each other, the magnitude of their resultant is
1) 14 2) 16 3) 18 4) 13
12. Find the resultant of 100 2 N along North-East, 1960 N along South and 980 2 N along North- West
when all these forces are acting at a point
1) 880 2 N along S - W 2) 1960 2 N along S - W

3) 880 2 N along N - S 4) 1960 2 N along N - S

13. A bird moves with velocity 20ms–1 in a direction making an angle of 60o with the Eastern line and 60o with
vertical upward line. The velocity vector of bird in Cartesian coordinate is
1) 10iˆ  10ˆj  10kˆ 2) 10iˆ  5 2jˆ 10kˆ 3) 10iˆ 10 2jˆ 10kˆ 4) 5iˆ  5 2jˆ  10kˆ
14. If (range)2 is 48 times (maximum height)2, then angle of projection is
1) 45o 2) 60o 3) 75o 4) 30o
15. The maximum horizontal range of projectile is 400 m. The maximum height attained by it will be
1) 100 m 2) 200 m 3) 400 m 4) 800 m
16. If K is the kinetic energy of a projectile fired at an angle 45o, then what is its kinetic energy at highest position?
1) K 2) K/2 3) K/4 4) 2K
17. An object is projected with a velocity of 20 m/s making an angle of 45 with horizontal. The equation for the
o

trajectory is h = Ax - Bx2 where h is height, x is horizontal distance, A and B are constants. The ratio A : B is
(g = 10 ms-2)
1) 1 : 5 2) 5 : 1 3) 1 : 40 4) 40 : 1
18. The range of a projectile, when launched at an angle of 15 with the horizontal, is 1.5 km. What is the range
o

of the projectile when launched at an angle of 45o with the horizontal?

1) 1.5 km 2) 3.0 km 3) 4.5 km 4) 6.0 km
19. A body is projected, with velocity v1, at an angle of 30 with the horizontal. Another body is projected
o

vertically upwards with velocity v2 from a point on horizontal line, vertically below the highest point. If the two
v2
bodies collide at highest point, then v should be
1

1) 2 2) 0.5 3) 3 2 4) 2 3

61
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

20. A ball of mass m is projected vertically upwards. Another ball of mass 2m is projected at an angle  with the
vertical. Both of them complete their journeys in same time of flight. The heights attained by the two balls are
in the ratio of
1) cos  : sin  2) 2 cos  : 1 3) 2 : 1 4) 1 : 1
21. Two bodies are projected horizontally with speeds 20 m/s and 25 m/s from the top of a tower. They hit the
ground in t1 and t2 sec. Then

1) t1 = t2 2) 2t1 = t2 3) t1 = 2t2 4) t1  2t1

22. The greatest height to which a person can throw a body is h. The greatest horizontal distance to which he can
throw the body is
1) 3h 2) 2h 3) h 4) h/2
23. A particle is projected from the ground with a velocity of 30 ms-1 . After 2 sec, it just crosses a wall 10 m high.
The angle of projection of the particle is
1) 75o 2) 60o 3) 45o 4) 30o
24. Two stones are projected with the same velocity but making different angles with the horizontal. Their ranges
are equal. If angle of projection of one is 30o and its maximum height is y, then the maximum height of the other
will be
1) 3y 2) 2y 3) y/2 4) y/3
25. When the angle of projection is 75o, a ball falls 10 m shorter of the target. When the angle of projection is 45o,
it falls 10 m ahead of the target. Both are projected from the same point with the same speed in the same
direction, the distance of the target from the point of projection is
1) 15 m 2) 30 m 3) 45 m 4) 10 m
26. ˆ ms1 and a constant acceleration
A particle leaves the origin with an initial velocity v  (3.00i)
a  (1.00iˆ  0.50ˆj) ms 2 . When the particle reaches its maximum x-coordinate, what is its y-component of
velocity?
1) 2.0 ms 1 2) 1.0 ms 1 3) 1.5 ms 1 4) 1 .0 m s  1
27. A projectile can have same range from two angles of projection with same initial speed. If h1 and h2 be the
maximum heights, then
1) R  h1h 2 2) R  2h1h 2 3) R  2 h1h 2 4) R  4 h1h 2
28. Average torque on a projectile of mass m, initial speed u and angle of projection  , between initial and final
position P and Q as in figure, about the point of projection is

1 1
1) mu 2 sin  2) mu 2 cos  3) mu 2 sin 2 4) mu 2 cos 2
2 2
62
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

29. A man is walking on a road with a velocity 3 km/h. Suddenly rain starts falling. The velocity of rain is 10 km/h
in vertically downward direction. The relative velocity of man with respect to rain is
1) 13 km / h 2) 109 km / h 3) 7 km / h 4) 13 km/h
30. The engine driver of a train moving at a speed v1 sights a freight train a distance d ahead of him on the same
track moving in the same direction with a slower speed v2 . He puts on the brakes and gives his train a constant
deceleration  . Then there will be no collision if

 v  v2 
2 2
 v  v2   v  v2  v1  v 2
1) d   1  2) d   1  3) d  1 4) d 
 2   2  2 2
31. A river 4.0 km wide is flowing at the rate of 2 km/hr. The minimum time taken by a boat to cross the river with
a speed v = 4 km/hr (in still water) is approximately
1) 1 hr and 9 minutes 2) 2 hr and 7 minutes
3) 1 hr and 12 minutes 4) 2 hr and 25 minutes
32. A cart is moving horizontally along a straight line with constant speed 30 m/s. A projectile is to be fired from the
moving cart in such a way that it will return to the cart after the cart has moved 80 m. At what speed (relative
to the cart) and at what angle (to the horizontal) must the projectile be fired?

 3   40  o
1) 10 8 m / s at 45o 2) 10 8 m / s at cos 1   3)   m / s at 90 4) none of these
 8  3 
 
33. A car moves with forward velocity v while rains fall vertically downwards with velocity V . At what angle the
rain will strike the front screen of the car.

v V V v
1) tan   2) cos   3) tan   4) sin  
V v v V
34. Ship A is moving with velocity 30 m/s due East and ship B with velocity 40 m/s due North. Initial separation
between the ships is 10 km as shown in figure. After what time the ships are closest to each other?

1) 80 sec 2) 120 sec 3) 160 sec 4) None of these

35. A man travelling in a car with a maximum constant speed of 20 m/s watches a friend start off at a distance 100
m ahead on a motor cycle with constant acceleration ‘a’. The maximum value of ‘a’ for which the man in the car
can reach his friend is

1) 2 m/s2 2) 1 m/s2 3) 4 m/s2 4) None of these

63
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

36. Four persons are initially at the four corners of a square whose side is equal to d. Each person now moves with
a uniform speed v in such a way that the first moves directly towards the second, the second directly towards
the third, the third directly towards the fourth and the fourth directly towards the first. The four will meet after
a time equal to:
d 2d 2d d
1) second 2) second 3) second 4) second
v 3v 3v 3v
37. Two trains, each travelling with a speed of 37.5 km/h are approaching each other on the same straight track. A
bird that can fly at 60km/h flies off from one train when they are 90km apart and heads directly for the other
train. On reaching the other train it flies back to the first and so forth. Total distance travelled by the bird is:
1) 90 km 2) 54 km 3) 36 km 4) 72 km
38. A person standing on an escalator takes a time t1 to reach the top of a tower when the escalator is moving. He
takes time t2 to reach the top of the tower when the escalator is still. How long will he take if he walks up in a
moving escalator ?
t1t 2 t1t 2
1) t2 – t1 2) t1 + t2 3) t  t 4) t  t
1 2 1 2

39. A body performs a uniform circular motion in a circle of radius R. The displacement of the particle after it has
described an angle of 60o is given by
1) 2R 2) R 3) 3R 4) 2R
40. A body crosses the topmost point of a vertical circle with critical speed. The value of centripetal acceleration
when the string becomes horizontal is
1) 3 g 2) 2 g 3) g 4) zero
41. A car turns around a curve at speed 15 km/h. If the speed is doubled, the tendency to overturn is
1) Quadrupled 2) Tripled 3) Doubled 4) Halved
42. A body of mass one kg is revolving in a vertical circle of radius 10 m. The difference in kinetic energies of the
mass at top and at bottom of the circle is given by (Take g = 10 ms-2)
1) 200 joule 2) 300 joule 3) 400 joule 4) 500 joule

43. The angular displacement is radian in a circular path of radius 10 m. The distance and displacement are
2
1) 5 and 10 2 m 2) 10 m and 10 m 3) 5 m and 10 m 4) 5 2 m and 10 m
44. A ball of mass m performs uniform circular motion in a circle of radius R. Linear momentum is represented by
P. The radial force acting on the particle is
mp 2 p2 p2 R
1) mRp 2 2) 3) 4)
R mR m
45. A particle is moving in a circle of radius R with constant speed v. The change in velocity when it moves from
A to B such that AOB  40o , is

1) 2 v cos 20o 2) 2 v sin 20o 3) 2 v cos 40o 4) 2 v sin 40o

64
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

46. A string of length l holds a heavy bob of mass m while suspended from a point. The bob revolves about a
vertical line passing through the point of suspension in a horizontal circle such that the string always remains
inclined to the vertical at an angle  as shown in figure. The period of revolution T is

l l cos  l sin  l tan 

1) T  2 g 2) T  2 g
3) T  2 g
4) T  2 g
47. Two masses M and m are attached to a vertical axis by weightless threads of combined length l. They are set
in rotational motion in a horizontal plane about this axis with constant angular velocity  . If the tensions in the
threads are the same during motion, the distance of M from the axis is
Ml ml  M  ml  M  m l
1) 2) 3) 4)
M m M m M m
48. A particle is moving in a circular path with a constant speed v. If  is the angular displacement, then starting
from   0o , the maximum and minimum changes in the momentum will occur when value of  is respectively
1) 45o and 90o 2) 90o and 180o 3) 180o and 360o 4) 90o and 270o
49. A wheel has a constant angular acceleration of 3.0 rad/s2. During a certain 4.0 s interval, it turns through an
angle of 120 rad. Assuming that at t = 0, angular speed 0  3rad / s , how long is motion at the start of this 4.0
second interval?
1) 7 s 2) 9 s 3) 4 s 4) 10 s
50. The breaking force of a string is 16 kg. The maximum frequency with which a body of mass 0.5 kg can be
whirled in a horizontal circle  g  2 ms 2  with a length of 0.5 m of the string is

1) 4 2) 5 3) 8 4) 10
LEVEL - II
1. A body travels a distance of 20m in the 7th second and 24m in 9th second. How much distance shall it travel
in the 15th second?
1) 20m 2) 42m 3) 38m 4) 36m
2. A body of mass m moving along a straight line covers half the distance with a speed of 2ms–1. The remaining
half of the distance is covered in two equal time intervals with a speed of 3ms –1 and
5ms–1 respectively. The average speed of the particle for the entire journey is
3 1 8 1 4 1 16 1
1) ms 2) ms 3) ms 4) ms
8 3 3 3

65
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

3. The driver of train A moving with a speed of 30ms–1 sees another train B moving on the same track with a
speed of 10ms–1 in the same direction. He immediately applies brakes and achieves a uniform retardation of
2ms–2 and finally A stops. To avoid collision, the minimum distance between the trains must be
1) 80m 2) 75m 3) 120m 4) 140m
4. An object is thrown vertically upward with some speed. It crosses two points p, q which are separated by h
metre. If tp is the time between p and the highest point and coming back and tq is the time between q and
highest point and coming back, then relation between tp, tq and h are,

16h 8h 6h 6h
1) g  2) g  3) 4)
tptq tp  tq 2
2
tp  tq tp 2  tq 2
5. A helicopter takes off along the vertical with an acceleration, a = 3ms–2 and zero initial velocity. In a certain
time t1, the pilot switches off the engine. At the point of take off, the sound dies away in a time t2 = 30s. The
velocity of the helicopter at the moment when its engine is switched off, assuming that velocity of sound is
320ms–1 is
1) 60ms–1 2) 80ms–1 3) 70ms–1 4) 65 ms–1
6. A body falling freely from a given height H hits an inclined plane in its path at a height h. As a result of this
impact the direction of the velocity of the body becomes horizontal. For what value of (h/H) the body will take
maximum time to reach the ground?

1 1
1) 2) 1 3) 0 4)
4 2

7. The distance x covered by a body moving in a straight line in time t is given by the relation 2x2 + 3x = t. If v
is the velocity of the body at a certain instant of time, its acceleration will be
1) –v3 2) –2v3 3) –3v3 4) –4v3

8. A car accelerates from rest at a constant rate for sometime after which it decelerates at a constant rate  to
come to rest. If the total time lapse is t, then the maximum velocity attained is given by

t t   
1) m     2) m     3) m     t 4) m     t
       
9. Velocity of the river with respect to ground is given by v0. Width of the river is d. A swimmer swims(with
respect to water) perpendicular to the current with acceleration a = 2t(where t is time) starting from rest from
the origin O, at t = 0. The equation of trajectory of the path followed by the swimmer is

x3 x2 x x
1) y = 2) y  3) y  v 4) y  v
3v0 3 2v0 2 0 0

66
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

10. A thief in stolen car passes through a police check post at his top speed of 90kmh–1. A motorcycle cop,
reacting after 2s, accelerates from rest at 5ms–2. His top speed being 108km/h. Find the maximum separation
between policemen and thief

1) 112.5m 2) 115m 3) 116.5m 4) None of these

11. The velocity (v) of a body moving along the positive x-direction varies with displacement (x) from the origin as
v  k x , where k is a constant. Which of the graphs shown in Fig. correctly represents the displacement -
time (x-t) graph of the motion.

12. Two bodies one held 30 cm directly above the other are released simultaneously and fall freely under gravity.
After 2 sec their relative separation will be:

1) 10 cm 2) 20 cm 3) 30 cm 4) zero
  
13. If P  Q  R  0 and out of these, two vectors are equal in magnitude and the third vector has magnitude 2
times that of any of these two vectors, then angles among the three vectors are

1) 45o, 75o, 75o 2) 45o, 90o, 135o 3) 90o, 135o, 180o 4) 90o, 135o, 135o
  
14. Two like parallel forces P and 3P are 40cm apart. If the direction of P is reversed, then their resultant shifts
through a distance
1) 30 cm 2) 40 cm C)50 cm 4) 60 cm
2
15. A string of length L is fixed at one end and the string makes rev/s around the vertical axis through the fixed

end as shown in the figure, then tension in the string is

1) ML 2) 2 ML 3) 4 ML 4) 16 ML
      
16. If a  5 , b  4 , c  3 thus what will be the value of a.b  b.c  c.a given that a  b  c  0
1) 25 2) 50 3) –25 4) –50
67
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

 
17. The vectors AB  3iˆ  4kˆ , and AC  5iˆ  2ˆj  4kˆ are the sides of a triangle ABC. The length of the
median through A is
1) 18 2) 72 3) 33 4) 288
 be such that u  1 , v  2 and w
18. Let u , v , w

 3 . If the projection of v along u is equal to that of
      
w along u and v , w are perpendicular to each other then u  v  w equals
1) 2 2) 7 3) 14 4) 14
  
19. Three forces P, Q and R acting along IA, IB and IC, where I is the in centre of ABC, are in equilibrium.
  
Then P : Q : R is
A B C A B C
1) cos : cos : cos 2) sin : sin : sin
2 2 2 2 2 2
A B C A B C
3) sec : sec : sec 4) cosec : cosec : cosec
2 2 2 2 2 2
20. Two particles A and B are projected with same speed so that the ratio of their maximum height reached is 3:1.
If the speed of A is doubled without altering other parameters, the ratio of the horizontal ranges attained by A
and B is
1) 1 : 1 2) 2 : 1 3) 4 : 1 4) 3 : 2
21. The position of an object moving along x-axis is given by x = a + bt2 where a = 8.5 m and
b = 2.5 m s–2 and t is measured in seconds. Its velocity at t = 2 s and the average velocity between t = 2 s and
4s is
1) 2 m s–1, 5 m s–1 2) 5 m s–1, 10 m s–1
3) 10 m s–1, 15 m s–1 4) 10 m s–1, 20 m s–1
22. A particles is thrown with velocity u making an angle  with the vertical. It just crosses the top of two poles
each of height h after 1 s and 3 s respectively. The maximum height of projectile is

1) 9 . 8 m 2) 19 . 6 m 3) 39 . 2 m 4) 4 . 9 m
23. The x and y coordinates of a particles at any time t are given by x = 2t + 4t2 and y = 5t, where x and y are
in metre and t in second. The acceleration of the particle at t = 5 s is
1) 40 ms-2 2) 20 ms-2 3) 8 ms-2 4) zero
24. A cannon and a target are 5.10 km apart and located at the same level. How soon will the shell launched with
the initial velocity 240 m/s reach the target in the absence of air drag?
1) 0.71 min 2) 0.41 min 3) Both (1) and (2) 4) None of these
25. An aeroplane is flying in a horizontal direction with a velocity u and at a height of 2000 m. When it is vertically
above a point A on the ground it releases a bomb which strikes the ground at point B. If AB = 3 km and g =
10 m/s2 , the value of u is
1) 300 km/hr 2) 150 km/hr 3) 540 km/hr 4) 54 km/hr
68
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

26. A stream of bullets is shot with speed v in all directions. The maximum area covered under firing is
1)   2 /g 2)   4 /g 2 3)   2 /g 2 4)   /g
27. A particle is projected from the ground with an initial speed of v at an angle  with the horizontal. The average
velocity of the particle between its point of projection and highest point of trajectory is
  
1) 1  2 cos 2  2) 1  cos 2  3) 1  3cos 2  4)  cos 
2 2 2
28. Two nearly identical balls are released simultaneously from the top of a tower. One of the balls fall with a
constant acceleration of g1 = 9.80 ms–2 while the other falls with a constant acceleration that is 0.1 % greater
than g1. What is the displacement of the first ball by the time the second one has fallen 1.0 mm farther than the
first ball?
1) 1 m 2) 2 m 3) 3 m 4) 4 m
29. From on the ground at a distance x from the foot of a pole, a ball is thrown, at an angle of 60o, which just touches
the top of a pole and strikes the ground at a distance of y, on the other side of it. The height of the pole.
2xy 3xy 2xy xy
1)  x  y  2)  x  y  3)  x  y  4) x  y

30. From the top of a tower 19.6 m high, a ball is thrown horiontally. If the line joining the point a projection to the
point where it hits the ground makes an angle of 45o with the horizontal, then the initial velocity of the ball is
1) 9.8 m s-1 2) 4.9 m s-1 3) 14.7 m s-1 4) 2.8 m s-1
31. Two canons installed at the top of a cliff 10 m high fire a shot each with speed 5 3 m/s at some intervel. One
canon fires at 60o with the horizontal whereas the second fires horizontally. The coordinates of the point of
collision of the shots are

1
1 1 1
1) 3 5m , 3 m 2) m, m 3) m, m 4) 5 3m, 5 m
5 3 5 3 3 5
32. A swimmer crosses a river with minimum possible time 10 second. And when he reaches the other end, he
starts swimming in the direction towards the point from where he started swimming. Keeping the direction fixed
the swimmer crosses the river in 15sec. The ratio of speed of swimmer with respect to water and the speed of
river flow is (Assume constant speed of river and swimmer)
2 3 9 5
1) 2) 3) 4)
5 2 4 2
33. A swimmer crosses a flowing stream of width d to and fro in time t1. The time taken to cover the same distance
up and down the stream is t2. Then the time the swimmer would take to swim a distance 2d in still water is
t 12 t 22
1) 2) 3) t1 t 2 4)  t1  t 2 
t2 t1

69
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

34. A boat crosses a river from part A to part B which are just on opposite side. The speed of the water is v w and
that of boat is v b relative to still water. Assume vb  2v w . What is the time taken by the boat if it has to cross
the river directly on the AB line?
2D 3D D D 2
1) v 3 2) 3) v 2 4)
b 2v b b vb
35. Two cars are moving with same velocity of 30kmh–1 maintaining a distance of 5 km between them. Speed of
a third car moving in the opposite direction and meeting the two cars at an interval of 240s is

1) 45 kmh–1 2) 30 kmh–1 3) 55 kmh–1 4) 35 kmh–1

36. Two swimmers start from point P on one bank of the river to reach Q on the opposite bank. Velocity of each
swimmer in still water is 2.5 kmh–1 . One of the swimmers crosses the river along the straight route PQ and the
other swims right angles to the stream and then walks the distance which he has been carried away by the river
to get to point Q. Stream velocity is 2 kmh–1. If both the swimmers reach the point Q simultaneously, the
velocity of walking of second swimmer is

1) 3 kmh–1 2) 4 kmh–1 3) 2 kmh–1 4) 3.5 kmh–1

37. A man holds an umbrella at 30 with the vertical to keep himself dry. He, then, runs at a speed of 10ms–1 and
o

finds the rain drops to be hitting vertically. Speed of the rain drops w.r.t. the running man and w.r.t. earth are

1) 20ms–1, 10ms–1 2) 10ms–1, 20 3ms 1 3) 10 3ms 1 , 20ms–1 4) 20ms–1, 10 3ms 1

38. Rain appears to fall vertically to a man walking at 3 kmh–1 but if he changes his speed to double, the rain
appears to fall at 45o. The real velocity of rain is
1) 3 2 kmh–1, 45o 2) 2 3 kmh–1, 45o 3) 3 2 kmh 1 , 30o 4) 2 3 kmh 1 , 60o

70
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

39. An aeroplane flies from P to Q with speed v and then from Q to P with same speed. If wind blows normal to
straight line PQ with speed V, the total time for to and fro motion is

L 2L 2L 2L
     
1 1
1) v2  V 2 2 2) v2  V 2 2 3)  V  v  4) v 2  V 2

40. A taxi leaves the station X for station Y every 10 minutes. Simultaneously another taxi also leaves the station Y
for station X every 10 minutes. The taxies move at the same constant speed and go from X to Y or vice-versa
in 2 hours. How many taxies coming from the other side will meet each taxi en-route from Y to X?
1) 24 2) 23 3) 12 4) 11
41. Consider a hot air balloon starting from rest from surface of earth accelerating upwards with a constant acceleration
of 5ms–2. After 2s a stone is thrown from the balloon vertically upwards with a relative velocity of 10ms–1. The
time after which the stone again reaches the balloon is
3 2 4 3
1) t  s 2) t  s 3) t  s 4) t  s
4 3 3 2
42. A man running on a horizontal road at 8 ms finds rain falling vertically. If he increases his speed to 12 ms–1, he
–1

finds that drops make 30o angle with the vertical. Find the velocity of rain with respect to the road.
1) 4 7ms 1 2) 8 2ms 1 3) 7 3ms 1 4) 8ms–1
43. A car is moving towards east with a speed of 25km/hr. To the driver of the car, a bus appears to move towards
north with a speed of 25 3 km/hr. The actual velocity of the bus is
1) 50 km/hr, 30o east of north 2) 50 3 km/hr, 30o east of north
3) 50 km/hr, 30o west of north 4) 50 3 km/hr, 30o west of north
44. A tube of length L is filled completely with an incompressible liquid of mass M and closed at both the ends.
The tube is then rotated in a horizontal plane about one of its ends with a uniform angular velocity  . The
force excerted by the liquid at the other end is
ML2 ML2 ML2 2
1) 2) ML2 3) 4)
2 4 2
45. A jeep turns around a curve of radius 0.3 km at a constant speed of 60 m/s. The resultant change in velocity,
instantaneous acceleration and average acceleration over 60o arc are

1) 30 ms-1, 11.5 ms-2, 12 ms-2 2) 60 ms-1, 12 ms-2, 11.5 ms-2

3) 60 ms-1, 11.5 ms-2, 12 ms-2 4) 40 ms-1, 10 ms-2, 8 ms-2

71
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

46. In figure, a particle is placed at the highest point A of a smooth sphere of radius r. It is given a slight push, and
it leaves the sphere at B, at a depth h vertically below A such that h is equal to

r 1 1 1
1) 2) r 3) r 4) r
6 4 3 2
47. A small block of mass m slides along the frictionless loop-to-loop track shown in figure. It starts from rest at
P. The height from which the block must be released so that the force it exerts against the track at the top of
the loop equals its weight is

H
R

1) H = 3R 2) H = R 3) H = 2R 4) H = 4R
48. A motorcycle moving with a velocity of 72 km.h-1 on a flat road takes a turn on the road at a point where the
radius of curvature of the road is 20 m. The acceleration due to gravity is 10 ms-2. In order to avoid skidding,
he must not bend with respect to the vertical plane by an angle greater than
1)   tan 1 (2) 2)   tan 1 (6) 3)   tan 1 (4) 4)   tan 1 (25.92)
49. A car is moving along a circular path of radius 500 m with a speed of 30 ms-1. If at some instant, its speed
increases at the rate of 2 ms-2, then at that instant the magnitude of resultant acceleration will be
1) 4.7 ms-2 2) 3.8 ms-2 3) 3 ms-2 4) 2.7 ms-2
50. For a particle in uniform circular motion the acceleration a at a point P(R,  ) on the circle of radius R is (here
 is measured from the x-axis)
v2 v2 v2 v2
1)  cos  ˆi  sin  ˆj 2)  sin  ˆi  sin  ˆj
R R R R
v2 v2 v2 ˆ v2 ˆ
3)  cos  i  sin  ˆj
ˆ 4) i j
R R R R

72
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

KEY WITH HINTS

LEVEL - I
1. 3 The velocity time graph is as shown below

v a 0t0

If it accelerates with a0 for time t0 thereafter retards with 2a0 then the stopping
t0 t0 t0/2

t0
time will be . The maximum velocity is a0t0. The area of the figure will give displacement hence the
2
 7a 0 t 0 2  5t 0
displacement is  4  and total time is .
  2

displacement 7a 0 t 0
Therefore average velocity = 
time 10
2. 2

h1
v0
h2
H

3v0

v02 9v02
0  v  2gh1 ;
2 h1  ; 9v  0  2gh 2 ;
2 h2 
0
2g 0
2g

v02 9v02
h1  ---------- (1); h2  -------- (2); t1  0  v 0  gt1
2g 2g
v0 3v 0
t1  ---------- (3); 3v 0  0  gh 2 ; t2  ----------(4)
g g

10v02 4v0 10v02 g 5

d  h1  h 2  ; t  t 1  t 2  ; Average speed s    v0
2g g 2g 4v0 4
3. 3 The displacement of each ball will be same when they cross each other. For ball A

g  t  1
2
t2
S = 20t – g ; Ball B is at the same point in time t – 1; S = 40  t  1 
2 2

gt g  t  1
2 2

From the two equations; 20t   40t  40  ; On solving t = 1.5 sec

2 2

73
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Vav 
d d1  d 2
 1811   42  v 
4. 1 t t1  t 2 ; 21 =  v = 25.3 m/s
60

2h 25
5. 3 t=   1s
g 10

Let t0 is the interval between two drops, Then 2 t0 = t, t0 = 0.5s

1 2 1
g t 0    10  0.5   1.25 m
2
2nd drop has taken t0 time to fall. Therefore distance fallen, d 
2 2
Height from ground = 3.75 m

10 
2
u2
6. 4 Total height h = 15 + = 15 + or h = 20m
2g 2  10

Initial velocity u = 2gh = 2  10  20 = 20 m/s; Now applying v = u + at, we have

v = (+20) + (–10)(3) = –10m/s  Velocity is 10m/s downwards
7. 4 Let v be the velocity of X and Y after t second
For X, v = 10 + 2t; For Y, v = 0 + 3t; 10 + 2t = 3t  t = 10s

t12 h1 t h1
8. 3 For the free fall, h  t  h1  t and h 2  t 2 ;
2 2 2
2
  1 
1 t2 h2 t2 h2

9. 4 v2A  u 2A  2as , substituting uA = 20ms–1 and vA = 30ms–1, we get

 302  202   302  202 

30 = 20 + 2as  a = 
2 2
; 2 2 2 2
v = u – 2as  v = 30 –  2
s
 2s  B B B
 2s 

v 2B = 302 – 302 + 202  vB = 20 ms–1

2 2 1 2
10. 3 Given y =  t  16t  2 ; Compare it with s = ut  at ;
3 2

a 2 4
We have u = 16ms–1,   a   ms 2
2 3 3

 4
For a body to come to rest v = 0, using these values in v = u + at, we get 0 = 16 +    t ; t = 12s
 3

74
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

 
11. 4 If P and Q are the given 2 vectors, then | P  Q | 17  P  Q  17.....(1)
 
| P  Q | 7  P  Q  7.....(2)
On adding and subtracting (1) and (2) we get P and [Link] of resultant
1/ 2 1/2 1/ 2
R   P 2  Q2  2PQ cos  ;   900  R   P 2  Q 2   122  52   13

12. 1 Adding the force-components along the west direction, we get, R w  880N in west direction

Along south direction Rs = 880N; Resultant of Rw and Rs

R  R 2w  R s2  880 2N (South West direction)

13. 3 Eastern-line is taken as a x-axis. Northern-line as y – axis, then vertical is the z-axis,

Let v makes angles ,  and  with x, y and z axes respectively. Then   60,   60

1
As, cos 2   cos 2   cos 2   1  cos  
2

v   v cos   ˆi   v cos   ˆj   v cos   kˆ  10iˆ  10 2ˆj  10kˆ

u 2 sin 2
14. 4 Let a projectile be lanched with velocity u of an angle  . The range is given by R 
g
u 2 sin 2 
The maximum height is given by H 
2g
2 2
 u 2 sin 2   u 2 sin 2   1
    ; By solving, we get tan   ;  300
2 2
Given R 48(H)   48 
 g   2g  3
u 2 sin 2
15. 1 Horizontal Range R  ; Horizontal range is maximum, when   450
g

u 2 sin  2  45  u 2
R    400 ...............(1)
g g

u 2 sin 2  u 2
Maximum height H   sin 2 45  100m (u sin g(1))
2g 2g

75
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

1
16. 2 Initial K.E of a projectile k  mu 2
2
1 1 K
K.E of a projectile of the highest point is K  m(u cos ) 2 ; K1  mu 2 cos 2   K cos 2 45 
1

2 2 2
gx 2
17. 4 h  Ax  Bx , but
2 y  x tan  
2u 2 cos 2 
g 
Compare A  tan , B  ;  A / B  tan  2u 2 cos 2  40
2u cos 2 
2
g

u 2
sin 2  u 2 sin 30 u 2
When   15 , R1   
0
18. 2
g g 2g

u2 R2
When   45 ; R 2   2  R 2  2R1  2  1.5  3.0km
0
;
g R1
19. 2 If two bodies reach the highest point at the same time they will collide

 v sin 30 
2
v 22
t1  1  For body projected at  ; t 2   For body projected vertically upwards
2g 2g

 v sin 30 
2
v 22 v2
 For collision, t1  t 2 ;  1  ;   sin 30  0.5
2g 2g v1
20. 4 Given time for each ball is same during which it performs up and down journeys
gt1 2u
Velocity at the top = zero;   u1  t 1  1
2 g
2u 2 cos 
Vertical velocity of the other body = u 2 cos  ;  t 2 
g
Since t1  t 2  u1  u 2 cos  ...........(1)
1 1
mu12  mgh1 ; For 2nd boll, m1  u 2 cos    m1gh 2
st 2
For For 1 ball,
2 2
mu12 mh1
where m  2m; 
mu 2 cos  mh 2
2 2

2
 u1  h1
   1 or h1  h 2  From (1), u1  u 2 cos  
 u 2 cos   h2

1 2
21. 1 For each body, vertical initial velocity is zero and vertical acceleration =g ;  For each,s  gt
2
For same vertical height S, t1=t2

76
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

u 2 sin 2 
22. 2 For a projectile, h  ; For greatest height,   900
2g

u 2 ; Maximum horizontal range  u sin 2  u sin(2  45)  u

2 2 2

 h max  g g g
2g
u2
 Maximum range R   2h max
g

23. 4 Vertical component of velocity of projectile =  u sin   ;

1 1
 H   u sin   t  gt 2 ;10  (30sin )  2  10(2) 2  60 sin   20 ie, 60sin   30
2 2
30 1
sin    , or   300
60 2
24. 1 As horizontal range of the two stones is same. So the sum of angles of projection of two stones must
be 900,
2
1
2 2 u2  
u sin 30 2
According to question , y    
2g 2g
2
 3 2
u  
u 2 sin 2 60  2  y1
And y 
1
 ;   3 or y1  3y
2g 2g y
u 2 sin(2  750 ) u 2 sin(2  450 ) u2
25. 2 If range of R, then  R  10 ......(1) and  R  10 
g g g

From (1)  R  10  sin150  R  10,  R  10  1 2  R  10  R  30m

26. 3 The velocity of the particle at any time t

v  v 0  at;  v x  v 0 x  a x t; v y  v 0 y  a y t  ( 0.5t)m / s
When the particle reaches its maximum x-cordinate
v x  0, ie, 3  t  0  t  3s;  v y  0.5  3  1.5 m / s

u 2 sin 2 u 2 sin 2 
27. 4 R at an angle  and  90    ; Now h1 
g 2g

u 2 sin 2  90    u 2 cos 2  u2 u2
h2   h h
; 1 2    sin  cos   sin  cos  
2g 2g 2g 2g
2
u 2 u 2  2sin  cos  
2
 u 2 sin 2  1 R 2
  ; h1h 2    .  ;  R  4 h 1h 2
2g 2g 4  g  16 16

77
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

2u sin  u 2 sin 2
28. 3 Time of flight, T  ; Horizontal range, R 
g g
  
 
Change in angular momentum, dL  Lf  L i about point of projection

u 2 sin 2 mu 3 sin  sin 2

  mu sin    
g g

 change in angular momentum dL
Torque | r | = 
time of light T

mu 3 sin  sin 2 g 1
   mu 2 sin 2
g 2u sin  2
29. 2 When two bodies A and B are in relative motion, the relative velocity of body A with respect to B can
be obtained by imposing equal and opposite velocity of B on both A and B, so that B is brought to rest

 
Taking velocity of man as  A and velocity of rain as  B

The relative velocity of man w.r. to rain =  2A   2B  9  100  109 km / h

30. 3 For movement along same track in the same direction

v  v  v  v 
2 2

Relative velocity = (v1 – v2)  Distance covered = 1 2 ; For no collision, d  1 2

2 2
31. 1 Minimum time is taken when the boat crosses the river at right angles to its flow. The resultant velocity
of boat and river should be at right angles to flow of river

4 km/h
AD represents resultant velocity ;  AC    CD    AD   42  22   AD 
2 2 2 2

2 km/h

 R  AD  12km / h ; Width along AD = 4 km;  Time = Distance / Velocity

4 4 2
    1.154 hr.  69 min .  1 hr. 9 min .
12 2 3 3
78
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

32. 3 When the cart is moving at 30 m/s, the projectile also has the same horizontal velocity. Also when it is
projected at with a velocity u at an angle  , the horizontal component is u cos  .

 Total horizontal velocity is  u cos   30  m / s

But since the projectile travels the same distance as the cart horizontally its horizontal velocity is 30 m/s
only.

 u cos   0 but u  0 ,    90o ; projected at 90o with horizontal.

80 8
Time for journey of cart    2t
30 3

8 8
i.e., if t is the time to reach maximum height then the time of flight is 2t  s ;  t  s
3 6

8 40
at maximum height v = 0,  0  u  at ; u = –at  10   m/s
6 3
33. 1 Direction of rain is vertically downwards. The car moves in the forward direction. The relative velocity
of rain w.r.t car will be inclined to vertical backwards. Rain will strike the front screen of car such that
v
tan  
V

34. 2

40
vBA  vB  vA  40ˆj  30iˆ ; tan   ; v BA  50m / s ;
30

3
104 
BD ABcos   5  120 sec.
Required time = v  v 50
BA BA

35. 1 v 2  u 2  2as ; 400 > 2a (100) ; a<2

79
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

36. 1 From considerations of symmetry, the four persons meet at the centre of the square. The displacement
from the corner to the centre of the square for each person is given by
4 3

d2  d2 d
sr  
2 2
1 2
The speed of each person can be resolved into the radial component and perpendicular component
Throughout the journey, the radial component of velocity towards the centre is given by
d
v s d
v r  v cos 45o  ; t  r  2  second
2 vr v v
2
37. 4 Relative speed of trains = 37.5 + 37.5 = 75 km/h
90 6
Time taken by the trains to meet =  hours
75 5
6
Speed of bird = 60 km/h;  Distance travelled by the bird = 60   72km
5
  1 1 1 tt
t    or t  1 2
38. 4 uv    ; t t1 t 2 t1  t 2
t1 t 2
39. 2


Displacement  AB, AOB  60o . Length of AB can be known from the equilateral

triangle OAB. All sides are equal.  AB = R.

40. 1 The body crosses the topmost point of a vertical circle with critical velocity so the velocity at the lowest
point of vertical circle  5Rg .
When string supporting the body becomes horizontal, vertical distance travelled is R.
v 2 3Rg
 v  u  2gR  5gR  2gR  3gR ; Centripetal acceleration
2 2    3g
R R
mv 2
41. 1 Centripetal Force F  . Hence F  v 2 ; Tendency  (v)2 ie, Tendency is Quadrupled.
R
42. 1 Velocity at top, F  Rg ; Velocity at bottom  5Rg

1 1
Difference in K.E. = m  5Rg   m  Rg  ; K.E. = 2mRg = 2 × 1 × 10 × 10 = 200 joule.
2 2
80
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

43. 1 AOB is a right angled triangle; Angular Displacement = 90o; Linear Displacement = AB

Circumference 2R 2  10
Arc AB  
4 4

Arc AB = Distance = 5 m ; Distance AB = Displacement = 10 2 m

2
mv 2 p m p  mp 2 p2
44. 3 Momentum p = mv, Radial force (F)  ; Eliminate v. v   F     2 
R m R m m R mR
    
Change in velocity v  v2  v1  v2    v1 ;  v   v 22  v12  2v1v 2 cos   v 2  v 2  2v 2 cos 
2
45. 2

 2v 2 1  cos   2v 2 1  1  2 sin 2   / 2    4v 2 sin 2   / 2 

or  v   2v sin   / 2   2v sin  40o / 2   2v sin 20o   v   2v sin 20o

46. 2

Resolve tension S into two rectangular components and equate.

mv 2 mv2 Ssin 
 Ssin  ; mg  S cos   
R R  mg Scos 

v2
 tan  or  R   Rg tan  or R 2 2  Rg tan 
2

Rg

g tan  g tan  g
or 2   
R l sin  l cos 

g 2 g l cos 
or     ; or T  2
l cos  T l cos  g

81
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

47. 2

Axis

l–r
m M ; Let the distance of M from axis = r;  Distance of m from axis = l – r

Tension in string is due to centrifugal force. It is same in the two threads.

ml
 Mr 2  m  l  r  2 or, Mr = ml – mr or, r(M + m) = ml or r   M  m 

48. 3

Change of velocity is maximum, being 2v, when particle travels from A to C.

 Angle   180o  Maximum change of momentum = 2mv
Again, when the particle comes back to A, the change of velocity is minimum being zero.
 Minimum change of momentum = zero. This occurs when angle = 360o.
 Maximum change occurs when   180o ; Minimum change occurs when   360o
1 2 1
49. 4 For angular motion   0 t  t or 120 = 3t + × 3t2
2 2
2
t
40 = t + ; 80 = 2t + t2; t 2  2t  80  0 ;  t  10  t  8  0 ; t = 10 or 8
2

50. 1 mg  mr2 or 16 ×  = 0.5 × 0.5 × 42  2 ; 16 = 0.25 × 4 ×  2 ; v =4

LEVEL - II
1. 4 Here D7 = 20m, D9 = 24m, D15 = ?
a a 13a
Dn = u   2n  1 ; D7  u   2  7  1 or 20 = u + ---------(i)
2 2 2
a 17
and D9 = u   2  9  1 or 24 = u + a --------(ii)
2 2
Subtracting eqn (ii) from eqn (i) we get 4 = 2a or a = 2ms–2; putting this value in eqn(i) we get
13 a 2
20 = u + × 2 = u + 13 or u = 20 – 13 = 7ms–1;  D15 = u   2  15  1  7   29  36m
2 2 2

82
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

2. 2 Let s be the total distance travelled by the body . Let t1 be the time taken by the body to travel first half
s
s
of the distance. Then t1 = 2 =
2 4
Let t2 be the time taken by body for each time interval for the remaining half journey

s s s s 8 1
Therefore, = 3t2 + 5t2 = 8t2 or t2 = ; Average speed, v av  t  2t = = ms
2 16 s  s  3
1 2
 2 
4  16 
3. 2 The relative speed of train A with respect to train B = 30 – 10 = 20ms–1
To avoid collision let the minimum distance between them be x.
This means that relative speed must reduce to 10ms–1 when distance covered is x.

 10    20   2   2   x  x  75m
2 2
Use v2 – u2 = 2ax

4. 2 Let u' be the velocity when crossing p and v' is the velocity while crossing q.
tp
Time taken to go to A from p is 
2
tq tp gtp
Time taken to go to A from q is   0  u   at  u    g  ; u 
2 2 2
tq gtq
For motion from q to A, 0  v  at  v  g ; v 
2 2
A

q
h

p For motion between p & q.; u  u , v  v, a  g, s  h

O
g 2 tp 2 g 2 tq 2 8h
v  u  2as
2 2 v2  u2  2  g  h ; 2gh  u2  v2   ; g
4 4 tp  tq 2
2

83
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

5. 2 Let the engine be switched off when it is at height h. The last sound wave produced (just before switch
h
off) takes a time t (say) to reach the ground. Then, velocity of sound = = 320 (given)
t

The helicopter has taken a time t 1 to reach the height h (given)

h 1  1 
 t1   30s(given) ; For the helicopter, h =  3  t12  s  ut  at 2 
320 2  2 

1 3 2 80
So, t1 +  t1   30  3t12 + 640t – 19200 = 0  t1 = s
320  2  1
3

80
Final velocity of helicopter is v = 0 + 3 ×
3
 80ms 1  v  u  at   80ms1

6. 4

PQR is an inclined plane. The body falls under gravity vertically from A to B till it strikes the inclined
plane.
At B, velocity is horizontal . From B to C, the body follows a parabolic path. At C, it reaches ground.

Let, the time for A to B = t1; the time for B to C = t2

1 1 2H  h 2h
 s  ut  gt 2  H  h   gt12 or t1 =
g
; Similarly t2 =
g
2 2

2 dt 2  1 1 
 total time t = t1 + t2 = H  h  h    
g dh g  2 H  h 2 h 


dt 2  1 1  h 1
For t to be maximum, 0 0=
g 2 H  h  2 h  ; By solving 
dh   H 2

84
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

dx 3dx
7. 4 Differentiating 2x 2  3x  t with respect to t we have 4x  1 -----(i)
dt dt
dx 1
Now  v . Therefore, 4xv + 3v = 1 or 4x + 3 = . Differentiating Eq. (i) with respect to time t,
dt v
2
 dx  d2x d2x 4v2
we have, 4    4x 2  3 2  0 ; or 4v 2  4xa  3a  0 ; or a   ----- (ii)
 dt  dt dt 4x  3

d2x 1
where a  2 is the acceleration. But
4x  3  ; Using this in Eq. (ii) we get a = –4v3.
dt v
m
8. 2 At u = 0, t = t1, a =  and v  v m from v = u + at ; we get t1 = -------(1)

Since the total time elapsed is t, the car decelerates for time t2 = (t – t1) to come to rest.
vm vm
using t2 = (t – t1), u = vm , v = 0 we get, t 2  or t  t1  -------- (2)
 

t
Solving (1) and (2) we get v m      

dv y dy 2 t3
9. 1  2t  v y  t 2 or  t ; or y = --------- (1)
dt dt 3

x x3
and x = v0 t  t  ; Substituting in (1) we have y =
v 3v0 3

10. 1 At maximum spearation their velocities are same  Velocity of car = 25m/s[90 km/hr= 25m/s]

or at = 25 or t = 5s  a  5 ms 2
But thief has travelled up to 7 s; s1 = displacement of thief = v1t1 = 25 × 7 = 175m

1 1
 5   5  = 62.5m
2
s2 = displacement of motorcycle =  a 2 t 22 =
2 2
Maximum separation = s1 – s2 = 112.5m

dv dx  dx 
11. 3 Given v  k x  v 2  k 2 x . Differentiate, we have 2v  k2  k2v  v  
dt dt  dt 

dv k 2 k2 k 2t dx k 2 t k2
 ;   dv 
2 
;   dx 
2 
 dt ;  v  ;   t dt
dt 2 2 dt 2

k2 2
x t  x  t2
4
85
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

1 1
12. 3 s  ut  at 2 ; For the first one s1  g  2 2  2g
2 2

For the second one 30 + s2 = 2g;s1  30  s 2 ; s1  s 2  30cm

     
13. 4 P  Q  x and R  2x ; using P  Q  R  0 , we get P  Q   R
     
     
P  Q . P  Q  R . R

P 2  Q 2  2PQ cos   R 2 ; x 2  x 2  2x 2 cos   2x 2 ; cos   0 or   90

        
Again, Q  R   P ;      
Q  R . Q  R  P . P

1
Q2  R 2  2QR cos   P 2 ; cos   or   135 ; Third angle = 360  135  90   135
2
14. 1 When forces are parallel, let resultant-force be at distance x from p.

 p  x   3p  40  x   x  30 cm

When p is reversed, p  y   3p  40  y   y  60 cm  shift  60  30  30 cm

15. 4 From fig T sin   M2 R ------(1); T sin   M2 L sin  ------(2)
2
2
T  M2 L  M  42 n 2 L  M . 42   L  16 ML 16. 1

      2 2 2 2   
  
a  b  c  0  a  b  c  0 ;  a  b  c  2 a.b  b.c  c.a  0 
        
a . b  b . c  c . a  25  a.b  b.c  c.a  25
17. 3

3  
5i – 2j + 4k  AB  AC 
AD   4iˆ  ˆj  4kˆ  | AD |  33
2

   
    v.u w .u
18. 3 Projection of v along u and w along u is  and  respectively..
|u| |u|
   
v.u w .u      
According to the question     v.u  w . u and v . w  0
|u| |u|
   2 2 2          
u  v  w  u  v  w 2  2 u.v  2v.w  2u.w  14 ;  u  v  w  14

86
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

    0 A  0 B  0 C
19. 1 By Lami's theorem; : Q : R  sin  90   : sin  90   : sin  90  
P
 2  2  2

A B C
 cos : cos : cos
2 2 2

H1 3 u 2Sin 21 3u 2Sin 22 Sin 2 1 3

20. 3  or  ; 
H2 1 2g 2g Sin 2 2 1

It is true if 1  600 and 2  300 ; When speed of A is doubled, then horizontal range

 2u  Sin  2  600  u 2Sin  2  300 

2
4u 2Sin600 u 2Sin600 R1 4
R1   ; R2   ; R  1
g g g g 2

dx
21. 3   2bt  5tms 1 ; At t = 2ms–1;   10ms 1
dt

x  4  x  2
Average velocity =  6b = 6(2.5)s–1 = 15 ms–1
42
1 1
22. 2 h  u cos  t1  gt12 (1); h  u cos  t 2  gt 22 (2)
2 2

Equating (1) and (2) and substituting the value of t1 and t2 we get, u cos   19.6ms 1

u 2cos 2
Maximum height =  19.6m
2g
23. 3 vx = 2 + 8t, ax = 8; vy = 5, ay = 0; So acceleration is along x-axis and its value is 8ms–2

2u sin 
24. 3 Let total time of motion = t; For projectile motion of shell, t 
g

9.8t R 5100 85
Sin  (1); Horizontal range R  u cos   t ; cos     (2)
480 ut 240t 4t

From (1) and (2) t4 – 2400t2 + 1083750 = 0

Solving for t2 we get, t = 42.39sec = 0.71min; t = 24.55sec = 0.41min
87
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

25. 3

1 2
For vertical journey s = ut + gt ;  t2 = 400 or t = 20sec
2

dis tan ce
For horizontal journey; Velocity = = 540 km/hr
time

v2 sin 2 v 2
26. 2 Maximum Range =
g

g
   45  ; Range become radius.
0

2
 v2  v 4
 Area of circle covered under firing =    Range  ;
2

Max. Area =   
 g  g2

R2
H2 
Displacement vav  4
27. 3 Avg. velocity = ; T
time
4

v2 sin 2  v 2 sin 2 2v sin  v

H R T ;  v av  1  3cos 2 
2g g g 2

1 2 1 2 1 2 h1 g1
28. 1 h gt ;  h1  g1t ----(1); h 1  t g1 -----(2); (2)  (1) ; h  g ;
2 2 2 1 1

 
 
  103  
 g1  h  h  1 1   g 
 0.001   g 100  0.1 = 1.0 m
 h1  h1  ; 1  1
 g1
1
g 
 1  g   1 
 1 

29. 2

 x  x  3xy
Let ‘h’ be height of the pole; h  x tan   1  ;  h  x tan 60  
 1   
 R   x  y   x  y

88
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

30. 1 Angle with the horizontal is 450 ;  vertical height = Range

 2  19.6 
19.6  u  2 or u = 9.8ms–1 ;  t  2h / g   2sec 
 9.8 

31. 4 
x  5 3 cos 60 t1  5 3t 2 ;  y  10  5 3 sin 60
1
2
1
t1  gt12  10  gt 22
2
Solving t1 = 2s and t2 = 1s; x  5 3 ; y = 5m
32. 1

v - velocity of man with respect to river; u - velocity of river

d
Minimum-time to reach from A to B, A  B   d  10v .............. (1)

d
Time taken to from B to C, B  C   d  15v cos  ............ (2)
 cos 
2 3
From (1) and (2) cos    sec  
3 2

u u 9 v 2
from fig., tan    sec 2   1  1  
v v 4 u 5
33. 1

vm
vr
d 2d
v t  t1 
; v  v v ;
2
m
2
r v 2m  v 2r v 2m  v 2r
------(1)
d

d d 2dv 2dv m
t2    2 m2 ; t2 
vm  vr vm  vr  vm  vr   v2m  v2r  ------ (2)

t
2d
From (1) 2d  v  v  t1 ; From (2) vm
2 2

v 2
m  v 2r 
t2 ;
vm m r
2d

2d v 2m  v 2r  t1  2d 2d t1 t t2
    t1  1  1
vm v 2
m  v 2r   t 2 v 2m  v 2r t2 t2 t2
89
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

34. 1

vw 1
Let ‘D’ be the width of river, vB sin   v w ; sin   v  2  vB  2v w     30o
B

D 2D
Time taken to cross the river t 
v b cos  v b 3

Distance between cars s

35. 1 Time interval t = 
relative velocity v m  30
240 5
v m  Velocity of 3rd car; 3600  v  30  v III  45km / hr
III
W
36. 1 Resultant velocity of swimmer 1 is v PQ  1.5km / hr ; t1  h (W - width of the river)
1.5
W
Time taken by swimmer 2 is t 2  ;  Distance QQ  velocity  time  0.8 W
2.5

; Time taken by the swimmer 2 to move to distance QQ' is;

w QQ 2w 1.5  2.5

t = t1 – t 2  Desired velocity =    3 km / h 1
1.5  2.5 ; t 2.5 w

 vm
Velocity of man v m  10m / s ; sin 30  v
o
37. 3
re

vm = velocity of man; vre = velocity of rain w.r.t earth;

vm
vm= velocity of rain w.r.t man; v re   20m / s ;
sin 30
v rm
As, cos 30  v ; vrm  vre cos 30  10 3ms 1
o

re

90
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

38. 1

2 vm
O P R

v'rm vrm 45o vm vm 1 vm

vr sin    sin 45  ; vr   3 2 kmh 1
vr vr ; vr 2 sin 45
Q

39. 2 The aeroplane has to follow a path such that resultant of  and V should be in a line with PQ.
L
V1
P Q

V ; V1  v 2  V 2
v

L
Time taken to cover distance PQ  ; Since velocity remains same during return also
v  V2
2

L 2L
 Time taken to cover distance QP  ; Total time =
v V
2 2
v  V2
2

40. 2 Let x is the total distance between X and Y and v is the velocity of a car. Then x = 120 v. Interval
x
between the points =  10 v .
12

Relative velocity of a car with one coming in opposite direction  v    v   2v

10 v 120
Time taken to meet a car = 2 v  5 min . ; Total cars seen   24
5
The last one in seen when one reaching the destination. So the number of seens is 24 – 1 = 23.

2u rel 2  10 4
41. 3 Time after which the stone again reaches the balloon, t  a  10  5  3 sec
rel

arel =(g + a)down

Frame is fixed on the balloon, acceleration of balloon is reversed and added to that of stone.

91
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

42. 1

vm
90 – 

vrm vr
v'rm
 

Vm  Vr sin 
Vr sin   Vm -------- (1); Vr cos   Vrm --------(2);  sin  ---------(3)

Vrm

From (1) vr sin   8 --------- (4); Vm  12

12  8 1 vm
From (3)   vrms  8 ; sin  
vrm 2 vr

4 4
vm v  v r sin  tan 30  
tan   ; tan   m ; v r cos  v . v rm
v 2r  v 2m v rm r
vr

4
vrm  4 3
 
2
1 ; v 2r  v 2m  v rm
2
 82  4 3 ; v2r  82  42  3  42  4  3 ;  v r  4 7
3

v B tan 
43. 1 tan  
v A  v B cos 

vA   v B cos  ; v A  25 ; vAB  25 3  v 2A  v 2B  2v A vB cos 

 v B  50km / hr, 300 east of north

92
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

44. 1 Force exerted by the liquid at the other end is the centrifugal force. In order to calculate it, consider a
small length element of liquid column at a distance x from the axis of rotation.
L

x dx
M 
dF = force acting on the length element, dx   dx  x2
L 
L 2
M M L 1
 f   2 . [Link]  2 .  ML2
0
L L 2 2
45. 2
120
o
vr

v1 v2
60o

  
1/ 2
 1
v  v1  v 2 ; v   v  v  2v1v 2 cos120
2
1
2
2 
o 1/2
 60 2  602  2  60  60   = 60 m/s
 2

v2 602
Instantaneous acceleration    12 m / s 2
r 0.3  1000
 300  s rd 
Time taken to cover the arc, t    t   
3 60  v v 

v 60
 average acceleration, a    11.5 m / s 2
t  300

3 60
46. 3
A m2 v
h r
C B

O
mg ; If v is velocity acquired at B, then v2  2gh

mv2 2gh g  r  h 
The particle will leave the sphere at B, when  mg cos  ; 
r r r
r
which gives, h 
3

93
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

mv2
47. 1 Centripetal force at the top = 2 mg;  2mg ; v 2  2Rg
R
1 1
K.E. at the top  mv 2  m2Rg  mRg ; mg  H  2R   mRg  H  3R
2 2

1  v 
2

48. 1 Using the formula for motor cycle, not to skid ;   tan  
 rg 

5  20  20 
  tan 1    tan  2 
1
where t  20 m, v  72 km / h  72   20m / s ;
18  20  10 
v 2  30 
2

49. 4 Centripetal acceleration a c    1.8 m / s 2 ; Tangential acceleration, a t  2ms 2

r 500
1.8
2
 Resultant acceleration, a  a t  a c   22  2.7 m / s 2
2 2

50. 3
y
ac P (R, )

ac x

For a particle in uniform circular motion.

a
v2
R
towards centre of circle.; a 
v2
R

 cos ˆi  sin  ˆj ;  v2 v2
a   cos  i  sin  ˆj
R
ˆ
R

94
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

CHAPTER - 03
LAWS OF MOTION

INTRODUCTION
Three fundamental principles, called Newton’s laws of motion, form the basis of Mechanics. Sir Isaac Newton
(1642-1727) presented these principles to the world in his book Philosophiae Naturalis Principia Mathematica
(The Mathematical Principles of Natural Philosophy), which was published in 5 July 1687 and is often referred
to as the Principia, procedures for finding the motion of an object.
LINEAR MOMENTUM
Linear momentum of a body is the quantity of motion contained in the body. It is measured as the product of the
 
mass of the body and its velocity i.e., Momentum = mass  velocity, p  m  v
Momentum is a vector quantity, the direction is same as that of velocity.
 
The dimensional formula of momentum is M1L1T 1 , unit : kg-m/sec [S.I.], g-cm/sec [C.G.S.]
If two objects of different masses have same momentum, the lighter body possesses greater velocity.
v1 m 2 1
p  m1v1  m 2 v 2 = constant   i.e. v 
v 2 m1 --------(1); m
Momentum of a body is measured by the force required to stop the body in unit time.
NEWTON’S FIRST LAW
A body continues to be in its state of rest or of uniform motion along a straight line, unless it is acted upon by
some external force to change the state.
Newton’s First Law defines Force
According to Newton’s first law of motion, a body continues to be in a state of rest or of uniform motion along
a straight line, unless it is acted upon by an external force to change the state. This means force applied on a body
alone, can change its state of rest or state of uniform motion along a straight line. Hence we define force as an
external effort in the form of a push or pull which moves or tries to move a body at rest ; stops or tries to stop
a body in motion ; changes or tries to change the direction of motion of a body.
Newton’s first law defines inertia and is rightly called the law of inertia. Inertia are of three types : Inertia of rest,
Inertia of motion, Inertia of direction
1. Inertia of rest : It is the inability of a body to change by itself, its state of rest. This means a body at rest remains
at rest and cannot start moving by its own.
Example : (i) A person who is standing freely in bus, thrown backward, when the bus starts suddenly.
If the motion of the bus is slow, the inertia of motion will be transmitted to the body of the person uniformly and

95
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

so the entire body of the person will come in motion with the bus and the person will not experience any jerk.
2. Inertia of motion : It is the inability of a body to change itself its state of uniform motion i.e., a body in uniform
motion can neither accelerate nor retard by its own.
Example : (i) When a bus or train stops suddenly, a passenger sitting inside tends to fall forward. This is
because the lower part of his body comes to rest with the bus or train but the upper part tends to continue its motion
due to inertia of motion.
(ii) A person jumping out of a moving train may fall forward.
(iii) An athlete runs a certain distance before taking a long jump. This is because velocity acquired by running is
added to velocity of the athlete at the time of jump. Hence he can jump over a longer distance.
3. Inertia of direction : It is the inability of a body to change by itself direction of motion.
Example :
(i) When a stone tied to one end of a string is whirled and the string breaks suddenly, the stone flies off along
the tangent to the circle. This is because the pull in the string was forcing the stone to move in a circle. As soon as the
string breaks, the pull vanishes. The stone moves along the straight line and flies off tangentially.
(ii) The rotating wheel of any vehicle throw out mud, if any, tangentially, due to directional inertia.
(iii) When a car goes round a curve suddenly, the person sitting inside is thrown outwards.
NEWTON’S SECOND LAW
According to this law, the rate of change of linear momentum of a body is directly proportional to the external force
applied on the body, and this change takes place always in the direction of the force applied.
EXPLANATION OF NEWTON’S SECOND LAW
According to Newton’s second law of motion, the rate of change of linear momentum of a body is directly proportional
to the external force applied on the body, and this change takes place always in the direction of the applied force.

m = mass, v  velocity;  The linear momentum of the body p  mv -------(2)
 
 
Let F is external force applied on the body, and dp - change in linear momentum in time dt.
     
dp dp dp
 F or F i.e., F  k -------(3); where k is a constant of proportionality..
dt dt dt
 
d  dv   dv
F  k  mv   km ; i.e., F  kma ------(4); where a  is acceleration.
dt dt dt
 
 F  ma -------(5)
If the acceleration produced is in three dimensions having components ax, ay, az along X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis
respectively, then
 

a  î a x  ĵa y  k̂a z -----(6);  
 F  m î a x  ĵa y  k̂a z -----(7); F  î Fx  ĵFy  k̂Fz -----(8)

Fx  ma x , Fy  ma y and Fz  ma z ------(9)
As acceleration is a vector quantity and mass is a scalar, therefore force F = ma, is a vector and direction is

same as that of a .
Writing eqn. (4) in scalar form F = ma ------ (10).
Thus force is product of mass and acceleration of the body.
Hence second law of motion gives a measure of force.
96
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

FORCE
Force is an external effort in the form of push or pull, which (i) produces or tries to produce motion in a body
at rest, or (ii) stops or tries to stop a moving body, or (iii) changes or tries to change the direction of motion of the
body.
Dimension : Force = mass  acceleration; [F] = [M1][L1T-2] = [M1L1T–2]
Units : Absolute units : (i) Newton (S.I.) (ii) Dyne (C.G.S)
Newton : One newton is that force which produces an acceleration of 1ms–2 on a body of mass 1 Kilogram.
1 Newton = 1 kg  1 ms-2=1kgm/s2
Dyne : One dyne is that force which produces an acceleration of 1cm/s2 in a body of mass 1 gram.
1 dyne = 1 g  1 cm s-2 = 1 g cm s–2.
Relation between Neutral and dyne, 1 N = 1 kg  1 ms–2 = 103 g  102 cm s–2 = 105 dynes
Gravitational units
The gravitational unit of force in S.I. is 1 kilogram weight (kg wt) or 1 kilogram force (kg f). It is that much
force which produces an acceleration of 9.81 ms–2 on a body of mass 1kg., kg wt = 9.81 N.
The gravitational unit of force in C.G.S. system is 1 gram weight (g wt) or one gram force (1 gf). It is that much
force which produces an acceleration of 981 cm s–2 on a body of mass 1 gram. 1 gm-wt = 981 dyne.
Relation between gravitational units of force : 1 kg-f =107gm-f
Consequences of Newton’s Second Law of Motion:
1. No force is required to move a body uniformly along a straight line
According to Newton’s second law of motion F = ma
When body is moving uniformly along a straight line, and if there is no force of friction, acceleration or retardation of
the body, a = 0. F = ma = 0 i.e.. no external force is required
2. Accelerated motion is always due to an external force.
The motion of a body may be accelerated under the following three conditions :
(i) Speed of a body may change. For this, force has to be applied in the direction of motion or in a direction
opposite to that of motion.
(ii) Direction of motion of a body may change. For this force has to be applied in a direction perpendicular to the
direction of motion of the body.
(iii) Velocity of the body may change. For this, force has to be applied in an inclined direction. The tangential
component of force changes the speed and the normal component of force changes the direction of motion of
the body.
3. Measurement of force
dv
From Newton’s second law of motion, F  ma  m
dt
By knowing the mass (m) of the body and measuring change in its velocity (dv) in a particular time (dt), force
F applied on the body can be calculated.
4. Concept of Inertial mass
F
From Newton’s second law of motion, F = ma  a
m

97
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Larger the mass of a body, smaller is the acceleration produced in it by a given force and hence greater is its
inertia. Thus mass of a body is a measure of inertia of the body in linear motion. Such a mass which accounts for
linear inertia of the body is called inertial mass of the body.
If a = 1, F = m  1 = m = mi the inertial mass.
We may define inertial mass of a body as the force required to produce unit acceleration in the body.
Note: (1) F = ma formula is valid only if force is changing the state of rest or motion and the mass of the body is
constant and finite.
 d 
 dv  dm
(2) If m is not constant F   mv   m  v ------------(11)
dt dt dt
(3) If force and acceleration have three component along x, y and z axis, then
 
F  F ˆi  F ˆj  F kˆ
x y z and a  a ˆi  a ˆj  a kˆ
x y z

From above it is clear that Fx  ma x , Fy  ma y and Fz  ma z

(4) No force is required to move a body uniformly along a straight line.
  
F  ma  F  0 (As a = 0 )
(5) When force is written without direction then positive force means repulsive while negative force means attractive.
Example : Positive force - Force between two similar charges. Negative force - Force between two opposite
charges
(6) Out of so many natural forces, for distance 10-15 metre, nuclear force is strongest while gravitational force is
weakest. FNuclear  FElectromagnetic  FGravitational

FE
(7) Ratio of electric force and gravitational force between two electrons F  10  FE  FG
43

(8) Constant force : If the direction and magnitude of a force is constant, then it is said to be a constant force.
(9) Variable or dependent force :
(i) Time dependent force : In case of impulse or motion of a charged particle in an alternating electric field
force is time dependent.
Gm1m 2
(ii) Position dependent force : Gravitational force between two bodies FG 
r2
1 q1q 2
or Force between two charged particles FE  4 r 2
0

(iii) Velocity dependent force : Viscous force  6rv  .

Force on charged particle in a magnetic field  qvBsin  

(10) Central force : If a position dependent force is always directed towards or away from a fixed point it is said to
be central otherwise non-central. Example : Motion of earth around the sun, motion of electron in an atom.
(11) Conservative and non conservative forces : If under the action of a force the work done in a round trip is zero
or the work is path independent, the force is said to be conservative otherwise non conservative.

98
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

Example : Conservative force : Gravitational force, electric force, elastic force.

Non conservative force : Frictional force, viscous force.
(12) Common forces in mechanics :
(i) Weight : Weight of an object is the force with which earth attracts it. It is also called the force of gravity or
the gravitational force.
(ii) Reaction or Normal force : When a body is placed on a rigid surface, the body experiences a force
which is perpendicular to the surfaces in contact. This force is called ‘Normal force’ or ‘Reaction’.

(iii) Tension : The force exerted by the end of a taut string, rope or chain against pulling (applied) force is
called the tension. The direction of tension is so as to pull the body.

(iv) Spring force : Every spring resists any attempt to change its length. This resistive force increases with

change in length. Spring force is given by F   Kx ; where x is the change in length and K is the spring
constant (unit-N/m).

4.7 Equilibrium of Concurrent Forces

(1) If all the forces working on a body are acting on the same point, then they are said to be concurrent.
(2) A body, under the action of concurrent forces, is said to be in equilibrium, when there is no change in the state
of rest or of uniform motion along a straight line.
(3) The necessary condition for the equilibrium of a body under the action of concurrent forces is that the vector
sum of all the forces acting on the body must be zero.
(4) Mathematically for equilibrium  Fnet  0
(5) Three concurrent forces will be in equilibrium, if they can be represented completely by three sides of a triangle
taken in order.

99
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

(6) Lami’s Theorem : For equilibrium of concurrent forces

  
F1 F2 F3
  --------(12)
sin  sin  sin 

NEWTON’S THIRD LAW

To every action, there is always an equal (in magnitude) and opposite (in direction) reaction.
(1) When a body exerts a force on any other body, the second body also exerts an equal and opposite force on
the first.
(2) Action and reaction never act on the same body.
 
(3) If FAB = force exerted on body A by body B (Action) and FBA = force exerted on body B by body A
 
(Reaction). Then according to Newton’s third law of motion FAB  FBA
(4) Example : A book lying on a table exerts a force on the table which is equal to the weight of the book. This is
the force of action. The table supports the book, by exerting an equal force on the book. This is the force of
reaction. As the system is at rest, net force on it is zero. Therefore force of action and reaction must be equal
and opposite.
PRINCIPLE OF CONSERVATION OF LINEAR MOMENTUM
According to this principle, in an isolated system, the vector sum of the linear momenta of all the bodies of the
system is conserved and is not affected due to their mutual action and reaction.
Consider an isolated system consisting of n bodies of masses m1, m2 .......... mn moving with velocities,
   
v1 , v 2 ,.........v n respectively. The vector sum of linear momenta i.e., the total linear momentum P of all the bodies
   
in the system is given by p  m1v1  m 2 v 2  ..........  m n v n

Let M be the total mass of the system and Vcm be the velocity of the centre of mass of the system.
 
p  MVcm ------------(13)
 
dp d  dVcm 
Differentiating (13) with respect to time, we get, 
dt dt

MVcm  M 
dt
 Ma cm ------------(14)

where a cm is the acceleration of centre of mass of the system.
 
According to Newton’s second law of motion Ma cm is equal to the external force F .

dp 
 From (11),  F -----------(15)
dt

In the case of an isolated system, no external force is acting on the system. i.e., F  0.

dp 
From (15), 0 Hence p  a constant ,
dt
  
m1v1  m2 v 2  .......m n v n  constant-----------(16)
which proves the principle of conservation of momentum

100
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

EXPLANATION OF NEWTON’S THIRD LAW OF MOTION

According to this law, to every action, there is always an equal and opposite reaction.
Here, the term action means the force exerted by one body on the other body while the term reaction means the
 
force exerted by the second body on the first. If FAB is the force exerted by body A on body B (i.e., action) and FBA
is the force exerted by body B on body A (i.e. reaction) then according to Newton’s third law of motion,
 
FAB   FBA -----------(17)
Consider an isolated system consisting of two bodies A and B moving along the same straight line. Let them
collide so that they mutually act and react upon each other. Due to this, their velocities will change and hence their
linear momenta will also change.
 
Let p A and p B be the change in linear momenta of body A and B respectively. According to law of
conservation of linear momentum, the net change in linear momentum of the system is zero.
   
i.e., p A  p B  0 -----------(18); p A  p B
Dividing both sides by t and taking the limit as t  0 , we get
   
 p   p 
Limit  A    Limit  B  ; dpA   dp B ----------(19)
t  0
 t  t  0
 t  dt dt
i.e. Rate of change of linear momentum of A = – Rate of change of linear momentum of B
 
Force on A = – Force on B; FBA   FAB -----------------(20)
Hence the forces of action and reaction are equal and opposite, which proves Newton’s 3rd law of motion.
Practical applications of the law of conservation of linear momentum
(i) When a man jumps out of a boat to the shore, the boat slightly moves away from the shore.
(ii) An astronaut in open space, who wants to return to the spaceship, throws some objects in a direction opposite
to the direction of motion of the spaceship. By doing so, he gains a momentum equal and opposite to that of the
thrown object and so he moves towards the spaceship.
(iii) Recoiling of a gun : For bullet and gun system, the force exerted by trigger will be internal so the momentum of
the system remains unaffected.
 
Let mG = mass of the gun, m B = mass of the bullet, vG = velocity of the gun, v B = velocity of the bullet
 
Initial momentum of the system = 0; Final momentum of the system = m G v G  m B v B
By the law of conservation of linear momentum

   mB 
m G v G  m B v B  0 ; so recoil ; v G   m v B --------(21)
G


a) Here negative sign indicates that the velocity of recoil vG is opposite to the velocity of the bullet

 1
b) vG 
m G i. e. higher the mass of gun, lesser the velocity of recoil of gun.

101
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

c) While firing the gun must be held tightly to the shoulder, this would save hurting the shoulder because in this
condition the body of the shooter and the gun behave as one body. Total mass become large and recoil
1
velocity becomes too small. v G  m  m ----------(22)
G man

(iv) Rocket propulsion : The initial momentum of the rocket on its launching pad is zero. When it is fired from the
launching pad, the exhaust gases rush downward at a high speed and to conserve momentum, the rocket
moves upwards.
Let m0 = initial mass of the rocket; m = mass of the rocket at any instant ‘t’ (instantaneous mass)
mr = residual mass of the empty container of the rocket; u = velocity of exhaust gases,

v = velocity of rocket at any instant ‘t’ (instantaneous velocity)
dm
= rate of change of mass of the rocket = rate of fuel consumption = rate of ejection of the fuel
dt
 dm
a) Thrust on the rocket : F   u  mg
dt

Here negative sign indicates that the direction of thrust is opposite to the direction of escaping gases.
 dm
F  u (if effect of gravity is neglected)
dt

u dm
b) Acceleration of the rocket: a = g
m dt

u dm
and if effect of gravity is neglected a = ----------(23)
m dt

 m0 
c) Instantaneous velocity of the rocket : v = u log e    gt
 m 

 m0   m0 
and if effect of gravity is neglected v  u log e    2.303u log10   ---------(24)
 m   m 

102
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

 m0 
d) Burnt out speed of the rocket; v b  v max  u log e  m  ----------(25)
 r
The speed attained by the rocket when the complete fuel gets burnt is called burnt out speed of the rocket. It
is the maximum speed acquired by the rocket.
Example 1: A rocket motor consumes 100 kg of fuel per second, exhausting it with a speed of 6 × 103 ms–1. What
thrust is exerted on the rocket? What will be the velocity of the rocket at the instant its mass is reduced to (1/40)th
of its initial mass? Take initial velocity of rocket as zero. Neglect gravity.
dm
Solution : Here,  100 kg wt/s
dt
u = 6 × 103 m/s
dm
Thrust F  u  6 103 100  6  105 N
dt

1 m
(ii) v = ?, m  m 0 or 0  40
40 m

m 
v   2.303 u log10  0   2.303  6  103  log10 40  2.303  6  103  1.602  22.13  103 m/s
 m 
APPARENT WEIGHT OF A MAN IN A LIFT/ELEVATOR
Suppose a person of mass m is standing on a weighing machine placed in an elevator/lift. The actual weight of
the person = mg. This acts on the weighing machine which offers a reaction R given by the reading of the weighing
machine. This reaction exerted by the surface of contact on the person is the apparent weight of the person.
(i) When the elevator is at rest

Acceleration of the person = 0; Net force on the person f = 0

R  mg  0 ; R = mg-----------------(26)
i.e. apparent weight is equal to the actual weight of the person.
(ii) When the elevator is moving uniformly in the upward or downward direction
In uniform motion, acceleration of the person = 0. Proceeding as in case (i) R = mg i.e., apparent weight =
actual weight of the person.
(iii) When the elevator is accelerating upwards
Suppose the uniform upward acceleration of the person in the lift = a
103
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

 Net upward force on the person f = ma, f  R1  mg

R1  mg  f  mg  ma  m  g  a  ------------(27); Thus R 1  mg

Hence apparent weight of the person becomes more than the actual weight when the elevator is accelerating
upwards.
(iv) When the elevator is accelerating downwards
Suppose the uniform downward acceleration of the person in the lift = a

 Net downward force on the person f = ma; f  mg  R 2

R 2  mg  f  mg  m a  m  g  a  ------------(28); Thus R 2  mg

Hence apparent weight of the person becomes less than the actual weight when the elevator is accelerating
downwards.

In free fall of a body under gravity, a = g  From (28), R 2  mg  g   0

i.e. apparent weight of the body becomes zero or the body becomes weightless.

Example 2 : A body starting from rest slides on an inclined plane of length s as shown in figure. Calculate the time
of descent and speed at the bottom. Find also (a) distance covered in half the time of descent and (b) time taken to
cover half the distance.

Solution: When a body slides on an inclined plane, component of weight along the plane produces acceleration
mg sin 
a  g sin  = constant
m
So, equation of motion can be applied. From 2nd equation of motion, here

1 2s 1 2h  h 
s  0  g sin   t 2 [as u = 0] ------(i); i.e., t  
g sin  sin  g  as s  sin   -----(ii)
2

While from 3rd equation of motion, i.e., v 2  02  2  g sin   s

or v  2gs  sin    2gh [as s sin   h ] ----------(iii)

104
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

Eqns. (ii) and (iii) are the desired results. Further as from Eqn. (i) s  t 2 , so
2
t s  t / 2  s
(a) If t   ,    , i.e., s 
2 s  t  4
i.e., in half the time of descent the body covers only one-fourth of the total distance.

s  s / 2   t 
2
t
(b) If s  ,    , i.e., t    0.7 t
2 s t 2
i.e., in about 0.7 times the time of descent, the body covers half of the total distance.
Frame of Reference
(1) A frame in which an observer is situated and makes his observations is known as his ‘Frame of reference’ and
is associated with a coordinate system and a clock.
(2) Frames of reference are of two types : (i) Inertial frame of reference (ii) Non-inertial frame of reference.
(i) Inertial frame of reference :
(a) A frame of reference which is at rest or which is moving with a uniform velocity along a straight line is called an
inertial frame of reference.
(b) In an inertial frame of reference Newton’s laws of motion holds good.
Example : The lift at rest, lift moving (up or down) with constant velocity, car moving with constant velocity on
a straight road.
(ii) Non inertial frame of reference :
(a) Accelerated frames of reference are non-inertial frames of reference.
(b) Newton’s laws of motion are not applicable in non-inertial frame of reference.
Example : Car moving in uniform circular motion, lift which is moving upward or downward with some
acceleration, plane which is taking off.
Impulse.
When a large force acts on a body for a very small time interval, it is called impulsive force.
 t2 
Impulse of a force is a measure of total effect of the force. I   Fdt
t1

Impulse is a vector quantity and its direction is same as that of force.


The dimensional formula of impulse is M1L1T 1 
Units : Newton-second or kg.m.s-1 (S.I.) and Dyne-second or [Link].s-1 (C.G.S.)
Force-time graph :
Impulse is equal to the area under F-t curve.
If we plot a graph between force and time, the area under the curve and time axis gives the value of impulse.
1 1
I = Area between the curve and time axis =  Base  Height  Ft
2 2

105
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

   

 dp t2  p2 
From Newton’s second law F 
dt
or 
t1
Fdt  dp  I  p 2  p1  p
p1

 
i.e. The impulse of a force is equal to the change in momentum.  F t   p 
This statement is known as Impulse momentum theorem.
Examples : Hitting, kicking, catching, jumping, diving, collision etc.

In all these cases an impulse acts. I   Fdt  Fav .t  p  constant ----------(29)
(i) In hitting or kicking a ball we decrease the time of contact so that large force acts on the ball producing
greater acceleration.
(ii) In catching a ball a player by drawing his hands backwards increases the time of contact and so, lesser
force acts on his hands and his hands are saved from getting hurt.
Motion of bodies connected by strings
Acceleration =a
R3 R1
R2

T1 T2 T3
F

m2g m1 g
m3g
F
a 
 m1  m2  m3  ----------(30)
m3F
Tension T1  m3a  ----------(31)
 m1  m 2  m3 

 m 2  m3  F
Tension T2   m 2  m 3  a  ----------(32)
 m1  m 2  m3 
Example 3: Two blocks of mass m = 1 kg and M = 2 kg are in contact on a frictionless table. A horizontal force F
( = 3 N ) is applied to m. Find the force of contact between the blocks. Will the force of contact remain same if F is
applied to M?
Solution: All the forces acting on the two blocks are shown in figure. As the blocks are rigid, under the action of a
F 3
force F, both will move together with same acceleration, a    1 m / s2
m  M 1 2

106
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

Now as the mass of larger block is M and its acceleration a, so force of contact, i.e., action on it,

MF 23
A M  Ma    2N
M  m 2 1

mF 1 3
If the force is applied to M, its action on m will be A m  ma   1 N
M  m 2 1
PULLEY
Some cases of pulley and mass as a system:
a) Masses suspended over a pulley in a vertical plane:
Consider two masses m1 and m2 connected at the two ends of a massless inextensible string passing over a frictionless
pulley. Let the pulley is massless.

T1
a T2
m2 m1
m2 g a

m 1g
Equations of motion are : m1g  T1  m1a ----------(33); T2  m 2 g  m 2a ---------(34)

 m1  m 2  g 2m1m 2 g
If the mass of the pulley is zero, T1 = T2.; a  --------(35); T1  T2  m  m --------(36)
m1  m 2 1 2

4m1m 2 g
Reaction at pulley R  T1  T2 ; R
 m1  m2  --------(37)
If the two masses are equal, put m1  m 2  m ; Then a = 0; T1  T2  mg

Reaction at pulley R  T1  T2  2mg

Example 4: Two 100 g blocks hang at the ends of a light flexible cord passing over a small frictionless pulley. A 40
g block rests on the block on right and removed after 2 sec.
(a) How far will each block move in the first second after the 40 g block is removed?
(b) What was the tension in the cord before the 40 g block was removed?
(c) What was the tension in the cord supporting the pulley after the 40 g block was removed?

107
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Solution: When two blocks of masses m1 and m2 are hanging from the ends of a string passing over a fixed pulley,
their acceleration is:

a
 m 2  m1  g 2m1m 2 g
and the tension is : T  m  m
 m 2  m1  ; 1 2

 M  m   M  g g
; From t = 0 to t = 2 (M = 100 g, m = 40 g); a 
 M  m  M 6

g 980
v  u  at  0     2   cm / s
6 3

980
Hence, at t = 2s, left block is moving up with velocity cm/s and right block is moving down with velocity
3
980 2M  m  M  g
cm/s. Tension in the string during this interval is: T  1.143 N
3 m  2M
From t = 2 to t = 3, when m is removed, blocks move with a constant velocity.

 980 
The distance covered  s     1 = 326.6 cm = 3.266 m.
 3 
Tension in the string = weight of each block. T = Mg = 0.98 N and T' = 2T = 1.96 N
Spring Balance and Physical Balance

1. Spring balance: When its upper end is fixed with a rigid support and the body of mass m is hung from its
lower end, spring is stretched and the weight of the body can be measured by the reading of spring balance
R = W = mg
2. Physical balance :

108
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

In physical balance actually we compare the mass of the body in both the pans. Here we does not calculate
the absolute weight of the body. Here X and Y are the masses of the empty pan.
(a) Perfect physical balance :
Weight of the pan should be equal i.e. X = Y and the needle must be in middle of the beam i.e. a = b.
a) False balance : When the masses of the pan are not equal then balance shows the error in measurement.
False balance may be of two types

(i) If the beam of physical balance is horizontal (when the pans are empty) but the arms are not equal, X > Y
and a < b.
Then to find true weight, two readings are to be taken. In the first case a body weight W is placed in pan X
and a weight W1 in pan Y.
Now the wts in the pans are exchanged and a weight W2 in pan X.
For rotational equilibrium about point ‘O’

Then, True weight W = W1W2

b) If the beam of physical balance is not horizontal (when the pans are empty) and the arms are equal
i. e., X > Y and a = b
In this physical balance if a body of weight W is placed in X-Pan then to balance it.
We have to put a weight W1 in Y Pan
Now if pans are changed then to balance the body we have to put a weight W2 in X Pan.

W1  W2
True weight W =
2

109
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

FRICTION

Friction is an opposing force that comes into play when one body actually moves (slides or rolls) or even tries
to move over the surface of another body. This resistance is represented by a single force called friction. The force
of friction is parallel to the surface and opposite to the direction of intended motion.
TYPES OF FRICTION
(1) Static friction : Let us consider a block of weight mg lying on a horizontal surface as shown in Fig. R is the
normal reaction between the block and the horizontal surface. It balances mg, i.e., R  mg --------(1)
Suppose a small force P is applied on the block to the right as shown. The force of friction F opposes the
motion. F = P -------(2)

This means as we increase P, friction F also increases, remaining equal to P always.

The opposing force that comes into play when one body tends to move over the surface of another, but
the actual motion has yet not started is called Static Friction.
Static friction is a self-adjusting force because it changes itself in accordance with the applied force.
(2) Limiting friction : As we increase the applied force, a stage comes when the body is just at the verge of
moving over the other. The static friction at this stage is obviously maximum. This maximum value of static
friction is called Limiting Friction.
Hence Limiting Friction is the maximum opposing force that comes into play, when one body is just at
the verge of moving over the surface of another body..
The magnitude of limiting friction between any two bodies in contact is directly proportional to the normal
reaction between them. F  R or F   R -------(3)
Direction of the force of limiting friction is always opposite to the direction in which one body is at the verge of
moving over the other
Coefficient of static friction :  s is called coefficient of static friction and defined as the ratio of force of
F
limiting friction to the normal reaction μ s  -------(4)
R
Dimensions of coefficient of static friction : [MoLoTo]. It has no unit. Value of coefficient of static friction lies in
between 0 and 1. Its value depends on material and nature of surfaces in [Link] value of  s does not
depend upon apparent area of contact.
(3) Kinetic or dynamic friction: If the applied force is increased further and sets the body in motion, the friction
opposing the motion is called kinetic friction. Kinetic friction depends upon the normal reaction.
Fk  R or Fk  μ k R where μ k is called the coefficient of kinetic friction.
The value of μ k depends upon the nature of the surfaces in contact. Kinetic friction is always lesser than limiting
friction Fk < Fl  k   s

110
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

Types of kinetic friction

a) Sliding friction: The opposing force that comes into play when one body is actually sliding over the surface
of the other body is called sliding friction. e.g. A flat block is moving over a horizontal table.
b) Rolling friction: When objects such as a wheel (disc or ring), sphere or a cylinder rolls over a surface, the
force of friction comes into play is called rolling friction. Rolling friction is directly proportional to the normal
R
reaction (R) and inversely proportional to the radius (r) of the rolling cylinder or wheel. Frolling = μ r -------(5)
r

r is called coefficient of rolling friction. It would have the dimensions of length and measured in metre.
Rolling friction is often quite small as compared to the sliding friction.
Graph Between Applied Force and Force of Friction.

(1) Part OA of the curve represents static friction (Fs). Its value increases linearly with the applied force
(2) At point A the static friction is maximum. This represent limiting friction (Fl) .
(3) Beyond A, the force of friction is seen to decrease slightly. The portion BC of the curve therefore represents
the kinetic friction ( Fk) .
(4) As the portion BC of the curve is parallel to X-axis therefore kinetic friction does not change with the
applied force, it remains constant, whatever be the applied force.
Advantages and Disadvantages of Friction
(1) Advantages of friction
(i) Walking is possible due to friction.
(ii) Two bodies stick together due to friction.
(iii) Brake works on the basis of friction.
(iv) Writing is not possible without friction.
(v) The transfer of motion from one part of a machine to other part through belts is possible by friction.
(2) Disadvantages of friction
(i) Friction always opposes the relative motion between any two bodies in contact. Therefore extra energy has
to be spent in overcoming friction. This reduces the efficiency of machine.
(ii) Friction causes wear and tear of the parts of the machinery in contact. Thus their lifetime reduces.
(iii) Frictional force result in the production of heat, which causes damage to the machinery.
Methods of reducing Friction.
(1) By polishing. (2) By lubrication.(3) By proper selection of material. (4) By streamlining the shape of the
body. (5) By using ball bearings.
111
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Angle of Friction.
Angle of friction may be defined as the angle which the resultant of limiting friction and normal reaction makes
with the normal reaction.
By definition angle  is called the angle of friction

F F
tan θ  -------(6); tan θ  μ [As we know μ]
R R

Hence coefficient of limiting friction is equal to tangent of the angle of friction.

Angle of Repose
Angle of repose is defined as the angle of the inclined plane with the horizontal such that a body placed on it just
begins to slide. By definition  is called the angle of repose
In limiting condition, F  mg sin  and R  mg cos 

F
So  tan α
R

F F
  μ  tan θ  tan α -------(7) [As we know  μ  tan θ ]
R R
Thus the coefficient of limiting friction is equal to the tangent of angle of repose. As well as    i.e. angle of
repose = angle of friction.
Calculation of Necessary Force in Different conditions.
If W = the weight of the body,  = angle of friction,   tan  , the coefficient of friction
then we can calculate necessary force for different conditions in the following manner :
(1) Minimum pulling force P at an angle  from the horizontal
By resolving P in the horizontal and vertical directions (as shown in figure)
For the condition of equilibrium
F  P cos  and R  W  P sin 

By substituting these value in F   R

P cos α  μ  W  P sin α 

112
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

sin θ
 P cos α   W  P sin α  [As   tan  ]
cos θ
W sin θ
P
cos  α  θ  -------(8)
(2) Minimum pushing force P at an angle α from the horizontal
By Resolving P in horizontal and vertical directions (as shown in the figure)
For the condition of equilibrium

F  P cos α and R  W  P sin α

By substituting these values in F = μR

 P cos α  μ  W  P sin α 

sin θ
 P cos α   W  P sin α  [As μ  tan θ ]
cos θ
W sin θ
P
cos  α  θ  -------(9)
Example 1 : Two blocks of masses m and M are connected to the ends of a string passing over a pulley. M lies on
the plane inclined at an angle  with the horizontal and m is hanging vertically as shown. The coefficient of static
friction between M and the plane is  s . Find the minimum and maximum values of m, so that the system is at rest.

Solution: The motion will depend on the relative values of m and M. If m is heavier than M, then the block M will
move upwards. If m is much lighter than M, then the block M will move downwards.
Consider the following situations:
Case (i) M is about to start sliding upwards (Motion impending upwards). This will happens if m is much heavier
than M.
As M is just at the point of sliding up, frictional force on M is  s N acting down the plane.
Balancing force along x-axis and y-axis:
N  Mg cos  , T  Mg sin   s N , T = mg; Hence, mg  Mg sin   s Mg cos 

Maximum value of m  M  sin   s cos   ---------(10)

113
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Case (ii) M is about to start sliding downwards (motion impending downwards). This will happen if m is much
lighter than M.
As M is about to start sliding down, the frictional force is  s N acting upwards.
Balancing forces along x-axis and y-axis:
N  Mg cos  , T  Mg sin   s N , T = mg; Hence, mg  Mg sin   s Mg cos 

Minimum value of m  M  sin   s cos   ---------(11); Therefore the blocks are at rest if,

M  sin   s cos   m  M  sin   s cos  

Motion of an Insect in the Rough Bowl
The insect crawl up the bowl up to a certain height h only till the component of its weight along the bowl is
balanced by limiting frictional force.
Let m = mass of the insect, r = radius of the bowl,  = coefficient of friction for limiting condition at point A

R  mg cos  ------ (12) and Fl  mg sin  ------(13)

F r 2  y2 r
Dividing (13) by (12); tan   l   [As Fl   R ];    or y 
R y 1 2

 1   1 
So h  r  y  r 1  ,  h  r 1   -------(14)
 1 2   1   2 

114
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

Maximum Length of Hung Chain

A uniform chain of length l is placed on the table in such a manner that its l  part is hanging over the edge of the
table without sliding. Since the chain have uniform linear density therefore the ratio of mass or ratio of length for
any part of the chain will be equal

m 2 mass hanging from the table

We know μ  m  mass lying on the table
1

 For this expression we can rewrite the above expression in the following manner

length hanging from the table

μ [ As chain have uniform linear density]
length lying on the table

l l
 -------(15) by solving l 
l  l 1    -------(16)
Stopping of block due to friction
1. On horizontal surface
(i) Distance travelled before coming to rest: A block of mass m is moving initially with velocity u on a rough
surface and due to friction it comes to rest after covering a distance S.

Retarding force F  ma   R
 ma   mg
ag
From v 2  u 2  2aS  0  u 2  2  gS [As v = 0, a   g ]

u2 P2
S -------(17) or S= -------(18) [momentum P = mu]
2μg 2μm 2 g
(ii) Time taken to come to rest
From equation v  u  at  0  u   gt [As v = 0, a   g ]

u
t -------(19)
μg
(iii) Force of friction acting on the body
We know, F  ma

115
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

v  u F m
u
So, F  m ; [As v = 0]
t t
 u 
F   mg -------(20)  As t  μg 
 
2. On inclined surface: When the block starts with velocity u its kinetic energy will be converted into potential
energy and some part of energy goes against friction and after travelling distance S it comes to rest i.e. v = 0

We know that retardation , a  g sin θ  μ cos θ 

By substituting the value of v and a in the following equation
v 2  u 2  2aS
 0  u  2 g  sin    cos   S
2

u2
S
2 g  sin    cos   -------(21)
Example 2 : Assuming the length of a chain to be L and coefficient of static friction  , compute the maximum length
of the chain which can be held outside a table without sliding.
Solution : If y is the maximum length of the chain which can hang outside the table without sliding, then for equilibrium
of the chain, the weight of hanging part must be balanced by the force of friction on the portion on the table.

W = fL -------- (i)
M M M
But from figure, W  yg and R  W    L  y  g ; So that, f L  R   L  y g
L L L
Substituting these values of W and fL in Eqn. (i), we get
M M
yg    L  y  g
L L
which on simplification yields y  L / 1   

116
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

QUESTIONS
LEVEL - I
1. Two spheres of masses 3 kg and 4 kg are attached to ends of a string which passes over a frictionless pulley.
Take g = 9.8 m/sec2. The relative acceleration of the system is
1) 4 ms–2 2) 1.4 ms–2 3) 3 ms–2 4) 2.8 ms–2
2. Two bodies having masses in the ratio 2:3 fall freely under gravity from heights 9:16. The ratio of their linear
momenta on touching the ground is
1) 2 : 9 2) 3 : 16 3) 1 : 2 4) 3 : 2
3. An elevator has a mass of 4000 kg. The supporting cable has a tension of 52000 N. It is initially at rest. How
far will it move in 4 sec?
1) 40 m 2) 52 m 3) 13 m 4) 24 m
4. The force which can push 150 N body upwards along an incline of 30o with an acceleration of
5 m/s2 will be
1) 75 N 2) 300 N 3) zero 4) 150 N
dM
5. A satellite in a force -free space sweeps stationary interplanetary dust at rate   . The acceleration of
dt
satellite is
 2  2  M
1) 2) 3)  2 4)
M 2M 2
1
6. A bullet passes through a plank and loses of its velocity. The minimum number of such planks which can
20
just stop the bullet is
1) 20 2) 19 3) 12 4) 11
7. A block of mass m1, of 3 kg, is lying on a frictionless plane inclined at 30o with the horizontal. It is connected
to a mass m2, of 4 kg, with the help of a string passing over a pulley as shown in figure. The acceleration of
each block will be
a
T
T m2
m1 a
o
m 2g
30
1) 2.55 ms–2 2) 3.55 ms–2 3) 4.55 ms–2 4) 5.55 ms–2
8. Two pulleys, smooth and weightless, carry two blocks M1 and M2 as shown in figure. M1 = 4 M2. The system is at
rest at t = 0. The acceleration of mass M1 is a when the system is released. Then the acceleration of M2 will be

M1
20 cm
M2
1) 8a 2) 4a 3) 2a 4) 0.5a
117
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

9. A radioactive nucleus, initially at rest, decays by emitting a  -particle and a neutrino (n) in mutually perpendicular
directions. The momentum PN of recoil nucleus will be
p n p  pn  p  p
1) p n  p 2) p 2n  p2 3) p  p 4)
n  pn
10. An elastic spring has a length  when the tension in it is 4 N. Its length is  when the tension in it is 5 N. What
is the length when tension in it is 9 N?
1) 5  4 2) 4  5 3) 5  4 4) 5  4
11. Three blocks A, B and C, each of mass 3 kg, are hanging on a string passing over a fixed frictionless
pulley as shown in the figure. The tension T1 in the string connecting blocks B and C is (g = 10 ms–2)

a
T T

A
B
T1
a C

1) 10 N 2) 20 N 3) 30 N 4) 40 N
12. A block of mass M is pulled along a horizontal smooth surface by a rope of mass m. Force P is applied at one
extremity of the rope. The force exerted by the rope on the block is
PM PM
1) P(M  m) 2) P(M  m) 3) 4)
(M  m) (M  m)
13. Two masses A and B, each of mass M are fixed together by a massless spring. A force acts on the mass B as
shown in figure.

F
A B
At the instant, the mass A has acceleration a. What is the acceleration of mass B?

F  Ma Ma F  Ma MF
1) 2) 3) 4)
M F M M F  Ma
14. A light string passing over a smooth light pulley connects two blocks of masses m1 and m2 (vertically). If the
g
acceleration of the system is , then the ratio of masses is
8
1) 8 : 1 2) 9 : 7 3) 4 : 3 4) 5 : 3

15. A particle moves in X-Y plane under the influence of a force F such that its instantaneous momentum is

p  ˆi 2 cos t  ˆj2 sin t . What is the angle between the force and the instantaneous momentum?
1) 0o 2) 45o 3) 90o 4) 180o
118
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

16. Liquid of density  flows along a horizontal pipe of uniform area of cross-section a with a velocity v through
a right-angled bend. What force should be applied to the bend to hold it in equilibrium?

av 2 av 2
1) 2a  v 2
2) 3) 2 av 2 4)
2 2
17 . A circular race track of radius 300 m is banked at an angle of 15o. If the coefficient of friction between the
wheels of a racing car and the road is 0.2, what is the maximum permissible speed to avoid slipping? (Take tan
15o = 0.27)
1) 18.2 ms–1 2) 28.2 ms–1 3) 38.2 ms–1 4) 48.2 ms–1
18. A vehicle of mass 120 kg is moving with a uniform velocity of 108 km h–1. The force required to stop the
vehicle in 10 s is
1) 90 N 2) 180 N 3) 360 N 4) 720 N
19. On the horizontal surface of a truck (  = 0.6), a block of mass 1 kg is placed. If the truck is accelerating at the
rate of 5m/sec2 then frictional force on the block will be
1) 5 N 2) 6 N 3) 5.88 N 4) 8 N
20. A block A with mass 100 kg is resting on another block B of mass 200 kg. As shown in figure a horizontal
rope tied to a wall holds it. The coefficient of friction between A and B is 0.2 while coefficient of friction
between B and the ground is 0.3. The minimum required force F to start moving B will be

1) 900 N 2) 100 N 3) 1100 N 4) 1200 N

21. If a block moving up in an inclined plane at θ  30o with a velocity 5m/s, stops after 0.5sec, then what is 
1) 0.5 2) 1.25 3) 0.6 4) None of these
22. A 4 kg block A is placed on the top of a 8 kg block B which rests on a smooth table. A just slips on B when
a force of 12 N is applied on A. Then the maximum horizontal force on B to make both A and B move
together, is
1) 12 N 2) 24 N 3) 36 N 4) 48 N
23. A body A of mass 1 kg rests on a smooth surface. Another body B of mass 0.2 kg is placed over A as shown.
The coefficient of static friction between A and B is 0.15. B will begin to slide on A if A is pulled with a force
greater than

1) 1.764 N 2) 0.1764 N 3) 0.3 N 4) It will not slide for any F

119
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

24. A block A of mass 2 kg rests on another block B of mass 8 kg which rests on a horizontal floor. The coefficient
of friction between A and B is 0.2, while that between B and floor is 0.5. When a horizontal force of 25 N is
applied on the block B, the force of friction between A and B is

1) Zero 2) 3.9 N 3) 5.0 N 4) 49 N

25. Two blocks of mass M1 and M2 are connected with a string passing over a pulley as shown in the figure. The
block M1 lies on a horizontal surface. The coefficient of friction between the block M1 and horizontal surface
is . The system accelerates. What additional mass m should be placed on the block M1 so that the system
does not accelerate

M 2  M1 M2 M1
1) 2)  M1 3) M 2  4)  M 2  M1  μ
μ μ μ

26. The coefficient of kinetic friction is 0.03 in the diagram where mass m2 = 20 kg and m1= 4 kg. The accelera-
tion of the block shall be (g = 10 ms–2)

1) 1.8 ms–2 2) 0.8 ms–2 3) 1.5 ms–2 4) 0.4 ms–2

27. A heavy uniform chain lies on a horizontal table top. If the coefficient of friction between the chain and the
table surface is 0.25, then the maximum fraction of the length of the chain that can hang over one edge of the
table is
1) 20% 2) 25% 3) 35% 4) 15%
28. A body takes just twice the time as long to slide down a plane inclined at 30o to the horizontal as if the plane
were frictionless. The coefficient of friction between the body and the plane is

3 4 3
1) 2) 3 3) 4)
4 3 4
29. A 2 kg mass starts from rest on an inclined smooth surface with inclination 30o and length 2 m. How much will
it travel before coming to rest on a surface with coefficient of friction 0.25
1) 4 m 2) 6 m 3) 8 m 4) 2 m
120
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

30. A motorcycle is travelling on a curved track of radius 500m where the coefficient of friction between road and
tyres is 0.5. The speed avoiding skidding will be
1) 50 m/s 2) 75 m/s 3) 25 m/s 4) 35 m/s
31. A fireman of mass 60kg slides down a pole. He is pressing the pole with a force of 600 N. The coefficient of
friction between the hands and the pole is 0.5. With what acceleration will the fireman slide down (g = 10 m/s2)

1) 1ms 2 2) 2.5 ms 2 3) 10 ms 2 4) 5 ms 2
32. The system shown in the figure is in equilibrium. The maximum value of W, so that the maximum value of static
frictional force on 100 kg. body is 450 N, will be

1) 100 N 2) 250 N 3) 450 N 4) 1000 N

33. A block of mass 10 kg is placed on an inclined plane. When the angle of inclination is 30o, the block just
begins to slide down the plane. The force of static friction is
1) 10 kg wt 2) 89 kg wt 3) 49 kg wt 4) 5 kg wt
34. A vehicle of mass m is moving on a rough horizontal road with momentum P. If the coefficient of friction
between the tyres and the road be , then the stopping distance is

P P2 P P2
1) 2) 3) 4)
2μmg 2μmg 2μm 2 g 2μm 2 g
35. A 60 kg body is pushed with just enough force to start it moving across a floor and the same force continues
to act afterwards. The coefficients of static and sliding friction are 0.5 and 0.4 respectively. The acceleration
of the body is
1) 6 m / sec2 2) 4.9 m / sec2 3) 3.92 m / sec2 4) 0.98 m / sec2
36. A particle is projected along a line of greatest slope up a rough plane inclined at an angle of 45o with the
1
horizontal. If the coefficient of friction is , then the retardation is
2
g g g  1 g  1
1) 2) 3) 1 4) 1
2 2 2 2  2  2  2 
37. A block released from rest from the top of a smooth inclined plane of inclination 45o takes t seconds to reach
the bottom. The same block released from rest from top of a rough inclined plane of the same inclination of
45o takes 2t seconds to reach the bottom. The coefficient of friction is
1) 0.5 2) 0.75 3) 0.5 4) 0.75
38. A car moves at a speed of 36 km h–1 on a level road. The coefficient of friction between the tyres and the road
is 0.8. The car negotiates a curve of radius R. If g = 10 ms–2, the car will skid (or slip) while negotiating the
curve if the value of R is
1) 20 m 2) 12.5 m 3) 14 m 4) 16 m

121
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

39. A person used force (F), shown in figure to move a load with constant velocity on surface. Identify the correct
surface profile.

1) 2) 3) 4)

40. A body of weight 64 N is pushed with just enough force to start it moving across a horizontal floor and the
same force continues to act afterwards. If the coefficients of static and dynamic friction are 0.6 and 0.4
respectively, the acceleration of the body will be (Acceleration due to gravity = g)
g g
1) 2) 0.64g 3) 4) 0.2g
6.4 32
41. A body of mass 5kg rests on a rough horizontal surface of coefficient of friction 0.2. The body is pulled
through a distance of 10m by a horizontal force of 25 N. The kinetic energy acquired by it is (g = 10 ms2)
1) 330 J 2) 150 J 3) 100 J 4) 50 J
42. 300 J of work is done in sliding a 2 kg. block up an inclined plane to a height of 10 meters. Taking value of
acceleration due to gravity ‘g’ to be 10 m/s2, work done against friction is
1) 100 J 2) 200 J 3) 300 J 4) Zero
43. A person of 60 kg descends in a lift with an acceleration 2 m s . The cable of lift suddenly breaks down. The
–2

weight of the person inside the lift is

1) 60 g 2) zero 3) 62 g 4) 58 g
44. An object of mass m is projected vertically upwards. The rate of change of momentum of the object will be
equal to
m
1) mg 2) mgh 3) m2g 4)
g
LEVEL - II
1. A man sits on a chair supported by a rope passing over a frictionless fixed pulley. The man who weighs 1000
N exerts a force of 450 N on the chair downwards while pulling the rope on the other side. If the chair weighs
250 N, then the acceleration of the chair is
9
1) 0.45 m s–2 2) zero 3) 2 m s–2 4) m s 2
25
2. A block is kept on a frictionless inclined surface with angle of inclination  as shown in figure. The incline is
given an acceleration a to keep the block stationary. Then a is equal to

a

g
1) g tan  2) g 3) g cosec  4) tan 
3. A mass of 6 kg is suspended by a rope of length 2 m from a ceiling. A force of 60 N is applied in the horizontal
direction at the mid-point of the rope. The angle made by the rope, with the vertical, in equilibrium position
will be (Take g = 10 m s–2 , neglect the mass of the rope)
1) 90o 2) 60o 3) 30o 4) 45o
122
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

4. A bomb of mass 1 kg is thrown vertically upwards with a speed of 100 m s–1. After 5 seconds, it explodes into
two fragments. One fragment of mass 400 grams is found to go down with a speed of 25 ms–1. What will
happen to the second fragment just after the explosion? (Take g = 10 ms–2)

1) it will go upward with speed 100 m s–1 2) it will go upwards with speed 40 m s–1

3) it will go upward with speed 60 m s–1 4) it will go downwards with speed 40 m s–1
5. The mass of a rocket is 500 kg and the relative velocity of gases ejecting from it is 250 m s–1 with respect to
the rocket. Find the rate of burning of the fuel to give the rocket an initial acceleration of 20 m s–2 in the
vertically upward direction. (Take g = 10 m s–2)
1) 300 kg s–1 2) 60 kg s–1 3) 90 kg s–1 4) 30 kg s–1
6. A 4 kg block A is placed on the top of a block B of mass 8 kg, which rests on a smooth table. A just slips on
B when a force of 12 N is applied on A. Then, the maximum horizontal force required to make both A and B
move together is
1) 12 N 2) 24 N 3) 36 N 4) 48 N
7. A man measures time period of a pendulum (T) in stationary lift. If the lift moves upwards with an acceleration
g
, then new time period will be
4
2 5 2T
1) 2) 5T / 2 3) 4)
5T 2T 5
8. A l kg particle strikes a wall with velocity 1 m/s at an angle 30o and reflects at the same angle. If it remains in
contact with wall for 0.1 sec, then the force is
1) zero 2) 40 3 N 3) 30 3 N 4) 10 3 N
9. A block of mass 5 kg is moving horizontally at a speed of 1.5 m/s. A perpendicular force of 5 N acts on it for
4 sec. What will be the distance of the block from the point where the force started acting?
1) 6 m 2) 8 m 3) 10 m 4) 2 m
10. An intense stream of water of cross-sectional area A strikes a wall at an angle  with the normal to the wall
and returns back elastically. If the density of water is  and its velocity is v, then the force exerted in the wall
will be

1) 2Av  cos  2) 2Av2  cos  3) 2Av2  4) 2Av 

11. A mass of 10 kg is suspended by a rope of length 2 m from a ceiling. A force of 75 N is applied in the
horizontal direction at the mid-point of the rope. The angle made by the rope, with the vertical, in equilibrium
position will be (Take g = 10 m s–2, neglect the mass of the rope)
1) 47o 2) 38.5o 3) 45o 4) 37o

123
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

12. A block of mass 4 kg is pressed against the wall by a force of 80 N as shown in the figure. Determine the value
of friction force. (Take g = 10 ms–2, s  0.2 ,  k  0.15 )

1) 8 N 2) 32 N 3) 8 N 4) 35 N

13. A 10 g bullet is fired from a rifle horizontally into a 5 kg block of wood suspended by a string and the bullet
gets embedded in the block. The impact causes the block to swing a height of 2.5 cm above its initial level.
The velocity of the bullet is

1) 286.8 m s–1 2) 350.7 m s–1 3) 100 m s–1 4) 523 m s–1

14. If the surfaces shown in figure are frictionless, the ratio of T1 and T2 is

T2 T1 30
o

3 kg 12 kg 15 kg

1) 3:2 2) 1: 3 3) 1 : 5 4) 5 : 1

15. A 40 kg slab rests on a frictionless floor. A 10 kg block rest on the top of the slab. The coefficient of static
friction between the block and slab is 0.60, while the kinetic coefficient is 0.40. The 10 kg block is acted upon
by a horizontal force of 100 N. If g = 9.8 m s–2, the resulting acceleration of the slab will be

100 N 10 kg

40 kg

1) 0.98 m s–2 2) 1.47 m s–2 3) 1.52 m s–2 4) 6.1 m s–2

16. A cubical block of side 30 cm is moving with velocity 2ms–1 on a smooth horizontal surface. The surface has
a bump at a point O as shown in figure. The angular velocity (in rad/s) of the block immediately after it hits the
bump, is
a = 30 cm

O
1) 1.33 2) 5.0 3) 9.4 D)6.7

124
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

17. A block of mass m is resting on a smooth horizontal surface. One end of a uniform rope of mass
(m/3) is fixed to the block, which is pulled in the horizontal direction by applying a force F at the other end.
The tension in the middle of the rope is

8 1 1 7
1) F 2) F 3) F 4) F
7 7 8 8
18. Figure shows (x - t) and (y - t) diagrams of a particle moving in 2-dimensions.
x y
(m) (m)
4
3
2 2
1 1

1 2 3 t(s) 1 2 3 t(s)
(a) (b)
If the particle has a mass of 500 g, the force acting on the particle is
1) 1 N along y-axis 2) 1 N along x-axis
3) 0.5 N along x-axis 4) 0.5 N along y-axis
19. A rocket is fired vertically from the earth with an acceleration of 2g, where g is the gravitational acceleration.
On an inclined plane inside the rocket, making an angle  with the horizontal, a point object of mass m is
kept. The minimum coefficient of friction mmin between the mass and the inclined surface such that the mass
does not move is
1) tan 2 2) tan  3) 3tan  4) 2 tan 
20. An insect crawls up a hemispherical surface very slowly. The coefficient of friction between the insect and the
surface is 1/3. If the line joining the centre of the hemispherical surface to the insect makes an angle  with the
vertical. The maximum possible value of  is given by

1) cot   3 2) tan   3 3) sec   3 4) cosec   3

21. What is the maximum value of the force F such that the block shown in the arrangement, does not move?
F
o  1
60 m= 3 kg 2 3

1) 20N 2) 10N 3) 12N 4) 15N

125
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

22. Masses M1, M2 and M3 are connected by strings of negligible mass which pass over massless and frictionless
pulleys P1 and P2 as shown in the figure. The masses move such that the portion of the string between P1 and
P2 is parallel to the inclined plane and the portion of the string between P2 and M3 is horizontal. The masses
M2 and M3 are 4.0kg each and the co-efficient of kinetic friction between the masses and the surfaces is 0.25.
The inclined plane makes an angle of 37o with the horizontal. If the mass M1 moves downwards with a uniform
velocity, the tension in the horizontal portion of the string is (g = 9.8m/sec2, sin37o = 3/5)
P1

M2
P2
M3
M1
37o

1) 0.98N 2) 9.8N 3) 4.9N 4) 19.6N

23. The magnitude of force (in N) acting on a body varies with time t(in s ) as shown. AB, BC and CD are
straight line segments. The magnitude of total impulse of force on the body from t = 4s to t = 16s is

800 C

600
Force (N)

400
A B
200
D
0 2 6 8 10 12 14 16
Time (s)

1) 6 × 10–3Ns 2) 3 × 10–3 Ns 3) 5 × 10–3Ns 4) 4 × 10–3Ns

24. A large free mass M and a small mass m are connected to a string such that m moves in horizontal circle.
Length of string is l and  is the angle this length makes with vertical. The frequency of rotation of mass m so
that M remains at rest is

l
mg

ml 1 mg 1 ml 1 Mg
1) 2π 2) 3) 4)
Mg 2π Ml 2π Mg 2π ml
126
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

25. The coefficient of friction between road and tyre of a car increases linearly with distance(x). The car starts
from rest and attains maximum possible acceleration. The kinetic energy E of the car depends on x as
1) E  x 2) E  x 1 3) E  x 2 4) E  x 2
26. A cubical block of side L rests on a rough horizontal surface with coefficient of friction  . A horizontal force
F is applied on the block as shown. If the coefficient of friction is sufficiently high so that the block does not
slide before toppling, the minimum force required to topple the block is

1) infinitesimal 2) mg/4 3) mg/2 4) mg 1  

27. In figure, the coefficient of friction between the floor and the block B is 0.1. The coefficient of friction between
the blocks B and A is 0.2. The mass of A is m/2 and that of B is m. What is the maximum horizontal force F
to be applied to the block B so that two blocks move together?
A
B F

1) 0.15mg 2) 0.05mg 3) 0.1mg 4) 0.45mg

28. A particle is projected up along a rough inclined plane of inclination 60o with the horizontal. If the coefficient
of friction is 0.5, the retardation is: (g = Acceleration due to gravity)

1)
g
2
2 3 2)
g
2 2
 
3 1 3)
g
2
2 3 1 4)
g
4

2 3 1 
29. A body of 10 kg is kept pressing normally on an inclined plane of inclination 30o by a force of 200N. The
coefficient of static friction between the plane and the body is 0.3. Then the frictional force is equal to
1) 100 N 2) 50 N 3) 200 N 4) 300 N
30. A normal force of 194 N is necessary to just hold a block stationary on an inclined plane of inclination 60o.
The coefficient of friction between the block and the plane is 0.2 The mass of the block is
1) 10 kg 2) 2 kg 3) 5 kg 4) 20 kg

31. The coefficient of friction between two surfaces is μ  0.8. The tension in the string shown in the figure is

1 kg
o
30

1) 0 N 2) 7 N 3) 4 N 4) 8 N
32. A block of wood weighs 10N and is resting on an inclined plane. The coefficient of friction is 0.7. The
frictional force that acts on the block, when the plane is 30o inclined with the horizontal is
1) 6.062 N 2) 5 N 3) 9.8 N 4) 70 N
127
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

33. A uniform chain is just at rest over a rough horizontal table with its nth part of length hanging vertically. The co-
efficient of static friction between the chain and the table is,

1 1 n n
1) μ  2) μ  3) μ  4) μ 
1 n 1 n 1 n 1 n

34. Consider a small cube of mass m kept on a horizontal disc. If the disc is to rotate with uniform angular velocity,
what could be its maximum value without causing any sliding between the cube and the disc? (coefficient of
static friction between the cube and disc is )

μg 2μg μg μg
1) 2) 3) 4) 2
r r 2r r

35. A house is built on the top of a hill with 45o slope. Due to sliding of material and sand from top to bottom of hill
the slope angle has been reduced. If the coefficient of static friction between sand particles is 0.75, what is the
final angle attained by the hill? (tan–1(0.75) = 37o)

o
Sand hill
45

1) 8o 2) 45o 3) 37o 4) 30o

36. A long horizontal rod has a bead which can slide along its length and initially placed at a distance L from one
end A of the rod. The rod is set in angular motion about A with constant angular acceleration . If the
coefficient of friction between the rod and the bead is , and gravity is neglected, then the time after which the
bead starts slipping is

A B
L

μ 1
1) μ α 2) 3) μα 4) infinitesimal
α

128
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

37. Three blocks A, B and C of equal mass m are placed one over the other on a smooth horizontal ground as
shown in figure. Coefficient of friction between any two blocks of A, B and C is 1/2.

The maximum value of mass of block D so that the blocks A, B and C move without slipping over each other
is
1) 6m 2) 5m 3) 3m 4) 4m
38. A plank of mass m1 = 8kg with a bar of mass m2 = 2kg placed on its rough surface, lie on a smooth floor of
elevator ascending with an acceleration g/4. The coefficient of friction is  = 1/5 between m1 and m2.

A horizontal force F = 30N is applied to the plank. Then the acceleration of bar and the plank in the reference
frame of elevator are
1) 3.5m/s2, 5m/s2 2) 5m/s2, 50/8m/s2 3) 2.5m/s2, 25/8m/s2 4) 4.5m/s2, 4.5m/s2
39. A block of mass m = 2 kg is placed on a plank of mass M = 10kg which is placed on a smooth horizontal plane.
1
The coefficient of friction between the block and the plank is μ  . If a horizontal force F is applied on the
3
plank, then find the maximum value of F for which the block and the plank move together. (Take g = 10m/s2)
h/4

h m
= 1/3
M F
1) 30N 2) 40N 3) 120N 4) none of the above
40. A block of mass m is placed on an inclined surface. Coefficient of friction between plane and block is   tan  .
A force F = kt is applied on block at t = 0, then which of the following represents variation of magnitude of
frictional force with time?
F = kt
m

> tan 


fr fr fr fr

1) Time 2) 3) 4)
Time Time Time

129
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

41. A block P of mass m is placed on a horizontal frictionless surface. Another block Q of the same mass is kept on
P and connected to a rigid wall by means of a spring of spring constant k as shown in figure. The two blocks
move together, without slipping, performing simple harmonic motion of amplitude A. If  is the coefficient of
static friction between blocks P and Q, the maximum value of the force of friction between P and Q is

kA
1) mg 2) 3) kA 4) zero
2
42. A boy of mass m is sliding down a vertical pole by pressing it with a horizontal force f. If  is the coefficient
of friction between his palms and the pole, the acceleration with which he slides down will be
f f f
1) g 2) 3) g  4) g 
m m m
43. Different forces are applied to each of four 1 kg blocks to slide them across a uniform steel surface at constant
speed as shown. In which diagram is the coefficient of friction between the block and the steel smallest?
F = 5N 1 kg F = 3N 1 kg
block block
1) 2)
Steel Steel
F = 2N 1 kg F = 4N 1 kg
block block
3) 4)
Steel Steel
44. A given object takes n times as much time to slide down a 45o rough incline as it takes to slide down a
perfectly smooth 45o incline. The coefficient of kinetic friction between the object and the incline is given by
1 1 1  1 
1)  k  1  n 2  2)  k  1  3)  k  4)  k   1  2 
n2 1  n 2   n 
45. A horizontal force, just sufficient to move a body of mass 4 kg lying on a rough horizontal surface, is applied
on it. The coefficients of static and kinetic friction between the body and the surface are 0.8 and 0.6 respectively.
If the force continues to act even after the body has started moving, the acceleration of the body (in ms–2) is
(take g = 10 ms–2)
1) 2 2) 4 3) 6 4) 8
46. A uniform iron chain of length 120 cm is placed on a rough horizontal table. If the coefficient of friction
between the chain and the table is 0.5, how much length of the chain can hang from the edge of the table?
1) 20 cm 2) 40 cm 3) 60 cm 4) 80 cm
47. A block of weight 200 N is pulled along a rough horizontal surface at a constant speed by a force of 100 N
acting at an angle of 30o above the horizontal. The coefficient of friction between the block and the surface is
1) 0.43 2) 0.58 3) 0.75 4) 0.85

130
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

KEY WITH HINTS

LEVEL - I

  m 2  m1  
1. 2 Acceleration =  m  m   g
 2 1

  4  3  9.8
=  4  3   9.8  7  1.4 m / s
2

 

2. 3 Momentum = mass  velocity = p; v 2  u 2  2gh; when u  0 ; v = 2gh

p1 m1v1 2 2gh1 2 h1 1
  .  
p 2 m 2 v 2 3 2gh 2 3 h 2 2

3. 4 Ma = T–Mg, Tension = T = 52000 N; 4000 a = 52000 - (4000  10) = 12000

1 2
a = 3m/s2; time = 4 sec; s = ut  at ; u  0 ;  s  1 2 at  1 2  3   4   24 m
2 2

2
4. 4 F = Mg = 150  M = 15 kg; F = Mg sin   Ma  150  sin 300  15  5

150
F=  75  150 N
2
dM  v 2
5. 1 Thrust on the satellite = F = –  .  v 2 ; Acceleration =
dt M
19
6. 4 2as = u2 – v2; After one plank; final velocity = u
20
2
 19  39 2
2as = u   u  
2
u .................(1)
 20  400

After n planks, velocity reduces down to zero.; 2a  ns   u 2 ..........(2)

From (1) and (2) ; n  11
1
7. 2 At equilibrium, m2g – T = m2a; T – m1gsin  = m1a

25
m2g – m1g sin30° = (m1 + m2) a; a  3.55ms 2
7
8. 3 The distance moved by M2 is twice the distance moved by M1.
 Acceleration of M2 = 2  acceleration of M1
 Acceleration of M2 = 2a

131
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

9. 2 Resolve momentum pN into two perpendicular components and equate with momenta of neutrino(n)
and  -particle.

pn
pN cos 
p
pN
pN sin 

p N cos   p ;   p N    p n    p  ;
2 2 2
 p N sin   p n ;

or momentum of recoil nucleus = p 2n  p2

10. 3 For an elastic spring, Force = –kx;  5 – 4 = –k     

9 – 4 = k  L    ; Where L = length under tension 9N

1 
or 5   L     L  5  4

11. 2 Let T = tension in string connecting A and B

T1 = tension in string connecting B and C
The block B and C accelerates downwards while the block A accelerates upwards
 for motion of A, T – mg = ma ...................... (i)
For motion of B and C ; 2mg – T = 2ma ............(ii)

g
from (i) and (ii) 2mg  mg  3ma ;  a  ...............(iii)
3

For motion of body C, mg  T1  ma  T1  m  g  a 

2mg
 T1  m  g  g / 3   20 N
3
Force P
12. 3 Acceleration of block = Total mass a 
 M  m
PM
 Force on block = (Mass of block)  (Acceleration a) =  M  m 

13. 1 For motion of mass A, T = Ma, where T denotes tension in the spring
For motion of mass B, Ma   F  T , where a  denotes acceleration of B

 F  Ma   F  Ma 
Or Ma   F  Ma  a   ;  Acceleration of mass B =
M M

132
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

 m1  m 2  g  g  m1  m 2  g

m
 1 
9
14. 2 For the given arrangement, a =
 m1  m 2  ; 8  m1  m 2  ; m2 7

 ˆ  dp
15. 3 ˆ
p  i 2 cos t  j2 sin t ;  F   2iˆ sin t  2ˆjcos t
dt

  
 F.p  2iˆ sin t  2ˆjcos t . ˆi2 cos t  ˆj2sin t = 4sin t cos t  4 sin t cos t  0

Hence angle between F and p  900

16. 3 Mass of liquid flowing per second, m = av
On either side of bend, p1 = p2 = mv. As turning is through 90°
p mv 2  av  v
p  p12  p 22  2 mv ; F =  2  ;  F  2 a v 2
t 1 1
17. 3 Here R = 300 m,   15o , g = 9.8 ms–2,   0.2 .

Rg    tan  
The maximum permissible speed is given by v max   38.2 ms 1
1   tan 
18. 3 v = 30 ms–1 , t = 10s; Initial momentum = 3600 kg ms–1 ; Final momentum = 0
change in momentum
Force =  360N
Time
19. 1 Limiting Friction  S R  S mg  0.6 1 9.8  5.88N . When truck accelerates in forward direction
at the rate of 5m/s2, a pseudo force (ma) of 5N works on block in backward . Fpseudo < FLimiting .
Static friction in between the block and the surface of the truck, = Applied force = 5N
20. 3 F  f AB  f BG  AB m A g   BG  m A  m B  g  0.2 100 10  0.3  300  10  1100N

u
21. 3 v  u  at  0  u  at ;  t  a

u
For upward motion on an inclined plane a  g  sin    cos    t  g  sin    cos  

u 5 1
 g sin   10  10  5
u u
g sin   g cos   ; g cos    g sin  ;   t  0.5 2   0.6
t t g cos  3 5 3
10 
2

 F   4 
22. 3 F  12N ; F  F  m    F  12  F  36N
 m M   48

 F   F 
23. 1 F  F  m    s R ;  m    0.15mg  F  1.764N
mM mM

133
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

24. 1 F between block B and surface

FBS   BS .R  0.5  m  M  g  0.5  2  8 10  50N , but the applied force is 25N. So the lower block
will not move therefore there is no pseudo force on upper block A. Hence there will be no force of
friction between A and B
M2 M M
25. 2   m  M1  2  m  2  M1
m  M1  
26. 3 Let the acceleration of the system is ‘a’
From the F.B.D of m2 ; T  F  m 2 a  T  m 2g  m 2 a

 T  0.03  20 10  20a  T  6  20a...............  i 

From the FBD of m1; m1g – T = m1a;  4 10  T  4a  40  T  4a....................  ii 

Solving (i) and (ii)
a = 1.5 m/s2
    0.25  
27. 1 From the expression           20% of the length of the chain
  1  0.25  1  5

 1   1  3
28. 1   tan  1  2   tan 30 1  2  
 n   2  4
29. 1 v2  u 2  2as  0  2g sin 30  2

v2 20
Let it travel distance ‘S’ before coming to rest, S    4m
2g 2  0.25  10

30. 1 v  rg  0.5  500 10  50m / s

31. 4 Friction  R  0.5  600  300N , Weight = 600N

(W  F)  600  300 
ma  W  F  a    5m / s 2
m 60
W
32. 3 For vertical equilibrium T1 sin 450  W ;  T1  sin 450 ; For horizontal equilibrium T2  T1 cos 450

W
  cos 45o  W and for critical condition T2 = F.  W  T2  F  450N
sin 45o
1 50
33. 4 F  mg sin   10  10  sin 30  100   50N  kg Wt  5.10 kg wt
2 9.8
34. 4 v 2  u 2  2as ; a  g, v  0, s  ? , then initial velocity tends to v..

v2 m2 v2 P2
0  v  2  g  s  s 
2  
2g 2g m 2 2m 2g
134
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

35. 4 Ff  N ; F = 0.5 × 60 × 9.8 = 294 N (static)

F 58.8
F = 0.4 × 60 × 9.8 = 235.2 N (kinetic); a   0.98 m / s 2
m 60
 1 1  g  1
36. 3 Retardation  g  sin    cos    g    1  
 2 2 2 2  2

37. 4 The acceleration of the block sliding down the smooth inclined plane is a1  g sin  and down the rough
inclined plane is a 2  g sin   g cos  . Given t1 = t and t2 = 2t. If the length of the inclined plane is s, we
have
1 1
s  a1t12  a 2 t 22 ; g sin  t 2   g sin   g cos     2t  ; or sin   4  sin    cos  
2

2 2
3 3
which gives  
4
tan  
4
   45o 
38. 2 Speed of car (v) = 36 km h–1 = 10 ms–1. The maximum centripetal force that friction can provide is

mv 2 v 2 10 10
f max  mg  or R min    12.5 m
R g 0.8 10
This is the minimum radius the curve must have for the car to negotiate it without sliding at a speed of 10ms–1.
39. 3 First a force is used to move the body when it has to be more than the static friction. Then the body starts
moving and is getting accelerated. Then suddenly the force is decreased to match the kinetic friction. The
body then moves with a constant velocity. Force >  s . N
For constant acceleration, velocity increases proportionally with time. Then suddenly force applied is
just equal to  K N . It is just sufficient to cancel friction. Maximum velocity attained earlier will be continued.

64 Applied force – Kinetic friction

40. 4 F  s R  64  0.6mg ; m  ; a=
0.6g Mass of the body

64
64  0.4 
64   K mg 0.6  0.2g
 
m 64
0.6g
41. 2 K.E = Total work done on the body – work done against friction.
 Fs   mg s  25  10  0.2  5  10  10  150J
42. 1 Work done against gravity = mgh = 200J
Work done against friction = Total workdone – Workdone against gravity = 300 – 200 = 100 J
43. 2 When the lift moves down with uniform acceleration a, the apparent weight of the person is N = m(g –a)
When cable breaks, lift falls with acceleration = g; N = m(g – g) = Zero
44. 1 Force = Rate of change of momentum; The force on a body under vertical motion is in fact equal to
weight mg. Rate of change of momentum = mg

135
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

LEVEL - II
1000
1. 3 For man, T + 450 - 1000 = a; T = 550 + 100a -----(1)
10
 250 
For a chair T  450  250   a ; T = 700 + 25a ----- (2); From (1) and (2), a = 2ms–2
 10 
2. 1

The block will remain stationary when

gsin 
ma cos   mg sin  a  g tan 
cos 
3. 4

Since the mass is in equilibrium, therefore, the three forces acting on the mass A must be represented by
the three sides of a triangle taken in one order. Hence,
60 6  10 SA
  1  tan   1    45o
SA SB SB
4. 1 v = u – gt = 50 ms–1; This is the velocity at the time of explosion.

400 600
By conservation of linear momentum, 1 50   (25)  v  v  100ms 1
1000 1000

dm dm dm
5. 2 Thrust required, m (a + g) = u ; 500  20  10   250  ;  60 kg/s
dt dt dt
6. 3 Mass of block A = 4 kg; Mass of block A and B = 12 kg, Total mass increases 3 times.
ie, the force of friction also increases 3 times = 12 × 3 = 36N
Maximum horizontal force required = 36N

l 4l T 2 2T
7. 4 T  2  l / g , T   2  2 ;  T 
gg/4 5g T 5 5

change in momentum
8. 4 Change in momentum = 2mv cos30o; Force =  10 3N
time

136
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

 F
9. 3 Horizontal distance, x = ut = 6m; Vertical distance, y = ½at2 = 8m  a  M 

Two motions are in mutually perpendicular directions; Net displacement = 62  82  10 m

10. 2 There is no change in the component of momentum along AB. It acts to the right.

The perpendicular components hits the wall. When the particles go after reflection, the component is
along OD, therefore the change is 2mv cos  ie, 2(Av)v cos . Force = change in momentum per
second is 2Av 2 cos .
11. 4

75 10  10 SA 3 SA 3
75 N    or tan     tan 37 o   37o
SA SB SB 4 SB 4
10 × 10 N
12. 1
F.B.D of the block is shown in the figure.
N = 80 × cos 37o = 64 N; So, fL = 0.2 × 64 = 12.8 N

As, 4 kg less than 80 sin 37o, so friction-force will act in downward direction.
Net-applied force in upward direction (excluding friction - force) is,
80 sin 37o – 40 = 48 – 40 = 8N
As, Fapplied is vertical direction is less than fL. So, block won’t move in vertical direction, and value of
static friction force is 8 N.
 mv 
13. 2 According to law of conservation of momentum mv + 0 = (m + M)V, V   
mM
mv
Block rises to height h, then V  2gh or M m  2gh

Mm
 velocity of the bullet v  . 2gh  350.7ms 1
m

137
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

T1 5
14. 4 T1 = (12 + 3) a = 15a ; T2 = 3a  
T2 1
15. 1 Limiting force of friction of block on slab s m1g  58.8N
The applied force = 100N is greater than force of limiting friction, the block will accelerate on slab, due
to which, the force acting on slab will be that due to kinetic friction ( k m1g)

 mg 0.4  10  9.8
Hence acceleration of slab a  m 
k 1
 0.98ms 2
2 40

16. 2 Since no external torque acts on the system therefore total angular momentum of the system about point
a
O remains constant. Before hitting, Li  mv
2

a mva
After hitting, Lf  I  mv  I or   ; I = moment of inertia of cube about its edge
2 2I

2
ma 2  2a  ma 2 ma 2 2ma 2 mva  3 3v 3 2
I m          5 rads 1
6  2  6 2 3 2  2ma 2
4a 4  0.3

F 3F
17. 4 a 
m
m 4m ;
3

 m 7F
The tension in the middle of the rope, T   m   a; T 
 6 8

18. 1 Graph between x and t is a straight line and passing through the origin. x  t

Graph between y and t is a parabola y  t2

dx dv dy
 vx   1 and a x  x  0 and v y   2t and a y  2ms 2
dt dt dt
The force acting on the particle is F = may = (0.5 kg) (2 ms–2) = 1N along y - axis
19. 2 Since the rocket is moving upwards with acceleration 2g, the apparent acceleration experienced by the
point object is 3g vertically downwards.

From the figure, N  3mg cos 

Point object does not move on inclined surface N  3mgsin 

3mg cos   3mg sin  or   tan  ;  is independent of acceleration of the rocket.
138
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

20. 1

f R

I r

mg cos  For equilibrium, R = mgcos  ; f  mg sin  ;
mg sin 
mg

R  mg sin  ;    tan ;  cot   3

21. 1

mg
R = Fsin60o + mg; R  Fcos 60o ; Solving F  cos 60o   sin 60o  20N

22. 2 T  M 3 g , as M3 moves with uniform velocity..

Thus, T  0.25  4  9.8  9.8 N

23. 3 Impulse =  Fdt  Area under graph

 Total impulse from 4s to 16s = Area ABCD = 5 × 10–3 Ns

24. 4 T = Mg and T cos   mg ; Also T sin   m2l sin   radius  l sin 

Mg 1 Mg
 T  m2l ; Mg  m2l    2v  ; ie, v 
ml 2 ml
1 1
 a  g  Kxg ; v  u  at  0  Kxgt ; K.E  mv  mK x g t  E  x 2
2 2 2 2 2
25. 4   Kx
2 2
26. 3

 L mg mg
Block will topple if,  F  L    mg   or F   least-force =
 2 2 2

139
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

27. 4
A A m
B ; mA  , m B  m ;  A  0.2,  B  0.1
B F 2
A mAg
a  0.2g ; F   m B  m A  a   B  mB  mA  g =0.45 mg
mA

28. 4 Retardation = g  sin    cos  

1  Retardation  g  3  1   g 2 3  1
  0.5     
2  2 4 4
29. 2

0N F
20

 1
sin o mg cos  ; F  mg sin  = 10 × 10 × = 50 N
mg 30 2

30. 3

R = mg cos 

F
; F  mg cos   R  mg sin     F  mg cos  
 mg mg cos 
sin
g 60o
m
 mg  sin    cos    F

F 0.2  194 38.8 And, m  50 /10  5 kg

 mg     50 N ;
sin    cos  3  1 0.766
  0.2   
2  2

31. 1 mg sin  is acting downwards  1 10  1 2  5N

The maximum force of friction= mg cos   7N
The full force of friction is not used. Therefore even without the string, the body will remain at rest.
Hence tension is zero.
32. 2

; R  10 cos 300  5 3 N and R  5N

Note that R  .7  5 3  6.062N is the maximum attainable frictional force.

140
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

33. 3 Weight of the hanging part =   weight of the part on the table.

M M n
ie, nL g   1  n   L g ; 
L L 1 n
34. 1 In absence of any sliding, net force on the cube in the frame of reference rotating with disc will be zero.
We find two forces in the plane of disc (frictional force and centrifugal force)
g
m 2 r  f ; But f  mg  max 
r
35. 3 As sand particles are sliding down, the slope of the hills gets reduced. The sand particles stop
coming down when component of the gravity force along the hill is balanced by limiting friction force.

mg sin   s mg cos     tan 1  s   370

36. 1 Linear acceleration a  L ; mL2    ma 


mL2  mL  2     t     t 
2


37. 3 Maximum friction between A and B can be
1
f max  m A g    mg  maximum acceleration of A can be
2
f max g m Dg g mDg
a max   ; Further, a max  3m  m or, 2  3m  m  m D  3m
m 2 D D

38. 3

FBD in reference frame of the lift

  g 
1 g 30    2  g   
a 2   g    2.5m / s 2 ;   4   25
5 4 a8   m / s2
8 8
F
39. 2 Acceleration a  ----- (1)
Mm
To move together friction = ma; mg  ma
1 F 12  10
 10  ;  F   40 N
3 12 3

141
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

40. 1 At t  0, f r  mg sin  (upward); where kt  mg sin , f r  0 ;

mg sin  mg sin   mg cos 

t
k k

mg sin   mg cos 

Frictional force increases (downward); t ; f r  mg cos   constant
k
41. 2 Let a be the acceleration at a time t of the blocks executing SHM. The force on the blocks due to
acceleration is F = (m + m) a = 2 ma;  Fmax  2m a max ----(1)
Now, the acceleration is maximum when the blocks are at the extreme position of maximum displacement,
is Fmax = kA ----- (2)
kA
Equating (1) and (2), we get a max 
2m

kA kA
 Maximum force of friction = mamax = m  
2m 2
42. 4 Normal reaction R = f. Therefore, force of friction = R  f . The net downward force F  mg  f .
F mg  f uf
Hence, the acceleration a   g
m m m
43. 3 For constant speed  external force = frictional force Fext  Fmax  R
44. 2 The square of the time of slide is inversely proportional to the acceleration. The accelerations in the two
cases are
g g
a1  g sin 45o  and a 2   g sin 45o   k g cos 45o   1   k 
2 2

t 22 a 1 1
  n2  1  or  k  1  2
t1 2
a 2 1  k n

45. 1 Force F   s   k  mg   0.8  0.6   4 10  8N

F 8N 2
 Acceleration  m  4kg  2ms .

46. 2 Let m be the mass per unit length of the chain and suppose a length l of the chain hangs from the edge
of the table. If L is the total length of the chain, then a length (L – l) of the chain remains on the table.
Now, mass of length l = ml and that of length (L – l) = m(L – l). It is clear that the downward force =
mlg of the hanging part of the chain balances with the frictional force m(L – l)  g of the part of the chain
left on the table. Thus
L 0.5 120
ml g  m  L  l  g ; or l     1   0.5  1  40 cm

142
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

47. 2 Since the block moves with a constant velocity, no net force acts on it. Therefore, the horizontal component
Fcos  of force F must balance with the frictional force, i.e., f r  F cos  .

Also f r    mg  Fsin      f  Fsin  

   f  Fsin    Fcos  ; or   200  100 sin 30o   100 cos 30o

 1 86.6
or   200  100    100  0.866  86.6 ; or    0.58
 2 150

143
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

CHAPTER - 04
WORK, ENERGY AND POWER

Work Done by Constant Force

In everyday life, the term ‘work’ is considered to be synonym of ‘labour’, ‘toil’, ‘effort’ etc. In physics, there
is a specific way of defining work.
Work is said to be done by a force when the force produces a displacement in the body on which it acts in
any direction except perpendicular to the direction of the force
For work to be done, following two conditions must be fulfilled.
(i) A force must be applied.
(ii) The applied force must produce a displacement in any direction except perpendicular to the direction
of the force.
 
Suppose a force F is applied on a body in such a way that the body suffers a displacement S in the direction of the
force. Then the work done is given
W = FS F S

However, the displacement need not always take place in the direction of the force. Suppose a constant force
   
F , applied on a body, produces a displacement S in the body in such a way that S is inclined to F at an angle .
Now the work done will be given by the dot product of force and displacement.
 
W  F . S , since work is the dot product of two vectors therefore it is a scalar quantity..
W = FS cos  or W = (F cos )S ------ (1)
W = component of force in the direction of displacement × magnitude of displacement.
So work is the product of the component of force in the direction of displacement and the magnitude of the
displacement.
Also, W = F(S cos ) ------ (2)
or work is product of the component of displacement in the direction of the force and the magnitude of the
force.

os
F Sc
 F

S S
F cos 
Special Cases:
Case (i) When = 90o, then W = FS cos 90o = 0
So, work done by a force is zero if the body is displaced in a direction perpendicular to the direction of the force.
144
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

Example 1 : A 10 kg block placed on a rough horizontal floor is being pulled by a constant force 50 N. Coefficient
of kinetic friction between the block and the floor is 0.4. Find work done by each individual force acting on the block
over displacement of 5 m.

Solution: Forces acting on the block are its weight (mg = 100 N), normal reaction (N = 100 N) from the ground,
force of kinetic friction  F   R  40 N  and the applied force (F = 50 N) and displacement of the block are
shown in the given figure.

 
All these forces are constant forces, therefore we use equation Wi f  F .  r

Work done Wg by the gravity ie, weight of the block Wg = 0 J  mg  x 

Work done WN by the normal reaction WN = 0 J  N  x 

Work done WF by the applied force WF = 250 J  F || x 

Work done Wf by the force of kinetic friction Wf = – 200 J  f  x 
Work done by Multiple Forces
   
If several forces act on a particle, then we can replace F in equation, W = F . S by the net force F where
     
 F  F1  F2  F3  ........... ,  W  F . S ------ (3)

This gives the work done by the net force during a displacement S of the particle. We can rewrite equation
     
(3) as: W  F1 . S  F2 . S  F3 . S  ..... or W  W1  W2  W3 .  .....
So, the work done on the particle is the sum of the individual works done by all the forces acting on the particle.
Work done by friction
There is a misconception that the force of friction always does negative work. In reality, the work done by
friction may be zero, positive or negative depending upon the situation as shown in the figure.

145
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

(a) When a block is pulled by a force F and the block does not move, the work done by friction is zero.
(b) When a block is pulled by a force F on a stationary surface, the work done by the kinetic friction is
negative.
(c) Block A is placed on the block B. When the block A is pulled with force F, the friction force does
negative work on block A and positive work on block B, which is being accelerated by a force F. The
displacement of A relative to the table is in the forward direction. The work done by kinetic friction on
block B is positive.
Work done by gravity
Consider a block of mass m which slides down a smooth inclined plane of angle  as shown in figure.


The force of gravity, Fg  mg ˆj , displacement is given by s  x ˆi  y ˆj  z kˆ
 
The work done by gravity is 
Wg  Fs . s  mg ˆj . x ˆi  y ˆj  z kˆ  or Wg   mg  y 

Since y  y f  y i   h  Wg = + mgh ------ (4)

If the block moves in the upward direction, then the work done by gravity is negative then Wg= – mgh --- (5)
Important
1. The work done by gravity depends only on the initial and final vertical coordinates, not on the path taken.
2. The work done by gravity is zero for path that returns to its initial point.
Work done by a variable force
Often the force applied to an object varies with position. Important examples include electric and gravitational
force, which vary with the distance between interacting objects. The force of a spring is another example; as the
spring stretches, the force increases.

    
Here we cannot apply W  F . S . Since F is variable. So we take a small part dS of its path. This dS is very
small so that force may not vary during this displacement. So the work done during this displacement is
 
dW  F . dS = F dS cos 
The total work done in going from A to B as shown may be calculated by summing up i.e. integrating the work
done during all its small fractions.
146
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

B
  B
i.e. WA  B   F . dS    Fcos   dS , In terms of rectangular components,
A A

 
F  Fx ˆi  Fy ˆj  Fz kˆ and dS  dx ˆi  dy ˆj  dz kˆ

xB yB zB

therefore, WA  B  
xA
Fx dx   Fy dy 
yA
 F dz
zA
z

Work done as Area under the force displacement graph

Suppose a particle moving along a straight line and a variable force acting on it.
xf

W  F .dx
x in
= Area under F - x graph from x = xin to xf.

In general, the work done from initial point xin to final point xf is given by the area under the force-displacement
curve as shown in the figure.
Area (work) above the x-axis is taken as positive, and below x-axis as negative
Units of work:
1. Unit of work:
I. In cgs system, the unit of work is erg.
One erg of work is said to be done when a force of one dyne displaces a body through one centimetre
in its own direction.  1 erg = 1 dyne × 1 cm = 1 g cm s–2 × 1 cm = 1 g cm2s–2
II. In SI i.e., the unit of work is joule.
One joule of work is said to be done when a force of one Newton displaces a body through one metre
in its own direction. 1 Joule = 1 Newton × 1 metre = 1 kg × 1 m/s2 × 1 m = 1 kg m2 s–2.
Relation between joule and erg
1 joule = 1 Newton × 1 metre; 1 joule = 105 dyne × 102 cm = 107 dyne cm
1 joule = 107 erg; 1 erg = 10 –7 joule
Dimensions of work
[Work] = [Force] [Distance] = [MLT–2] [L] = [ML2T–2]
On the basis of dimensional formula, the unit of work is kg m2 s–2.
Conservative and Non-conservative Forces
Gravitational, electrostatic, and restoring force of a spring are some of the natural forces produces work done
that depends only on the locations of the initial and final points and not on the path followed. On the other hand, there
are forces such as friction, whose work depends on path followed. Accordingly, forces are divided into two

147
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

categories - one whose work is path independent called conservative and other whose work is path dependant
called non-conservative forces. The forces of the former category are known as conservative forces and of the
latter one as non-conservative forces.
A force is conservative if the work done by it on a body moving it from one position to another position
depends only on the initial and final positions and not on the path followed by it.
or The net work done by the force on a body that moves through any closed path is zero.
A force is said to be non conservative if the work done by it on a body between two positions depends on the
path followed by the body between the two positions.
or The workdone by the force on a body that moves through a closed path in non-zero.
Conservative Force and Potential Energy
For a conservative force F that depends upon position r, there is a potential energy function U which also
depends on r. When a conservative force does positive work, the potential of the system decreases, i.e.,
dU
Work done = decrease in potential energy or Fdr = – dU or F   -----(6)
dr
Hence the negative derivative of the potential energy function with respect to position gives the conservative
force acting on the system.
b

The change in potential energy when the body is displaced from r = a to r = b is U b  U a   [Link]
a

Note: F is negative if r is opposite to F and positive if r is in the same direction as F.

kq1q 2
Example 2 : The force between two point charges q1 and q2 separated by a distance r is F  where k is a
r2
constant. Find the potential energy of the system of charges.
r r
dU kq q
 dU   [Link] ; Integrating U    [Link]   kq1q 2  r dr ;  U  1 2
2
Solution: F  
dr 0 0 r
Energy
Definition: Energy is defined as internal capacity of doing work.
Energy appears in many forms such as mechanical, electrical, chemical, thermal (heat), optical (light), acoustical
(sound), molecular, atomic, nuclear etc., and can change from one form to the other.
Unit: Erg is the egs unit of energy and Joules is the SI unit.
1 erg = 1 g × (1 cm/s)2; 1 J = 1 kg × (1 m/s)2

Kinetic Energy
The energy possessed by a body by virtue of its motion is called kinetic energy.
Examples: (i) Flowing water possesses kinetic energy which is used to run the water mills.
(ii) Moving vehicle possesses kinetic energy.
(iii) Moving air (ie, wind) possesses kinetic energy which is used to run wind mills.

148
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

1) Expression for kinetic energy :

Let m = mass of the body, u = initial velocity of the body ( = 0), F = force acting on the body,
a = Acceleration of the body, s = Distance travelled by the body, v = Final velocity of the body

v2
From v2 = u2 + 2as  v 2  0  2as s 
2a
Since the displacement of the body is in the direction of the applied force, then work done by the force is

v2 1
W  F  s  ma  ;  W mv 2
2a 2
1
This work done appears as the kinetic energy of the body KE  W  mv 2 ------ (7)
2
2) Work-energy theorem: From equation (7) dW = mv dv
Work done on the body in order to increase its velocity from u to v is given by
v
v
 v2  1
W  m  v dv  m   ;  W m  v 2  u 2  ------ (8)
u  2 u 2 

Work done = change in kinetic energy W  E ------ (9)

This is work energy theorem, it states that work done by a force acting on a body is equal to the change
produced in the kinetic energy of the body.
Examples:
(i) In case of vertical motion of a body under gravity when the body is projected up, force of gravity is opposite
to motion and so kinetic energy of the body decreases and when it falls down, force of gravity is in the
direction of motion so kinetic energy increases.
(ii) When a body moves on a rough horizontal surface, as force of friction acts opposite to motion, kinetic energy
will decrease and the decrease in kinetic energy is equal to the work done against friction.
3) Relation between kinetic energy and linear momentum: As we know
1 1 p 1
E
2
mv 2    v 2
2 v
 As p  mv   E  pv
2
1 1 p2 2E
 KE, E  mv  Pv  ------ (10) and Momentum p   2mE ------ (11)
2
1)
2 2 2m v
From above relation it is clear that a body can not have kinetic energy without having momentum and vice-
versa.
Important Points for K.E.
 
1. As mass m and v 2  v . v  are always positive, kinetic energy is always positive and scalar..
2. The kinetic energy of a group of particles or bodies is the sum of the kinetic energies of the individual particles.
  
Consider a system consisting of n particles of masses m1, m2, ...., mn. Let v1 , v 2 , ....., v n be their respective
velocities.

149
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

1 1 1
Total KE of the system is, E k  m1v1  m2 v 2  ........  m n v n
2 2 2

2 2 2
Stopping of Vehicle by Retarding Force
When a retarding force acts on a moving vehicle, which stops after covering a certain distance:
(1) Stopping distance: Let m = Mass of vehicle, v = Velocity, p = momentum, E = Kinetic energy
F = Stopping force, x = Stopping distance, t = Stopping time
By the work-energy theorem,
1
W  K  mv 2
2

 Stopping force (F) × Distance (x) = Kinetic energy (E)

Kinetic energy  E  mv 2
 Stopping distance (x) = Stopping force (F)  x ------ (12)
2F
(2) Stopping time: By the impulse-momentum theorem,
p mv
F  t  p  F  t  p  t or t ------ (13)
F F
Potential Energy
The difference in potential energy between two points A & B is equal to the work done by external force

 F  against the conservative forces in moving a particle slowly (that is without developing kinetic energy) between
ext

those two points.

B
 
U B  U A  U  Wext.  A  B    Fext . dr
slowly A

     
B
 
 U    FC . dr  U   W
Fext  FC  ma  Fext.  FC  0  Fext.   FC ; C
A

Change in potential energy between two points is equal to the negative of work done by conservative forces.
Gravitational potential energy for uniform gravitational force:
Near the earth surface, the variation in the gravitational force between a body of mass m and the ground can
be neglected. For such a system, change in gravitational potential energy in any vertically upward displacement h of
mass m is given by U = mgh and in vertical downward displacement h is given by U = –mgh.
Elastic Potential Energy
(i) Restoring force and spring constant: When a spring is stretched or compressed from its normal position
(x = 0) by a small distance x, then a restoring force is produced in the spring to bring it to the normal position.
150
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

According to Hooke’s law this restoring force is proportional to the displacement x and its direction is always
opposite to the displacement.

  
ie, F   x ; or F   k x ------ (14); where k is called spring constant.
if x = 1, F = k (Numerically); or k = F
Hence spring constant is numerically equal to force required to produce unit displacement in the spring.
Actually k is a measure of the stiffness/softness of the spring.

F
 k  
 F  MLT 

2

  MT 2 
Dimension : As k 
x x L
Units : S.I. unit Newton/metre, C.G.S. unit Dyne/cm
2. Expression for elastic potential energy: When a spring is stretched or compressed from its normal
  
position (x = 0), work has to be done by external force against restoring force. Fext  Frestoring  kx .
Let the spring is further stretched through the distance dx, then work done
 
dW  Fext . dx  Fext . dx cos 0o  kx dx  As cos 0o  1
Therefore total work done to stretch the spring through a distance x from its mean position is given by
x
x x
 x2  1
W   dW   kx dx  k    kx 2 ------ (15)
0 0  2 0 2
This work done is stored as the potential energy of the stretched spring.

1 2 1  F F2
 Elastic potential energy U 
2
kx ; U
2
Fx  As k  x  ; Also U 
2k

1 2 1 F2
 Elastic potential energy U  kx  Fx  ------ (16)
2 2 2k
Note: If the spring is stretched from initial position x1 to final position x2 then work done
1
= Increment in elastic potential energy = k  x 22  x12 
2
(3) Energy graph for a spring: If the mass attached with the spring performs simple harmonic motion about its
mean position then its potential energy at any position (x) can be given by

151
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

1 2
U kx ------ (17); So for the extreme position
2

1 2
U
2
ka  As x  a for extreme

This is the maximum potential energy or the total energy of the mass.

1 2
 Total energy E  ka ------ (18) (v = 0 at extreme so KE = 0)
2

1 2 1 2 1
Now kinetic energy at any position K  E  U  ka  kx =  k  a 2  x 2  ------ (19)
2 2 2

1 2
 U max  ka  At extreme x  a  and U min  0 [At mean x = 0]
2

1 2
K max  ka  At x  0 and K min  0 [At extreme x   a ]
2
It means kinetic energy changes parabolically with respect to position but total energy remains always constant
irrespective to position of the mass.
Electrical Potential Energy
It is the energy associated with state of separation between charged particles that interact via electric force.
1 q1q 2
For two point charge q1 and q2, separated by distance r. U  4 . r
0

While for a point charge q at a point in an electric field where the potential is V; U = qV ------ (20)
As charge can be positive or negative, electric potential energy can be positive or negative.

152
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

Potential energy associated with spring force:

The potential energy associated with a spring force of an ideal spring when compressed or elongated by a
1
distance x from its natural length is defined by the equation U  kx
2

Important
(i) The kinetic energy of an object is a measure of the amount of work needed to increase its speed from
zero to given value.
(ii) The kinetic energy of a particle is the work it can do on its surroundings in coming to rest.
(iii) Since the velocity and displacement of a particle depend on the frame of reference, the numerical
values of the work and the kinetic energy also depend on the frame.
(iv) If work done by net force is positive, kinetic energy of the system increases. If net work done is
negative K.E. decreases and if net work is zero, K.E. remains constant.
Work Done in Pulling the Chain Against Gravity
A chain of length L and mass M is held on a frictionless table with (1/n)th of its length hanging over the edge.
M
Let m  = mass per unit length of the chain and y is the length of the chain hanging over the edge. So the
L
mass of the chain of length y will be ym and the force acting on it due to gravity will be mgy.

The work done in pulling the dy length of the chain on the table.
dW = F(–dy) [As y is decreasing]; ie, dW = mgy (–dy)
So the work done in pulling the hanging portion on the table.
0
0
 y2  mgL2 MgL
W    mgy dy  mg    ;  W ------ (21)
L/ n  2  L/n 2n 2 2n 2

153
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Velocity of Chain While Leaving the Table

Taking surface of table as a reference level (zero potential energy)

 MgL
Potential energy of chain when 1/nth length hanging from the edge = 
2n 2
MgL
Potential energy of chain when it leaves the table  
2
1 MgL MgL
Kinetic energy of chain = loss in potential energy  Mv 2  
2 2 2n 2

1 MgL  1  1 
 Mv 2  1 2   velocity of chain v  gL  1  2  ------ (22)
2 2  n   n 
Conservation of Mechanical Energy
The work-energy theorem, shows that the change KE in a body’s kinetic energy is equal to the net work
done on it: KE  Wnet
Consider separately the work Wc done by conservative force and the work Wnc done by nonconservative
forces. Then KE  Wc  Wnc
We’ve defined the change in potential energy U as the negative of the work done by conservative forces. So
we can write.
KE  U  Wnc ; or KE  U  Wnc
We define the sum of the kinetic and potential energy as the mechanical energy. The Equation shown that the
change in mechanical energy is equal to the work done by non-conservative forces.
i.e. E  Wnc ;  E  0 if Wnc = 0
Thus if work done by non-conservative forces is zero the mechanical energy of the system is unchanged. This
is called law of conservation of mechanical energy. It may also be written as
U  KE  0 ; or U  KE ( Increase in PE = Decrease in KE)
or U + KE = constant; or Uin  KE in  U f  KE f

154
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

Power
Power of a body is defined as the rate at which the body can do the work.
W W
Average power  Pav   
t t
 
dW F. ds  
Instantaneous power  Pin st.     As dW  F . ds 
 
dt dt

    ds 
Pinst  F .v ------ (23)  As v  dt 
 
ie, power is equal to the scalar product of force with velocity.
Important points

(1) Dimension:  P    F v    MLT 2   LT 1    P    ML2 T 3 

(2) Units : Watt or Joule/ sec [S.I.], Erg/sec [C.G.S.]
Practical units: Kilowatt (kW), Mega watt (MW) and Horse Power (hp)
Relations between different units: 1 watt = 1 Joule / sec = 107 erg/sec
1 hp = 746 watt; 1 MW = 106 Watt; 1 kW = 103 Watt
1
(3) If work done by two bodies is same then power 
time
ie, the body which perform the given work in lesser time possess more power and vice-versa.
(4) As power = work/time, any unit of power multiplied by a unit of time gives unit of work (or energy), ie,
Kilowatt-hour or watt-day are units of work or energy.
J
1KWh  103   60  60 sec   3.6  106 Joule
sec

dW
(5) The slope of work-time curve gives the instantaneous power. As P   tan 
dt

dW
(6) Area under power time curve gives the work done as P 
dt

 W   P dt  W  Area under P-t curve

Position and Velocity of An Automobile with respect to Time
An automobile of mass m accelerates, starting from rest, while the engine supplies constant power P, its
position and velocity change with respect to time.

155
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

(1) Velocity: Fv = P = constant.

dv  mdv  P
ie, m
dt
vP  F  dt  ; or  v dv   m dt
v2 P
By integrating both sides we get  t  C1
2 m
1/ 2
 2Pt 
Initially the body is at rest ie, v = 0 at t = 0, so C1 = 0  v  ------ (24)
 m 
1/ 2
 2Pt 
(2) Position: From the above expression v   
 m 
1/ 2 1/ 2
ds  2Pt   ds   2Pt 
or 
dt  m 
  v  dt  ; ie,  ds    m  dt

1/2
 2P  2 3/ 2
By integrating both sides we get s    . t  C2
m 3
1/ 2
 8P 
Now at t = 0, s = 0, so C2 = 0  s  t 3/ 2 ------ (25)
 9m 

COLLISION
Collision
Collision in a system takes place when there is an interactive force acts for a short time between two or more
bodies.
(i) In a collision, a relatively large force acts on each colliding particle for a relatively short time.
(ii) In collision, it is not necessary that the colliding particles come in contact physically.
(iii) In a collision, if the motion of colliding particles before and after the collision is along the same line, the collision
is said to be head on or one dimensional. Particles move in other directions than initial direction after collisions
is called oblique impact.
(iv) The law of conservation of momentum holds good for any type of collision (elastic, inelastic or perfectly
inelastic). The total momentum of the system after the collision must be equal to the total momentum of the
system before collision. Although the momentum of individual particles within the system may be changed, but
the total momentum remains constant.
(v) A perfectly elastic collision: If in a collision, along with momentum KE is also conserved, the collision is said to
be perfectly elastic.
(vi) An inelastic collision: If in a collision, some kinetic energy is lost, the collision is said to be inelastic. All real
collisions belong to this category. Here, KE appears in other forms.
(vii) A perfectly inelastic collision: If in a collision, two bodies stick together or move with same velocity after the
collision, the collision is said to be perfectly inelastic.
(viii) The conservation of momentum and the conservation of total energy holds for all the three types of collisions,
but KE conservation hold only for perfectly elastic collision.
156
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

(ix) The collisions of elementary particles, like electrons, protons with the nucleus are examples of nearly perfectly
elastic collisions. In real collisions, like collision of a ball with a wall, etc., some KE is lost in the form of heat and
sound. However, these are usually neglected and collisions are treated as elastic collisions.
Elastic collision
During collision if KE is conserved the collision is elastic ie. Initial KE will be equal to the final KE. For an
inelastic collision the KE is not conserved. ie, the final KE will not be equal to the initial KE. The loss in KE appears
in other forms of energy.
If two bodies after collision stick together the collision is perfectly in-elastic.
The ratio of relative velocity after collision to the relative velocity before collision is called coefft. of restitution e.
 
|v v |
e   2 1 ------(26); e  0, v  v , perfectly inelastic collision.
| u 2  u1 | 2 1

   
e  1 | v 2  v1 |  | u 2  u1 | , perfectly elastic collision.; For all other collision, 0 < e < 1.
Example 3: A ball of mass m is dropped from height H. The coefficient of restitution is e, when the ball strikes the
ground. Find the velocity of the ball just after collision, Also the height upto which the ball rises after the collision.

The velocity with which the ball just before it strikes the ground  2gH

Velocity of the ball just after collision = v.

The velocity of the floor before and after collision is zero.

 v0 
 e    ,  v  e 2gH
  2gH  0 

Let the height to which ball rises is H1

 
2
v 2  u 2  2as ; 0  e 2gH  2gH1 ; H1  e 2 H

Note: Velocity after nth collision = en 2gH -------(27)

Height attained after nth collision = e2n H-------(28)

Collision in one dimension
Elastic collision
Consider two bodies moving along a line with velocities u1 & u2 collide elastically, after collision they travel with
velocities v1 & v2.

m1 m1
u1 u2 v1 v2

m2 m2

157
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

By law of conservation of momentum

m1u1  m 2 u 2  m1v1  m 2 v 2 ; m1  u1  v1   m 2  v 2  u 2  ---------(29)

since collision is elastic, KE is conserved.

1 1 1 1
m1u12  m 2 u 22  m1v12  m 2 v 22 ; m1  u12  v12   m 2  v 22  u 22  ---------(30)
2 2 2 2

Dividing eqn. (30) by (29); u1  v1  v 2  u 2 ;  u1  u 2   v2  v1 ---------(31)

Thus in one dimesnional elastic collision, relative velocity of approach = relative velocity of recession.
Multiplying eqn. (31) with m2 and subtracting it from eqn. (29)

 m  m2  2m 2
 m1  m2  u1  2m2 u 2   m1  m2  u1 ; v1   1
m  m
 u1 
m  m
u2 ---------(32)
 1 2  1 2

Similarly multiplying eqn. (31) with m1 and adding to (29)

2m1 m  m1
2m1u1   m2  m1  u 2   m1  m 2  v 2 ; v2  u1  2 u2
m1  m 2 m1  m 2 ---------(33)

If the masses are equal, m1 = m2 = m; then v1 = u2 and v2 = u1

ie, For an elastic collision of two bodies of equal masses, in 1 dimension the velocities are interchanged, initially if
u2 = 0, then v1 will become zero ie, if the second body was at rest initially then the Ist body stops motion and the
second body moves with the velocity of the first body.
Inelastic collision of a ball with the earth
Let h0 be the initial height of the ball with respect to the earth. Since, the earth is massive, the initial and final
velocities of the earth can be assumed to be zero.

a) When the ball hits the ground first time, its velocity before collision is u1  2gh 0 . After collision, v1 = eu1. The

v12  h1 
height h1 attained after first impact should be h1   e2 h 0  e  
2g  h 0  . The velocity just after second

v 22
impact, v 2  ev1  e u1 and height attained after second impact, h 2 
2  e 4 h 0 . Hence, the height attained
2g
after n impacts, h n  e 2n h 0 ---------(34)
b) Total distance travelled by the ball before coming to rest is:

s  h 0  2h1  2h 2  h 0  2e 2 h 0  2e 4 h 0  ........

 1   1  e2  
 0     0 0 1  e2  0 0  1  e2  ---------(35)
   
2 4
or s 2h 1 e e ..... h 2h h h
   
158
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

2h 0
c) If the ball is released at t = 0, at a height h0, after a time t1, first impacts occur us on earth surface, t1 
g

2h1 2h 0
The second impact occurs after an additional time, t 2  2  2e  2et1
g g

2h 2 2h 0
The third impact occurs after a further additional time; t3  2  2e2  2e 2 t1
g g
Hence, the total time in which ball comes to rest is,
  1 
T  t1  t 2  t 3  .....  t1 1  2e  2e 2  ..... ;  t1 1  2e 1  e  e 2  ......   t1 1  2e  
  1  e 

2h 0  1  e 
 T   ---------(36)
g  1 e 
d) Momentum transfer to floor: Let the momentum of the ball when it hits the floor first time is p = mu1
(downwards). Then, momentum of the rebounding ball is p1 = mv1 = ep (upwards). Thus, momentum change
(transfer) in first (one) collision is: p1  p   ep   p 1  e 

Similarly, for the second impact, momentum transfer is: p 2  ep   e 2 p   ep 1  e 

Therefore, the total momentum transfer is:
 1 e 
p  p1  p 2  p3  .....  p 1  e   ep 1  e   e 2 p 1  e   .....  p   ---------(37)
 1 e 
e) Average force exerted by the ball is:

p p 1  e  / 1  e  mu1 m 2gh 0
Fav      mg ---------(38)
T 2h 0  1  e  2h 0 2h 0
 
g  1 e  g g
Loss of kinetic energy
(i) Elastic collisions: The total KE in an elastic collision is conserved. However, individual particles may gain or
lose KE. Suppose a particle of mass m1, moving with velocity u1 collides with a particle of mass m2 at rest.
1
The KE of particle 1 before collision is: K i  m1u12
2

1   m1  m 2  
The KE of particle 1 after collision is, K f  m1v12 ; But, v1    u1 ;
2   m1  m 2  
2 2
 m1  m 2  K f  m1  m 2  Ki  K f 4m1m 2
So, K f    Ki    ---------(39) or 
 m1  m 2  ------(40)
2
m  m K i  m1  m 2  Ki
 1 2 

The loss is maximum (=100%) when m1 = m2.

159
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

(ii) Inelastic collision: Let e = coefficient of restitution. Conservation of momentum and definition of e gives (with
u2 = 0)

m1u1  m1v1  m 2 v 2 and eu1  v 2  v1

 m1  em 2  m1 1  e 
Solving, we get; v1   m  m  u1 and v 2 
m1  m 2
u1
 1 2 

1 1 1
Initial KE of the system, K i  m1u12 ; Final KE of the system, K f  m1v12  m 2 v 22
2 2 2

1  m1m 2  2
Loss in KE in inelastic collision is : K i  K f  2  m  m  u1 1  e 
2

 1 2 

K lost m 2 1  e 
2

The fraction of KE lost (as heat, light, sound, etc.) is: 

Ki  m1  m 2 
Impulse momentum principle
When a system changes its configuration, its particles change their location or momenta. Sum of linear momenta
of all the particles equals to the linear momentum of centre of mass due to translation. Principle of impulse and
momenta states that net impulse of all the external forces is equal to change in momentum of the centre of mass.
  
  Fi dt  p c2  p c1

Deforming and Reforming forces

During collisions, particles or bodies may have a slight deformation in their size or shape. If the bodies are
elastic, they attain their original size or shape immediately after deformation. So there will be a reformation force
after a deformation. For such bodies there is no loss of mechanical energy and the KE is conserved, such collisions
are elastic collisions.
For an inelastic collision the colliding particles do not regain their shape and size completely, after collision.
Some energy will be consumed by colliding particles in the form of deformation P.E, due to this KE is not conserved.
But momentum conservation will be satisfied.
Coefft. of restitution is also defined as

Impulse of reformation velocity of separation of points along line of impact

e =
Impulse of deformation velocity of approach of point of contact along line of impact

Example for calculation of e

Two smooth balls A and B approaching each other such that their centres are moving along the CD in absence
of external impulsive force. The velocities of A and B just before collision be u1 and u2 respectively. The velocities
of A and B just after collision be v1 and v2 respectively.

160
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

 Fext = 0 momentum is conserved for the system.

 m1u1  m 2 u 2   m1  m 2  v  m 1 v1  m2 v 2

m1u1  m 2 u 2 m1v1  m 2 v 2
 v 
m1  m 2 m1  m 2 ---------(43)
Head on collision
m1 m1
u1 u2 v1 v2
line of impact line of impact
m2 m2
u1 > u2 Before collision v 2 > v1 After collision

v 2  v1
e= e  u1  u 2   v 2  v1 ; v2  v1  e  u1  u 2 
u1  u 2

By momentum conservation. m1u1  m 2 u 2  m1v1  m 2 v 2

m1u1  m 2 u 2  em 2  u1  u 2  m1u1  m 2 u 2  m1e  u1  u 2 

v1  ; v2 
m1  m 2 m1  m 2

If e = 0, v1 = v2; e = 1, m1 = m2 = m; then v1 = u2 & v2 = u1. they exchange the velocities.

m2
If m1 > > m2, then m1  m 2  m1 , m  0 ; then v1 = u1; and v2 = u1 + e(u1 – u2)
1

Example 4: Two identical balls A & B moving with velocities uA & uB in the same direction collide, coefficient of
restitution is e. Deduce the expressions for velocities after collision. If the collision is perfectly elastic, what do you
observe.

161
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

By momentum conservation. vA  v B  u A  u B -------(44)

From the equation for coefficent of restitution. v B  v A  e  u A  u B  -------(45)

 1 e   1 e   1 e   1 e 
From (44) & (45); v B    uB    u A ; vA    uA    u B ; when e = 1, vB = uA ; vA = uB
 2   2   2   2 
Oblique impact on a fixed plane
For a body of mass m moving with velocity u making an angle  with the normal to a fixed horizontal floor..
After collision, the body is deflected with a velocity v, making an angle  with the normal.
m
u v
  m

Impact takes place along the normal. The normal component of u is along -y direction and normal component
of v is along +y direction

velocity of separation   v cos   j v cos 

e   ie, eu cos   v cos  -----(46)
velocity of approach  u cos    j u cos  ;

Impulsive force acts along the normal, momentum along the normal is not conserved. Component of impulsive
force along horizontal is zero, so momentum along horizontal is conserved. Hence

tan 
v   e 2 cos 2   sin 2   u ; tan  
1/2
u sin   v sin  ------(47); From (46) & (47);
e

for perfectly elastic collision, e = 1, then v = u and   

ie, in a perfectly elastic oblique collision the body rebounds from the fixed surface with same speed and at the
same angle on the other side of normal.
Inelastic collision - Loss of KE due to collision.
In case of inelastic collision, after collision the bodies move with same velocity or they stick together.
m1 m2
u1 u2
A B A B

Before collision After collision

Two particles of masses m1 & m2, moving with velocities u1 & u2 (u1 > u2) along the same line collide head on.
And after collision they have same common velocity v, then by conservation of linear momentum.
m1u1  m 2 u 2
m1u1  m 2 u 2   m1  m 2  v ; v
m1  m 2

162
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

1 1 1
KE i  m1u12  m 2 u 22 ; KE f   m1  m 2  v 2 ; loss in KE due to collision.
2 2 2
1 1 1
KE i  KE f  m1u12  m 2 u 22   m1  m 2  v 2
2 2 2

1  m u  m2u 2   1  m1m 2  u1  u 2  2u1u 2  

2 2 2

  m1u12  m 2 u 22  1 1    
2  m1  m 2 

2
  m1  m 2  

1 m1m 2 1 m1m 2
 u1  u 2  --------(48);
2
k  If m2 is at rest, u2 = 0; k  2  m  m  u1
2

2  m1  m 2  1 2

k m2  1 2 k
  k  m1u1  ; If m2 is a massive target (m2 >> m1);  1; 100%
k m1  m 2  2  k
ie, if a light moving body strikes a heavy body at rest and sticks to it, all its KE will be lost.
Example 5 : A steel ball of mass m, moving with a velocity u undergoes a perfectly elastic oblique collision with
another identical steel ball at rest. What happens to two bodies after collision.
m v1

m m
u

at rest
Before collision
m v2

After collision
mu  mv1  mv 2 ; u  v1  v 2 ; u  v  v  2v1v 2
2 2
1
2
2

1 1 1
KE is conserved. mu 2  mv12  mv 22 ; u 2  v12  v 22 ;  2v1v 2  0 , v1 . v2 = 0
2 2 2
v1 v 2 cos   0, cos   0,   90o
After collision both of them move perpendicular to each other.

163
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

QUESTIONS
LEVEL - I
1. A plate of mass m, length b and depth a is initially lying on a horizontal floor with length parallel to the floor and
depth perpendicular to the floor. The work done to erect it on its depth is

b  b b  a  b  a 
1) mg   2) mg  a   3) mg  4) mg 
2  2  2   2 
2. An elastic string of unstretched length L and force constant k is stretched by a small length x. It is further
stretched by another small length y. The work done in the second stretching is
1 2 1 1 1
k  x 2  y2  k x  y ky  2x  y 
2
1) ky 2) 3) 4)
2 2 2 2
3. The kinetic energy K of a particle moving in straight line depends upon the distance s as K = as2. The force
acting on the particle is
1) 2 as 2) 2 mas 3) 2a 4) as2
4. A 0.5 kg ball is thrown up with an initial speed 14 m/s and reaches a maximum height of 8.0 m. How much
energy is dissipated by air drag acting on the ball during the time of ascent?
1) 19.6 J 2) 4.9 J 3) 10 J 4) 9.8 J
5. An engine of power 7500 W makes a train move on a horizontal surface with constant velocity of 20 ms–1.
The force involved in the problem is
1) 375 N 2) 400 N 3) 500 N 4) 600 N
6. An automobile weighing 1200 kg climbs up a hill that rises 1 m in 20 m. Neglecting frictional effects, the
minimum power developed by the engine is 9000 W. If g = 10 ms–2, then the velocity of the automobile is
1) 36 kmh–1 2) 54 kmh–1 3) 72 kmh–1 4) 90 kmh–1
7. A quarter horse power motor runs at a speed of 600 rpm. Assuming 40% efficiency, the work done by the
motor in one rotation will be
1) 7.46 J 2) 7400 J 3) 7.46 erg 4) 74.6 J
8. A particle of mass m is moving in a circular path of constant radius r such that its centripetal acceleration ac is
varying with time t as ac = k2 rt2. The power is

mk 4 r 2 t 5
1) 2mk 2 r 2 t 2) mk 2 r 2 t 3) 4) zero
3
9. The momentum of a body increases by 50% due to change in its velocity. The kinetic energy of the body
increases by
1) 125% 2) 50% 3) 250% 4) 50%
10. A spring when pulled by 3 cm has potential energy U. If it is stretched by 6 cm, the potential energy will be
1) 3 U 2) 4 U 3) 6 U 4) 2 U
11. A long spring is streteched by 2 cm and its potential energy is E. If the spring is stretched by 4 cm, the potential
energy stored in it will be
1) E 2) 2E 3) 3 E 4) 4 E
164
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

12. A pump raises water at a rate of 0.5 m3/min from a well 30 m deep. If the efficiency of the pump is 70%, the
power developed in the process is
1) 1750 W 2) 2625 W 3) 3500 W 4) 7000 W
13. Two bodies possess equal linear momentum. Their masses are m1 and m2 and respective kinetic energies are
E1 and E2. The ratio E1 : E2 is equal to
1) m1 : m2 2) m2 : m1 3) m12 : m 22 4) m 22 : m12
14. A man carries a box of 25 kg. The energy gained by box when the man holds the box in his hand for 5 min is
1) 5 J 2) Zero 3) 125 J 4) 7500 J
15. The force required to row a boat at constant velocity is proportional to the velocity. If it takes 10 horse power to
row a certain boat at a speed of 5 km/h, how much horse power does it take to row it at a speed of 15 km/h?
1) 90 2) 60 3) 30 4) 45
16. A body of mass m moving with a constant velocity v hits another body of equal mass moving with equal speed
v but in the opposite direction and sticks to it. The velocity of the compound body after collision is
1) V 2) 2V 3) zero 4) –2V
17. A ball of mass m moving with velocity v collides with another ball of mass 2 m and sticks to it. The velocity of
the final system is
1) v/3 2) v/2 3) 2v 4) 3v
–1
18. A body of mass 3 kg is moving with a velocity of 4 ms towards right, collides head on with a body of mass 4
kg moving in opposite direction with a velocity of 3 ms–1. After collision the two bodies stick together and move
with a common velocity, which is
1) zero 2) 12 ms–1 towards left
12 1
3) 12 ms–1 towards right 4) ms towards left
7
19. A saucer of mass 10 g is kept floating in air with the help of bullets, each of mass half of the saucer, fired at same
velocity at the rate of 10 bullets per second. If the bullets rebound with same speed in opposite direction, the
velocity of bullet at the time of impact is

1) 98 cms–1 2) 9.8 cms–1 3) 98 ms–1 4) 1000 cms–1

20. A 10 kg object collides with stationary 5 kg object and after collision they stick together and move forward
with velocity 4 ms–1. What is the velocity with which the 10 kg object hit the second one?
1) 4 ms–1 2) 6 ms–1 3) 10 ms–1 4) 12 ms–1
21. A shell is fired from a cannon with velocity v m/s at an angle  with the horizontal direction. At the highest point
in its path it explodes into two pieces of equal mass. One of the pieces retraces its path to the cannon and the
speed (in m/s) of the other piece immediately after the explosion is:

3v 3 v cos 
1) 3v cos  2) 2v cos  3) cos  4)
2 2
165
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

22. A body is allowed to fall on the ground from a height h1. If it is to rebound to a height h2, then the coefficient of
restitution is:

h2 h2 h1 h1
1) h 2) h1 3) h 4) h2
1 2

23. A rubber bead of mass 5 g falls from a height of 100 cm and rebounds to half the height. Impulse for a time of
0.1s is

1) 0 2) 3.8 Ns 3) 0.038 Ns 4) 0.38 Ns

24. If two balls, each of mass 0.06 kg moving in opposite directions with speed 4 m/s collide and rebound with the
same speed, then the impulse imparted to each ball due to other is
1) 0.48 kg-m/s 2) 0.24 kg-m/s 3) 0.81 kg-m/s 4) zero
25. A car of mass 400 kg and travelling at 72 km/h crashes into a truck of mass 4000 kg and travelling at 9 km/h
in the same direction. The car bounces back at a speed of 18 km/h. The speed of the truck after the impact is
1) 9 km/h 2) 18 km/h 3) 27 km/h 4) 36 km/h
26. A tennis ball is thrown from a height h above the ground. If the ball strikes to the ground with elastic collision,
what height will the ball achieve after the third collision?
1) he6 2) e2h 3) e3h 4) None of these
27. A radioactive nucleus initially at rest decays by emitting an electron and neutron at right angles to one another.
The momentum of electron is 3.2 × 10–23 kg-m/sec and that of the neutron is 6.4 × 10–23 kg-m/sec. the
direction of the recoiling nucleus with that of the electron motion is:

1) tan 1  0.5  2) tan 1  2  3)   tan 1  2  4)  tan 1  2 
2
28. A ball is dropped from a height of 10 m. It is embedded 1 m in sand. In this process
1) only momentum is conserved
2) only kinetic energy is conserved
3) both momentum and kinetic energy are conserved
4) neither momentum nor kinetic energy is conserved
29. A sphere collides with another sphere of identical mass. After collision, the two spheres move. The collision is
inelastic. Then the angle between the directions of two spheres is
1) 45o 2) different from 90o 3) 90o 4) 0o
30. After perfectly inelastic collision between two identical particles moving with same speed in different directions,
the speed of the particles becomes half the initial speed. The angle between two velocities before collision is
1) 30o 2) 60o 3) 90o 4) 120o
31. Two equal masses m1 and m2 moving along the same straight line with velocities +3 m/s and –5 m/s respectively
collide elastically. Their velocities after the collision will be respectively
1) +4 m/s for both 2) –3 m/s and + 5 m/s 3) –4 m/s and +4 m/s 4) –5 m/s and + 3 m/s

166
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

32. A block of mass 5 kg is resting on a smooth surface. At what angle a force of 20 N be acted on the body so that
it will acquire a kinetic energy of 40 J after moving 4 m?
1) 30o 2) 45o 3) 60o 4) 120o
33. A ball hits the floor and rebounds after an inelastic collision. In this case,
1) the momentum of the ball just after the collision is the same as that just before the collision
2) the mechanical energy of the ball remains the same in the collision
3) the total momentum of the ball and the earth is conserved
4) the total mechanical energy of the ball and the earth is conserved
34. A mass m moving horizontally with velocity v0 strikes a pendulum of mass m. If the two masses stick together
after the collision, then the maximum height reached by the pendulum is:

1) v 0 2 / 8 g 2) v0 2 / 2 g 3) 2v0 g 4) v0g

35. A ball moving with a velocity u1 collides elastically with another ball of equal mass, in a one-dimensional
collision. Which of the following is not possible?
1) First ball will come to rest

2) Second ball will move with a velocity u1

3) Both balls will move with velocity u1 after collision

4) The first ball will move with a velocity less than u1
36. A ball strikes against the floor and returns with double the velocity; in which type of collision is it possible?
1) Perfectly elastic 2) Inelastic 3) Perfectly inelastic 4) It is not possible
37. A billiard ball moving with a speed of 5 m/s collides with an identical ball, originally at rest. If the first ball stops
dead after collision, then the second ball will move forward with a speed of :
1) 10 ms–1 2) 5 ms–1 3) 2.5 ms–1 4) 1.0 ms–1
38. A big particle of mass (3 + m) kg blasts into 3 pieces, such that a particle of mass 1 kg moves along x-axis, with
velocity 2 m/s and particle of mass 2 kg moves with velocity 1 m/s perpendicular to direction of 1 kg particle.
If the third particle moves with velocity 2 m / s , then m is

1) 2 kg 2) 1 kg 3) 2 2 kg 4) none of these
39. A bullet of mass 0.05 kg moving with a speed of 80 ms–1 enters a wooden block and is stopped after a distance
of 0.40 m. The average resistive force exerted by the block on the bullet is:
1) 300 N 2) 20 N 3) 400 N 4) 40 N
40. An impulsive force acting on a particle increases the kinetic energy of the particle by 100%. The increase in the
momentum is
1) 10% 2) 40% 3) 70% 4) 100%

167
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

41. A ball is moving with velocity 2 ms–1 towards a heavy wall moving towards the ball with speed 1 ms–1, as shown.
Assuming collision to be elastic, the velocity of the ball immediately after the collision (in ms–1) is

1) 2 2) 3 3) 4 4) 5

42. Two blocks of masses 10 kg and 4 kg are connected by a spring of negligible mass and placed on a frictionless
horizontal surface. An impulse gives a velocity of 14 m/s to the heavier block in the direction of the lighter
block. The velocity of the centre of mass is
1) 30 m/s 2) 20 m/s 3) 10 m/s 4) 5 m/s
LEVEL - II
1. The force F acting on a body varies with its displacement x as F = kx–2/3. The power delivered by the force
will be proportional to
1) x 3/2 2) x 1/ 2 3) x1/ 2 4) x 3/ 2
2. In a hydroelectric power station, the height of the dam is 10 m. How many kg of water must fall per second
on the blades of a turbine in order to generate 1 MW of electrical power?
Take g = 10 ms–2.
1) 103 kgs 1 2) 104 kgs 1 3) 105 kgs 1 4) 106 kgs 1
3. A bullet is fired normally on an immovable wooden plank. It loses 25% of its momentum in penetrating a
thickness of 3.5 cm. The total thickness penetrated by the bullet is
1) 8 cm 2) 10 cm 3) 12 cm 4) 14 cm
4. A body of mass m = 1 kg is dropped from a height h = 40 cm on a horizontal platform fixed to one end of an
elastic spring, the other being fixed to a base, as shown in Fig. As a result the spring is compressed by an
amount x = 10 cm. What is the force constant of the spring. Take g = 10 ms–2.

1) 600 Nm–1 2) 800 Nm–1 3) 1000 Nm–1 4) 1200 Nm–1

5. A body of mass m accelerates uniformly from rest to velocity 1 in time t1. The instantaneous power delivered
to the body as a function of time t is
m1 t m12 t m12 t 2 m1 t 2
1) t 2) 2 3) 4)
1 t1 t12 t1
168
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

6. An escalator is moving downwards with a uniform speed u. A man of mass m is running upwards on it at a
uniform speed . If the height of the escalator is h, the work done by the man in going up the escalator is
mghu mgh
1) zero 2) mgh 3)    u  4)    u 

7. A car of mas m moving at a speed  is stopped in a distance x by the friction between the tyres and the road.
If the kinetic energy of the car is doubled, its stopping distance will be
1) 8x 2) 4x 3) 2x 4) x
8. A body is allowed to fall freely under gravity from a height of 10 m. If it loses 25% of its energy on impact with
the ground, to what height will it rise after one impact?
1) 2.5 m 2) 5.0 m 3) 7.5 m 4) none of these
9. A body of mass m thrown vertically upwards attains a maximum height h. At what height will its kinetic energy
be 75% of its initial value?
h h h h
1) 2) 3) 4)
6 5 4 3
10. A body, having kinetic energy k, moving on a rough horizontal surface, is stopped in a distance x. The force of
friction exerted on the body is

k k k
1) 2) 3) 4) kx
x x x
11. Two springs with spring constants K1 = 1500 N/m and K2 = 3000 N/m are stretched by the same force. The
ratio of potential energy stored in springs will be
1) 1 : 2 2) 2 : 1 3) 4 : 1 4) 1 : 4
12. A body of mass 5 kg is placed at the origin. It can move only on the x-axis. A force of 10 N is acting on it in
a direction making an angle of 60o with the x-axis and displaces it along the x-axis by 4 metre. The work
done by the force is
1) 2.5 J 2) 7.25 J 3) 40 J 4) 20 J
13. When a spring is extended by 2 cm energy stored is100 J. When extended further by 2 cm the energy
increases by
1) 300 J 2) 400 J 3) 200 J 4) 100 J
14. When a mass M is attached to the spring of force constant k, then the spring stretches by l. If the mass
oscillates with amplitude l, what will be the maximum potential energy stored in the spring?
kl 1
1) 2) 2kl 3) Mgl 4) Mgl
2 2
15. A shell of mass 200 gm is ejected from a gun of mass 4 kg by an explosion that generates 1.05 kJ of energy.
The initial velocity of the shell is
1) 40 ms–1 2) 120 ms–1 3) 100 ms–1 4) 80 ms–1
16. A body of mass 4 m at rest explodes into three fragments. Two of the fragments each of mass m move with
speed  in mutually perpendicular directions. Total energy released in the process is
3
1) m2 2) m2 3) 2m2 4) 3m2
2
169
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

17. A body of mass 20 g is moving with a certain velocity. It collides with another body of mass 80 g at rest. The
collision is perfectly inelastic. The ratio of kinetic energies of the system before and after collision is
1) 2 : 1 2) 4 : 1 3) 5 : 1 4) 3 : 2
18. A block of mass M is hanging over a smooth and light pulley through a light string. The other end of the string
is pulled by a constant force F.
If K.E. of the block increases by 20 J in 1 s. Then
1) tension in string is Mg 2) work done by the force of gravity is 20 J in 1 s
3) tension in string is F 4) work done by the tension on the block is 20 J in 1 s.
19. Two identical 5 kg blocks are moving with same speed of 2 ms–1 towards each other along a frictionless
horizontal surface. The two blocks collide, stick together, and come to rest. Consider the two blocks as a
system. The works done by external and internal forces are, respectively,
1) 0, 0 2) 0, 20 J 3) 0, –20 J 4) 20 J, –20 J
20. The velocity-time graph of a particle moving in a straight line is shown in Fig. The mass of the particle is 2 kg.
Work done by all the forces acting on the particle in time interval between t = 0 to t = 10 s is

1) 300 J 2) – 300 J 3) 400 J 4) – 400 J

21. The system shown in Fig. is released from rest with mass 2 kg in contact with the ground. Pulley and spring are
massless, and friction is absent everywhere. The speed of 5 kg block when 2 kg block leaves the contact with
the ground is (force constant of the spring k = 40 N m–1 and g = 10 ms–2)

1) 2 ms 1 2) 2 2 ms 1 3) 2ms–1 4) 2 ms 1
22. A particle of mass m moves with a variable velocity v, which changes the distance covered x along a straight
line as v  k x , where k is a positive constant. The work done by all the force acting on the particle, during
the first t second is

mk 4 mk 4 t 2 mk 4 t 2 mk 4 t 2
1) 2 2) 3) 4)
t 4 8 16

170
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

23. If a man speeds up by 1 ms–1, his kinetic energy increases by 44%. His original speed in ms–1 is
1) 1 2) 2 3) 5 4) 4
24. A motor drives a body along a straight line with a constant force. The power P developed by the motor must
vary with time t as shown in figure.

25. Power supplied to a particle of mass 2 kg varies with time as P = t2/2 watt, where t is in second. If velocity of
particle at t = 0 is  = 0, the velocity of particle at t = 2 s will be

1 1
1) 1 ms–1 2) 4 ms–1 3) 2 ms 4) 2 2 ms 1
3
26. A man running has half the kinetic energy of a boy of half his mass. The man speeds up by 1 ms–1 and then has
kinetic energy as that of the boy. What were the original speeds of man and the boy?

1) 2 ms 1 ; 2 2  1 ms 1 2)  
2  1 ms 1 , 2  
2  1 ms 1

3)  
2  1 ms 1 ; 2  
2  1 ms 1 4) None of these
27. An ideal spring with spring constant k is hung from the ceiling and a block of mass M is attached to its lower
end. The mass is released with the spring initially unstretched. Then the maximum extension in the spring is
4Mg 2Mg Mg Mg
1) 2) 3) 4)
k k k 2k
28. A motor boat is travelling with a speed of 3.0 m/s. If the force on it due to water flow is 500 N, the power of
the boat is
1) 150 kW 2) 15 kW 3) 1.5 kW 4) 150 W
29. The work done by the external forces on a system equals the change in
1) total energy 2) kinetic energy 3) potential energy 4) none of these
30. The power required to raise 300 litre of water per minute through a vertical height of 6 m and then to deliver
it through a nozzle of diameter 2.4 cm is
1) 204 W 2) 280 W 3) 306 W 4) 400 W
31. P and Q are two like parallel forces. If P be displaced parallel to itself through x, then the resultant is displaced
through
Px Qx
1) (P + Q) x 2) 3) 4) None of these
PQ PQ
32. Two springs of spring constants 2000 N/m and 1000 N/m are stretched with same force. They will have
potential energy in the ratio of
1) 2 : 1 2) 22 : 12 3) 1 : 2 4) 12 : 22

171
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

33. A body is slowly lowered onto a massive platform moving horizontally at a speed of 4 m/s. Through what
distance will the body slide relative to the platform? (The coefficient of friction is 0.2; g = 10 m/m2)
1) 4 m 2) 2 m 3) 16 m 4) 8 m
34. A body is projected at an angle of 30 to the horizontal. The initial kinetic energy of the body is
o

40 J. What will be the kinetic energy at the top most point?

1) 25 J 2) 40 J 3) 30 J 4) 20 J
35. A particle of mass m collides with another stationary particle of mass M. If the particle m stops just after
collision, the coefficient of restitution for collision is equal to
m Mm m
1) 1 2) 3) 4)
M Mm Mm
36. A bullet of mass m hits a target of mass M hanging by a string and gets embedded in it. If the block rises to a
height h as a result of this collision, the velocity of the bullet before collision is:

 m
1) v  2gh 2) v  2gh 1  
 M

 M  m
3) v   1   2gh 4) v  2gh  1  
 m  M
37. If a ball is dropped from rest, its bounces from the floor. The coefficient of restitution is 0.5 and the speed just
before the first bounce is 5 ms–1. The total time taken by the ball to come to rest is
1) 2 s 2) 1 s 3) 0.5 s 4) 0.25 s
38. A tennis ball bounces down flight of stairs striking each step in turn and rebounding to the height of the step
above. The coefficient of restitution has a value
1) 1/2 2) 1 3) 1/ 2 4) 1/ 2 2
39. A ball strikes a horizontal floor at an angle   45o . The coefficient of restitution between the ball and the floor
is e = 1/2. The fraction of its kinetic energy lost in collision is:
1) 5/8 2) 3/8 3) 3/4 4) 1/4
40. A ball collides elastically with another ball of the same mass. The collision is oblique and initially one of the balls
was at rest. After the collision, the two balls move with same speeds. What will be the angle between the
velocity of the ball after the collision?
1) 30o 2) 45o 3) 60o 4) 90o
41. A plastic ball is dropped from a height of 1 m and rebounds several times from the floor. If 1.03 sec elapse
from the moment it is dropped to the second impact with the floor, what is the coefficient of restitution?
1) 0.03 2) 0.64 3) 0.02 4) 0.05
42. A body of mass 2 kg makes an elastic collision (head-on) with another body at rest and continue to move in the
rd
1
original direction at a speed equal to of its original speed. The mass of second body is .............
3
1) 2 kg 2) 3 kg 3) 1 kg 4) 4 kg

172
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

43. A neutron moving at a speed v undergoes a head-on elastic collision with a nucleus of mass number A at rest.
The ratio of the kinetic energies of the neutron after and before collision is
2 2 2 2
 A 1   A 1   A   A 
1)   2)   3)   4)  
 A 1   A 1   A 1   A 1 
44. A body of mass 5 kg is moving along the x-axis with a velocity 2ms–1. Another body of mass 10 kg is moving
along the y-axis with a velocity 3 ms 1 . They collide at the origin and stick together. The final velocity of the
combined mass is

1) 3 ms 1 2)  
3  1 ms 1 3)
4 1
3
ms 4) none
 
45. A collision occurs between two identical balls of mass m each, moving with velocities u1 and u 2 . If the collision
3m   2
is head on and the energy lost in the collision is E   u1  u 2  then the coefficient of restitution is
16
1) 0.25 2) 0.75 3) 0.5 4) 0.9
46. The masses of five balls at rest and lying at equal distances in a straight line are in geometrical progression with
ratio 2 and their coefficients of restitution are each 2/3. If the first ball be started towards the second with
velocity u, then the velocity communicated to 5th ball is
2 3 4
5 5 5 5
1) u 2)   u 3)   u 4)   u
9 9 9 9
47. A particle projected at an angle 45o with the horizontal has the range 16 m. It explodes into two equal parts at
the highest point of projection, out of which one falls vertically downwards at the point of explosion. Then the
other will fall at what distance from the starting point?
1) 8 m 2) 16 m 3) 24 m 4) 32 m
48. A car weighing 2 × 10 kg and moving 20 m/s along a main road collides with a lorry of mass 8 × 103 kg which
3

emerges at 5 m/s from a cross road at right angles to the main road. If the two vehicles lock, what will be their
velocity after the collision?
1) 4 / 2 m / s, 45o with cross road 2) 4 / 2 m / s, 60 o with cross road

3) 4 2 m / s, 60 o with main road 4) 4 2 m / s, 45o with main road

173
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

KEY WITH HINTS

LEVEL - I

a b b a   ba 
1. 3 Initial height of CG  ; Final height of CG  ; Work done = mg     mg  
2 2 2 2  2 
2. 4 Elastic force in string is conservative in nature.
W = –V1; where, W = work done by elastic force of string

1 2 1 1 1
W    Vf  Vi   Vi  Vf ; or W  kx  k  x  y  or W  kx 2  k  x 2  y 2  2xy 
2

2 2 2 2

1 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 1
 kx  kx  ky  k  2xy    kxy  ky 2  ky  2x  y 
2 2 2 2 2 2
Work done against elastic force Wex = – W
1
3. 1 Given, K = as2 or mv 2  as 2
2

1 dv ds
Differentiating w.r.t. time t, m.2v  a .2s. ; m.v.a = [Link] v; ma = 2as; Ft = 2as
2 dt dt

u 2 14 14
4. 4 If there is no air drag then maximum height. H   10 m
2g 2  9.8
But due to air drag ball reaches up to height 8 m only so, loss of energy.
= Mg (10 – 8) = 0.5 × 9.8 × 2 = 9.8 J

P 7500 Js 1
5. 1 Power = 7500 W = 7500 Js , Velocity v = 20 ms ; P  Fv or F  
–1 –1  375 N
v 20 ms 1

6. 2 P  mg sin  v  F  mg sin  

P 9000  20 18
or v  mg sin  or v  15ms 1  15   54 kmh 1
1200 10  1 5
7. 1 Motor makes 600 revolution per minute.
revolution rev 1
 n  600  10  Time required for one revolution  sec
min ute sec 10

1 1 746
Energy requierd for one revolution = Power × time   746   J
4 10 40

746 40 746
But work done = 40% of input  40%     7.46 J
40 100 40

174
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

v2
8. 2 Here a c   k 2 rt 2  v = krt
r
dv d  krt 
The tangential acceleration is a t    kr ; The work done by centripetal force will be zero.
dt dt
So power is delivered to the particle by only tangential force which acts in the same direction of
instantaneous velocity.
 Power = Ftv = matkrt = m(kr)(krt) = mk2r2t
p12 2mK1 K1
9. 1 Let original momentum p1 = 100 , ; Final momentum = 150 .;  
p 22 2mK 2 K 2
2 2
 100  K1 2 K 4 K 9K1
       1 or  1  K2 
 150  K2 3 K2 9 K2 4
9
Change in KE K  K1 K1  K1 5
 100  2  100 4 100   100  125%
Original KE K1 K1 4

2
U1 1/ 2kx12 x12 U1  3  1
  ;   ;
U 2 1/ 2 kx 22 x 22 U 2  6 
10. 2 For spring, Ratio of potential energy
4
 U 2  4U1  Initial P.E.  U  U 2  4U
1 2 E
11. 4 Potential energy of spring when x = 2 is E kx  2k  k 
2 2
1 1 E
k 4 ;
2
When stretched to 4 cm, energy  Energy =   16  4 E
2 2 2
70 mass×g×h 100 0.5  103  9.8  30
12. 3  Power  ;  Power   = 3500 W
100 second 70 60
v1 m 2
13. 2 m1v1  m 2 v 2  
v 2 m1

1
m v2 2 2
E1 2 1 1 m1  v1  m1  m 2  m E1 m 2
        2  
Now E 2 1
m 2 v 22 m 2  v 2  m 2  m1  m1 E 2 m1
2
14. 2 Energy gained or workdone = F × distance
Since distance moved = zero;  Energy gained = zero
15. 1 Power P = (force F) × (velocity v)  P  Kv 2 (given, F = kv)
2 2
P  v   15  9
 2  2     or P2 = 9 × P1 = 9 × 10 = 90 HP
P1  v1   5  1

175
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

m1v1  m 2 v 2 m  V   m  V 
16. 3 v or v  0
m1  m 2 mm

v
17. 1 From conservation of linear - momentum ; mv  3mv  v 
3
18. 1

u1= 4 m/s u2= 3 m/s

m1= 3 kg m2= 4 kg

m1u1 + m2u2 = (m1 + m2) v ; v=0

19. 1 Change in momentum of bullet  mv    mv   2mv  2  5  v  10 v

10
Force = rate of change of momentum  10 v   100 v
1
For equilibrium, this force has to be equal to the weight of saucer ie,
9800
100 v  10  980 or, v   98cms 1
100
15  4
20. 2 As, m1u1  m 2 u 2   m1  m 2  v  10  u1  5  0  10  5  4  u1   6 ms 1
10

21. 1 In case of projectile motion as at the highest point  v  vertical  0 and  v horizontal  v cos 
the initial linear momentum of the system will be mv cos  .
Now, as force of blasting is internal and force of gravity is vertical, so linear momentum of the system
along horizontal is conserved, ie, p1  p 2  mv cos  or m1v1  m 2 v 2  mv cos 

m
But , it is given that m1  m 2  and as one part retraces its path, v1   v cos  .
2
1 1
 m   v cos    mv 2  mv cos  ; Solving, we get; v2  3v cos 
2 2
v1  v 2
22. 2 u1  2gh1 , v1  2gh 2 ; e
u 2  u1

v1 h2
Since, u 2  v 2  0  e 
u1 h1

176
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

23. 3 Velocity with which bead strikes the ground  2gh  20 ms 1

Velocity with which bead rises  2  10  0.5  10 ms 1

Impulse  mv   mv   0.005  

20  10  0.038 Ns
24. 1 As balls rebound with same speed, hence impulse imparted to each ball = 2p = 2mv = 2 × 0.06 × 4 =
0.48 kg-m/s
25. 2 Applying the law of conservation of momentum,
400 × 20 + 4000 × 2.5 = –400 × 5 + 4000 v2.
18
 v 2  5m / sec  5  km / h  18 km / h
5

26. 1 h n  e 2n h
27. 3 p e  3.2  10 23 kg  m / sec, p n  6.4  1023 kg  m / sec

 3.2    6.4 
2 2
p R  p 2e  p 2n  1023 kg  m / sec

p n 6.4  1023
tan    2
p e 3.2 1023

According to law of conservation of momentum, the residual nucleus must move in a direction just

opposite to that of PR , as shown in figure. Hence, direction of the recoiling nucleus, with that of the
electron motion is,         tan 1  2 
28. 1 The collision is inelastic because the bodies stick to each other after collision. Only the momentum is
conserved; there being a loss in K.E.
29. 2 The collision is given to be inelastic and the spheres of same mass move after collision. The angle
between the two direction will be different from 90o.
30. 4 Let  be the desired angle; Hence, p 2  p12  p 22  2p1p 2 cos 
where p is the resultant momentum of colliding particles.
2
  u  1
 2m  2     mu    mu   2  mu  mu  cos  ; 1  1  1  2 cos , cos    2 ,   120
2 2 o

  
31. 4 v1 = + 3 m/s v2 = –5 m/s

m1 m2

As m1 = m2 , therefore, after collision, velocities of masses get interchanged.

ie, velocity of mass m1 = –5 m/s and velocity of mass m2 = +3 m/s
177
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

32. 3 According to work-energy theorem; W = change in kinetic energy

1 1
Fs cos  
2
mv 2  mu 2 ;
2 20  4  cos   40  0  u  0 

40 1 1
cos    ;   cos 1    60o
80 2 2
33. 3 In an in-elastic-collision only momentum of the system may remain conserved. Some energy can be lost
in the form of heat, sound etc.
34. 1 Applying the law of conservation of the momentum we get;
2
v0 1 1 v  mv 20
mv0  0  2m  v or v  ; K.E   2m  v 2   2m   0  
2 2 2  2  4
Let the system reach a height ‘h’; P.E. of the system  2mgh

mv20 v 20
Hence,  2mgh or h 
4 8g
35. 3 In inelastic-head-on collision of two bodies of equal mass, their velocities get interchanged. Further, if

u2 = 0, then v1 = 0 and v2 = u1. ie, both balls can’t move with velocity u1 after the collision.
36. 4 After striking at the floor the ball cannot return with double the velocity because there will be some loss
of kinetic energy of the ball after collision which will appear in the form of sound energy, heat energy,
etc.
37. 2 It is a case of elastic collision. As masses of two balls are equal and 2nd ball is at rest before collision,
hence after the collision the speeds are just exchanged, ie, 1st ball will now come to rest while the
second ball will move forward with the same speed as that of the first ie, 5 ms–1.

momentum 2 2
Resultant momentum  2  2  2 2 ; Mass    2 kg
2 2
38. 1
velocity 2
½  0.05   80 
2
Initial KE
39. 3 Resistive force   = 400 N
stopping distance 0.40

kf v 22  2 pp
40. 2 Given  2   2  v 2  2 v1 Change in momentum     100
ki v12  p 
41. 3 The speed of wall will not change after the collision.
So, let v be the velocity of ball after collision.
Since collision is elastic, e = 1.  relative velocity of separation = relative velocity of approach.
v – 1 = 2 + 1  v = 4 ms–1.
42. 3 Just after collision
m1v1  m 2 v 2 10  14  4  0
vc    10 m / s
m1  m 2 10  4
Spring force is an internal force, it cannot cannot change the linear momentum of the (two mass + spring)
system. Therefore vc remains the same.
178
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

LEVEL - II

1. 2 Given F  x 2/3 . Therefore, acceleration  x 2/3 , i.e.

d
  Kx 2/3   d  K  x
2/3
(K = constant)  dx
dx
 2  x1/3 or   x1/6 ; P  F .   x 2/3  x1/6  x 1/ 2
2. 2 Let M kg of water fall per second.
The power is P = rate at which work is done = mass per second × g × h = Mgh
P 106
But P = 1 MW = 10 W, h = 10 m. Therefore
6 M  10 4 kg s 1
gh 10 10
3. 1 Let u cms be the speed of the bullet. Since the mass of the bullet remains unchanged, its speed
–1

3u
becomes   cms 1 after it penetrates a distance x = 3.5 cm. The retardation a due to the resistance
4
2
 3u 
of the wooden plank is given by u    2ax or u     2a  3.5
2 2 2

 4 
u2
which gives a  cms 2 . The bullet will come to rest when its velocity   0 . If x' is the thickness
16
penetrated by the bullet, then
u2 u2 u 2 16
u    2ax 
2 2 or x  . But, a  cms 2
; Therefore x    8 cm
2a 16 2u 2
4. 3 Since the platform is depressed by an amount x, the total work done on the spring is mg (h + x). This
1 2
work is stored in the spring in the form of potential energy kx . Equating the two, we have
2
1 2 2mg  h  x 
kx  mg  h  x  or k  2
 1000 Nm 1
2 x
5. 2 Power delivered in time t1 is P1 = F . v1 = m a . v1.
v1 m1.1 m12
Now, acceleration vector is a  t . Therefore P1  
1 t1 t1

P1 P1 m2 t
 Power delivered per unit time = t ; Power delivered at time t   t  21
1 t1 t1
6. 4 Relative speed of man with respect to escalator = ( – u)
 Actual displacement of man per second = ( – u)
h
Hence, the actual displacement of man in going up the escalator of height h is    u  . Therefore,

h
Work done = mg     u  ,

179
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

7. 3 If a is the deceleration due to the force of friction f, then 2ax  2

1
or m2  max or KE = fx ( f = ma)
2

Thus if KE is doubled, x is also doubled.

8. 3 Height h = 10 m. PE at this height = mgh. On reaching the ground, KE = mgh. Since the body loses
25% of energy due to impact, KE of the body after one impact = 0.75 mgh. If 1 is the initial upward
velocity after the impact, we have

1 3
m12  0.75 mgh  mgh or 12  1.5 gh
2 4

The height h1 to which the body will rise is

12 1.5gh
h1    0.75 h  0.75  10  7.5 m  h  10 m 
2g 2g

9. 3 As the body rises, the initial kinetic energy is converted into potential energy. At the maximum height h,
the energy is entirely potential = mgh, which is equal to the initial kinetic energy. Let h' be the height
where the kinetic energy is 75% of its initial value. At this height, the potential energy must be 25% of
h
its maximum value, i.e. at height h', PE = 0.25 mgh. Thus mgh' = 0.25 mgh or h' = .
4

10. 1 Let f be the force for friction and m be the mass of the body. The retardation a = f/m. If  is the initial
1
speed of the body, then 2ax = 2 or max  m2  k
2

But ma = f. Therefore fx = k or f = k/x.

11. 2 Force F = – K × displacement (x),

2
1 1  F  1 F2 U1 1 F2 2K 2 K 2 3000 2
P.E.  U  Kx 2  U  K    ;     
2 2 K 2K U 2 2 K1 F 2 K1 1500 1

12. 4 Workdone = Force × displacement along force direction

W = F . x . cos  = 10 × 4 × cos 60o = 20 J

1
k  2  10 2  ;
2
13. 1 100  100  2  10 4 k
2

1 100 1
k   4  0.5  106  5 105 ; E   5  105   4  102   5  4  2  10  400J
2

2 10 2
Increase in energy = 400 J – 100 J = 300 J

180
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

14. 4

When the mass M is suspended by the spring, the spring stretches by l as shown in figure. (ii).
 Mg  kl (i)
1 2 1 1
Energy stored in the spring is U1  kl   kl  l  Mgl [Using (i)] (ii)
2 2 2
When the mass M oscillates with amplitude l as shown in figure (iii)
1 2 1
 Energy stored in the spring is U2  kl  Mgl [Using (i)] (ii)
2 2
1 1
 Maximum potential energy stored in the spring  U1  U 2  Mgl  Mgl  Mgl
2 2
m 1 1
15. 3 mv  Mv  v    v ; Total K.E. of the bullet and gun  mv 2  Mv2
M 2 2
1 1 m2 1 2  m  1   0.2  2
Total K.E.  mv 2  M. 2 v 2  mv 1      0.2  1   v  1.05  1000J
2 2 M 2  M  2  4 
4 1.05 1000
 v2   1002  v  100 ms 1
0.1 4.2
   
16. 2 Initial momentum p  0 . Since no external force exists, momentum remain conserved i.e., p1  p 2  p3  0
As two fragments of mass m each are moving with speed v each at right angles,
    
| p1  p 2 |  m v 2  v 2  2mv  | p3 |  | p1  p 2 |  2 mv
The mass of third fragment is 2 m.  Kinetic energies of three fragments are
p2 1 p2 1 p32 1
and 3 2 2m  2 mv
 2
K1  1  mv 2 , K 2  2  mv 2 K
2m 2 2m 2  
3
Total energy released during explosion  K1  K 2  K 3  mv 2
2
17. 3 u1 = u, u2 = 0; 1  2  
m1u1  m 2 u 2 20u u
From the law of conservation of momentum,   m1  m 2
 
20  80 5
1 1 1
KE i  m1u12  m 2 u 22   20  u 2  0  10u 2
2 2 2
1 1 u2
KE f   1 2
m  m  2
  20  80   2u 2  KE i : KE f  5 :1
2 2 25
181
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

18. 3 As string is massless and pulley is frictionless, F = T. From work-energy theorem the change in K.E. of
block is equal to work done by gravity force plus work done by tension in the string.
 
19. 3 Fext  0; therefore, Wext  Fext .s  0 ; By work-energy theorem W = kF – kI

1 1 
Wext  Wint  0   mv 2  mv 2  ; Wint   mv 2  5  22  20 J
2 2 
20. 1 From work - energy theorem,

1 1
m  v f2  v i2    2  20   10    300J
2 2
W  KE  K f  K i 
2 2  

21. 2 Let x be the extension in the string when 2 kg block leaves the contact with ground. Then tension in the
spring should be equal to weight of 2 kg block:

2g 2  10 1
Kx  2g or x    m
K 40 2

1 1
Now from conservation of mechanical energy, mgx  Kx 2  mv 2
2 2

Kx 2 1 40
 2gx   2 10    2 2 ms 1
m 2 45

dx
22. 3 Given v  k x or k x or x 1/ 2dx  k dt
dt
1
x 2
 kt  C k2t2 k2t
Integrating 1 ; assuming x(0) = 0;  C  0; 2 x  kt  x  or v 
4 2
2
2
1 1 1  k2t  1
 
2
Therefore, work done, W = Increase in KE  mv 2
 m 0  m    mk 4 t 2
2 2 2  2  8

1
 E 2  E1   2 m  v  1
 2
 v2 
1 1  44
As, E1  mv ; E 2  m  v  1 ;
2
23. 3
2

 v = 5 m/s.
2 2 E1 1 2 100
mv
2
L L T2
24. 1 We know that, P  F.v  F.  L  T2  P  F.  F.  F.T or P  T
T T T

25. 3 From work-energy theorem, DKE = Wnet; K f  K i   P dt

2
1
2
 t2  1 1  t3  1
mv  0     dt
2
or  2  v2    ; v2 ms 1
2 0 2  2 2  3 0 3
182
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

26. 3 Let mass of boy be m, therefore, mass of man = 2 m,

1 1 1 1
As, KE of man = KE of boy   2m  u 2   mu 2
2 2 2 2
u 2 u
u2  , u  ; When man speeds upto 1 m/s.
4 2
1 1 1
 2m  u  1  mu2  m  2u  ;
2 2
 u  1
2
KE of man = KE of boy  2u 2
2 2 2
2 1
u 1  2 u ; u 
1
2 1

 2 1 2 1  
; u  2  1 ms ; u  2u  2 2  1 ms

1 1
 
27. 2 Let x be the maximum extension of the spring as shown in figure. From conservation of mechanical
energy; decreases in gravitational potential energy = increase in elastic potential energy

1 2 2Mg
 Mgx  kx  x
2 k

work done F. s
28. 3 Speed = 3 m/s; Force = 500 N; P 
time interval t
s
Velocity = rate of change of displacement; i.e. v 
t
Therefore, P = F . v = 3 × 500 = 1500 watt = 1.5 KW
29. 2 Work done on the body of mass m by external force F in order to increase its velocity from v1 to v2,
v2 v2 v
dv 2
1 1
W   F. ds   m . vdt  m  vdv  mv 22  mv12 = K – K W = K2 – K1
v1 v1
dt v1
2 2 2 1;

Thus work done by a force acting on a body is equal to change in kinetic energy of the body.
3

30. 3   300 l / min  300  10

Volume rate of flow of water, V = 5 × 10–3 m3/s
60
 gh
Density of water () = 103 kg/m3 ; Power to raise water to height of 6 m = V

d 2
= 103 × 5 × 10–3 × 9.8 × 6 = 294 watt; Area of nozzle, A   1.44 10 4 m 2
4

V 5  103 50
Let v be the velocity of water into the nozzle, v   4
 m/s
A 1.44 10 1.44
1 1  2
 The kinetic energy of water developed per second  mv 2  Vv
2 2
2
1  50 
  103  5  103    = 306 watt
2  1.44 
183
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

31. 2 Let the forces P and Q are acting at A and B and their resultant (P + Q) acts at C. Then,

P BC P  Q BC  AC AB [Link]
 or    AC  (1)
Q AC Q AC AC PQ

Again, when P is displaced parallel to itself to A', where AA' = x, let the resultant of P and Q is shifted
to C'. Thus,

P BC P  Q BC  AC AB P  Q AB  x

 or   or 
Q AC Q AC AC Q AC  x

[Link]  P.x
or (P  Q)  AC  x   Q  AB  x  ; or AC 
PQ

QAB  Px [Link] Px
 The displacement of the resultant = AC' – AC  PQ
 
PQ PQ

2
1 2 1  F  1F2
32. 1 Potential energy U  kx  k   
2 2 k 2k

U1 k 2 2000 2
U1  k1  U 2  k 2 ;   
U 2 k1 1000 1 ; Ratio is 2 : 1

33. 1 The frictional force between the body and the platform = mg, where m is the mass of the body.
Initially the relative velocity = 4 m/s.; The relative retardation = g = 0.2 × 10 = 2 m/s2.
If S is the relative displacement before the relative velocity becomes zero, we have

16
0 = 42 – 2 × 2 × S; S  4m
4

34. 3 At the topmost point, the horizontal component of velocity = u cos 30o

1
 initial kinetic energy  mu 2  40 J
2

1 1 40  3
Kinetic energy at the topmost point  mu 2  mu 2 cos 2 30o  40 cos 2 30o   30J
2 2 4

184
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

35. 2 As net horizontal force acting on a system is zero, hence momentum must remain conserved.
mu
mu v  v v m
Hence, mu + 0 = 0 + mv2  v 2  ; As per definition e  2 1  2  M 
M u 2  u1 u u M
36. 3 If initial velocity of bullet be v, then after collision combined velocity of bullet and target is

v 
mv v2
and h  or v  2gh
 M  m 2g

mv Mm  M
  2gh  v    . 2gh   1   2gh
M  m  m   m
vu v  v0 v  v0
37. 3 Acceleration a  or a  or g  v0
t t t
v B  v A 0   5
speed before first bounce; v 0  5ms 1  t   0.5 s
g 10
38. 3

As shown in adjoining figure ball is falling from height 2h and rebounding to a height h only. It means
that velocity of ball just before collision.
v 1
u  2  2h  g  4hg and velocity just after collision.; v   2hg  e   
u 2
1
Let the ball strikes at a speed u then k  mu . Due to collision tangential component of velocity
2
39. 2
2
1
remains unchanged (u sin 45o), but the normal component of velocity change to  u cos 45o
2
 Final velocity of ball after collision
2 2 2
1   u   u  5
v  u sin 45 
o 2
  u cos 45o 
2 
   
 2 2 2
  8u

1 5
Hence final kinetic energy k 2  mv 2  mu 2
2 16
1 5
mu 2  mu 2
k1  k 2 2 16 3
 Fractional loss in KE  
1

k1 mu 2 8
2
185
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

40. 2

Applying law of conservation of momentum along horizontal and vertical directions, we get;
mv sin 1  mvsin 2  0 ; ie, 1  2 ............ (1)
u
Also, mu  mv  cos 1  cos 2   2mv cos   1  2    say   ; cos   ...........(2)
2v
1 1 1
According to law conservation of kinetic KE, mu 2  mv 2  mv 2
2 2 2
or u 2  2v 2 or u  2 v ......... (3)

2 v 1
From eqn. (2) and eqn. (3), cos   or, cos   or   45o  1  2
2v 2
41. 2 The time elapsed from the moment it is dropped to the second impact with the floor is,
2h
t 1  2e  ; where h is the initial height of the body from ground
g
2
1.03  1  2e  ; e = 0.64
9.8
u
u v 4u
42. 3 u1  u , u2 = 0; v1  , v 2  v ; e 3 1 v  u  u v
3 u 0 3 3

From the law of conservation of momentum, m1u1  0  m1v1  m 2 v 2

u 4u m 2
m1u  m1  m2  m 2  1   1 kg
3 3 2 2
43. 1 Mass of neutron (m1) = 1 unit. Mass of nucleus (m2) = A units. Here u1 = u and u2 = 0. Therefore, the
velocity of the neutron after the collision is

 m  m2  1  A 
v1   1 u    u
m
 1  m 2  1  A

2
1 1 1  A  2
KE of neutron after collision  m1v1   1 
2
u
2 2 1  A 
2
1 1 1 1  A 
KE of neutron before collision is  mu 2   1 u 2  u 2 ; The ratio is 
2 2 2 1  A 
186
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

44. 3 Momentum of 5 kg mass (p1) = 5 × 2 = 10 kg ms–1 along x-axis.

Momentum of 10 kg mass (p2) = 10 3 kgms 1 along y -axis.
These two momenta are perpendicular to each other. Therefore the resultant initial momentum is

 
2
p  p12  p 22  102  10 3  20 kg ms 1

If v is the velocity of the combined mass, then final momentum = (10 + 5)v = 15 v kg ms–1.
4 1
From the principle of conservation of momentum, 15 v = 20 or v  ms
3
 1  e  m1   m 2  em1 
45. 3 v2    u1    u2
 m1  m2   m1  m 2 

1  1
u  v rel. f   v rel. i     v rel. i 1  e 2  since  v rel. f  e  v rel. i
2 2 2
Here, u2 = 0  E 
2   2

3 1m 3 1 1 1
m  v rel. i   v rel. i 1  e2  ;  1  e 2  ;
2 2
e2  ; e
16 2 2 16 4 4 2
46. 4 We know that velocity of second ball after collision is given by
u1 1  e  m1 u 2  m 2  m1e 
v2  
 m1  m 2   m1  m 2  ; Here u2 = 0, m2 = 2m1 and e = 2/3, hence

 2
u 1   m1
5
v2  
3
 u
 m1  2m1  9
As four exactly similar type of collisions are taking place successively, hence velocity communicated to
4
5
fifth ball v5    u
9

u2 2u sin 
47. 3 R max  when   45o ; T
g g
At highest point the horizontal velocity after explosion is found by applying conservation of momentum.
m m
m.u cos   v   0 ;  v  2u cos 
2 2
T u sin 
 Horizontal distance travelled  2u cos  2  2u cos  g

u2 u2
 sin 2   R  16 m from highest point.
g g
 Distance from the starting point = 16 + 8 = 24 m.
187
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

48. 4

 
Total momentum before impact  pC  p L

 
 2 10  20    8  103  5   40  103  2 kg  m / sec
2 2
| p C  p L | 3

pL 8  103  5
Direction of momentum with main road, tan    1 or   45o
pC 2  103  20

According to the law of conservation of momentum,

103  40 2   2 103  8  103  V ; V= 4 2 m/s

188
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

CHAPTER - 05
MOTION OF SYSTEMS OF PARTICLES
AND RIGID BODY

A. CENTRE OF MASS
Every physical system or body has associated with a certain point whose motion represents the motion of the
system or body. This point is called centre of mass.
Centre of Mass of a body or system is a point where the whole mass of the body or system is supposed to be
concentrated, and forces are directly applied to this point for translational motion.
Consider a system of particles of masses m1, m2, ..... mn whose position vectors are given by r1 , r2 , r3 ...........rn
respectively.

Y
m1
m2 n

m r i i
r1 r2 m3 m r  m 2 r2  .......m n rn R cm  i 1
mn R cm  11
m1  m 2  m 3  ......m n ;
n
r3
rn m
i 1
i

O X

n
1 n 
but  mi  M , the mass of the system, then, R CM   m i ri
i 1 M i 1
miri is the moment of the particle with mass mi about O.
In three dimensional form
1 n 1 n 1 n
X CM   i i CM M 
M i 1
m x , Y 
i 1
m y
i i ; Z CM   m i zi
M i 1
If the system has a continuous distribution of mass, consider an elemental mass dm at a distance r from the
origin, the summation is to be replaced by integration.
y
dm

O x

189
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

1 1 1 1
R CM 
M  rdm ; Then X CM   x dm ; YCM 
M M  ydm ; ZCM 
M
z dm

If the centre of mass is at the origin O, then m r  0 ,

i 1
i i

Here the centre of mass is the point about which the sum of the moments of the mass of the system is zero.
Position of centre of mass for a two particle system
Consider a system of two particles of mass m1 & m2 separated by a distance r. The centre of mass lies between
the particles at distances r1 & r2 from m1 & m2 respectively. The distance of the centre of mass is inversely proportional
to the mass of the particles.

1 r1 m 2  m2   m1 
r ;  r1   r r2   r
m r2 m1 ; m1r1 = m2r2;  m1  m2   m1  m 2 
r
m1 CM m2

r
If m1 = m2, r1 = r2 = ; ie, centre of mass lies at a point midway between the masses.
2
r1 > r2 if m1 < m2 and r2 > r1 if m1 > m2.
Example 1 : The position vectors of three particles of mass
 
  
m1 = 1 kg and m2 = 2 kg and m3 = 3 kg are r1  ˆi  4ˆj  kˆ m, r2  ˆi  ˆj  kˆ m , 

 
r3  2iˆ  ˆj  2kˆ m respectively. Find the position of their centre of mass.

 m r  m 2 r2  m 3 r3
rCM  1 1 
    
1 ˆi  4ˆj  kˆ  2 ˆi  ˆj  kˆ  3 2iˆ  ˆj  2kˆ 
m1  m 2  m3 6

 9i  3j  3k  3 1 1  1
rCM    i  j  k    3i  j  k 
6 2 2 2  2
Centre of mass of a uniform rod
Consider a rod of mass M and length L lying along the X axis with its one end at x = 0, and the other end at
x = L.
dx
x
x=0 x=L
M
Mass per unit length  .
L
M
For an elemental length of rod dl, at a distance x from the origin. Mass = dm = dx.
L
The element is at (x, 0, 0)
190
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

 x dm
L
1 M 1 L
L

 The co-ordinates of the centre of mass. x CM  0

    x dx  L  x dx  2
 dm M 0  L  0

 ydm  0  zdm  0 L 
IIIly y CM  ; z CM  ;  rCM   , 0, 0  . It lies at the centre of the rod.
 dm  dm 2 
Remember
The centre of mass may be within or outside the body.

CM
CM CM

For a given shape it depends on the distribution of the mass, for homogeneous bodies it coincides with geometrical
centre.
The sum of the moments of masses of a system about the centre of mass is always zero.
Comparison between centre of mass and centre of gravity
The centre of mass of a body is the point at which its whole mass is assumed to be concentrated. Centre of
gravity of the body is the point at which whole of its weight is assumed to be concentrated.
 
 mi ri  mi g i ri
R CM  R CG 
 mi  mi g i
For a body in uniform gravitational field g is a constant, then, COM & COG coincides.
For a larger body the top and bottom portions have different values of gravity, since the gravity decreases with
altitude.
Here the COG is slightly below the centre of mass.
Centre of mass of a semi circular ring
y

dm

d y = R sin 
YCM
 x
R
Consider a semi circular ring of radius R with the centre of mass lying on the y-axis. The x-coordinate of the
centre of mass is zero.
Consider an elemental portion of the ring of mass dm subtending an angle d at an angle  from x-axis., then
M
dm   Rd .
R
191
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

 
1 1 M R 2R
M
 Rd  R sin  
M 0 R 
y CM  dmy ; y  R sin    sin  d 
0 
Centre of mass of some regular bodies.

Centre of mass of uniform rod of length L lying L 

allong the x-axis rem   , 0, 0 
2 
Centre of mass of a semicircular ring of radius R R

2R
yen 
0 sin  d 

Centre of mass of a semicircular disc of radius R 4R
yem 
3
Centre of mass of a solid hemisphere 3R
yem 
8
Centre of mass of a hollow hemisphere R
yem 
2
Centre of mass of a solid cone of height H H
yem  from base of the cone
4
Centre of mass of a hollow cone of height h h
yem  from base of the cone
3
Centre of mass of a solid sphere at its centre
Centre of mass of a square or rectangle at its centre

Example 2 : A toy has been constructed as in fig. The density of the material of the sphere is 12 times that of the
cone, compute the centre of mass of the toy.

m2 O2 2R

4R
m1
O1
O
2R

1 16 3
Let  is the density of cone then m1    2R   4R    R 
2

3 3
h 4R
the centre of mass of the cone is at a height   R from O.
4 4
192
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

4 3
Similarly mass of sphere m 2  R 12   16R 3  3m1
3
Centre of mass of the sphere = 4R + R = 5R from base of the cone.
m1 y1  m 2 y 2 m1R  3m1  5R
 the centre of mass of the system y CM  m1  m 2

4m1
 4R from Base

Motion of the centre of mass

When the centre of mass of a body is determined, the body can be converted to a particle, whose mass is
concentrated at the centre of mass and the motion of the centre of mass can describe the motion of the body and the
forces acting on the body are directly applied to the centre of mass.
  
Consider a system of particles of masses m 1, m2, ..... mn having position vectors r1 , r2 , r3 .........
  
m1 r1  m 2 r2  m 3 r3  .........
The centre of mass of the system R CM  m  m  m  ..........
1 2 3

dr1 dr dr
m1  m 2 2  m3 3  ............
d dt dt dt
Velocity of centre of mass VCM   R CM  
dt m1  m 2  m3  ........

m1v1  m 2 v 2  m3 v3  dr
   v ; m1  m 2  m3  ..........  M
m1  m 2  m3  dt
 MVCM  m1v1  m 2 v 2  m3 v3  .......... ; since p = MV,,
     
MVCM  p is the linear momentum.  p  p1  p 2  p3  .........
 Linear Momentum of a system of particles is equal to the product of mass of the system with the velocity of
its centre of mass.
 
If VCM  0, p  0 ie, in the frame of reference of the centre of mass, the momentum of a system is zero. Due
to this the centre of mass frame is called zero momentum frame.
dVCM 1    1 
Acceleration of the centre of mass a CM 
dt
  m1a1  m 2 a 2  .......m n a n  =
M M
 mn a n

 
  MdVCM dp 
Consider the equation MVCM  p ; differentiating   Fext
dt dt
 
Fext is the external force applied. Ma CM  Fext
This equation is called the equation of motion of the centre of mass of a system of particles.
It shows that the centre of mass of a system of particles moves as though all the mass of the system is concentrated
at it and all the external forces were applied to it.
Note:
  
1) If Fext  0, a CM  0 , then VCM  a constant

193
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

ie, If no external forces are acting on a system, the velocity of the centre of mass remains a constant. It shows
that the velocity of the centre of mass is unaffected by the internal forces. So if the centre of mass of a system is at
rest it will remain at rest unless acted by an external force.
    
2) If Fext  0, a CM  0, VCM  a constant ; So that p  MVCM  a constant
We can see that equation of motion of centre of mass leads to conservation of linear momentum. When no
external forces are acting on a system of particles, the linear momentum remains conserved which leads to Newtons
third law of motion.
Centre of mass at rest
Examples: 1) Explosion of a Bomb at rest. The explosion is due to internal forces, The centre of mass of the Bomb
remain at the same position, so the fragments will fly in all direction.
2) A Boat floating in a lake has net zero momentum even if the people on it changes the position.
3) Objects initially at rest, if moving under mutual forces (electrostatic, gravitational) have net zero momentum.
4) A compressed spring by two masses on either side of the spring when released, the masses acquire velocities
in opposite direction, so that the net momentum is zero.
Centre of mass moving with uniform velocity
If Fext = 0, Vcm is a constant, so also the net momentum of the system remains constant. ie, the centre of mass
of the system continues to move with initial velocity.
Examples: 1) A bomb moving in a straight line with constant velocity when explodes the fragments move in all
direction. So that the velocity of centre of mass remains constant, and the momentum remains conserved.
2) A man jumping on a cart exert internal forces, therefore the net momentum of the system and hence the motion
of the centre of mass remains conserved.
3) A car moving on a straight road with uniform speed has its centre of mass moving with constant velocity.

B. RIGID BODY DYNAMICS

Introduction
Translation is motion along a straight line but rotation is the motion of wheels, gears, motors, planets,the hands
of a clock, the rotor of jet engines and the blades of helicopters. First figure shows a skater gliding across the ice in
a straight line with constant speed. Her motion is called translation but second figure shows her spinning at a constant
rate about a vertical axis. Here motion is called rotation.

(1) Rigid body : A rigid body is a body that can rotate with all the parts locked together and without any
change in its shape.

194
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

(2) System : A collection of any number of particles interacting with one another and are under consideration
during analysis of a situation are said to form a system.
(3) Internal forces : All the forces exerted by various particles of the system on one another are called
internal forces. These forces alone enable the particles to form a well defined system. Internal forces between two
particles are mutual (equal and opposite).
(4) External forces : To move or stop an object of finite size, we have to apply a force on the object from
outside. This force exerted on a given system is called an external force.
Moment of a force about a point or Torque

Y F
F sin 
 F cos 
F
P
r 

r O X
O A
d N

Fig.(1) Fig.(2)
 
Consider a light rod clamped at one end. A force F is applied at a point A distant r from the fixed point O
perpendicular to the length of the rod. The rod tends to turn about O. This turning effect depends on the magnitude
of the force and the perpendicular distance from O to the line of action of the force. This turning effect is called the
moment of the force or torque about the point O.
The moment of the force about a point is the product of the force and the perpendicular distance from the point
of the line of action of the force.

Moment of force = F  OA
Conventionally, anticlock-wise turning effect is considered to be positive and clockwise to be negative. If the
force acts in a direction inclined to the rod (Fig 2), where the force makes an angle  with the rod.
  
Moment of the force about O  F  ON  F  r sin   r F sin   r  F.

[where  is the angle between the direction of r and F ]


The moment of a force about a point is also called torque  exerted by the force about that point.

   r  F ---------(1)

(1) Torque is an axial vector, ie, its direction is always perpendicular to the plane containing vector r and F in
accordance with right hand screw rule.
(2) Rectangular components of force
 
Fr  Fcos  = radial component of force, F  Fsin  = transverse component of force.

As   r F sin  ; or   r F = (position vector) × (transverse component of force)

195
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Thus the magnitude of torque is given by the product of transverse component of force and its perpendicular
distance from the axis of rotation ie, Torque is due to transverse component of force only.

(3) As   r F sin  ; or   F  r sin    Fd [As d  r sin  from the figure]

ie, Torque = Force × Perpendicular distance of line of action of force from the axis of rotation.
Torque is also called as moment of force and d is called moment of lever arm.
  
(4) Maximum and minimum torque : As   r  F or   rFsin 
 
 max imum  rF When | sin  | max  1 ie,   90o F is perpendicular to r
 
minimum  0 When | sin  | min  0 ie,   0o or 180o F is collinear to r
(5) For a given force and angle, magnitude of torque depends on r. The more is value of r, the more will be the
torque and easier to rotate the body.
Example: (i) Handles are provided near the free edge of the planck of the door.
(ii) The handle of screw-driver is taken thick.
(iii) The handle of flourmill is placed near the circumference.
(iv) The handle of the hand-pump is kept long.
(v) The arm of wrench used for opening the tap, is kept long.
(6) Unit: newton-metre (SI) and dyne-cm (C.G.S.)
(7) Dimension : [ML2T–2]
(8) If a body is acted upon by a number of forces, the total torque is the vector sum of the individual torques.
   
  1  2  3  ---------(2)

Work done by a torque

If a force F acts on a body at a perpendicular distance r  r  from the axis of rotation, the work done by the
force in rotating the body through an angle  is given by

W  F r      = Torque × angular displacement

dW d
Power =    , where  is the angular velocity..
dt dt
Angular Impulse

dp
Impulse I   Fdt   dt ; dp = change in momentum.
dt

dL
In rotational motion angular impulse J is, J   dt   dt  dL = change in angular momentum. -----(3)
dt
196
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

Parallel forces
If the lines of action of a set of forces are parallel, they are called parallel forces. If the parallel forces are in
the same plane, they are called coplanar parallel forces. If all the forces are in the same direction, they are called
like parallel forces. If they are in opposite directions, they are called unlike parallel forces.
A condition for equilibrium of a set of coplanar parallel forces

P Q

C A D B E O

R S W

Two conditions are to be satisfied.

1. Translational equilibrium
2. Rotational equilibrium
1. Translational equilibrium
For translational equilibrium, the algebraic sum of the forces acting on the body =0
i.e.; P+Q-R-S-W = 0 ------(4), P + Q = R + S + W
The total force acting along a direction= the total force acting in the opposite direction. If this condition is
satisfied, the body is either at rest or moving with uniform linear velocity.
2. Rotational equilibrium
For rotational equilibrium, the algebraic sum of the moments of forces about any point is equal to zero . About O,
P  OA + Q  OB – R  OC – S  OD – W  OE = 0 -----(5)
P  OA + Q  OB = R  OC + S  OD + W  OE.
Total anticlock wise moments = Total clock wise moments. About D,
Q  DB + R  DC – P  DA – W  DE = 0; Q  DB + R  DC = P  DA + W  DE.

If this condition is satisfied, the body is either not rotating or rotating with constant angular velocity.

A body is said to be in rotational equilibrium if resultant torque acting on it is zero ie,   0 .

In case of beam balance or see-saw the system will be in rotational equilibrium if,
 
1  2  0 or F1l1  F2l2  0  F1l1  F2l2 -------- (6)

   
However if, 1  2 , L.H.S. will move downwards and if 1  2 . R.H.S. will move downward and the
system will not be in rotational equilibrium.

197
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Rotatory Motion Translatory Motion

   
I  F  ma
   
W    . d W   F . ds
   
P. PF.v
 
 dL  dP
 F
dt dt
Couple
F
A B
F O

Two equal unlike parallel forces acting at different points in a body constitute a couple.
Consider a body in which two equal forces (F) acting at points A and B in opposite directions. Let O be a point
in between A and B.
Moment of the couple about O= OB  F+OA  F = F(OA+OB) = F  AB

Moment of the couple is called torque 

Therefore   F  AB -----(7)
Thus torque is the product of one of the forces and the perpendicular distance.
Generally both couple and torque carry equal meaning. The basic difference between torque and couple is that in
case of couple both the forces are externally applied while in case of torque one force is externally applied and the
other is reactionary.
1 2
Work done by torque in twisting the wire W  C ----- (8)
2
Where   C ; C is known as twisting coeffcient or couple per unit twist.
Angular Displacement
It is the angle described by the position vector r about the axis of rotation.
198
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

Linear displacement  s 
Angular displacement     Radius  r 

(1) Unit : radian

(2) Dimension : [M0 L0 T0]

(3) In vector form, linear displacement s   r

ie, angular displacement is a vector quantity whose direction is given by right hand rule. It is an axial vector.
For anti-clockwise sense of rotation, direction of  is perpendicular to the plane, outward and along the axis of
rotation and vice-versa.
Angular Velocity
The angular displacement per unit time is defined as angular velocity.


If a particle moves from P to Q in time t,   where  is the angular displacement.
t

 d
(1) Instantaneous angular velocity   lim 
t 0 t dt
total angular displacement 2  1
(2) Average angular velocity av  total time

t 2  t1 -----(9)
(3) Unit: Radian/sec

(4) Dimension : [M0L0T–1] which is same as that of frequency.

(5)
 
Vector form v   r [where v = linear velocity,, r = radius vector]

 is an axial vector, whose direction is normal to the rotational plane and its direction is given by right hand rule.

2
(6)   2 [where T = time period,  = frequency]
T
(7) The magnitude of angular velocity is called the angular speed which is also represented by  .

199
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Angular Acceleration
The rate of change of angular velocity is defined as angular acceleration.

If a particle has angular velocity 1 at time t1 and angular velocity 2 at time t2 then,
 
 2  1
Angular acceleration  
t 2  t1 -----(10)
 
  d d 2 
(1) Instantaneous angular acceleration   lim
t  0 t
 
dt dt 2
(2) Unit : rad/sec2
(3) Dimension : [M0L0T–2]

(4) If   0 , circular or rotational motion is said to be uniform.

2  1
(5) Average angular acceleration  av  t  t -----(11)
2 1

(6)
  
Relation between angular acceleration and linear aceleration a    r .-----(12)

(7) It is an axial vector whose direction is along the change in direction of angular velocity ie, normal to the
rotational plane, outward or inward along the axis of rotation (depends upon the sense of rotation).
Equations of Linear Motion and Rotational Motion
1) If linear acceleration is 0, u = constant and s = u t If angular acceleration is 0,

 = constant and   t

2) If linear acceleration a = constant, If angular acceleration  = constant then

u  v t  1  2  t
(i) s  (i)  
2 2

vu 2  1
(ii) a  (ii)  
t t

(iii) v = u + at (iii) 2  1  t

1 2 1 2
(iv) s  ut  at (iv)   1t  t
2 2

(v) v2 = u2 + 2as (v) 22  12  2

a 
(vi) s nth  u   2n  1 (vi) nth  1   2n  1
2 2
200
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

3) If linear acceleration is not constant, the above If angular acceleration is not constant, the
equation will not be applicable. In this case above equation will not be applicable. In thise case

dx d
(i) v  (i)  
dt dt

dv d 2 x d d 2 
(ii) a   (ii)   
dt dt 2 dt dt 2

(iii) vdv = a ds (iii) d  d

Concept of moment of inertia

According to Newton’s Ist law in rotational motion, there is an inability of a body to change by itself its state
of rest or of uniform rotational motion. This inability is called rotational inertia or moment of inertia.
Linear inertia is the measure of the mass and it is a single value. But moment of inertia is depending on masses
of particles constituting the body and their distances from the axis of rotation. It can have any number of
orientations.
Moment of Inertia
Moment of inertia plays the same role in rotational motion as mass plays in linear motion. It is the property of
a body due to which it opposes any change in its state of rest or of uniform motion.
(1) Moment of inertia of a particle I = mr2; where r is the perpendicular distance of the particle from the rotational
axis.

(2) Moment of inertia of a body made up of a number of particles, I  m1r12  m 2 r22  m 3 r32  ......

(3) Moment of inertia of a continuous distribution of mass, treating the element of mass dm at position r as
particle. dI  dm r 2 ie, I   r 2 dm

(4) Dimension : [ML2T0]

(5) S.I. unit : kgm2.
(6) Moment of inertia depends on mass, distribution of mass and on the position of axis of rotation.
(7) Moment of inertia does not depend on angular velocity, angular acceleration, torque, angular momentum and
rotational kinetic energy.
(8) It is not a vector as direction is not to be specified and also not a scalar as it has different values in different
directions. Actually it is a tensor quantity.
201
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

(9) In case of a hollow and solid body of same mass, radius and shape for a given axis, moment of inertia of
hollow body is greater than that for the solid body because it depends upon the mass distribution.
Radius of Gyration
Radius of gyration of a body about a given axis is the perpendicular distance of a point from the axis, where
if whole mass of the body were concentrated, the body shall have the same moment of inertia as it has with the actual
distribution of mass.
When square of radius of gyration is multiplied with the mass of the body, it gives the moment of inertia of the
body about the given axis.

I
I  Mk 2 or k  -----(13); Here k is called radius of gyration.
M

From the formula of discrete distribution,

I  mr12  mr22  mr32  ...........  mrn2

If m1 = m2 = m3 = ......... m then I  m  r12  r22  r32  ............rn2  -----(14)

From the definition of Radius of gyration, I  Mk 2 -----(15)

By equating (14) and (15) Mk 2  m  r12  r22  ...........  rn2 

nmk 2  m  r12  r22  r32  .............  rn2  (As M = nm)

r12  r22  r32  .........  rn2

 k -----(16)
n
Hence radius of gyration of a body about a given axis is equal to root mean square distance of the constituent
particles of the body from the given axis.
(1) Radius of gyration (k) depends on shape and size of the body, position and configuration of the axis of
rotation, distribution of mass of the body w.r.t. the axis of rotation.
(2) Radius of gyration (k) does not depend on the mass of body.
(3) Dimension [M0L1T0]
(4) S.I. unit : Metre.

202
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

Significance of radius of gyration: Through in this concept a real body (particularly irregular) is replaced by a
point mass for dealing its rotational motion.
Example: In case of a disc rotating about an axis through its centre of mass and perpendicular to its plane,

k
I

1/ 2  MR 2 
R
M M 2

 
So instead of disc we can assume a point mass M at a distance R / 2 from the axis of rotation for dealing
the rotational motion of the disc.
Theorem of Parallel Axes
Moment of inertia of a body about a given axis I is equal to the sum of moment of inertia of the body about an
axis parallel to given axis and passing through centre of mass of the body, I g and Ma2 where M is the mass of the
body and a is the perpendicular distance between the two axes.

I  Ig  Ma 2 -----(17)

Example : Moment of inertia of a disc about an axis through its centre and perpendicular to the plane is
1
MR 2 , so moment of inertia about an axis through its tangent and perpendicular to the plane will be
2

1 3
I  Ig  Ma 2  MR 2  MR 2  M R 2
2 2

Theorem of perpendicular axes

According to this theorem the sum of the moment of inertia of a plane lamina about two mutually perpendicular
axes lying in its plane is equal to its moment of inertia about an axis perpendicular to the plane of lamina and passing
through the point of intersection of first two axes.
Iz = Ix + Iy --------- (18)

203
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Angular momentum
The turning momentum of a particle about the axis of rotation is called the angular momentum of the particle.
or
The moment of linear momentum of a body with respect to any axis of rotation is known as angular momentum.

If P is the linear momentum of a particle and r its position vector from the point of rotation then angular momentum.

  
L  rP

L  r P sin  nˆ
Angular momentum is an axial vector ie, always directed perpendicular to the plane of rotation and along the
axis of rotation.
(1) S.I. Unit : kgm 2s 1 or J sec
(2) Dimension: [ML2T–1] and it is similar to Planck’s constant (h).
 
(3) In cartesian co-ordinates if r  xiˆ  yjˆ  zkˆ and P  Px ˆi  Py ˆj  Pz kˆ

ˆi ˆj kˆ
  
Then L  r  P  x y z   yPz  zPy  ˆi   xPz  zPx  ˆj   xPy  yPx  kˆ -----(19)
Px Py Pz

(4) As it is clear from the figure, radial component of momentum Pr  P cos 

Transverse component of momentum P  P sin 
So magnitude of angular momentum L  rP sin 
L  rP -----(20)
 Angular momentum = Position vector × Transverse component of angular momentum.
ie, the radial component of linear momentum has no role to play in angular momentum.

204
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

(5) Magnitude of angular momentum L  P  r sin    Pd [As d  r sin ]

 Angular momentum = (Linear momentum) × (Perpendicular distance of line of action of force from the axis
of rotation)
    
(6) In case of circular motion, L  r  P  m  r  v   mvr sin 
 
 L  mvr  mr 2  [As r  v and v  r or L  I  As mr 2  I 
 
In vector form L  I
  
  dL d    d   
(7) From L  I  I  I    As dt   and   I 
dt dt
ie, the rate of change of angular momentum is equal to the net torque acting on the particle. [Rotational
analogue of Newton’s second law]
(8) If a large torque acts on a particle for a small time then ‘angular impulse’ of torque is given by
   2
t
  
J    dt  av  dt or Angular impulse J  av t  L -----(21)
t1

 Angular impulse = Change in angular momentum.

(9) The angular momentum of a system of particles is equal to the vector sum of angular momentum of each
    
particle ie, L  L1  L 2  L3  ...........  L n .
Law of Conservation of Angular Momentum

 dL
Newton’s second law for rotational motion   .
dt

dL
So if the net external torque on a particle (or system) is zero then 0
dt
   
ie, L  L1  L 2  L3  ....... = constant.-----(22)
Angular momentum of a system (may be particle or body) remains constant if resultant torque acting on it
zero.
 1
 I
As L  I so if   0 then I = constant

Since angular momentum I remains constant so when I decreases, angular velocity  increases and vice-
versa.
Examples of law of conservation of angular momentum:
(1) The angular velocity of revolution of a planet around the sun in an elliptical orbit increases when the planet
comes closer to the sun and vice-versa because when planet comes closer to the sun, it’s moment of inertia I
decreases therefore  increases.
(2) A circus acrobat performs feats involving spin by bringing his arms and legs closer to his body or vice-versa.
On bringing the arms and legs closer to the body, his moment of inertia I decreases. Hence  increases.
205
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Motion of a point mass tied to a string wound over a cylinder

Suppose a solid cylinder of mass M and radius ‘R’ is mounted on a horizontal axis XX1 and is capable of
rotation about it. Let a point mass m be attached to the free end of a light string wound over the cylinder. When the
point mass is left, it moves downwards with an acceleration ‘a’. The torque developed rotates the cylinder and the
string unwinds itself. If T is the tension the string acting upwards, then the equation of motion of the point mass can
be written as

x R
x'

T T
f
mg mg
f = mg – T where f = ma, the net downward force.  ma  mg  T -----(23)
If I is the M.I. of the cylinder and  the angular acceleration of the cylinder, then the torque produced in the
cylinder due to tension in the string,

  I  T  R
a a Ia
We know that a  R   I  TR T  -----(24)
R R R2
Ia Ia
Substituting (24) in (23), ma  mg  ma   mg
R2 R2
 I  mg g g
a  m  2   mg a   -----(25); This shows that a < g.
 R  I I k2
m 2 1 1 2
R mR 2 R
TR 2
From (25), a  -----(26)
I
I mg Im g I mg
Substituting (26) in (24), T  
R 2
I  mR 2  I  mR 2 
m  2  I  1
 R 
 I 
mg mg
T 2
 -----(27). This shows that T is less than mg
mR R2
1 1 2
I k

2gh 2gh
Velocity of point mass v   -----(28)
I k2
1 1 2
mR 2 R

2mgh m 2gh 2gh

Angular velocity of rigid body     -----(29)
I  mR 2
m k R
2 2
k  R2
2

206
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

QUESTIONS

LEVEL I
1. A man of mass M stands at one end of a plank of length L which is at rest on a frictionless horizontal surface.
M
The man walks to the other end of the plank. If mass of the plank is , the distance that the man moves
3
relative to ground is
L 3L L
1) L 2) 3) 4)
4 4 3
2. Four particles of mass 1 kg, 2 kg, 3 kg and 4 kg are placed at the corners A, B, C and D respectively of a
square ABCD of edge, AB along X-axis and edge AD is taken along Y-axis, the coordinates of centre of mass
in SI unit is
1) (1, 1) m 2) (5, 7) m 3) (0.5, 0.7) m 4) None of these

3. The density of a non-uniform rod of length 1 m is given by   x   a 1  bx 2  where a and b are constants and
0  x  1 . The centre of mass of the rod will be at

32  b 4  2  b 3 2  b 4 3  b 
1) 4 3  b 2) 3 3  b 3) 4 2  b 4) 3 2  b
       
4. In the given figure, two bodies of mass m1 and m2 are connected by massless spring of force constant k and are
placed on a smooth surface (shown in figure), then

1) the acceleration of centre of mass must be zero at every instant

2) the acceleration of centre of mass may not be zero at every instant
3) the system always remains in rest
4) none of the above
5. An isolated particle of mass m is moving in a horizontal plane (x-y), along the x-axis, at a certain height above
m 3m
the ground. It suddenly explodes into two fragments of masses and . An instant later, the smaller
4 4
fragment is at y = +15 m. The larger fragment at this instant is at
1) y = –5 m 2) y = + 20 m 3) y = + 5 m 4) y = –20 m
5
6. Distance between earth and moon is 3.8 × 10 km and the mass of earth is 81 times the mass of the moon.
(Radius of earth = 6.37 × 103 km). Then
1) C.M. of earth moon system lies between the outer surfaces of moon and earth
2) C.M. of earth moon system lies within the earth
3) C.M. of earth moon system lies within moon
4) C.M. of earth moon system lies outside the earth
207
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

7. A thin disc of mass m and radius r is moving up an inclined plane. Before ascending this plane disc was rolling
horizontally without slipping with speed  . The maximum height to which it can rise is

1 2 22 32 2
1) 2) 3) 4)
3 2g 3g 4g g

8. Two particles of mass m1 and m2 (m1 > m2) attract each other with a force inversely proportional to the square
of the distance between them. If the particles are intially held at rest and then released, the centre of mass will
1) move towards m1 2) move towards m2 3) remains at rest 4) None of these
9. A system consists of three particles, each of mass m and located at (1, 1), (2, 2) and (3, 3). The co-ordinates
of the centre of mass are
1) (1, 1) 2) (2, 2) 3) (3, 3) 4) (6, 6)
10. Two particles A and B initially at rest, move towards each other, under mutual force of attraction. At an instance
when the speed of A is v and speed of B is 2v, the speed of centre of mass (CM) is
1) zero 2) v 3) 2.5 v 4) 4 v
11. Two point objects of mass 1.5 g and 2.5 g respectively are at a distance of 16 cm apart, the centre of gravity
is at a distance x from the object of mass 1.5 g, where x is
1) 10 cm 2) 6 cm 3) 13 cm 4) 3 cm
12. A body A of mass M while falling vertically downwards under gravity breaks into two parts; a body B of mass
1 2
M and a body C of mass M . The centre of mass of bodies B and C taken together shifts compared to
3 3
that of body A towards
1) depends on height of breaking 2) does not shift
3) body C 4) body B
13. Three identical spheres, each of mass 1 kg are kept as shown in figure below, touching each other, with their
centres on a straight line. If their centres are marked P, Q, R respectively, the distance of centre of mass of the
system from P is
Y

X
P Q R

PQ  PR  QR PQ  PR PQ  QR PR  QR
1) 2) 3) 4)
3 3 3 3
208
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

14. Two blocks of same mass m are attached to each other with an unstretched spring which is at rest on a smooth
horizontal surface. A constant force F is applied on one block to pull it away from the other. Displacement of
centre of mass at time t is
m m

1 Ft 2 Ft 2 1 Ft 2 1 Ft 2
1) 2) 3) 4)
2 m m 4 m 3 2m
15. Considering a system having two masses m1 and m2 in which first mass is pushed towards centre of mass by a
distance a, the distance required to be moved for second mass to keep centre of mass at same position is

m1 m2

m1 m1m 2 m2  m 2 m1 
1) m a 2) 3) m a 4)  a
2 a 1  m1  m 2 
16. Three masses 2 kg, 3 kg and 4 kg are lying on the vertices of an equilateral triangle of side a. The x-coordinate
of the centre of mass is.......

7 5 7 2 5
1) b 2) a 3) b 4) a
12 9 9 9

   
17. A 3 kg body has a velocity of ˆi  6ˆj ms–1 and a 2 kg body has a velocity of 2iˆ  ˆj ms–1 then velocity of
centre of mass is

 
1) 3.2iˆ  1.4ˆj ms
1

2) 2.3iˆ  4.1jˆ ms
1
  
3) 1.4iˆ  3.2ˆj ms
1

4) 4.1iˆ  2.3jˆ ms 
1

18. Two blocks of masses 10 kg and 4 kg are connected by a spring of negligible mass and placed on a frictionless
horizontal surface. An impulse gives a velocity of 14 m/s to the heavier block in the direction of the lighter block.
The velocity of the centre of mass is
1) 30 m/s 2) 20 m/s 3) 10 m/s 4) 5 m/s
19. The centre of mass of two particles with masses 4 kg and 2 kg located at (1, 0, 1) and (2, 2, 0) respectively has
coordinates
1 2 2 4 1 1 2 1 1 4 2 2
1)  , ,  2)  , ,  3)  , ,  4)  , , 
3 3 3  3 3 3  3 3 3 3 3 3

209
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

20. A ladder of length L is slipping with its ends against a vertical wall and a horizontal floor. At a certain moment,
the speed of the end in contact with the horizontal floor is v and the ladder makes an angle   30o with
horizontal. Then, the speed of the ladder’s centre of mass must be
3 v
1) v 2) 3) v 4) 2 v
2 2
21. Four cubes of side a each of mass 40 g, 20 g, 10 g and 20 g are arranged in XY plane as shown in the figure.

The coordinates of COM of the combination with respect to point O is

19a 17a 17a 11a 17a 13a 13a 17a
1) , 2) , 3) , 4) ,
18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
22. The figure shows a metallic plate of uniform thickness and density. The value of l in terms of L so that the centre
of mass of the system lies at the interface of the triangular and rectangular portion is

L L L 2
1) l  2) l  3) l  4) l  L
3 2 3 3
23. A block of mass m slides with velocity v along a frictionless level surface towards a block of mass 4m initially
at rest. The velocity of centre of mass is

v v 5v 4
1) 2) 3) 4)   v
5 4 2 5
24. Look at the drawing given in the figure, which has been drawn with ink of uniform line-thickness. The mass of
ink used to draw each of the inner circles, and each of the two line segments is m. The mass of the ink used to
draw the outer circle is 6 m. The coordinates of the centres of the different parts are : out circle (0, 0), left inner
circle (–a, a), right inner circle (a, a), vertical line (0, 0) and horizontal line (0, –a). The y-coordinate of the
centre of mass of the ink in this drawing is

a a a a
1) 2) 3) 4)
10 8 12 3

210
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

25. A circular plate of uniform thickness has a diameter of 56 cm. A circular portion of diameter 42 cm is removed
from one edge of the plate as shown in figure. Find the position of the centre of mass of the remaining portion.

1) 9 cm 2) 9 cm rightward 3) 9 cm leftwards 4) zero

26. The rotational kinetic energy and moment of inertia of a body are represented by E and I respectively. The
angular momentum (L or J) of the body is
2E 2I
3) L  4) L 
2 2
1) L2 = 2EI 2) L2 = EI
I E
27. The ratio of translational energy and total energy of a rolling sphere is given by
1) 5 : 7 2) 3 : 5 3) 1 : 3 4) 2 : 5
28. The moment of inertia of a solid sphere of density  and radius R about its diameter is

176R 3 176R 5 105R 5 105R 3

1) 2) 3) 4)
105 105 176 176
29. A square lamina of side l has mass M. Its moment of inertial about one of its diagonal is

Ml 2 Ml 2 Ml 2 Ml 2
1) 2) 3) 4)
6 8 12 16
30. A body of mass M slides down a smooth inclined plane and acquires a velocity v when it reaches the bottom of
the plane. The ring of same mass rolls down the same inclined plane. It reaches the bottom with velocity.
v
1) 2) 2.v 3) v 4) 2v
2
31. Two solid spheres, each of mass M and radius R/2, are connected by a massless rod of length 2R, as shown
in the figure. The moment of inertia of the system about YY' will be

21 5 2 4
1) MR 2 2) MR 2 3) MR 2 4) MR 2
5 21 5 5

211
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

32. Four spheres, each of mass M and radius r, are situated at the four corners of a square of side R, as shown in
figure. The moment of inertia of the system about an axis perpendicular to the plane of square and passing
through its centre will be
A B

R/ 2
R O

D R C
OA = R/ 2

5M  4r 2  5R 2  2M  4r 2  5R 2  5M  4R 2  5r 2  2M  4R 2  5r 2 
1) 2) 3) 4)
2 5 2 5
33. A uniform solid cylinder of mass M and radius R is free to rotate on frictionless horizontal axle, as shown in
figure. Two masses, m each, hung from two cords wrapped around the cylinder. If the system is released from
rest, the tension in each cord will be

Mmg Mmg 2Mmg 2Mmg

1)  4m  M  2)  2m  M  3)  2m  M  4)  4m  M 

34. A long thread is wrapped round a reel. If one end of thread is held in hand and the reel is allowed to fall under
gravity; then the acceleration of reel will be
2g 3g
1) g 2) 3) 4) zero
3 2
35. A ring of radius (4a) is rigidly fixed in vertical position on a table. A small disc of mass (m) and radius (a) is
released as shown in the figure. When the disc rolls down, without slipping, to the lowest point of the ring, then
its speed will be

1) ga 2) 2ga 3) 3ga 4) 4ga

36. A rigid spherical body is spinning around an axis without any external torque. Due to change in temeprature,
the volume increases by 1%. Its angular speed will
1) Increase approximately by 1% 2) Decrease approximately by 1%
3) Decrease approximately by 0.67% 4) Decrease approximately by 0.33%

212
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

37. Three rods each of length L and mass M are placed along X, Y and Z axes in such a way that one end of each
rod is at the origin. The moment of inertia of the system about Z axis is
ML2 2ML2 3ML2
1) 2) 3) 4) 3ML2
3 3 2
38. A particle of mass m is fixed to one end of a light spring of force constant k and unstretched length l. The
system is rotated about the other end of the spring with an angular velocity  , in gravity-free space. The
increase in length of spring will be

m2l m2l m2l m2l

1) 2) 3) 4)
k  m2 k  m2 k  m k  m
39. A particle of mass m is projected with a velocity v making an angle of 45 with the horizontal. The magnitude of
o

angular momentum of the projectile about the axis of projection, when the particle is at the maximum height h, is
mv3 2mv3 mv 2
1) Zero 2) 3) 4)
4 2g 3g 4 2g
40. A body of mass m and radius R is rolling horizontally, without slipping, with speed v. It then rolls up a hill to a
3v 2
maximum height h  . What is the moment of inertia of body?
4g
1 2 2
1) mR 2 2) mR2 3) mR
2
4) mR
2

2 3 5
41. A thin circular ring of mass M and radius R is rotating about its axis with a constant angular speed  . Two
blocks, each of mass m, are attached gently to opposite ends of a diameter of the ring. The angular speed of
the ring will be
2M  M  2m   M  M  2m  
1)  M  2m  2) 3)  M  2m  4)
2M M
42. Two discs have same mass and thickness. Their materials have densities d1 and d2. The ratio of their moments
of inertia about central axis will be
1) d1 : d2 2) d1d2 : 1 3) 1 : d1d2 4) d2 : d1
43. A conical pendulum consists of a simple pendulum moving in a horizontal circle as shown. C is the pivot, O
the centre of the circle in which the pendulum bob moves and  the constant angular velocity of the bob. If

L is the angular momentum about point C, then

 
1) L is constant  2) only direction of L is constant
3) only magnitude of L is constant 4) none of the above
213
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

44. A thin wire of length L and uniform linear mass density  is bent into a circular loop with centre at O as shown.
The moment of inertia of the loop about the axis XX' is
X o
X'
90

L3 L3 5L3 3L3

1) 2) 3) 4)
8 2 162 162 82
45. Two discs of same thickness but of different radii are made of two different materials such that their masses
are same. The densities of the materials are in the ratio 1 : 3. The moments of inertia of these discs about the
respective axes passing through their centres and perpendicular to their plains will be in the ratio
1) 1 : 3 2) 3 : 1 3) 1 : 9 4) 9 : 1
46. The wheel of a car is rotating at the rate of 1200 revolutions per minute. On pressing the accelerator for 10
seconds, it starts rotating at 4500 revolutions/minute. The angular acceleration of the wheel is
radian degree radian degree
1) 30 2) 1880 3) 40 4) 1980
sec 2 sec2 sec 2
sec2
47. The moment of inertia of a door of mass m, length 2l and width l about its longer side is

11 ml 2 5 ml 2 ml 2
1) 2) 3) 4) None of these
24 24 3
48. From a uniform wire, two circular loops are made (i) P of radius r and (ii) Q of radius nr. If the moment of
inertia of Q about an axis passing through its centre and perpendicular to its plane is 8 times that of P about a
similar axis, the value of n is (Diameter of wire is very much smaller than r or nr)
1) 8 2) 6 3) 4 4) 2
LEVEL II
1. Three identical spheres, each of mass m are placed at the corners of a right angled triangle with mutually
perpendicular sides equal to 2m. Taking their point of intersection as the origin, the position vector of centre of
mass is
A

2m

B
O 2m

1)
3
 
1 ˆ ˆ
i j 2)
3
 
2 ˆ ˆ
ij 3)
3
 
2 ˆ ˆ
i j 4)
3
 
1 ˆ ˆ
i j

2. A non-uniform thin rod of length L is placed along X-axis such as one of its ends is at the origin. The linear mass
density of rod is l = 0x. The distance of centre of mass of rod from the origin is

L 2L L L
1) 2) 3) 4)
2 3 4 5
214
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

3. Two balls each of mass ‘m’ are placed at the vertices A and B of an equilaterial triangle of side 1 m. A third ball
of mass 2 m is kept at vertex C. Taking vertex A as the origin, find the coordinates of the centre-of-mass of the
given system.
C 2m
1m 1m

m m
A 1m B

1 1  1  1 3   3 3 
1)  m, m  2)  m, 2m  3)  2 m, 4 m  4)  4 m, 4 m 
2 2  2     
4. The two bodies of mass m1 and m2 (m1 > m2) respectively are tied to the ends of a massless string, which
passes over a light and frictionless pulley. The masses are initially at rest and then released. Then acceleration of
the centre of mass of the system is

2 2
 m1  m 2   m 2  m1  m1g
1)   g 2)   g 3) m  m 4) zero
 m1  m 2   m1  m 2  1 2

5. A bullet of mass 50 g is fired from a gun of mass 2 kg. If the total kinetic energy produced is 2050 J, the kinetic
energy of the bullet and the gun respectively are
1) 200 J, 5 J 2) 2000 J, 50 J 3) 5 J, 200 J 4) 50 J, 2000 J
6. Two spherical bodies of masses M and 5 M and radius R and 2R respectively in free space with initial separation
between their centres equal to 12 R. If they attract each other due to gravitational force only, then the distance
covered by the smaller body just before collision is
1) 2.5 r 2) 4.5 R 3) 7.5 R 4) 1.5 R
7. In the shown figure the magnitude of acceleration of centre of mass of the system is (g = 10 ms–2)

1) 4 ms–2 2) 10 ms–2 3) 2 2 ms 2 4) 5 ms 2
215
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

8. The acceleration of the centre of mass of a uniform solid disc rolling down an inclined plane of angle  is

2 1 1
1) g sin  2) g sin  3) g sin  4) sin 
3 2 3

9. Masses of 2 kg each are placed at the corners B and A of a rectangular plate ABCD as shown in the figure. A
mass of 8 kg has to be placed on the plate so that the centre of mass of the system should be at the centre O.
Then the mass should be placed at:

1) 1 m from O on OE 2) 2m from O on OF 3) 2 m from O on OG 4) 2 m from O on OH

10. A 500 kg boat is 9 m long and is floating without motion on still water. A man of mass 100 kg is at one end and
if he runs to the other end of the boat and stops, the displacement of the boat is:
1) 1.5 m in the direction of displacement of the man
2) 0.75 mi n the direction of displacement of the man
3) 1.5 m in the direction opposite to the displacement of the man
4) 0.75 m in the direction opposite to the displacement of the man
11. Two particles P and Q initially at rest are 1 m apart. P has a mass of 0.1 kg and Q has a mass of 0.3 kg. P and
Q attract each other with a constant force of 10–2 N. No external forces act on the system. At what distance
from P’s original position do the particles collide and the time taken by the particle for collision is
1) 0.25 m, 3 sec 2) 0.75 m, 15 sec 3) 0.75 m, 3 sec 4) 0.25 m, 15 sec
12. A cracker is thrown into air with a velocity of 10 m/s at an angle of 45o with the vertical. When it is at a height
of (1/2)m from the ground, it explodes into a number of pieces which follow different parabolic paths. What is
the velocity of centre of mass, when it is at a height of 1 m from the ground? (g = 10 ms–2)
1) 4 5 ms 1 2) 2 5 ms 1 3) 5 4 ms 1 4) 10ms 1
13. In a system of particles 8 kg mass is subjected to a force of 16 N along +ve y-axis and another 8 kg mass is
subjected to a force of 8 N along +ve x-axis. The magnitude of acceleration of the centre of mass and the angle
made by it with x-axis are given respectively by:

1) 5 / 2ms 2 ,   45o 2) 3 5 ms 2 ,   tan 1  2 / 3

3) 5 / 2 ms 2 ,   tan 1  2  4) 1 ms 2 ,   tan 1 3

14. If a force 10iˆ  15jˆ  25kˆ acts on a system and gives an acceleration 2iˆ  3jˆ  5kˆ to the centre of mass of the
system, the mass of the system is

1) 5 units 2) 38 units 3) 5 38 units 4) given data is not correct

216
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

15. From a circular disc of radius R a square is cut out with a radius as its diagonal. The distance of the centre of
mass of the remainder from the centre of the disc is

R R R R
1) 2) 3) 2  2  1 4)
2  2
16. Two blocks of masses 2 kg and 1 kg respectively are tied to the ends of a string which passes over a light
frictionless pulley. The masses are held at rest at the same horizontal level and then released. The distance
traversed by centre of mass in 2 s is (g = 10 m/s2)

1) 1.42 m 2) 2.22 m 3) 3.12 m 4) 3.33 m

17. The uniform solid sphere shown in figure has a spherical hole in it. The position of its COM is

pq p2 q p3q pq

1) X COM   2) X COM   3) X COM   4) X COM 
2 R 2  p2 R 3  p3 2
18. The block of mass 1 kg is at x = 10 m and moving along negative x-axis with velocity 6 ms–1. Another block
of mass 2 kg is at x = 12 m and moving along +ve x-axis with velocity 4 ms–1 at the same instant. The position
of their centre of mass after 2s is
1) 13 m 2) 12.67 m 3) 11.12 m 4) 14.77 m
19. A circular disc of radius R and thickness R/6 has moment of inertia I about an axis passing through its centre
and perpendicular to its plane. It is melted and recasted into a solid sphere. The moment of inertia of the
sphere about its diameter as axis of roation is

2I I I
1) I 2) 3) 4)
5 5 10

20
20. A particle moves along a circle of radius m with constant tangential accelraration. If the velocity of the

particle is 80 m/s at the end of second revolution after motion has begun, the tangential acceleration is

1) 640  ms 2 2) 160  ms 2 3) 400  ms 2 4) 40 ms 2

217
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

21. A circular disc X of radius R is made from an iron plate of thickness t and another disc Y of radius 4 R is made
t
from an iron plate of thickness . Then the relation between the moments of inertia IX and IY is.
4
1) IY = 64 IX 2) IY = 32 IX 3) IY = 16IX 4) IY = IX
22. Two bodies have their moments of inertia I and 2I respectively about their axis of rotation. If their kinetic
energies of rotation are equal, their angular momenta will be in the ratio

1) 2 : 1 2) 1 : 2 3) 2 :1 4) 1: 2

R
23. A thin disc of mass 9 M and radius R from which a disc of radius is cut. Moment of inertia of the disc about
3
an axis passing through O and perpendicular to plane of disc is

40 37
1) MR 2 2) MR 2 3) 9 MR2 4) 4 MR2
9 9
24. If angular momentum of a body is increased by 200% its kinetic energy will increase by
1) 400% 2) 800% 3) 200% 4) 100%
25. The radius of gyration of a solid sphere of radius r about a certain axis is r. The distance of this axis from the
centre of the sphere is
1) r 2) 0.5 r 3) 0.6 r 4) 0.4 r
26. A solid sphere of mass M, radius R and having moment of inertia about an axis passing through the centre of
mass as I, is recast into a disc of thickness t, whose moment of inertia about an axis passing through its edge
and perpendicular to its plane remains I. Then, radius of the disc will be

2R 2 4R R
1) 2) R 3) 4)
15 15 15 4
27. A disc of mass M and radius R is rolling with angular speed  on a horizontal plane as shown in figure. The
magnitude of angular momentum of the disc about the origin O is

1) 1/ 2  MR 2 2) MR 2  3)  3 / 2  MR 2  4) 2MR 2 

218
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

28. Two point masses A of mass M and B of mass 4 M are fixed at the ends of a rod of length l and of negligible
mass. The rod is set rotating about an axis perpendicular to its length with a uniform angular speed. The work
required for rotating the rod will be minimum, then the distance of axis of rotation from the mass A is at
2 8 4 l
1) l 2) l 3) l 4)
5 5 5 5

29. Linear acceleration of cylinder of mass m2 is a2. Then angular acceleration  2 is (given that there is no slipping)

a2 a2  g 2 g  a2   2a 2  g 
1) 2) 3) 4)
R R R R
30. A ring is suspended from a point S on its rim as shown in figure. It behaves like a seconds pendulum. If
g   2 , The radius of the ring is
S

r=l
G

1) 0.1 m 2) 0.3 m 3) 0.5 m 4) 1.0 m

 
31. The angular velocity of a body is   2iˆ  3jˆ  4kˆ and torque   ˆi  2ˆj  3kˆ acts on it. The rotational power is
1) 5 W 2) 10 W 3) 15 W 4) 20 W
32. A thin disc of mass (9 M) and radius (R) is given. A concentric disc of radius (R/3) is cut at centre. The M.I.
of remaining part is

R/3

20 40 10 20
1) MR 2 2) MR 2 3) MR 2 4) MR 2
3 9 3 6
33. A diver makes 2.5 revolutions on the way from a 10 m high platform to the water. Assuming zero initial vertical
velocity, the average angular velocity during the dive is

3 5 5 
1) rad s 1 2) rad s 1 3) rad s 1 4) rad s 1
2 2 3 2
219
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

34. A cube, a disc and a sphere have same mass m. The side of a cube is equal to the diameter of disc as well as
sphere, given as d. If all rotate about the axes passing through their centres of mass, the ratio of their moments
of inertia Icube : Idisc : Isphere is

1) 12 : 15 : 20 2) 15 : 12 : 20 3) 30 : 20 : 15 4) 20 : 15 : 12

35. Two bodies with moments of inertia IA and IB have same angular momenta. If IA is greater than IB, the relation
between their kinetic energies KEA and KEB is

1) KEA > KEB 2) KEA = KEB

3) KEA < KEB 4) KEA < < KEB

36. Two discs A and B of same mass M and radius R are connected to one another to form single rigid body.
Moment of inertia of this attachment about an axis normal to the plane of disc A and passing through its centre is

R R

A B

3
1) 2MR2 2) 3MR2 3) MR 2 4) 5MR2
2

37. A rod which is massless has four masses fixed on its as shown in the figure. The moment of inertia about an
axis passing through the centre of rod is

l/4 l/4 l/4 l/4

M M
m m

 m l2  M
1) l  M   2)  m  
2

 4 2 4

l2  m  l2
3)   M  4)  2m  2M 
2 4  2
220
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

38. Four spherical particles, each of mass m and radius r are kept at the four corners of a square of side a.
Moment of inertia of the system along a side of the square is

a
m m

a a

m a m

2 2 2 2 2 2 4 2 2 4 2 2
1) 4m  r  a  2) 4m  r  a  3) 2m  r  a  4) 2m  r  a 
5  7  5  7 
39. A circular turn table circulates about its normal axis with uniform angular speed  . A circular thick layer of ice
and of radius much smaller than the table-top rotates along with the table. The new angular speed  of the
table when ice starts melting is
Ice

Turn table

1)    2)    3)    4)   2
40. A uniform disc of mass m and radius r rotates along an axis passing through its centre of mass and normal to
its plane. An unstretchable rope is wound on the disc. Tangential acceleration of a point P on the periphery of
the disc when a uniform force F is applied on the rope is

F 3F F 2F
1) 2) 3) 4)
2m 2m m m
41. A solid cylinder of mass m and radius r rolls down with angular velocity  on an inclined plane of angle of
inclination  and height h. Rotational kinetic energy of the cylinder when it reaches the foot of the inclined
plane is

1 1 2 2 1 2 2 1
1) mgh 2) mr  3) mr  4) mgh
2 3 2 4
221
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

42. Three similar spheres of mass m and radius r are moving down along three inclined planes A, B and C of
similar dimensions. Sphere on inclined plane A falls freely, sphere on inclined plane B rolls without slipping and
sphere on inclined plane C slides down then
1) velocities of all the spheres are same
2) velocities of spheres on A and C are same whereas that on B is less
3) velocity of sphere on A is least and that on C is maximum
4) velocity of sphere on A is maximum
43. A uniform disc rotates freely about a perpendicular axis making n1 revolutions per minute. Wax of mass m falls
vertically and sticks to the disc at a distance x from the axis. Rotational speed reduces to n2 rpm, then moment
of inertia of the disc is

n1 n 2 2 n2 2 n1 2 n2 2
1) n  n mx 2) n  n mx 3) n  n mx 4) n  n mx
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2

222
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

KEY WITH HINTS

LEVEL I

1. 3 If speed of man relative to plank be v, then it can be shown easily that speed of man relative to ground

M 3 3L
v mg  v  v  Distance covered by man relative to ground must be
 M 4 4
M  
 3
mA XA  m BX B  mC XC  mDX D 1 0  2  1  3 1  4  0 1
2. 3 X CM  ; x CM    0.5 m
mA  m B  mC  m D 1 2  3  4 2
y
D (0, 1)
C (1, 1)

A (0, 0) B (1, 0) x

mA YA  m B YB  mC YC  m D YD 1 0  2  0  3 1  4  1 7
Similarly yCM  mA  m B  mC  m D
   0.7 m
1 2  3  4 10

3. 1 Here,   x   a 1  bx 2  ; when b  0 ,   x   a = constant

ie, density of a rod of length 1 m is constant.  centre of mass of rod would lie at 0.5 m (centre).
3 2  b 6
When we try b  0 , we find choice (A) alone gives x  4 3  b  12  0.5
 
4. 1 The resultant force on the system is zero. So, centre of mass of system has no acceleration.
5. 1 Since there is no external force acting on the particle hence
m1Y1  m 2 Y2 1 3
YCM  0,   15    Y2  0 ; Y2 = –5 m
m1  m 2 4 4

81 0  1 3.8  105

6. 2 Taking centre of earth as x = 0; x CM   4.6 103 km
81  1
But radius of earth = 6.37 × 103 km.  Centre of mass of earth moon system lies within earth itself.
1 1 1 1 mr 2 v 2 3
7. 3 K.E.  mv 2  I2 ,  mv 2   2  mv 2
2 2 2 2 2 r 4

3 3 v2
When PE = KE  mgh  mv 2 ,  h 
4 4 g
8. 3 The centre of mass remains at rest because force of attraction is mutual. No external force is acting.

223
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

m1 r1  m 2 r2  m 3 r3
9. 2 The coordinates of CM of three particles are. x  m1  m 2  m 3

 x1  x 2  x 3  m  2  y1  y2  y3  m  2
here m1  m 2  m 3  m ; So x  and y 
3m 3m
10. 1 As initially both the particles were at rest therefore velocity of centre of mass was zero and there is no
external force on the system so speed of centre of mass remains constant ie, it should be equal to zero.
11. 1
16 cm

1.5 g G 2.5 g
x 16 – x cm
Taking the moment of forces about centre of gravity G is, (1.5) gx = 2.5 g (16 – x), 8x = 80 or x = 10 cm
12. 2 Since the acceleration of centre of mass in both the case is same equal to g. So the centre of mass of the
bodies B & C taken together does not shift compared to that of body A.
13. 2 r1 = 0, r2 = PQ, r3 = PR

r1  r2  r3 0  PQ  PR PQ  PR
Distance of centre of mass from P is r  
3 3 3

F 1 2 1 F 2 1 Ft 2
14. 3 Acceleration of COM, a  ; Displacement of COM in time t  at  t 
2m 2 2 2m 4 m

15. 1 Let x1 and x2 are the distances of centre of mass from mass m1 and m2, then, m1x1  m 2 x 2 ------(1)

If m1 is moved towards COM by a distance a, then m2 is moved by a'

m1
 m1  x1  a   m2  x 2  a  -------(2); Solving (1) and (2) a   m a
2

a
2  0  3a  4
2  5a
16. 2 Here x CM 
2 3 4 9

a/2 4

3
1
a

224
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

17. 3

Here vCM 
  
2 2iˆ  ˆj  3 ˆi  6ˆj   
 1.4iˆ  3.2ˆj ms 1
23
18. 3
v1 = 14 m/s

u1 u2

m1 = 10 kg m2 = 4 kg

m1v1  m 2 v 2 140
v CM    10m / s
m1  m 2 14

19. 4 Here, m1 = 4 kg, m2 = 2 kg; x1  1, y1  0, z1  1 and x 2  2, y 2  2, z 2  0

m1x1  m 2 x 2 4
The coordinates of centre are x  m1  m 2

3

m1 y1  m 2 y 2 2 m1z1  m 2 z 2 2
y  ; z 
m1  m 2 3 m1  m 2 3

20. 3 Distance AB = constant.

 Component of V along AB = component of v along AB.

V 3v dx  dy 
or  or V  3 v ; Now,  v ;     V  3v
2 2 dt  dt 

   1 2  3 2

 xˆ yˆ  drc 1  dx ˆ dy ˆ  1  ˆ  
 v c       v  v
rc  i  j  v c   i j  vi  3vjˆ  
2 2 dt 2  dt dt  2     2   2  
 

a 3a 5a
m1X1  m 2 X 2  m 3 X 3  m 4 X 4 60   10   20  19a
21. 1 X CM   2 2 2  ;
m1  m 2  m3  m 4 90 18

a 3a
50   40 
Similarly Y  2 2  25a  60a  85a  17a .
CM
90 90 90 18
225
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

22. 3

L
 bL      bl     l 
1 L l
A1x1  A 2 x 2 
2 3 2 3

23. 1 Here, m1 = m, v1 = v; m2 = 4m, v2 = 0; vCM = ?

m1v1  m 2 v 2 m  v  4m  0 v
v CM   
m1  m 2 m  4m 5

m1 y1  m 2 y 2  m3 y3  m 4 y 4  m5 y5  6m  0    m  a   m  a   m  0   m  a  a
24. 1 yCM   
m1  m 2  m3  m 4  m5 6m  m  m  m  m 10

25. 3 Suppose r1 be the distance of centre of mass of the remaining portion from centre of the bigger circle,

  42 
2
A 
then A1r1  A 2 r2 ; r1   2  r2   7  9 cm
  56    42  
2 2
 A1   

1 2
26. 1 Kinetic energy of rotation E  I ; Angular momentum L  I . Eliminate  ; L2 = 2EI
2

27. 1 Total kinetic energy = K.E. of Rotation + K.E. of translation

1 2 1 2
E I  Mv 2 , for sphere I  MR 2 , v  R
2 2 5

12 2 2 1
 MR    M  R
2
E
25  2

1 1
mv 2 Mv 2
ET 5
E
7 7
MR 2 2  Mv 2 ;  2  2 
E 7 7
10 10 MR 2 2 Mv 2 7
10 10

2 24  8 176 5
28. 2 For a sphere I  MR 2 ; I   R 3 .  . R 2   R 5  R
5 53  15 105

226
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

29. 3 Moment of inertia of a square about an axis passing through its centre and perpendicular to its plane.

M 2 M Ml 2
I0 
12
 l  b2    l 2  l 2  
12 6
The two diagonals of a square are mutually perpendicular to each other. Let I = M.I. about any diagonal.

Ml 2 Ml 2
By theorem of perpendicular axes. I1 + I2 = I0; I + I = I0; 2I   I
6 12

l
h
30. 1


Velocity of body, under linear motion, v  2gh  h  l sin 

 velocity of body = 2gl sin  ; For a ring, I  MR 2  MK 2 or K  R

g sin  g sin  g sin  1

Acceleration of ring rolling down the plane  ; a 2
  [Link]   v2  2al
K 2
R 2 2
1 2 1 2
R R

1  v
 Velocity of Ring  V  2  2 g sin   . l V
  2

2M  R   2M  R  2
2 2

31. 1 I YY   IA  YY   I B YY where YY' denotes axis  IYY         M  2R  

5  2   5  2  

MR 2 MR 2 4MR 2 42MR 2 21MR 2 21MR 2

or I YY      or I YY 
10 10 1 10 5 5
32. 2 The situation of the four spheres is symmetrical about the given axis of rotation. Obviously each has
same moment of inertia.
Now, for any one sphere, say at A,

2Mr 2 MR 2 M  4r  5R 
2 2 2
2 2  R 
I  IG  M  OA  I  Mr  M
2
or
5   or I   
 2 5 2 10
For all the four spheres, taken together.

4M  4r 2  5R 2  2M  4r 2  5R 2 
Moment of inertia = 4I.  
10 5

227
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

33. 1 The equation of motion of the system.; 2mg – 2T = 2ma or T + ma = mg ----(i)

 MR 2  a 2F 2  2T 4T
 RF    or a    ----(ii)
 2 R M M M

 4T  Mmg
From (i) and (ii), we get, T  m     mg or T 
M  M  4m 
34. 2 Loss of potential energy = Gain of kinetic energy

1 1 1 1  mr 2  2 3mv 2
mgh  mv 2  I2  mgh  mv 2    
2 2 2 2 2  4

3v 2 3  2ah 3a 2g
or gh    v 2  u 2  2ah  2ah  or g  or a 
4 4 2 3

1 2  K2  1  1 3
35. 4 By law of conservation of energy.  mgh  mv 1  2   mv 2 1    mv 2
2  R  2  2 4

3mv 2
 mg  3a   or 4ga  v 2 or v  4ga
4
1/3
4  3V 
Volume of sphere  R  R  
3
36. 3 
3  4 
2/3
 3V 
L  I   MR 2    M    = (Constant) V 2/3 .
 4 
Since angular momentum L remains constant; V 2/3 = constant.
2 dV d d 2 dV
 0 or   0.67% ;  Percentage change in   0.67%
3 V   3 V
 Minus sign indicates that there is a decrease in  .
ML2
37. 2 M.I. of rod about an end  ; Since I  I1  I2  I3 [about the three axes.]
3
ML2 ML2 ML2 2ML2
 I  0 2  M.I. of system about Z-axis = .
3 3 3 3
38. 2 L et the spring increase by x. Force = kx.  Radius of circle = (l + x)

 Centripetal force = Force due to spring; or mR2  kx or m  l  x  2  kx

m2l
or ml   kx  mx  x  k  m  or x  k  m2
 
2 2 2

228
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

v2 sin 2  v2 sin 2 45o v2

39. 2 In a projectile, maximum height  h   h  
2g 2g 4g

mv
At highest point, linear momentum (p) = mv cos 45o 
2

mv mv3 mv3
 Angular momentum = moment of momentum or J  h   J
2 4 2g 4 2g

2
1 1 2 1 1 2 v  I 
40. 1 K.E. of rolling body = Mv  I ;
2
 K.E.  mv  I
2
  m  R 2 
2 2 2 2 2
When the body rolls up a hill to a maximum height h, its total K.E. is converted into P.E.

v2  1  3v 2  3v 2  1 3m mR 2
  m   mgh , where h   PE  mg    or m   or I 
2 R 2  4g  4g  R2 2 2
Such a body may either be a circular disc or a solid cylinder having I = mR2/2.

41. 3 Angular momentum is conserved.  I 2 2  I11

I11 MK 2  M

or 2   where K = radius of gyration. or Angular speed  M  2m
I2  M  2m  K 2  
2
 R1  d2
42. 4 mass = volume × density = R 2 xd Here m1 = m2 or   
 R2  d1
2
I1 2  mR 12  R 1  d2 I d
Now      1  2
I 2 2  mR 2  R 2 
2
d1 I 2 d1
43. 3 The direction of L is perpendicular to the line joining the bob to point C. Since this line keeps changing
its orientation in space, direction of L keeps changing however as  is constant, magnitude of L remain
constant.
L
44. 4 Mass per unit length of wire =  .  Mass of wire = L ; 2R  L  R 
2

MR 2 3 3 L3
M.I. of loop about given axis = MR   MR 2 ; M.I. of loop  . 2
2

2 2 8 
1
45. 2 Moment of inertia of disc  MR 2 ;
2

M 1 M I1 1 M 2 2t2 2 3
Density   ; I . M. ;  . .  
R 2 t 2 t I 2 2 t1 M2 1 1

229
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

2  1 2  n 2  n1  4500 rev 1200 rev

46. 4   ; n2   75 , n1   20
t t 60 sec 60 sec


 75  20   360o degree  1980 degree
1 Revolution  2 Radian = 360o.;
10 sec 2 sec 2

ml 2
47. 3 I  about YY  
12

ml 2 ml 2 ml 2
Using parallel axis theorem : I  about AD    
12 4 3

48. 4 For P loop, let radius = r, mass = m.

For Q loop, let radius = nr, mass = nm
Moment of inertia of P loop = Ip = mr2.
Moment of inertia of Q loop = IQ = (nm) (nr)2
IQ nm  n 2 r 2
 2
 n 3 ; 8 = n3  n = 2
IP mr

LEVEL II

 mi x i m  0  m  0  m  2 2  mi y i 2
1. 3 x CM    ; y CM  
 mi mmm 3  mi 3

 Position vector of centre of mass is

2 ˆ ˆ
3
 
i j

2. 2

dm
x dx

The mass of considered element is

L
L  x3  L
3

 x dm 0 
3  
3  2L
   0L 
0
dm   0 xdx  x CM  0 2
 dm 0  x   0 L 3
2

2
 2 0
230
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

3. 3

m1x1  m 2 x 2  m3 x 3
; Here centre of mass is given by x  m1  m 2  m 3 ;

2m 1 y  m1 y1  m 2 y 2  m3 y 3 3 1 3 
x  ;  
 Centre of mass is 2 m, m
4m 2 m1  m 2  m3 4  4 

 m1  m 2 
4. 1 In the pulley arrangement, | a1 || a 2 | a   g
 m1  m 2 
but a1 is in downward direction and a2 in the upward direction, ie, a2 = – a1.
2
m a  m 2a 2  m  m2 
 Acceleration of centre of mass a CM  1 1  1  g
m1  m 2  m1  m 2 

5. 2 Since, there is no external force acting on gun-bullet system.

K b m g 2 kg K b
Hence b p  p     40
g and K m 50 g K
g b g

Kb 41
Now total energy = Kb + Kg = 2050 ; Kb   2050 ; K b  2050
40 40
2050  40
 Kb   2000 J and Kg = 2050 – 2000 = 50 J
41
6. 3 Distance between the centres of spheres = 12 R
 Distance between their surfaces = 12 R – (2R + R) = 9 R
Since there is no external force, hence centre of mass must remain unchanged and hence
 m1r1  m 2 r2  Mx  5M  9R  x  , where x = distance covered by smaller body..  x  7.5 R

5g  5g m1a1  m 2 a 2 5 4 2  42
7. 3 a system   4 m / s2 ; a cm    2 2 m / s2
55 m1  m 2 10
8. 2 The acceleration of the body which is rolling down an inclined plane of angle  is
g sin 
g  ; Now, here the body is a uniform solid disc
k2
1 2
R

k2 1 g sin  2g sin 
so,  ; a ; a
R2 2 1 3
1
2
231
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

9. 1

m1x1  m 2 x 2
Here, m1 = 4 kg; x1 = 2m; m2 = 8 kg, x2 = ?; xCM = 0  x CM 
m1  m 2

8
 x 2    1m  1 m from O on OE.
8
 
 m1v1  m 2 v 2  
10. 3 Initially boat at rest, ie, vCM  0  0  m1 r1  m 2  r2  0
m1  m 2
Now, here in boat-man system if the man moves towards right, the boat moves towards left.
 m1r1  m 2 r2 ----(1)

If r2 is the displacement of boat relative to shore, then the displacement of man relative to shore
would be  9  r2  , ie, r1  9  r2 ----(2)  100  9  r2   500r2 ; r2  1.5 m
0.1 0  0.3  1
11. 2 Two particles collide at their centre of mass.  Distance of CM from P   0.75 m
0.1  0.3

1 2 1 F 2 1 102 2
Consider p : s1  a 1t or 0.75  t   t  t  15 sec
2 2 m1 2 0.1
12. 1 Motion of centre of mass is exactly similar to that of translatory motion of a body that is thrown into air.
10 10
u x  u cos  u y  u sin   m / s; vx  m/s
2 2

100
v2y  u 2y  2  g  h  ; v 2y   2  10  1  30
2

 Net velocity of CM  v x  v y  80  4 5 m / s
2 2

 
13. 3 Fext  Fx2  Fy2  162  82  8 5 N ; M  m1  m 2  16  Fext  Ma CM

 Fext 8 5 5  
a CM    m / sec2 ; a CM lies in the direction of Fext .
M 16 2

 F 16
Angle made by Fext with x-axis  tan
1 y
 tan 1  tan 1  2 
Fx 8

232
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

   
14. 4 Fext  M a CM ie, a CM should lie in the direction of Fext
 
 
Here, Fext.  5 2iˆ  3jˆ  5kˆ ; a CM  2i  3jˆ  5kˆ
 
Since, Fext , and a CM are not lying in the same direction, given data is incorrect.
15. 3

 2 R2 
; Mass of the remaining portion is   R  2  
 

Here  = mass per unit area.  m1x1  m 2 x 2

 2 R2  R2 R R
  R  
2 
x 
2
..
2 or x  2  2  1

16. 2

a
2g  1g 10
 m / s2  a COM 
 2  a   1 a 
2 1 3 2 1

a 10 1 1  10  2 20
  m / s 2  downwards  ;  s COM  a COM t 2     2   m  2.22 m
3 9 2 2 9  9

M
17. 3 Mass of original spherei s m1 = M (say); Then mass of removed sphere will be m 2  3
. p3
R
X-coordinate of COM of m1 is x1 = 0; X-coordinate of COM of m2 is x2 = q

M
m1 x1  m 2 x 2 M  O   3 .p3  q 
 R p 3q
 For the remaining part x COM x
m1  m 2 ; or COM

M
 
M  3 . p3 R 3  p3
R

m1x1  m 2 x 2 34 m1 v1  m 2 v2 2 1
18. 2 x COM   m; vCOM   ms
m1  m 2 3 m1  m 2 3

2 4 34 4 38
S  vCOM  t   2  m ;  X f COM  X i COM  S    m  12.67 m
3 3 3 3 3

233
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

19. 3 Volume of the disc = volume of sphere

4 3 3 2 3 R R3 R
R 2 t  R 1  R 13  R t  R2 ; R 
3  R1 
3 4 4 6 1
8 2
2 2 R 2 MR 2 1 MR 2 I
I of sphere  MR 12  M   
5 5 4 10 5 2 5
2  02
20. 4 2  02  2   (1)
2
v 80
   4 ; 0  0 ,   2n  4   n  2
R 20 / 

 4 
2
 0 162 20
Substituting in eqn. (1)    2 ;  T  R  . 2  40ms 2
2  4 8 

1 1 1 tR 4
21. 1 I
2
MR 2  (volume × density) R2.
2
I
2
 R 2 t  R 2 
2
44
Iy ty  R y  14
       64  I y  64I x
Ix t x  R x  41

1 2 1 2 1 12 2  2
22. 4 K.E.  I  I11  2I122 ;   1 
2 2 2 2 1
2
2 1

L1 I1 1 1 1 2 1
Angular momentum L  I     
L 2  2I  2 2 2 2 1 2
2
9M 9M R
23. 4 For uniform disc, mass density  ; Mass of removed portion      M .
R 2 R 2
3
2 2
MR  2R 
MI of removed portion by parallel axis theorem. I1     M   (1)
2 3  3 

 R2 
I
The moment of inertia of complete disc about the stated axis is 2  9M  
 2 
So the moment of inertia of the disc is I 2  I1  I 2  I1  4MR 2
24. 2 When the angular momentum of a body is increased by 200%, its new momentum L' will become.
2
200L k   L   3L 
L  L   3L ;     9; k' = 9 k
100 k  L   L 

k  k 9k  k
% increase in kinetic energy =  100  100  800 %
k k

234
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

2 2
25. 3 2
I  mk 2 = mr -----(i); Also I  I CM  mh 2  mr  mh 2 ------(ii)
5
2 2 3 2 3
From (i) and (ii) mr 2  mr  mh 2 ; mr  mh 2  h 2  r 2  h  0.6 r
5 5 5
26. 1 MI of solid sphere of mass M and radius R about an axis passing through the centre of mass is
2
I  MR 2 . Let the radius of disc be r.. Moment of inertia of circular disc of radius r and mass M
5
1 2
about an axis passing through the centre of mass and perpendicular to its plane is Mr
2
1 3
 Using theorem of parallel axes, moment of inertia of disc about its edge is I  Mr  Mr  Mr
2 2 2

2 2
2 3 4 2 2R
Given I = I' or MR 2  Mr 2 or r 
2
R ; r
5 2 15 15
27. 3

   1 3
L  LT  L R ; L  Mv  R  Icm   M  R R  MR   MR 
2 2

2 2

1 2
28. 3 W I ; Let x is the distance of CM from A.; I  Mx 2  4M  l  x  2 and if I is minimum,
2
dI
W will be minimum.  2Mx  4M  2  l  x   1  2Mx  8M  l  x 
dx
dI 4
 10Mx  8Ml  10Mx  8Ml = 0 ; x l
dx 5
m2R 2
29. 3 m 2g – T = m2 a2------(1); TR   2 -------(2)
2
2T 2 2 g  a2 
From eqn. (2)  2  m R . By using (1)  2   m 2g  m 2a 2  
2 m2R R

2  l2
30. 3 For a compound pendulum, T  2 (For ring r = K) because I = MK2 = mr2.
lg

r2  r2 2r 2 2
Here l = r = K, T = 2 sec, g    2  2
2  2 or 2  2r  2 2r
rg r 2


1
 2r  1  2r  1 or r   0.5 m  Radius of ring = 0.5 m.
2
235
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE


31. 4   
Power P   .   ˆi  2ˆj  3kˆ . 2iˆ  3jˆ  4kˆ  = 2 + 6 + 12 = 20 W

32. 2 Mass per unit area of disc = 9M / R 2 ;  Mass of removed portion = m

R
2
9M R
R/3  m     M
R 2
3

9M  R 2 M  R 2 40
M.I. of remaining portion    MR 2
2 29 9

1 2y 2 10m 
33. 2 Let the free fall time be t y  v0 t  gt 2  t    2s
2 g 10ms 2

 2.5 rev   2 rad rev1  5

Thus, the magnitude of the average angular velocity is avg   rad s 1
2s 2

md 2  d  md 2 2md 2
34. 4 Icube    r  ; Idisc  ; Isphere 
6  2  8 5 4

1 1 1
 Icube : Idisc : Isphere  : :  20 :15 :12
6 8 10

1 2 2 1 2 2
35. 3 Using I  constant ; I A A  I B B or I A A  I BB
2 2

1
IA 2A
2 I KE A
 B
1 or KE  1 Given IA > IB; KE A  KE B
I BB2 I A B
2

MR 2
Here I A  ; I AB  IA  M  2R  from theorem of parallel axis
2
36. 4
2

MR 2 9 MR 2 9MR 2
IAB   M4R 2  MR 2 ; Then I  I A  I AB    5MR 2
2 2 2 2

2 2
l l ml 2 Ml 2 l 2  M
37. 2 Here I   MR 2  2 m   2 M      m 
2 4 2 8 2 4

236
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

2 2
38. 3 Moment of inertia of the two spheres lying on the axis of rotation itself is 2  mr . Moment of inertia
5
2 2 2
of the two spheres lying on other two corners (using parallel axes theorem) is  2  mr  ma 
5 

2 2 2 2 8 2 4 2 2
Total moment of inertia = 2  mr  mr  ma   mr  2ma  2m  r  a 
2 2

5 5  5 5 
39. 2 When ice melts it spreads over the table top. The new distribution of mass on the periphery will increase
moment of inertia. Thus angular velocity decreases.
1 2 at
40. 4 Using   Fr;   I ; We get Fr  I  mr  (where at is tangential acceleration)
2 r
1 2F
m at  F  at 
2 m
1 2 1  mr 2  2 1 2 2 1
41. 1 Rotational kinetic energy K.E rot  I     mr   mv 2
2 2 2  4 4
1 1
but v  2gh  K.E rot  2mgh  mgh
4 2
42. 2 Velocity of free fall (sphere on A) A  2gh

2gh
Velocity of rolling without slipping (sphere on B) B 
1 

Velocity of sliding (sphere on C) C  2gh ; Clearly A  C  B

n1 n n2 n 
43. 2 Initial angular velocity i   2  1 ; Final angular velocity f   2  2
60 30 60 30
Let Ii be the moment of inertia of disc, then new moment of inertia of disc with mass m. If = Ii + mx2.

If f  Ii  mx  n 2  Ii  mx 2 
2
n 2 30
But Ii i  If f ;  Ii   . or Ii 
i n1  30 n1

n2
or n1Ii  n 2 Ii  n 2 mx 2 ; or Ii  n  n mx
2

1 2

237
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

CHAPTER - 06
GRAVITATION

Gravitation is the name given to the force of attraction between any two bodies in the universe. Gravitational
force is the weakest force among the four fundamental forces of nature, but is the most important force because it
played an important role in initiating the birth of stars, and controlling the entire structure of the universe.
NEWTON’S LAW OF GRAVITATION
Newton’s law of gravitation states that every body in the universe attracts every other body with a force,
which is directly proportional to the product of their masses and inversely proportional to the square of the distance
between their centres. The direction of the force is along the line joining the particles.
Thus the magnitude of the gravitational force F that two particles of masses m1 and m2 separated by a
m1m 2 m1m 2
distance r exert on each other is given by F  or F  G ------(1)
r2 r2

VECTOR FORM OF NEWTON’S LAW OF GRAVITATION

Consider two bodies A and B of masses m1 and m2, placed at a distance r apart,
 Gm1m 2 Gm1m 2  Gm m 
According to Newton’s law of gravitation, F12  2
rˆ21  3
r21   13 2 r21
r r r21

r12 = unit vector from A to B. r̂21 = unit vector from B to A.

F12 = gravitational force exerted on body A by body B.

F21 = gravitational force exerted on body B by body A

Here negative sign indicates that the direction of F12 is opposite to that of r̂21 .
 Gm1m 2 Gm1m 2  Gm m 
Similarly F21  2
rˆ12  3
r12   1 3 2 r12 ------(2)
r r r12
 
 It is clear that F12  F21 . Which is Newton’s third law of motion.
Here G is the constant of proportionality which is called ‘Universal gravitational constant.’
if m1 = m2 and r = 1 then G = F.
238
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

ie, universal gravitational constant is equal to the force of attraction between two bodies each of unit mass
whose centres are placed unit distance apart.
i) The value of G in the laboratory was first determined by Cavendish using the torsional balance.
ii) The value of G is 6.67 × 10–11 N-m2 kg–2 in S.I. and 6.67 × 10–8 dyne-cm3-g–2 in C.G.S. system.
iii) Dimensional formula [M–1 L3 T–2]
iv) The value of G does not depend upon the nature and size of the bodies.
Properties of Gravitational Force
1. It is always attractive in nature while electric and magnetic forces can be attractive or repulsive.
2) It is independent of the medium between the particles while electric and magnetic force depend on the nature of
the medium between the particles.
3) It holds good over a wide range of distances. It is found true for interplanetary to inter atomic distances.
4) It is a central force, ie, acts along the line joining the centres of two interacting bodies.
5) It is the weakest force in nature : As Fnuclear  Felectromagnetic  Fgraviational .
6) The ratio of gravitational force to electrostatic force between two electrons is of the order of 10–43.
GRAVITY
Gravity is the force of attraction exerted by earth towards its centre on a body lying on or near the surface of
earth. Gravity is merely a special case of gravitation and is also called earth’s gravitational pull.
Force of gravity acting on a body is the measure of weight of the body. Thus weight of a body is defined as the
force of attraction exerted by the earth on the body towards its centre.
If m is the mass of a body placed on the surface of earth, where acceleration due to gravity is g, then, gravity pull
= weight of body = mg. The units and dimensions of gravity pull or weight are the same as those of force.
Example 1 : A mass M is split into two parts m and (M – m), which are then separated by a certain distance. What
ratio (m/M) maximises the gravitational force between the parts?
Solution : If r is the distance between m and (M – m), then gravitational force will be

m M  m G dF
FG 2
 2  mM  m 2  ,  0 , where F to be maximum, M and r are constants.
r r dm

d G   G 
2 
i.e.,  mM  m 2    0 ; i.e., M – 2m = 0  as r 2  0 
dm  r 
 m  1
or      , i.e., the force will be maximum when the two parts are equal.
M 2
Acceleration Due to Gravity
The force of attraction exerted by the earth on a body is called gravitational pull or gravity.
We know that when force acts on a body, it produces acceleration. Therefore, a body under the effect of
gravitational pull must accelerate.
The acceleration produced in the motion of a body under the effect of gravity is called acceleration due to
gravity, it is denoted by g.
Consider a body of mass m, lying on the surface of earth then gravitational force on the body is given by

239
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

GMm
F ------(3); Where M = mass of the earth and R = radius of the earth.
R2
If g is the acceleration due to gravity, then the force on the body due to earth is given by
Force = mass × acceleration, or F = mg ------(4)

GMm
From (3) and (4) we have mg 
R2

GM G 4 3  4
 g ------(5);  g  R    g GR ------(6)
R2 R2  3  3
Important Points
GM 4
i) From the expression g   GR it is clear that its value depends upon the mass radius and density of
R2 3
planet and it is independent of mass, shape and density of the body placed on the surface of the planet. ie, a
given planet (reference body) produces same acceleration in a light body as well as heavy body.
ii) The greater the value of (M/R2) or R , greater will be value of g for that planet.
iii) Acceleration due to gravity is a vector quantity and its direction is always towards the centre of the planet.
iv) Dimension [g] = [LT–2]
v) It’s average value is taken to be 9.8 m/s2 or 981 cm/sec2 or 32 feet/sec2, on the surface of the earth at mean
sea level.
vi) The value of acceleration due to gravity vary due to the following factors: (a) Shape of the earth, (b) Height
above the earth surface, (c) Depth below the earth surface and (d) Axial rotation of the earth.
MASS OF EARTH

gR 2
From equation (5), we find M ------(7), M = 6.018  1024 kg
G
DENSITY OF EARTH
Consider earth to be a spherical body of radius R. Let  be the uniform density of the material of the earth.

Mass M 3M
As density,     ------(8)
Volume 4 R 3 4R 3
3

3g R 2 G 3g
From (7) and (8), we get   ------(9)
4R 3
4RG
3  9.8
From (9)   = 5.4783  103 kgm-3  5.5  103 kgm-3
4  (22 / 7)  6.4  106  (6.67  1011 )

240
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

VARIATION OF ACCELERATION DUE TO GRAVITY

The value of acceleration due to gravity changes with height (i.e. altitude), depth, shape of the earth and rotation of
earth about its own axis.
Variation of g with height
Consider earth to be a sphere of mass M, radius R with centre at O. Let g be the value of acceleration due to gravity
at a point A on the surface of earth.,

GM
 g ------(10)
R2

GM

If g' is the acceleration due to gravity B, at a height h above the surface of the earth, then g  R  h 2 ----(11)
 
2
g GM R2 R2 g R2  h
Dividing (11) by (10), we get     ;   1   -----(12)
g  R  h  2 GM  R  h  2 g R 2 1  h R   R 
2

If h<<R then h/R is very small as compared to 1. Expanding the R.H.S. of above equation by Binomial theorem and
neglecting the square and higher powers of h/R, we get
g 2h  2h 
 1 or g  g 1   --------(13)
g R  R
From (13), we note that the value of acceleration due to gravity decreases with height.
It is due to this reason that the value of acceleration due to gravity is lesser at mountains than in plains.
Important points
1
i) As we go above the surface of the earth, the value of g decreases because g  .
r2
ii) If r   then g' = 0, ie, at infinite distance from the earth, the value of g becomes zero.
iii) If h << R ie, height is negligible in comparison to the radius then from equation (12) we get

 2h 
 g 1   [As h << R]
 R
iv) If h<< R then decrease in the value of g with height:
2hg g g  g 2h
Absolute decrease g  g  g  ; Percentage decreases  100  100  100%
R g g R
Variation in g with Depth
Consider earth to be a homogeneous sphere of radius R and mass M with centre at O. Let g be the value of
GM
acceleration due to gravity at a point A on the surface of earth, (Fig. below). Then g
R2
241
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

A
d B

R
(R–d)
O

4
G  R 3
4 3 4
If  is the uniform density of material of earth, then M  R 3 ; g 2
 GR ------(14)
3 R 3
Let g' be the acceleration due to gravity at the point B at a depth d below the surface of earth. The body at B will
experience gravity pull due to shaded portion of earth whose radius is (R – d) and mass is M'
GM 4
g  ------(15) and M    R  d   ------(16)
3

R  d
2
3

4
G  R  d 
3

3 4
Substituting (16) in (15),  g   G  R  d   ------(17)
R  d
2
3

4
G  R  d  
g 3 R d R d  d
g  g 1   ------(18)
Dividing (17) by (14), we get,     or
g 4 R R R  R
GR
3
From (18), we note that the value of acceleration due to gravity decreases with depth. At the centre of the earth, d = R,
 R
g' = g0 (say). From (18), we get g 0  g 1    0 ------(19)
 R
It means the acceleration due to gravity is zero at the centre of earth. Therefore the weight of the body of mass
m at the centre of earth = mg0 = 0, but the mass of the body will not be zero.
Important Points
i) The value of g decreases on going below the surface of the earth. From equation (18) we get g   R  d  .
So it is clear that if d increases, the value of g' decreases.
ii) At the centre of the earth d = R  g  0 , ie, the acceleration due to gravity at the centre of earth becomes zero.
iii) Decrease in the value of g with depth.
gd
Absolute decrease g  g  g 
R
g g  g d
Percentage decrease  100   100  100%
g R R
iv) The rate of decrease of gravity above the earth (if h << R) is double to that of inside the earth.

242
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

Variation of g Due to Shape of Earth.

Earth is elliptical in shape. It is flattened at the poles and bulged out at the equator. The equatorial radius is
about 21 km longer than polar radius,
GM
from g  ------(20)
R2

GM GM
At equator g e  R 2 ------(21); At poles gp 
e
R 2p ------(22)
2
ge R p
From (20) and (21)  ; Since R equator  R pole  g pole  g equator and g p  g e  0.018 ms
2
g p R e2
Example 2: Compute the mass and density of the moon if acceleration due to gravity on its surface is 1.62 m/s2 and
its radius is 1.74 × 106 m (G = 6.67 × 10–11 MKS units)

 GM  gR 2
Solution : We know that g   2  , M   7.35  1022 kg
 R  G
M gR 2 3g
   
and as 4 GR  3.3  10 kg / m
3 3
V G  4 / 3 R 3

Inertial and Gravitational Masses

i) Inertial mass: It is the mass of the material body, which measures its inertia.
If an external force F acts on a body of mass mi, then according to Newton’s second law of motion
F
F  m i a or m i  .------(23)
a
Hence inertial mass of a body may be measured as the ratio of the magnitude of the external force applied on
it to the magnitude of acceleration produced in its motion.
Important points
i) It is the measure of ability of the body to oppose the production of acceleration in its motion by an external
force.
ii) Gravity has no effect on inertial mass of the body.
iii) It is proportional to the quantity of matter contained in the body, independent of size, shape etc.
iv) It does not depend on the temperature of body.
v) It is conserved when two bodies combine physically or chemically.

243
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

m0
vi) When a body moves with velocity v, its inertial mass is given by m  , where m o = rest mass.
v2
1 2
c
2) Gravitational Mass: It is the mass of the material body, which determines the gravitational pull acting upon it.
If M is the mass of the earth and R is the radius, then gravitational pull on a body of mass mg is given by
GMm g F F F
F or m g    ------(24)
R 2
GM / R 2
 g E
Here mg is the gravitational mass of the body, E is the gravitational intensity.
If at any point E = 1, then mg = F
Thus the gravitational mass of a body is defined as the gravitational pull experienced by the body in a gravitational
field of unit intensity.
3) Comparison between inertial and gravitational mass
i) Both are measured in the same units.
ii) Both are scalars.
iii) Both do not depends on the shape and state of the body.
iv) Inertial mass is measured by applying Newton’s second law of motion where as gravitational mass is
measured by applying Newton’s law of gravitation.
v) Spring balance measure gravitational mass and inertial balance measure inertial mass.
4. Comparison between mass and weight of the body

Mass (m) Weight (W)

It is a quantity of matter contained in a body It is the attractive force exerted by earth
on any body
Its value does not change with g Its value changes with g
Its value can never be zero for any at infinity and at the centre of earth
material particle its value is zero
Its unit is kilogram and its dimension is [M] Its unit is Newton or kg-wt and
–2
dimension are [MLT ]
It is determined by a physcial balance It is determined by a spring balance
It is a scalar quantity It is a vector quantity
Gravitational Field
We know that earth attracts every body towards its centre. According to Newton’s law of gravitation, the
force of attraction varies inversely as the square of the distance of the body from the centre of earth. This shows that
in the space all around the earth, its gravitational pull can be experienced by other material bodies. The same is true
for every material body.
The space surrounding a material body in which gravitational force of attraction can be experienced is called
its gravitational field.
INTENSITY OF GRAVITATIONAL FIELD
The intensity of gravitational field at a point in a gravitational field is defined as the force experienced by
a body of unit mass placed at that point provided the presence of unit mass does not disturb the original
244
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

gravitational field. It is always directed towards the centre of gravity of the body whose gravitational field is
considered. Intensity of gravitational field at a point is a vector quantity and is denoted by E.

  F
So if a test mass m at a point in a gravitational field experiences a force F then E  ------(25)
m
Important points
i) It is a vector quantity and is always directed towards the centre of gravity of body whose gravitational field
is considered.
ii) Units : Newton/kg or m/s2; Dimension : [MoLT–2]
iii) If the field is produced by a point mass M and the test mass m is at a distance r from it then by Newton’s
GMm
law of gravitation F 
r2

F GMm / r 2 GM
then intensity of gravitational field E    E 2
m m r
v) As the distance (r) of test mass from the point mass (M), increases, intensity of gravitational field decreases.

GM 1
E 2
;  E 2
r r

vi) Intensity of gravitational field E = 0, when r  

vii) Intensity at a given point (P) due to the combined effect of different point masses can be calculated by
vector sum of different intensities.

   
E net  E1  E 2  E3  .............

viii) Point of zero intensity: If two bodies A and B of different masses m1 and m2 are d distance apart.
Let P be the point of zero intensity ie, the intensity at this point is equal and opposite due to two bodies A
and B and if any test mass placed at this point, it will not experience any force.

  Gm1 Gm 2

For point P E1  E 2  0  x 2  d  x 2  0
 
m1 d m2 d
By solving x and  d  x   ------(26)
m1  m 2 m1  m 2
245
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

ix) Gravitational field line is a line, straight or curved such that a point mass placed in the field of another
mass would always move along this line. Field lines for an isolated mass m are radially inwards.

GM GM
x) As E  2 and also g  2  E  g
r R
Thus the intensity of gravitational field at a point in the field is equal to acceleration of test mass placed at that point.
Gravitational Potential
At a point in a gravitational field, potential V is defined as negative of work done per unit mass in shifting a
test mass from some reference point (usually at infinity) to the given point ie,
 
W F . dr    F 
V      E . dr  As m  E 
m m
dV GM
 E ------(27) , V ------(28)
dr r
ie, negative gradient of potential gives intensity of field or potential is a scalar function of position whose
space derivative gives intensity. Negative sign indicates that the direction of intensity is in the direction where the
potential decreases.
M  3R 2  r 2 
Note: Potential at a point inside a solid sphere V   G ------(29)
2R 3
Important points
i) It is a scalar quantity because it is defined as work done per unit mass.
ii) Unit : Joule / kg or m2/sec2
iii) Dimension : [MoL2T–2]
Example 3 : What are the values of gravitational attraction and potential at the surface of earth referred to zero
potential at infinite distance? Given that the mass of the earth is 6 × 1024 kg, the radius of earth is 6400 km and
G = 6.67 × 10–11 MKS units.
Solution : According to the theory of gravitation, for an external point a spherical mass distribution behaves as if the
whole of its mass were concentrated at the centre; so

GM  6.67  10    6  10 
11 24

I 2   9.8 N / kg
R  6.4  10 
6 2

GM  6.67  1011    6  10 24 
and V   R    6.25 107 J / kg
 6.4 10 6

246
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

iv) Gravitational potential difference : It is defined as the work done to move a unit mass from one point to
the other in the gravitational field. The gravitational potential difference in bringing unit test mass m from point A to
point B under the gravitational influence of source mass M is

WAB 1 1
V  VB  VA   GM    ------(30)
m  rB rA 

Gravitational Potential Energy

Gravitational potential energy of a body at a point in a gravitational field of another body is defined as
the amount of work done in bringing the given body from infinity to that point without acceleration.
When the body is at infinity with respect to another body, the gravitational attraction on the body is zero.
Therefore its potential energy is zero, which is called zero level of potential energy.
The gravitational potential energy of a body at a point is defined as the amount of work done in bringing the
body from infinity to that point against the gravitational force.

r r
GMm 1 GMm
W 2
dx   GMm   ; W

x  x  r

GMm
This work done is stored inside the body as its gravitational potential energy U   ----(31)
r
Important points
i) Potential energy is a scalar quantity.
ii) Unit : Joule; Dimensions : [ML2T–2]
iv) Gravitational potential energy is always negative in the gravitational field because the force is always attractive
in nature.
v) As the distance r increases, the gravitational potential energy becomes less negative ie, it increases.
vi) If r   then it becomes zero (maximum)
vii) In case of discrete distribution of masses.

 Gm1m 2 Gm 2 m3 
Gravitational potential energy U   u i      .........
 r12 r23 
viii) If the body of mass m is moved from a point at a distance r1 to a point at distance r2 (r1 > r2) then change in
potential energy
r2
GMm 1 1 1 1 
U   2
dx   GMm    or U  GMm    ------(32)
r1
x  r2 r1   r1 r2 
As r1 is greater than r2, the change in potential energy of the body will be negative. It means that if a body is
brought closer to earth its potential energy decreases.

247
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

GMm  GM 
ix) Relation between gravitational potential energy and potential U    m
r  r 
 U = mV
x) Gravitational potential energy at the centre of earth relative to infinity.

 3 GM  3 GMm
U centre  mVcentre  m    ------(33)
 2 R  2 R
xi) Gravitational potential energy of a body at height h from the earth surface is given by

GMm gR 2 m mgR
Uh     ------(34)
Rh Rh h
1
R
Work Done Against Gravity
If the body of mass m is moved from the surface of earth to a point at distance h above the surface of earth,
then change in potential energy or work done against gravity will be
1 1 
W  U  GMm   
 r1 r2 
1 1 
 W  GMm   [As r1 = R and r2 = R + h]
 R R  h 

GMmh mgh GM
 W  ------- (35) [As  g]
2 h h R2
R 1   1 
 R R
Important points
i) When the distance h is comparable to radius of the earth, then we will use above formula, eqn. (35).
 n 
ii) If h = nR then W  mgR   ------(36)
 n 1 
1
iii) If h = R then W  mgR
2
iv) If h is very small as compared to radius of the earth then term h/R can be neglected.

mgh  h 
From W   mgh -------------(37)  As  0
1 h / R R 
ESCAPE VELOCITY
When a body is projected vertically upwards from the surface of the earth, with a certain velocity, its motion is
opposed by gravitational pull and resistance of earth’s atmosphere, due to which the body rises up to a certain height
and then falls back to the earth. As velocity of projection is increased, the body attains a greater height before falling.
Finally a stage reaches when the velocity is so large that it just crosses the gravitational field and will never return
back to the earth on its own. The body is said to have escaped. The minimum velocity of projection to achieve this
stage is called escape velocity.
248
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

Thus escape velocity of a body is defined as the minimum velocity with which the body has to be projected
vertically upwards from the surface of a planet so that it just crosses the gravitational field of that planet
and never returns on its own.

Q
dx
P
xA
R
O

Let earth be a perfect sphere of mass M, radius R with centre at O. Let a body of mass m to be projected from
a point A on the surface of earth, (Fig. above). Join OA and produce it further.
Take two points P and Q at a distance x and (x + dx) from the centre O of the [Link] force of
GMm
attraction on the body at P is F
x2
This much force has to be applied on the body in the upward direction. Work done in taking the body against
GMm
gravitational attraction from P to Q is dW  Fdx  dx
x2
Total work done in taking the body against gravitational attraction from surface of earth (i.e x = R) to a region
beyond the gravitational field of earth (i.e. x   ) can be calculated by integrating the above expression within the
limits x = R to x   . Thus total work done is
 
GMm   x 1  1 

W dx  GMm R x 2
dx  GMm    GMm
R
x 2
 1  R  x  R


1 1 GMm
 GMm     ------(38)
  R R R
This work done is at the cost of kinetic energy given to the body at the surface of the earth. If ve is the escape
velocity of the body projected from the surface of earth, then
1
Kinetic energy of the body  mv e2 ------(39)
2
From (38) and (39)
1 GMm 2GM 2GM
 mv e2  or ve2  or ve  ------(40)
2 R R R
GM
As g  GM  gR 2
R2

2gR 2
Putting this value in (40), we get ve   2gR ------------(41)
R

249
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

4 3
If  is the density of earth, then, M  R 
3

2G 4 3 8GR 2
From (37), ve   R   ------(42)
R 3 3
Important points
i) Escape velocity is independent of the mass and direction of projection of the body.

ii) For the earth as g = 9.8 m/s2 and R = 6400 km  v e  2  9.8  6.4  106  11.2 km / sec
iii) A planet will have atmosphere if the rms velocity of molecule in its atmosphere is lesser than escape
velocity. This is why earth has atmosphere (as at earth v rms  v e ) while moon has no atmosphere (as at
moon v rms  v e ).
Kepler’s Laws of Planetary Motion
Johannes Kepler, a German mathematician and astronomer (1571-1630) after a life time study work out three
empirical laws which govern the motion of the planets and are known as Kepler’s laws of planetary motion. These are,
(1) The law of Orbits : Every planet moves around the sun in an elliptical orbit with sun at one of the foci.

(2) The law of Area : The line joining the sun to the planet sweeps out equal areas in equal interval of time. i.e.
areal velocity is constant. According to this law planet will move slowly when it is farthest from sun and more rapidly
when it is nearest to sun. It is similar to the law of conservation of angular momentum

dA 1 r  vdt  1 dA L L
Areal velocity    rv   ----------(43) [ As L = mvr; rv  ]
dt 2 dt 2 dt 2m m
(3) The law of periods: The square of period of revolution (T) of any planet around sun is directly proportional
to the cube of the semi-major axis of the orbit.
3
r r 
T  a or T   1 2 
2 3 2

 2 

250
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

r1  r2
From the figure AB = AF + FB; 2a  r1  r2  a  where a = semi - major axis.
2
r1 = Shortest distance of planet from sun (perigee); r2 = Largest distance of planet from sun (apogee)
SATELLITE
A satellite is a body which is revolving continuously in an orbit around a comparatively much larger
body. For example, earth is a satellite of sun and moon in turn is a satellite of earth.
PRINCIPLE OF LAUNCHING A SATELLITE
Satellite
v

A1
A2
R A3

Earth

Consider a very high tower on the surface of earth whose height is more than the height of the earth’s atmosphere.
Let a body be projected from top of this tower with some horizontal velocity. The body will describe a parabolic
path under the effect of gravity and hit the surface of earth at point A1. If the initial horizontal velocity of projection of
the body is increased, the body will hit the surface of earth at point A2, farther from the foot of the tower, (Fig.
above). The horizontal range in second case is more than that in the first case.
If we go on increasing the initial horizontal velocity of projection of the body, its horizontal range will also increase
and finally a stage will come when the body will describe a stable circular path around the earth and becomes a
satellite of earth. The velocity required to put the satellite into its orbit around the earth is called orbital
velocity of the satellite.
Orbital Velocity of Satellite
Orbital velocity of a satellite is the velocity required to put the satellite into its orbit around the earth.
For revolution of satellite around the earth, the gravitational pull provides the requied centripetal force.

mv2 GMm GM
 ;  v
r r2 r

gR 2 g
v R ----------(44) [As GM = gR2 and r = R + h]
Rh Rh
Important points
i) Orbital velocity is independent of the mass of the orbiting body and is always along the tangent of the orbit.
ii) Orbital velocity depends on the mass of central body and radius of orbit.

iii) 
For a given planet, greater the radius of orbit, lesser will be the orbital velocity of the satelite v  1/ r 
251
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

iv) Orbital velocity of the satellite when it revolves very close to the surface of the planet

GM
 v0   gR ----------(45); For the earth v  9.8  6.4  106  7.9 km / s  8 km / sec
R

GM ve
v) Close to the surface of planet v0  ;  v0  i.e., vescape  2 vorbital ----------(46)
R 2

It means that if the speed of a satellite orbiting close to the earth is made 2 times (or increased by 41%) then
it will escape from the graviational field.
1
vi) If the gravitational force of attraction of the sun on the planet varies as F  then the orbital velocity varies
rn
1
as v  .
r n 1
Time Period of Satellite
It is the time taken by satellite to go once around the earth.
Circumference of the orbit 2r r
 T orbital velocity
  2r
v GM

R  h
3 3/ 2
r3 R  h
 T  2 ;  T  2  2  1   -----(47) [As r = R + h]
GM gR 2 g  R
Important points
r3
i) From T  2 T is independant of mass of planet and depends on the mass of central body..
GM

r3 42 3
ii) T  2 T 
2
r ie, T 2  r 3 , accordance with Kepler’s third law..
GM GM
iii) Time period of nearby satellite

r2 R3 R
T  2  2 2
 2 ------- (48) [As h = 0 and GM = gR2]
GM gR g
For earth R = 6400 km and g = 9.8 ms–2.
T = 84.6 minutes = 1.4 hr
Height of Satellite
R  h
3
r3
As we know, time period of satellite T  2   2
GM gR 2
1/3
 T 2 gR 2 
From the above rearranging the equation h   2 
 R ----------(49)
 4 

252
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

By knowing the value of time period we can calculate the height of satellite from the surface of the earth.
Geostationary Satellite
The satellite which appears stationary relative to earth is called geostationary or geosynchronous satellite. It is
used as a communication satellite. Such a satellite appears stationary due to its zero relative velocity with respect to
that place on earth. The orbit of a geostationary satellite is known as the parking orbit
Important points
i) It should revolve in an orbit concentric and coplanar with the equatorial plane.
ii) Its sense of rotation should be same as that of earth about its own axis ie, in anti-clockwise direction (from west
to east).
iii) Period of revolution around the earth is the same as that of earth about its own axis.  T  24hr  86400 sec
iv) Height of geostationary satellite:
 R  h   24hr
3
r3
As T  2  2
GM GM
Susbstituting the value of G and M we get R + h = r  42000 km  7 R
 height of geostationary satellite from the surface of earth h  6R  36000 km.
GM
v) Orbital velocity of geostationary satellite can be calculated by v  , v = 3.08 km/sec.
r
Angular Momentum of Satellite
GM
Angular momentum of satellite L = mvr;  Lm r  L  m 2GMr -------(50)
r
Energy of a satellite
2
1 GMm 1  GM  GMm
Total energy of a satellite ; E = KE + PE  mv 
2
 m   
2 r 2  r  r
GMm GMm GMm
   ------(51)
2r r 2r
Weightlessness
The weight of a body is the force with which it is attracted towards the centre of earth. When a body is
stationary with respect to the earth, its weight equals the gravity. This weight of the body is known as its static or true
weight.
Weightlessness in a Satellite.
A satellite, which does not produce its own gravity moves around the earth in a circular orbit under the action
GM
of gravity. The acceleration of satellite is 2 towards the centre of earth.
r r
If a body of mass m placed on a surface inside a satellite moving around the earth. Then force on the body are
GMm
(i) The gravitational pull of earth  (ii) The reaction by the surface = R
r2

253
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

QUESTIONS
LEVEL - I
1. An artificial satellite revolving in a circular orbit around the earth has a total energy E0, being the sum of P.E. and
K.E. Its potential energy is
E0
1) 2 E 0 2) E 0 2 3)  4) 2 2 E 0
2
2. The orbital angular momentum of a satellite revolving at a distance r from the centre is L. If the distance is
increased to 16 r, then new angular momentum will be
L
1) 16 L 2) 64 L 3) 4) 4 L
4
3. The earth revolves round the sun is one year. If the distance between them becomes double, the new period of
revolution will be
1) 8 year 2) 4 year 3) 2 2 year 4) 2 year
4. If the radius of earth shrinks by 1.5% (mass remaining same), then the value of acceleration due to gravity
changes by
1) 1% 2) 2% 3) 3% 4) 4%
5. Two identical satellites A and B are circulating round the earth at the height of R and 2R respectively (where R
is the radius of earth). The ratio of kinetic energy of A to that of B is
2 3 3 5
1) 2) 3) 4)
3 2 5 3
3
6. A satellite is revolving round the earth in circular orbit at some height above surface of earth. It takes 5.26 × 10
seconds to complete a revolution while its centripetal acceleration is 9.32 m/s2. Height of satellite above
surface of earth is (Radius of earth 6.37 × 106 m)
1) 70 km 2) 120 km 3) 160 km 4) 220 km
7. ve and vp denote the escape velocities from the earth and another planet having twice the radius and the same
mean density as that of the earth. Then
vp vp
1) ve  2) ve  v p 3) ve  2v p 4) ve 
2 4
8. Time period of revolution of a satellite around a planet of radius R is T. Period of revolution around another
planet, whose radius is 3R but having same density is
1) T 2) 3T 3) 9T 4) 3 3 . T
9. Potential energy of a satellite having mass ‘m’ and rotating at a height of 6.4 × 106 m from the earth surface is
1) –0.5 mgRe 2) –mgRe 3) –2mgRe 4) 4mgRe
10. Two satellites A and B go round a planet P in circular orbits having radii 4R and R respectively. If the speed of
the satellite A is 3v, the speed of satellite B will be
4v 3v
1) 12 v 2) 6 v 3) 4)
3 2
254
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

11. The orbital velocity of an artificial satellite in a circular orbit just above the earth’s surface is v. For a satellite
orbiting at an altitude of half of the earth’s radius, the orbital velocity is

3  3 2
1) v 2) .v 3) .v 4) v
2 3 2 3

12. The radii of two planets are R1 and R2. Their densities are respectively 1 and 2 . The ratio of the acceleration
due to gravity at their surface is

g1 R 22 g1 R 21 g1 R11 g1 R12

1) g  R  2) g  R  3) g  R  4) g  R 
2 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1

13. The period of revolution of planet A around the sun is 8 times that of B. The distance of A from the sun is
............ times greater than that of B from the sun?
1) 4 2) 5 3) 6 4) 8
14. The height of the point vertically above earth’s surface at which acceleration due to gravity becomes 1% of its
value at the surface is (Radius of earth = R)
1) 8R 2) 9R 3) 10 R 4) 20 R
15. If mass and diameter of a planet are twice those of earth, the period of oscillation of pendulum on this planet will
be (If it is a second’s pendulum on earth)

1 1
1) sec 2) 2 sec 3) sec 4) 2 2 sec
2 2

16. If radius of earth is R, then the height h at which value of g becomes one-fourth is

R R 3R
1) 2) 3) 4) R
4 2 4
17. Two identical satellites A and B revolve round the earth in circular orbits, at distances R and 3R from the
surface of the earth, where R denotes radius of earth. The ratio of angular momenta of A and B is

1) 1 : 1 2) 1: 2 3) 2 :1 4) 2 : 1

18. ve denotes escape velocity for a planet. A tunnel is dug along a diameter of the planet. A small body is dropped
into it at the surface. The speed of body, when it reaches the centre of planet, will be

ve ve
1) 2ve 2) 2 ve 3) 4)
2 2

19. An artificial satellite of mass m orbits earth at a height R above the surface of earth. If g denotes gravitational
field intensity at the surface of earth of radius R, the kinetic energy of the revolving satellite will be

mgR mgR mgR mgR

1) 2) 3) 4)
4 2 3 5

255
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

20. A geostationary satellite orbits earth at a height of 6R above the surface of earth where R denotes radius of
earth. Another satellite revolves around earth at a height 2.5R from earth’s surface. The period of other satellite
will be
1) (6 × 2.5) hour 2) (6/2.5) hour 3) (2.5/6) hour 4) 6 2 hour
21. The magnitudes of gravitational fields at distances r1 and r2 from the centre of a uniform sphere of radius R are
F1 and F2. The ratio F1/F2 when r1 < R and r2 < r1, is
2
r1 r1  r1  r2
1) r 2) r2 3)   4) r1
2  r2 
22. g is the acceleration due to gravity at a point very near earth’s surface. The earth suddenly shrinks to a smaller
radius (x) where (x) = 0.8 R, where R denotes radius of earth, without change in its mass. Now, the acceleration
due to gravity at the same point will be
1) 0.8 g 2) 0.4 g 3) g 4) g/2
23. Two particles of equal mass m each, go round a circle of radius R, under the action of their mutual gravitational
attraction. The speed of each particle is

Gm 1  1 Gm 2Gm
1) 2) 3) 4)
2R 2R Gm 2 R R
24. A body of mass m is taken from earth surface to a height equal to radius of earth. The increase in potential
energy will be
mgR mgR
1) mgR 2) 3) 2mgR 4)
2 4
25. The change in potential energy when a body of mass m is raised to a height (nR) from the earth’s surface is
(radius of earth = R)

mgR  n  1 mgR  n  1 mgRn mgRn

1) 2) 3)  n  1 4)  n  1
n n
26. There are two bodies of masses 100 kg and 10,000 kg separated by a distance of 1 m. At what distance from
the smaller body, the intensity of gravitational field will be zero?
1 1 1 10
1) m 2) m 3) m 4) m
9 10 11 11
27. The metallic bob of simple pendulum has the relative density  . The time period of this pendulum is T. If the
metallic bob is immersed in water, then the new time period will be

T    1 T    1 
1) 2) 3) T 4) T
 (  1)     1
28. A satellite is placed in a circular orbit around earth at such a height that it always remains stationary with respect
to earth’s surface. Its height from earth’s surface is
1) 32,000 km 2) 36,000 km 3) 6400 km 4) 42400 km

256
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

29. Geostationary satellite orbits around the earth in a circular orbit of radius 42400 km. Then the time period of a
spy satellite orbiting a few hundred km above earth’s surface (R = 6400 km) will approximately be
1) 1/2 h 2) 3 h 3) 2 h 4) 4 h
30. A pendulum is taken inside 1 km from sea level. Then, in 1 day, it
1) Loses 13.5 sec 2) Gains 13.5 sec 3) Loses 7 sec 4) Gains 7 sec.
31. Two spheres, each of radius r, are touching each other. The force of attraction between them is proportional to
6
1) r 2) r4 3) r2 4) r–2
32. Energy required to move a body of mass m from an orbit of radius 2R to 3R is (where M = Mass of the earth,
R = Radius of the earth)
GMm GMm GMm GMm
1) 2) 3) 4)
12R 3R 8R 6R
33. Infinite number of masses, each of 3 kg, are placed along a straight line at the distances of 1 m, 2m, 4 m, 8m,
.... from a point O on the same line. If G denotes the universal constant of gravitation, then the magnitude of the
gravitational field intensity at O is
1) G 2) 2 G 3) 3 G 4) 4 G
34. A satellite goes along an elliptic path around earth. The rate of change of area swept by the line joining earth and
the satellite is proportional to
1) r 2) r 3) r2 4) r3
35. A small body of super dense material has a mass twice the mass of earth. Its size is very small as compared to
the size of earth. While at a height H << R above the earth’s surface, it starts from rest and reaches the earth’s
surface in time given by
H H 2H 4H
1) 2) 3) 4)
g g 3g 3g
36. Mass M is divided into two parts xM and (1 – x)M. For a given separation, the value of x for which the
gravitational attraction between the two pieces becomes maximum is
1 3
1) 2) 3) 1 4) 2
2 5
37. Four particles of mass m, 2m, 3m and 4m are kept in sequence at the corners of a square of side a. The
magnitude of gravitational force acting on a particle of mass m placed at the centre of the square will be
24m 2 G 6m 2 G 4 2 Gm 2
1) 2) 3) 4) Zero
a2 a2 a2
38. The moon’s radius is 1/4 that of the earth and its mass is 1/80 times that of the earth. If g represents the
acceleration due to gravity on the surface of the earth, that on the surface of the moon is
g g g g
1) 2) 3) 4)
4 5 6 8
39. The correct curve for gravitational intensity I of a spherical shell with distance from its centre is

257
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

40. The distance from the surface of earth (of radius 6400 km), where acceleration due to gravity becomes just
4% of its maximum value on the surface of earth, is
1) 25600 km 2) 26500 km 3) 56200 km 4) 65200 km
41. In order to have apparent weight of bodies at equator to be zero, the new speed of rotation of earth will be
1) 20 times slower than the present speed 2) 17 times slower than the present speed
3) 17 times faster than the present speed 4) 27 times faster than the present speed
42. Escape velocity of projectile on a planet’s surface is 11.2 km s–1. If a body is projected at double the speed,
its speed at an infinite distance from the planet is
1) 11.2 km s–1 2) 1.2 km s–1 3) 7.4 km s–1 4) 19.4 km s–1
43. The energy required to send a satellite (of earth of radius r) having mass 1000 kg from a circular orbit of radius
2r to another of radius 3r is
1) 5 × 107 J 2) 5 × 109 J 3) 9 × 105 J 4) 9 × 109 J
44. Three particles of mass M each are lying on the corners of an equilateral triangle of side l. If the length of each
side of the triangle is increased to twice, the work done is given by

3GM 2 3GM 2 GM 2 1.5GM

1) 2) 3) 4)
2l 2l l l

LEVEL - II
1. If the distance between centres of earth and moon is D and the mass of earth is 81 times the mass of moon, then
at what distance from centre of earth the gravitational force will be zero
D 2D 4D 9D
1) 2) 3) 4)
2 3 3 10
2. Weight of a body of mass m decreases by 1% when it is raised to height h above the earth’s surface. If the body
is taken to a depth h in a mine, change in its weight is
1) 2% decrease 2) 0.5% decrease 3) 1% increase 4) 0.5% increase
3. Two particles of equal mass go round a circle of radius R under the action their mutual gravitational attraction.
The speed of each particle is

1  Gm 1 Gm 4Gm
1) v  2) v  3) v  4) v 
2R Gm 2R 2 R R
4. A planet has mass 1/10 of that of earth, while radius is 1/3 that of earth. If a person can throw a stone on earth
surface to a height of 90 m, then he will be able to throw the stone on that planet to a height
1) 90 m 2) 40 m 3) 100 m 4) 45 m

258
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

1
5. The depth d at which the value of acceleration due to gravity becomes times the value at the surface,
n
is [R = radius of the earth]

R  n 1  R  n 
1) 2) R   3) 4) R  
n  n  n2  n 1 
o
6. The angular velocity of the earth with which it has to rotate so that acceleration due to gravity on 60 lattitude
becomes zero is (Radius of earth = 6400 km. At the poles g = 10 ms–2)
1) 2.5 × 10–3 rad/sec 2) 5.0 × 10–3 rad/sec 3) 10 × 101 rad/sec 4) 7.8 × 10–2 rad/sec
7. The gravitational potential in a region is given by V = (3x + 4y + 12z).J/kg. The modulus of the gravitational
field at (x = 1, y = 0, z = 3) is
1) 20 N kg–1 2) 13 N kg–1 3) 12 N kg–1 4) 5 N kg–1

8. A body weighs Wr in a train at rest. The train now begins to move with a velocity of v around the equator from
west to east. The angular velocity of earth is  . The same body in this train will now weigh as

2v  2v   g  v   3v 

1) Wr  2) Wr 1   3) Wr   4) Wr 1  
g  g   g   g 

1
9. If the radius of earth contracts of its present value, the length of the day will be approximately
n

24 24
1) h 2) h 3) 24 nh 4) 24n2 h
n n2
10. A uniform ring of mass m is lying at a distance 1.73 a from the centre of a sphere of mass M just over the sphere
where a is the small radius of the ring as well as that of the sphere. Then gravitational force exerted on the
sphere is

GMm GMm GMm GMm

1) 2) 1.73a 2 3) 3 4) 3
8a 2   a2 8a 2

259
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

K
11. The gravitational field due to a mass distribution is E  in the x-direction (K is a constant), Taking the
x3
gravitational potential to be zero at infinity, its value at a distance x is
K K K K
1) 2) 3) 2 4) 2x 2
x 2x x
12. The intensity of gravitational field at a point situated at a distance of 8000 km from the centre of the earth is 6N/
kg. The gravitational potential at that point is – (in Joule / kg)
1) 8 × 106 2) 2.4 × 103 3) 4.8 × 107 4) 6.4 × 1014
13. Two bodies of mass m and M are placed at distance d apart. The gravitational potential at the position where
the gravitational field due to them is zero is V, then

G Gm GM G
  M
2
1) V   m  M 2) V   3) V   4) V   m M
d d d d m
14. A satellite is revolving round the earth with orbital speed v0. If it stops suddenly, the speed with which it will
strike the surface of earth would be (ve = escape velocity of a particle on earth’s surface)

v e2
1)
v0
2) v 0 3) v2e  v20 4) ve2  2v02

15. A body of mass m kg. starts falling from a point 2R above the earth’s surface. Its kinetic energy when it has
fallen to a point ‘R’ above the earth’s surface [R-Radius of earth, M-Mass of earth, G-Gravitational constant]
1 GMm 1 GMm 2 GMm 1 GMm
1) 2) 3) 4)
2 R 6 R 3 R 3 R
16. If mass of earth is M, radius is R and gravitational constant is G, then work done to take 1 kg mass from earth
surface to infinity will be

GM GM 2GM GM
1) 2) 3) 4)
2R R R 2R
17. Three paticles each of mass 100 gm are brought from a very large distance to the vertices of an equilateral
triangle whose side is 20 cm in length. The work done will be
1) 0.33 × 10–11 J 2) –0.33 × 10–11 J 3) 1.00 × 10–11 J 4) –1.00 × 10–11 J
18. A boy can jump to a height h on ground level. What should be the radius of a sphere of density d such that on
jumping on it, he escapes out of the gravitational field of the sphere
1/ 2 1/ 2 1/ 2 1/ 2
 4 Gd   4 gh   3 gh   3 Gd 
1)   2)  3)  4)  
 3 gh   3 Gd   4 Gd   4 gh 

260
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

19. The escape velocity from the earth is about 11 km/s. The escape velocity from a planet having twice the radius
and the same mean density as the earth, is
1) 22 km/s 2) 11 km/s 3) 5.5 km/s 4) 15.5 km/s
20. A projectile is projected with velocity kve in vertically upward direction from the ground into the space. (ve is
escape velocity and k < 1). If air resistance is considered to be negligible then the maximum height from the
surface of the earth to which it can go, will be (R = radius of earth)

R R Rk 2 R
1) 2
k 1
2) 2
k 1  
3) 1  k 2 4)
k 1
21. A rocket of mass M is launched vertically from the surface of the earth with an initial speed V. Assuming the
radius of the earth to be R and negligible air resistance, the maximum height attained by the rocket above the
surface of the earth is
R R
 gR   2gR 
1)  gR  1 2) R  2
 1 3)  2gR  1 4) R  2  1
 2V
2
  2V   V
2
  V 

22. In planetary motion the areal velocity of position vector of a planet depends on angular velocity   and the
distance of the planet from sun (r). If so the correct relation for areal velocity is
dA dA dA dA
1)  r 2)  2 r 3)  r 2 4)  r
dt dt dt dt
23. The distance of Neptune and Saturn from sun are nearly 1013 and 1012 meters respectively. Assuming that they
move in circular orbits, their periodic times will be in the ratio
1) 10 2) 100 3) 10 10 4) 1/ 10
24. The maximum and minimum distance of a comet from the sun is 8 × 1012 m and 1.6 × 1012 m. If its velocity
when nearest to the sun is 60 m/s, what will be its velocity in m/s when it is farthest
1) 12 2) 60 3) 112 4) 6
25. A satellite A of mass m is at a distance of r from the centre of the earth. Another satellite B of mass 2 m is at
distance of 2r from the earth’s cente. Their time periods are in the ratio of
1) 1 : 2 2) 1 : 16 3) 1 : 32 4) 1: 2 2
26. A planet moves around the sun. At a given point P, it is closed to the sun at a distance d1 and has a speed v1. At
another point Q, when it is farthest from the sun at a distance d2, its speed will be
d12 v1 d 2 v1 d1v1 d 22 v1
1) 2 2) d 3) d 4) 2
d2 1 2 d1
27. Two satellites A and B go round a planet P in circular orbits having radii 4 R and R respectively. If the speed of
the satellite A is 3 v, the speed of the satellite B will be
1) 12 v 2) 6 v 3) 3 v 4) 2 v
28. If the gravitational force between two objects were proportional to 1/R; where R is separation between them,
then a particle in circular orbit under such a force would have its orbital speed  proportional to
1 1
1) 2) Ro 3) R1 4)
R2 R
261
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

29. The distance between centre of the earth and moon is 384000 km. If the mass of the earth is 6  1024 kg and
G  6.67 1011 Nm 2 / kg 2 . The speed of the moon is nearly
1) 1 km/sec 2) 4 km/sec 3) 8 km/sec 4) 11.2 km/sec
30. A satellite is launched into a circular obrit of radius ‘R’ around earth while a second satellite is launched into an
orbit of radius 1.02 R. The percentage difference in the time periods of the two satellite is
1) 0.7 2) 1.0 3) 1.5 4) 3
31. Periodic time of a satellite revolving above Earth’s surface at a height equal to R, where R the radius of Earth,
is [g is acceleration due to gravity at Earth’s surface]

2R R R R
1) 2 2) 4 2  3) 2 4) 8
g g g g

32. An earth satellite S has an orbit radius which is 4 times that of a communication satellite C. The period of
revolution of S is
1) 4 days 2) 8 days 3) 16 days 4) 32 days
33. One projectile after deviation from its path, starts moving round the earth in a circular path at radius equal to
nine times the radius at earth R, its time period will be

R R R R
1) 2 2) 27  2 3)  4) 8  2
g g g g

34. The gravitational potential difference between the surface of a planet and a point 20 m above it is 14 J kg–1.
The work done in moving a 2.0 kg mass by 8.0 m on a slope of 60o from the horizontal, is equal to
1) 7 J 2) 9.6 J 3) 16 J 4) 32 J
35. A satellite is moving around the earth with speed  in a circular orbit of radius r. If the orbit radius is decreased
by 1%, its speed will
1) Increase by 1% 2) Increase by 0.5% 3) Decrease by 1% 4) Decrease by 0.5%
36. If total energy of an earth satellite is zero, it means that
1) the satellite is bound to earth
2) the satellite may no longer be bound to earth’s field
3) the satellite moves away from the orbit along a parabolic path
4) the satellite escapes in a hyperbolic path.
37. Let a star be much brighter than our sun but its mass is same as that of sun. If our earth has average life span of
a man as 70 years the earth like planet of this star system having double the distance our earth from our star will
have an average life span of a man as

1) 25 planet years 2) 20 planet years 3) 70 years 4) 15 planet years

262
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

38. A satellite is orbiting just above the surface of a planet of average density D with period T. If G is the universal
3
gravitational constant, the quantity is equal to
G
1) T 2D 2) 3T 2 D 3) 3D 2 T 4) D2T

3
39. A neutron star has a mass of 5 × 1030 kg and size of 12 × 103 m. If it rotates with a speed of revolution per
2
second

1) Centripetal acceleration produced in an object placed at equator is 2 × 1012 ms–2.

2) Its acceleration due to gravity is 1 × 106 ms–2
3) An object placed on its equator escapes from its surface
4) An object placed at its equator sticks to its surface
40. The gravitational potential of two homogeneous spherical shells of same surface density at their respective
centres are in the ratio 3 : 4. If the two shells coalesce into single one, the potential of an internal point of the
shell when surface density remains unchanged is
1) 1 : 2 : 3 2) 2 : 3 : 4 3) 3 : 4 : 5 4) 4 : 5 : 6

263
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

KEY WITH HINTS

LEVEL - I
1 GmM GM
Total energy = Kinetic energy + Potential energy; E 0  mv 2  ; but  v 
2
1. 1
2 R R
GmM GmM
E0    P.E.    2E 0
2R R

GM L2 r 16r
2. 4 L = mvr But v  ; L r;  2   4 ; L = 4L = 4L
r L1 r1 r 2 1

2 3
 T1   R 1 
3. 3 Apply Kepler’s third law, T 2  R 3 ;      ; T2  8  2 2 year
 T2   R 2 

GM g R
4. 3 g 2
  2 (GM is constant) = | – 2 × 1.5 | = 3%
R g R

1 1  GM  E1 r2 3R 3
5. 2 K.E.  Mv 02  M  ;   
2 2  r  E 2 r1 2R 2

v2 2r Tv T 2a c r
6. 3 ac   ........ (i) and T  ........ (ii)  r
2
or r2  ;
r v 42

T 2a c
Rh  ; h = 160 km.
42

2GM 8G
7. 1 Escape velocity ve   .R
R 3

32G ve R 1
Similarly, v p  . R; Then, v  2R  2
3 p

GmM GM
8. 1 mR2  2 ;   3 ;
2

R R

g 1 G 2
   ra d /s ;  
r 8 0 0 3 T
T does not depend on R. Hence T remains as such

GMm GMm gR e2 m
9. 1 Potential energy   2R e ; where h = Re;
 P.E.     0.5 R e
2R e 2R e

264
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

GM v1 R2 1
10. 2 Orbital velocity   v;    v 2  6v
R v2 R1 2

GM GM v0 2 2
11. 2 v0  v0     v0  . v0
R 3R / 2 v0 3 3

GM 4G g1 R 11
12. 3 g  R  
R2 3 g 2 R 22
2 3
 T1   R1  R1
13. 1 Apply Kepler’s third law,    64    ;  4; R 1  4R 2
 T2   R2  R2

GM GM g 1  R 
2
g  ,g
14. 2
R  h
2
R 2 ; g  100   R  h  ; h  9R

2
l l Tp Me R p
15. 4  TP  2 , Te  2    2; Te  2 2 sec
gp ge ; Te M p R e2

2 2 2
 R  g  R  1  R 
16. 4 g  g   ;  g     ; R + h = 2R  h=R
Rh 4 Rh 4 Rh

17. 2 Angular momentum (L) = Moment of linear momentum

L1 r 1 L1 1
 L  mv0 r  m GMr ;   1   
L2 r2 2 L2 2

GmM
18. 3 P.E. of body on surface of earth = E P  
R

3 GmM
P.E. of body at the centre of earth =   Ep ; Let v = velocity at centre of earth.
2 R

1 GM ve2 ve
 mv 2  E P  EP or v 
2
 Rg  ; v
2 R 2 2

GM GM 1 mgR
 For orbital velocity, v 0    K.E.  mv 02 
2
19. 1 ;
r 2R 2 4

 T   r   3.5R 
2 3 2
1
20. 4  For revolving satellite, T 2  r 3   2   2    3  T2  6 2 hour
 T1   r1  7R 2

265
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

21. 1

G  4   r 3   F1 r1
; or F  ;  
r2  3 F2 r2

GM
22. 3 Acceleration due to gravity on or near earth = g  ; g is on the surface of earth.
R2
GM
g when the point is outside earth and r > R.
r2
When the earth shrinks, r and M are still the same.; Hence g remains as such
23. 3

mv 2 Gm  m 1 Gm
Centripetal force = Gravitational force or  2 ; v
R  2R  2 R

gR 2 g
24. 2 At height h = R; g  
R  h
2
4
Potential energy at surface of earth = – mgR
 mgR
Potential energy at height = –mg'h 
2
 mgR  mgR mgR
 Increase potential energy =    mgR    mgR 
2 2 2
GMm
25. 4 Potential energy in gravitational field = E 
r

1 1 
 Change in potential energy E  GMm   
 r1 r2 

GMm  nR  R  R  mgRn
Given r1 = R, r2 = (nR + R) ;  E  
R  nR  R   n  1
G  Mass G 100 G  10000
26. 3 Gravitational intensity due to a mass = E   
1  x 
2
 distance 
2 x2

1 10 1
or x  1  x  or 10 x = 1 – x or x  m
11
27. 4 Let volume of the bob = V  Weight of bob in air = Vg
266
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

 Weight of water displaced = V × 1 × g = Vg (Here density of water = 1 g cm–3)

 Loss in weight = Vg ; Weight of bob in water = Vg    1 (i)

g    1
 Weight of bob in water = mg' = Vg (ii)  Vg   Vg    1 or g 

T g 
Now  or T  T
T g    1
28. 2

For a satellite; Centripetal force = Gravitational force

GmM R 2g R 2T 2g
or mr  or r 3  
2
or or r 32  R 2 g ; ;
r2 2 42
or r  4.24 107 m or r = 42400 km  Height from earth’s surface = (r – R) = 36000 km
2 3 2 3 3
 T2   r2   T2   6400   8 
      0.15 
3
29. 3     or    
 T1   r1   T1   42400   53 
or T2  24   0.058  = 1.394 hour = 2 hour
1

T g g  d 2 T  d 
30. 3    1   ;  1   by binomial theorem.
T g  d R
g 1   
T  2R 
 R

T  1  T  T 1
or  1   or  = loss of time per second
T  2  6400  T 2  6400
24  60  60 27
 Loss in one day ie,   Loss per day =  7 sec approximately..
2  6400 4
31. 2

Gm1m 2 G4r 3 4r 3

; F , where d = 2 r or F  
3   2r 
2
d2 3

G  422 r 4
or F  or F  r 4
9

267
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

GMm  GMm  GMm

32. 4 Energy spent = Increase in potential energy    
3R  2R  6R

 
GM GM GM  1 
     GM   4GM
33. 4 Intensity, I
1  2   4 
2 2 2
..........
1 ;   4G  Intensity = 4G
1   3
 4

dA L mvr vr 1 dA
34. 1 Areal velocity =     GMr or  r
dt 2m 2m 2 2 dt

 2m  0    m  H   H
35. 3 By using centre of mass ,  r 
2m  m 3

2 H 2H
 Time of journey = g3  Time  3g

Gm1m 2 GxM 1  x  M
36. 1 Gravitational force F  
r2 r2
dF d
For maximum value of force
dx
0 
dx
 x  x 2   0  1  2x  0  x  1/ 2
37. 3

Gmm
If two particles of mass m are placed x distance apart then force of attraction  F (Let)
x2
Now according to problem particle of mass m is placed at the centre (P) of square. Then it will experience
four forces.

Gmm
FPA = force at point P due to particle A  F
x2

G2mm G3mm G4mm

Similarly FPB  2
 2F, FPC  2
 3F and FPD   4F
x x x2

   Gmm
Hence the net force on P Fnet   Fi  2 2 F  Fnet  2 2
x2

2a 9 4 2 Gm 2
x   Fnet 
2 2 a2
268
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

GM g m M m R e2 16 g
38. 2 Acceleration due to gravity g  2   . ; g moon  g earth  
R g e M e R 2m 80 5

39. 2 Inside a shell and at centre, I = 0

At surface I is maximum and at an external point

1
I
r2

R2 gh R2 4 R2 gh 4 R2
40. 1 g
Using h  g    
R  h ; g R  h ; or 100
 R  h  ; g 100  R  h 
2 2 2 2

or h = 4R = 25600 km
41. 3 For the apparent weight of a body to be zero,

g 1 g
mr 2  mg ;    rad/s ; i.e.,  
r 800 r

2 2 800
Change in time period, T    1.4 hour
 1 3600

24
Thus earth should rotate  17 times faster..
1.4
42. 4 From the principle of conservation of energy

1 1 1
mv 2  mvi2  mv e2 or v  vi2  ve2  3 ve  19.4 km/s
2 2 2

GMm GMm
43. 2 U1   and U2    W = U2 – U1 = 5.02 × 109 J
2  2r 2  3r

 GM 2   GM 2 
44. 2 U1  3   ; U2  3   
 l   2l 

3 GM 2 3GM 2 3 GM 2
 Work done =  in P.E. = U2 – U1    
2 l l 2 l

269
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

LEVEL - II
1. 4

Gm1m Gm 2 m
If P is the point where net gravitational force is zero then FPA  FPB ;  ;
d  x 
2
x2

m1 D m1 D 9D
So x   
m1  m 2 m1 10
m1 
81

g 2h  100
2. 2 Percentage change in g when the body is raised to height h,  100%   1%
g R

g h
Percentage change in g when the body is taken into depth at,  100%   100%
g R

1  2h  1
 percentage decrease in weight  2  R  100   2 1%   0.5%
 
3. 3

m 2R

Both the particles moves diametrically opposite position along the circular path of radius R and the
gravitational force provides required centripetal force.
mv2 Gmm 1 Gm
 v
 2R  ;
2
R 2 R

GM g p 9
4. 3 Acceleration due to gravity g  ; 
R 2 g e 10
If a stone is thrown with velocity u from the surface of the planet then maximum height.
u2 Hp ge
H ; H g ; Hp = 100 m.
2g e p

 d g  d d 1  n 1 
5. 2 g  g  1   ;  g 1   ;  1 ; d R
 R n  R R n  n 
270
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

6. 1 Effective acceleration due to gravity due to rotation of earth g  g  2 R cos 2 

4g 2
0  g  2 R cos 2 60o ;    rad/sec = 2.5 × 10–3 rad/s
R 800

 dV ˆ V ˆ V ˆ 
7. 2 I  
 dx
i
dy
j
dz 

k    3iˆ  4ˆj  12kˆ  ; As V = (3x + 4y + 12z)

It is uniform field. Hence its value is same everywhere | I |  32  4 2  122  13 N kg 1

8. 2 Let W be the weight of the body of mass m when train is at rest and earth is not rotating. Let ve be
velocity of earth and R be the radius of earth, then

mve2
Wr  W  ------(i)
R

 v  v
2

Train moves from West to East, Wm m e -----(ii)

R
m 2 mg
Wm  Wr 
R
 v  2v e v  
Rg
 2ve v   2v v  v 
e
2

mg   2v 
  2v   Wr 2v ; or Wm  Wr 1  
g g  g 

2 2
9. 2 Conservation of angular momentum L  I  MR 2  = constant
5 T
 T  R 2 [if M remains same]
2
T2  R / n  1 24
   2; T2  hr [As T1 = 24 hr]
T1  R  n n2

Gmr
I
10. 4 Intensity due to uniform circular ring at a point on its axis
a  r2 
2 3/ 2

GMmr GMm 3 a 3 GMm

 
 Force on sphere F 
a 2
r 
2 3/2  4a 
2 3/ 2 8a 2

K K
11. 4 V    E dx    3
dx  2
x 2x
GM GM
12. 3 Gravitational intensity at point p, I  and graviational potential; V
r2 r
Joule
 V  I  r  4.8  107
kg
271
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

M m
13. 4 If P is the point of zero intensity, then x  d and d  x  d
M m M m

GM GM G M
 
2
Now potential at point p, V  V1  V2    m M
x dx d m
14. 4 Applying conservation of mechanical energy between A and B point

GMm 1  GMm  2GM 2GM

  mv 2    ; v2    v e2  2v 20 ; v  v e2  2v 02
r 2  R  R r
15. 2 When body starts falling toward earth’s surface its potential energy decreases so kinetic energy increases.
Increase in kinetic energy = Decrease in potential energy

 GMm   GMm   GMm   GMm  1 GMm

Final kinetic energy – 0 =       
 r1   r2   R  2R   R  R  6 R

 GMm  GMm GM
16. 2 Work done  U final  U initial  U  U R  0      [As m = 1 kg]
 R  R R
17. 4

Potential energy of three particles system U   Gm1m 2  Gm 2 m3  Gm1m 3 ;

r1 2 r2 3 r1 3
11
U  1 10 J
18. 3 When a boy jumps from a ground level upto h then its velocity v  2gh ----------(1)

2G  4 3 
Also ve   R d  ---------- (2)
R 3 
1/ 2
8  3 gh 
From (1) and (2) 2gh  R Gd ; R
3  4 Gd 

272
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

2GM 8
19. 1 ve   GR 2
R 3
 v e  R if  = cosntant. Since the planet having double radius in comparison to earth therefore the
escape velocity becomes twice ie 22 km/s.
20. 3 Difference in PE = KE at point of projection.

mgh 1 Rk 2
 m  kv e  ; But v e  2gR
2
 h
1
h 2 1 k2
R
21. 3 KE of rocket = change in PE of rocket.

1 mgh 1 2g 1 V2R R
mV 2    ; h h
2 h; h V2 R 2gR  V 2
;  2gR 
1  2  1
R  V 

dA L mvr 1 2 dA
22. 3    r ; Since L = mvr and v  r   r 2
dt 2m 2m 2 dt
3/ 2 3/2
TNeptune  R Neptune   1013 
23. 3 Kepler’s third law T 2  R 2      12   10 10
TSaturn  R Saturn   10 
24. 1 According to conservation of angular momentum
rmin
mv min rmax  mv max rmin  constant ;  v min  v max   12 m / s
rmax
25. 4 Time period doesnot depend upon the mass of satellite, it only depends upon the orbital radius
3/ 2 3/ 2
T1  r1   r  1
According to Kepler’s law     
T2  r2   2r  2 2
26. 3 According to law of conservation of angular momentum
d1v1
mv1d1  mv 2 d 2  v2 
d2

GM vB r vB 4R
27. 2 Orbital velocity of satellite v    A ;  ; vB = 6
r vA rB 3v R

1 1 1
28. 2 If F  then v  n 1 ; here n = 1 v
11
 Ro
Rn R R

GM
29. 1 Orbital velocity v  ; v  1.02 km / sec  1 km / sec
r

273
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

T1  1.02R 
3/ 2
30. 4 T2  R 3 ;

 T1  T  1.02   1 1.03014  1
3/ 2

 Percentage decrease  T   100   100  0.0301 100  3%

  1 1

R  h R  R
3 3
8R R
31. 2 T  2  2 2
 2  4 2
GM gR g g

3/ 2
T r 
  4
3/ 2
32. 2 From Kepler’s law T  r 3/2  s  s  ; Ts = 8 Tc = 8 days
Tc  rc 

 9R 
3
r3 R R
 2  9 
3/2
33. 2 T  2  2  27  2
gR 2 gR 2
g g

dV 14
34. 2 Gravitational intensity, I   0.7 Nkg 1 = g
dx 20
Work done under this field in displacing a body on a slope of 60o through a distance s
= m(g sin 60o)s = 9.6 J

GM 1
35. 2 Orbital velocity v   v (If r decreases then v increase)
r r
1 1
Percentage change in v  (Percentage change in r) = 1%   0.5%
2 2
 Orbital velocity increase by 0.5%.
36. 3 For total energy < zero, the satellite remains bound to earth, for energy = zero it moves away from the
orbit in parabolic path but for energy > zero it escapes from the orbit in hyperbolic path.
3 3
T  r  2  2r  2
37. 1 Here 2   2     ; T2  2 2 ; T1  2 2 years
T1  r1   r 

70
 life of man on new planet  = 25 planet years.
2 2

38. 1 Using T  2 R3 R3
 2
GM 4
G   R 3 D
3

42 R 3 3 3
or T 2   or  T2D
4 G
G R 3 D DG
3
274
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

GM  6.67  10  5 10   2.3 10

11 30

g   12
ms 2
39. 4 Acceleration due to gravity,
12 103 
2
r2

Centrifugal acceleration

a  r2  r   2v   12 103   2  1.5  1.07  106 ms 2

2 2

Since a < g, so the object remains stuck to the surface of the star.

40. 3 Mass of single shell = sum of masses of two shells 4r 2  4r12  4r22 is surface density, r is radius
of shell after coalesce ; r1 and r2 are radii of individual shells.
If V1 and V2 are potentials at the centres of two shells then

GM1 GM V1 3 r2 9
V1    4Gr1 and V2    4Gr2   i.e., 12  .
r1 r2 V2 4 r2 16

Then r12 : r22 : r 2  r12 : r22 :  r12  r22   9 :16 : 25 ; or V1 : V2 : V  3 : 4 : 5

275
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

CHAPTER - 07
PROPERTIES OF BULK MATTER
PROPERTIES OF SOLIDS
SOLIDS
A solid is that state of matter in which its constituent atoms or molecules are held strongly at the positions of
minimum potential energy and it has a definite shape and volume.
Interatomic Forces
The forces between the atoms due to electrostatic interaction between the charges of the atoms are called
interatomic forces. These forces are electrical in nature and these are active if the distance between the two atoms is
of the order of atomic size ie, 10–10 metre.
1. Intermolecular Forces
The forces between the molecules due to electrostatic interaction between the charges of the molecules are
called intermolecular forces also called Vander Waal forces.
2. Comparison between Inter atomic and Intermolecular Forces
a) Similarities
(i) Both the forces are electrical in origin.
(ii) Both the forces are active over short distances.
(iii) General shape of force-distance graph is similar for both the forces.
(iv) Both the forces are attractive upto certain distance between atoms/molecules and become repulsive
when the distance between them become less than that value.
b) Dissimilarities
(i) Interatomic force depends upon the distance between the two atoms, whereas the intermolecule
force depends upon the distance between the two molecules as well as their relative orientation.
(ii) Interatomic forces are about 50 to 100 times stronger than intermolecular forces.
3. States of Matter
The three states of matter differ from each other due to the following two factors.
a) The different magnitudes of the interatomic and intermolecular forces.
b) The extent of random thermal motion of atoms and molecules of a substance (which depends upon temperature)
Note: The fourth state of matter in which the medium is in the form of positive and negative ions, is known as
plasma. Plasma occurs in the atmosphere of stars (including the sun) and in discharge tubes.
4. Types of Solids
A solid is that state of matter in which its constituent atoms or molecules are held strongly at the position of
minimum potential energy and it has a definite shape and volume. The solids can be classified into two categories,
crystalline and glassy or amorphous solids.
276
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

5. Elastic Property of Matter

a) Deforming force. If a force applied on a body produces a change in the normal positions of the molecules
of the body, then the force applied is called deforming force. Thus a deforming force is one which when
applied changes the configuration of the body,.
b) Elasticity : The property of matter by virtue of which a body tends to regain its original shape and size after
the removal of deforming force is called elasticity. If on the removal of deforming forces the body regain its
original configuration completely it is said to be perfectly elastic. A quartz fibre and phosphor bronze are the
nearest approach to the perfectly elastic body.
c) Plasticity : The property of matter by virtue of which it does not regain its original shape and size after the
removal of deforming force is called plasticity.
If the body does not have any tendency to recover its original configuration, on the removal of deforming force,
it is said to be perfectly plastic. Paraffin wax, wet clay are the nearest approach to the perfectly plastic body.
6. Elastic limit:
Elastic bodies show their property of elasticity upto a certain value of deforming force. The maximum deforming
force upto which a body retains its property of elasticity is called elastic limit of the material of the body.
Elastic limit is the property of a body whereas elasticity is the property of material of the body.
7. Elastic fatigue :
The temporary loss of elastic properties because of the action of repeated alternating deforming force is called
elastic fatigue.
It is due to this reason.
(i) Bridges are declared unsafe after a long time of their use.
(ii) Spring balances show wrong readings after they have been used for a long time.
(iii) We are able to break the wire by repeated bending.
8. Elastic after effect : The time delay in which the substance regains its original condition after the removal of
deforming force is called elastic after effect.
9. Stress
When a force is applied on a body there will be a relative displacement of the particles and due to the property
of elasticity, an internal restoring force is developed which tends to restore the body to its original state.
The internal restoring force acting per unit area of cross section of the deformed body is called stress.
At equilibrium, restoring force is equal in magnitude to external force, stress can therefore be defined as external
force per unit area on a body that tends to cause it to deform.
Force F
If external force F is applied on the area A of a body then, Sress  
Area A
Unit : N/m2 (S.I.), dyne/cm2 (C.G.S.); Dimension : [ML–1T–2]
Depending on external force applied there are two types of stresses : Normal and Shear or tangential stress.
a) Normal stress: Here the force is applied normal to the surface.
It is again of two types : Longitudinal and Bulk or volume stress.
(i) Longitudinal stress
Deforming force is applied parallel to the length and causes increase in length. Longitudinal stress produced due
to increase in length of a body under a deforming force is called tensile stress.
277
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Longitudinal stress produced due to decrease in length of a body under a deforming force is called compressional
stress.
(ii) Bulk or Volume stress
It occurs in solids, liquids or gases. In the case of fluids only bulk stress can be found. It produces change in
volume and density, shape remaining same. It is equal to change in pressure because change in pressure is
responsible for change in volume.
b) Shear or tangential stress: It comes in picture when successive layers of solid move on each other ie,
when there is a relative displacement between various layers of the solid.

(i) Here deforming force is applied tangential to one of the faces.

(ii) Area taken for calculation is the area of the face on which force is applied.
(iii) It produces change in shape, volume remaining the same.

10. Strain
The ratio of change in configuration to the original configuration is called strain.
Being the ratio of two like quantities, it has no dimensions and units.
Strain are of three types:
a) Linear strain : If the deforming force produces a change in length alone, the strain produced in the body is
called linear strain or tensile strain.

Change in length  l 
Linear strain 
Original length  l 

Linear strain in the direction of deforming force is called longitudinal strain and in a direction perpendicular to
force is called lateral strain.
b) Volumetric strain : If the deforming force produces a change in volume alone the strain produced in the
body is called volumetric strain.

278
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

Change in volume  V 
Volumetric strain 
Original volume  V 

c) Shearing strain : If the deforming force produces a change in the shape of the body without changing its
volume, strain produced is called shearing strain.
It is defined as the angle in radians through which a plane perpendicular to the fixed surface of the cubical body
gets turned under the effect of tangential force.

x

L

Note: When a beam is bent both compression strain as well as an extension strain are produced.

11. Stress-strain Curve

If by gradually increasing the load on a vertically suspended metal wire, a graph is plotted between stress (or
load) and longitudinal strain (or elongation) we get the curve as shown in figure. From this curve it is clear that:
a) When the strain is small (<2%) (ie, in region OP) stress is proportional to strain. This is the region where the
Hooke’s law is obeyed. The point P is called limit of proportionality and slope of line OP gives the Young’s
modulus Y of the material of the wire. If  is the angle of OP from strain axis then Y  tan  .
b) If the strain is increased a little bit, ie, in the region PE, the stress is not proportional to strain. The wire still
regains its original length after the removal of stretching force. This behaviour is shown up to point E known
as elastic limit or yield-point. The region OPE represents the elastic beahviour of the material of wire.
c) If the wire is stretched beyond the elastic limit E, ie, between EA, the strain increases much more rapidly and
if the stretching force is removed the wire does not come back to its natural length. Some permanent increase
in length takes place.

d) If the stress is increased further, by a very small increase in it a very large increase in strain is produced
(region AB) and after reaching point B, the strain increases even if the wire is unloaded and ruptures at C. In
the region BC the wire literally flows. The maximum stress corresponding to B after which the wire begins to

279
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

flow and breaks is called breaking or tensile strength. The region EABC represents the plastic behaviour of
the material of wire.
Brittle material
A brittle material when subjected to stress, it breaks without significant plastic deformation. e.g., ceramics, glass
etc.

The plastic region between E and C is small for brittle material and it will break soon after the elastic limit is
crossed.
Ductile material
Ductility is a measure of materials ability to undergo significant plastic deformation before rupture. Ductility is
characterised by materials ability to be stretched into a wire. Malleability is materials ability to deform under
compressive stress, it can be made a sheet by hammering. Gold has good ductility and malleability while lead has
low ductility but high malleability.

The material of the wire which have a good plastic range and such materials can be easily changed into different
shapes and can be drawn into thin wires.
Elastomers are polymers capable of recovering their original shape after being stretched to great extents.

Stress strain graph is a curve within the elastic limit for elastomers and strain produced is much larger than the
stress applied. Such materials have no plastic range and the breaking point is close to elastic limit. e.g., rubber.
12. Hooke’s law and Modulus of Elasticity
According to this law, within the elastic limit, stress is directly proportional to the strain.
stress
ie, stress  strain or  costant=E ----------(1); E is called modulus of elasticity.
strain

It’s value depends upon the nature of the material of the body and the manner in which the body is deformed.
It’s value depends upon the temperature of the body. It’s value is independent of the dimensions (length, volume
etc.) of the body.
280
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

There are three moduli of elasticity namely Young’s modulus (Y), Bulk modulus (K) and modulus of rigidity (  )
corresponding to the three types of the strains.
13. Young’s Modulus (Y) is defined as the ratio of normal stress to longitudinal strain within limit of elasticity.
Normal stress F / A FL
Y  
longitudinal strain l / L Al ----------(2)
MgL
If force is applied on a wire of radius r by hanging a weight of mass M, then Y 
r 2l
Example 1 : Calculate the elongations of (a) a copper wire of 1.4 mm diameter and (b) an aluminium wire of 1 mm
diameter as shown in figure, if Young’s modulus for copper and aluminium are 11 × 1010 N/m2 and 7 × 1010 N/m2
respectively.

FL
Solution : By definition of Young’s modulus, L  .
YA
(a) As tension in the copper wire will be due to the load of 7 kg.
7  9.8  0.5
TCu  M1g  7  9.8 N ;  L Cu   0.2  103 m
 22 / 7   0.7 10 
3 2
 1110 10

(b) The tension in the aluminium wire will be

11 9.8  1
TAl  M 2 g  TCu  11 9.8 N ;  L Al   1.96 10 3 m
 22 / 7   0.5 10 
3 2
 7  10 10

14. Elongation in a wire by its own weight: The weight of the wire Mg act at the centre of gravity of the wire so
that length of wire which is stretched will be L/2.
FL Mg  L / 2  MgL L2 dg
 Elongation l     ----------(3)
AY AY 2AY 2Y
[As mass (M) = volume (AL) × density (d)]
15. Thermal stress : If a rod is fixed between two rigid supports, due to change in temperature, its length will
change and so it will exert a normal stress (compressive if temperature increases and tensile if temperature
decreases) on the supports. This stress is called thermal stress.

281
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

l l
As by definition, coefficient of linear expansion  ;  thermal strain  
L L
So thermal stress =  Y ; And tensile or compressive force produced in the body  YA
Note: In case of volume expansion Thermal stress = K ;
K = Bulk modulus,  = coefficient of cubical expansion.
16. Force between the two rods : Two rods of different metals, having the same area of cross section A, are
placed end to end between two massive walls as shown in figure. The first rod has a length L1, coefficient of
linear expansion 1 and young’s modulus Y1. The corresponding quantities for second rod are L 2 ,  2 and Y2.
If the temperature of both the rods is now raised by T degrees.

Increase in length of the composite rod (due to heating) will be equal to l1  l2   L11  L2  2  T
and due to compressive force F from the walls due to elasticity,

 L1 L 2  F
decrease in length of the composite rod will be equal to   
 Y1 Y2  A
as the length of the composite rod remains unchanged the increase in length due to heating must be equal to
F  L1 L2 
decrease in length due to compression ie, A  Y  Y    L11  L 2  2  T
 1 2

A  L11  L 2  2  T
or F  -------(4)
 L1 L 2 
Y  Y 
 1 2

17. Force constant of wire: Force required to produce unit elongation in a wire is called force constant of material
F
of wire. It is denoted by k.  k --------(5)
l
F/A F YA YA
but from the definition of young’s modulus Y    -------(6)  k
l/L l L L
It is clear that the value of force constant depends upon the dimension (length and area of cross section) and
material of a substance.
18. Work Done in Stretching a Wire
In stretching a wire work is done against internal restoring forces. This work is stored in the wire as elastic
potential energy or strain energy. If a force F acts along the length L of the wire of cross-section A and stretches
it by x then

282
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

stress F / A FL YA
Y   F .x
strain x / L Ax L

YA
So the work done for an additional small increase dx in length, dw  Fdx  [Link]
L
1 1
YA 1 YA 2
Hence the total work done in increasing the length by l, W   dW   L .x dx  2 L l
0 0

1 YAl 2 1
This work done is stored in the wire.  Energy stored in wire U   Fl ----------(7)
2 L 2
Dividing both sides by volume of the wire we get energy stored in per unit volume of wire.
1 F l 1 1 1
U V      stress  strain   Y   strain    stress  ----------(8)
2 2

2 A L 2 2 2Y
[As AL = volume of wire]
19. Breaking of Wire
When the wire is loaded beyond the elastic limit, then strain increases much more rapidly. The maximum stress
corresponding to B (see stress-strain curve) after which the wire begin to flow and breaks, is called breaking
stress or tensile strength and the force by application of which the wire breaks is called the breaking force.
(i) Breaking force depends upon the area of cross-section of the wire ie, Breaking force  A
 Breaking force = P × A; Here P is a constant of proportionality and known as breaking stress.
(ii) Breaking stress is a constant for a given material and it does not depends upon the dimension (length or
thickness) of wire

(iii) If a wire of length L is cut into two or more parts, then each part of it again can hold the same weight. Since
breaking force is independent of the length of wire.
(iv) If a wire can bear maximum force F, then wire of same material but double thickness can bear maximum
force 4F because Breaking force  r 2 .
(v) The working stress is always kept lower than that of a breaking stress.

breaking stress
So that safety factor = working stress may have large value.

(vi) Breaking of wire under its own weight.

Breaking force = Breaking stress × Area of cross section.

283
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

P
Weight of wire = Mg = ALdg = PA ;  Ldg  P  L ----------(9)
dg
This is the length of the wire if it breaks by its own weight.
20. Bulk Modulus
When a solid or fluid (liquid or gas) is subjected to a uniform pressure all over the surface, such that the
shape remains the same, then there is a change in volume.
Then the ratio of normal stress to the volumetric strain within the elastic limits is called as Bulk modulus. This
is denoted by K.

Normalstress F/A PV

K K 
Volumetric strain ; V / V V
----------(10)

where P = increase in pressure ; V = original volume; V = change in volume.

The negative sign shows that with increase in pressure, P the volume decreases by V i,e if P is positive, V
is negative. The reciprocal of bulk modulus is called compressibility.
1 V
C = compressibility =  ----------(11)
K PV
S.I. unit of compressibility is N–1m2 and C.G.S. unit is dyne–1 cm2.
Gases have two bulk moduli, namely isothermal elasticity E0 and adiabatic elasticity E  .
Example 2 : Compute the bulk modulus of water if its volume changes from 100 litre to 99.5 litre under a pressure
of 100 atmosphere. Compare it with that of air
Solution : By definition of bulk modulus,

BW   V

 100 
100 1.013 10 5
  2.026 10 N / m
9 2

V  99.5  100 
Now as isothermal elasticity of a gas is equal to its pressure,
BA  E   0  1.013  1015 N / m 2

BW CA 2.026  109  1
So that    2  104  as C  B 
BA C W 1.013 10 5

i.e., bulk modulus of water is very large as compared to air. This means that air is about 20,000 times more
compressive than water, i.e., the average distance between air molecule is much larger than that between water
molecules.
284
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

21. Modulus of Rigidity

Within limits of elasticity, the ratio of tangential stress to the shearing strain is called modulus of rigidity of the
Shearing stress
material of the body and is denoted by  , ie,   Shearing strain

In this case the shape of a body changes but its volume remains unchanged.
Consider a cube of material fixed at its lower face and acted upon by a tangential force F at its upper surface
having area A. The shearing stress, then, will be

F|| F
Shearing stress = 
A A
This shearing force causes the consecutive horizontal layers of the cube to the slightly displaced or sheared
relative to one another, each line such as PQ or RS in the cube is rotated through an angle  by this shear. The
shearing strain is defined as the angle  in radians through which a line normal to a fixed surface has turned. For
small values of angle,
QQ x
Shearing strain =   
PQ L
22. Poisson’s Ratio
When a long bar is stretched by a force along its length then its length increases and the radius decreases as
shown in the figure.
Lateral strain : The ratio of change in radius to the original radius is called lateral strain.
Longitudinal strain : The ratio of change in length to the original length is called longitudinal strain.
The ratio of lateral strain to longitudinal strain is called Poisson’s ratio

Lateral strain
ie,   Longitudinal strain

dr / r
 ----------(12); Negative sign indicates that the radius of the bar decreases when it is stretched.
dL / L
Poisson’s ratio is a dimensionless and a unitless quantity.

285
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

23. Relation between Y, k,  and 

Moduli of elasticity are three, viz, Y, K and  while elastic constants are four, viz, Y, K,  and  . Poisson’ss
ratio  is not modulus of elasticity as it is the ratio of two strains and not of stress to strain. Elastic constants are
found to depend on each other through the relations: Y  3K 1  2  and Y  2 1    .

9K 3K  2
Y and   ----------(13)
3K   6K  2
24. Torsion of Cylinder
If the upper end of a cylinder is clamped and a torque is applied at the lower end the cylinder gets twisted by an
angle  . Simultaneously shearing strain  is produced in the cylinder..

(i) The angle of twist  is directly proportional to the distance from the fixed end of the cylinder..
At fixed end   0o and at free end  = maximum.
(ii) The value of angle of shear  is directly proportional to the radius of the cylindrical shell.
At the axis of cylinder  = 0 and at the outer most shell  = maximum.

r
(iii) Relation between angle of twist    and angle of shear    ; AB  r  l  
l

r 4
(iv) Twisting couple per unit twist or torsional rigidity C   C  r 4  A 2 ----- (14)
2l

1 2 r 4 2
(v) Work done in twisting the cylinder through an angle  is W  C  ----------(15)
2 4l
25. Interatomic Force constant
Behaviour of solids with respect to external forces is such that their atoms are connected to springs. When an
external force is applied on a solid, the distance between its atoms changes and interatomic force works to
restore the original dimension.
The ratio of interatomic force to that of change in interatomic distance is defined as the interatomic force
F
constant. K  .
r

It is also given by K  Y  r0 [Where Y = Young’s modulus, r0 = Normal distance between the atoms of wire]
Unit of interatomic force constant is N/m and Dimension MT–2.

286
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

26. Elastic Hysteresis

When a deforming force is applied on a body then the strain does not change simultaneously with stress rather
it lags behind the stress. The lagging of strain behind the stress is defined as elastic hysteresis.
Hysteresis loop : The area of the stress-strain curve is called the hysteresis loop and it is numerically equal to
the work done in loading the material and then unloading it.

If we have two tyres of rubber having different hysteresis loop then rubber B should be used for making the car
tyres. It is because of the reason that area under the curve ie, work done in case of rubber B is lesser and hence
the car tyre will not get excessively heated and rubber A should be used to absorb vibration of the machinery
because of the large area of the curve, a large amount of vibrational energy can be dissipated.
27. Practical Applications of Elasticity
a) The metallic parts of machinery are never subjected to a stress beyond elastic limit, otherwise they will get
permanently deformed.
b) The thickness of the metallic rope used in the crane in order to lift a given load is decided from the knowledge
of elastic limit of the material of the rope for the factor of safety.
c) The bridges are declared unsafe after long use because during its long use, a bridge under goes quick
alternating strains continuously. It results in the loss of elastic strength.
28. Maximum height of a mountain on earth can be estimated from the elastic behaviour of earth.
At the base of the mountain, the pressure is given by P  hg and it must be less than elastic limit (K) of earth’ss
supporting material.
K K
K  P  hg  h or h max  ---------(16)
g g

K 3 108
As K  3  10 Nm
8 2 h max    104 m  10 km
g 3 10  9.8
3

29. I form girders

In designing a beam for its use to support a load (in construction of roofs and bridges), it is advantageous to
increase its depth rather than the breadth of the beam.
Consider a bar of length l, breadth b and depth d supported horizontally at its two ends, Let Y be the Young’s
modulus of the material of the bar. When a load W is attached at its middle point, the depression  produced
Wl 3
at the middle point of the bar is given by   ---------(17)
4Ybd3

287
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

b
(a) (b) (c)
In order to have smaller depression  , for a given load, (i) l should be small (ii) Y should be large (iii) b should
large and (iv) d should be large. The most effective method to reduce depression in the beam of given length and
1
material is to make depth of the beam large as compared to its breadth because   d3 . But on increasing the
depth too much, the beam shown in Fig.(a) may bend, as shown in Fig. (b). This bending is called buckling. To
check this buckling, a compromise between breadth and depth of a beam is made by using I shaped girder
shown in Fig. (c), with a large load bearing surface.
WL3
For a beam with circular cross-section depression is given by   ---------(18)
12r 4 Y
Example 3: A 5 m long cylindrical steel wire with radius 2 × 10–3 m is suspended vertically from a rigid support and
carries a bob of mass 100 kg at the other end. If the bob gets snapped, calculate the change in temperature of the
wire ignoring radiation losses. Y  2.1 1011 Pa; d = 7860 kg/m3; s = 420 J/kg-K
1
Solution : Energy stored per unit volume is given by  stress  strain
2
When the bob gets snapped, this stored energy is released, thereby raising temperature of wire, i.e.,

 mg   mg 
2 2
1 L
 stress  strain  volume  ms ; or   LA  s  ; or    0.00457 K
2 2AY 2A 2 Ys
HYDROSTATICS AND HYDRODYNAMICS
Any state of matter that can flow is a fluid. Study of fluids at rest is fluid statics and fluids in motion is called fluid
dynamics or hydrodynamics, Gases and liquids can flow.
Pressure
It is defined as the magnitude of the normal force acting on unit surface area.

288
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

F
P , is the normal force acting on a surface area A .
A  F
The pressure is a scalar. The pressure is equally transmitted in all directions in a fluid when a force is applied.
Unit of pressure N/m2, or Pascal ; 1 Pascal = 1 N/m2
Atmospheric pressure
The pressure exerted by the atmosphere is called atmospheric pressure. At sea level 1 atm. = 1.013 × 105 Pa.
Gauge Pressure
The excess of pressure of a system above Atmospheric pressure is called Gauge pressure. e.g., Tyre Pressure.
Absolute pressure
Absolute pressure = Atmospheric pressure + Gauge Pressure
Variation of pressure with depth
The weight of a liquid cannot be neglected. So the pressure exerted by a column of liquid will be increasing with
depth of the liquid.
Consider a column of a liquid of height y, Let P1 is the pressure on the top of the column and P2 is the pressure
on the bottom of the column of area A.

Force exerted by the liquid column at the bottom

P2 A  P1A  yAg ; where  is the density of the liquid.  P2  P1  yg

dP
So along the liquid column the pressure gradient is  g . -------(1)
dy
At the same level in a liquid the pressure is the same.
The pressure at the bottom of a liquid column is greater than its top. P2 > P1.
Generally pressure increases linearly with depth of a fluid.
Pascals law: The pressure applied to an enclosed fluid is transmitted equally to every part of the fluid and to the
walls of the container.
Hydraulic lift

289
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

It is used to lift heavy objects. A liquid is enclosed in a vessel, by two pistons of area A1 & A2, where A2 > A1.
F1
When a force F1 is applied on the liquid at the piston of smaller area, then P  A .
1

The pressure is transmitted equally to the other part of the liquid having larger area. The force applied at the
F1
other end F2 = P × A2  F2  A  A 2 -------(2) then F2 > F1.
1

So that a large force is applied on the second piston.

Pressure difference in an accelerated liquid
Consider a liquid of density  in a container is given an acceleration a, to the right the liquid meniscus will
change, and it will be inclined at an angle  as shown.

h1
h2
a
p1
L p2

Consider a small element of length L, shaded as shown in the liquid. Let A be the cross sectional area of the
element. The mass of the element, m  LA .

When an acceleration a is given to the liquid, then P1A  P2 A  ma   LA  a

where P1 & P2 are pressure at both ends of the element.
h1  h 2 a
 P1  P2  La ;  h1  h 2  g  La ; 
L
 tan  
g
-------(3)

P1  P2
 a ; P1  P2  aL -------(4)
L
Example 1 : An open rectangular tank 1.5 m wide, 2 m deep and 3 m long is half filled with water. It is accelerated
horizontally at 3.27 m/s2 in the direction of its length. Determine the depth of water at each end of tank
(g = 9.81 m/s2)

a 1
tan   
g 3
Depth at corner A = 1 – 1.5 tan  = 0.5 m
Depth corner B = 1 + 1.5 tan  = 1.5 m

290
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

Liquid placed in an elevator

When elevator accelerates upwards with acceleration a0, then the pressure in the fluid at a depth h is given as
P  h  g  a 0  -------(5)

a0

Density
mass m
Mass per unit volume of a substance is defined as the density      ; unit-kg/m3.
volume V
m dm
Density at a point of a fluid is   VLt0 
V dV
It is scalar quantity.
Relative density
The ratio of the density of a material to the density of a reference material (usually water at 4oC) is called the
density of given liquid
relative density. RD  density of a reference liquid (usually water)

specific weight of a liquid

Specific gravity specific weight of pure water at 4o C

Numerically relative density and specific gravity are equal when water is taken as reference liquid.
Specific gravity = Relative Density. It is a dimensionless ratio with no unit.
Density of a mixture of substance
Let m1, m2, m3 etc. are the masses and 1 , 2 , 3 etc. are the densities of the substances respectively, when
mixed together. Then the total mass of mixture = m1 + m2 + m3

Total volume of mixture  m1  m 2  m3 -------(6)

1 2 3

m1  m 2  m 3
 Density of the mixture is   m m m -------(7)
1
 2 3
1 2 3

m1  m 2
for two substance     -------(8)
 m12  m21  1 2
Buoyant force (upthrust)
If a body is partially or wholly immersed in a fluid, it experiences an upward force, due to the fluid surrounding
it. This force exerted on the body by the fluid is called Buoyant force and the phenomenon is called Buoyancy.
291
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Archimedes’ Principle
It states that when a body is partially or totally immersed in a liquid, it loses a weight equal to the weight of the
liquid displaced by it.

Let a body of density  immersed in a liquid of density  .

Force experienced on the top of the body F1  P1  A  A  h1g  P0 

upward force experienced on the bottom of the body  F2  P2 A  A  h 2 g  p0 

 net upward force = F = F2 – F1  Ag  h 2  h1  ;  F  AgL  Vg  AL = V

Floatation

When a body of density B and volume V is immersed in a liquid of density  , the forces acting are

1) The weight of the body W = mg = VBg acting vertically downwards through the centre of gravity of the body..

2) The upthrust (Th) = Vg acting vertically upwards through the centre of gravity of the displaced liquid (centre
of buoyancy)
Then according to the following situations the body will sink or float.

a) If  B   , then weight of the body is greater then the upthrust, the body will sink.

b) If  B   , then W = Th, so the body will be completely submerged, and there will be neutral equilibrium
any where in the liquid.

c) If  B   , then W < Th, the body moves up and will be in equilibrium and will float in the liquid such that

W  VA g (where VA is the volume of the body inside the liquid.)

 VBg  VA g ; VB  VA  -------(9)

 A body will float if  B  

When body is floating weight of the body is equal to the upthrust VBg  VA g .
In case of floating W = Th, the apparent weight of the floating body is zero.
 The law of floatation states that, a body will float in a liquid if weight of the liquid displaced by the immersed
part of the body is equal to the weight of the body.

292
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

Rotatory equilibrium in floatation

When a floating body is slightly tilted from equilibrium position, the centre of Buoyancy shifts. The vertical line
passing through the new centre of buoyancy B' and the initial vertical line meet at a point M called metacentre. If the
metacentre is above the centre of gravity, the couple due to forces at G (weight of the body W) and at B' (upthrust)
tends to bring the body back to its original position. So for rotation equilibrium of a floating body the meta centre
must be always higher than the centre of gravity of the body.
When the metacentre is below the centre of gravity, the body topples. If in any case when the centre of gravity
rises above the metacentre the body cannot float.

Fraction of volume of a body outside the liquid

For a floating body W = Th

     V   
VBg  VA g , VA   B  V ; Vout  V  VA  V 1  B  ; f out  out  1  B  ----------(10)
     V  
Hydrodynamics
1. Steady flow
It is defined as the type of flow of a fluid in which the fluid characteristics does not change with time. In unsteady
flow, velocity, pressure and density at a point in the liquid flow varies with time.
Stream line flow
In a steady flow, all the particles passing through a given point follow the same path and hence a unique line of
flow, then the flow is called streamline. The velocity of the particles in stream line remain constant or vary in a regular
manner.
Streamlines will not intersect, because if they intersect each other the particles can move in either direction at
the point of intersection, which is impossible and the flow cannot be steady.
Laminar and Turbulent flow
The flow of a viscous fluid in which particles of the fluid move in parallel layers, each of which has a constant
velocity but is in motion relative to its neighbouring layers. Laminar flow over a horizontal surface may be thought of
as consisting of thin layers or laminae, all parallel to each other. The layer near the surface is stationary and all the
other layers slide over each other.
Turbulant flow of a liquid in which the fluid undergoes irregular fluctuations or mixing takes place. The speed of
the fluid at a point is continuously undergoing changes in magnitude and direction.
Incompressible and compressible flow
In incompressible flow the density of the fluid remain constant throughout - liquids are generally incompressible.
In compressible flow the density of fluid varies from point to point (density is not a constant) - Gases are
compressible.

293
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Equation of continuity
For a steady flow of an incompressible and non viscous fluid through a tube of non-uniform cross section, the
product of the area of cross section and the velocity of flow is same at every point in the tube.
ie, A × v = a constant.
A2
v2
A1 C
v1
B
A1 and A2 are the area of cross section of a tube of non uniform cross section (A2 > A1) at B & C respectively.
Let v1 is the velocity of liquid at B, and v2 is the velocity of liquid flowing at C. The volume of liquid flowing through
the tube at B, per sec = A1v1,
Mass of liquid flowing per sec through the tube at B, will be A1v1 (  is density)
Mass of the liquid flowing out per sec through the tube at C, will be = A 2 v2
Since the liquid is in compressible, and the liquid cannot accumulate in the tube, the liquid entering the tube must
be equal to the liquid coming out per sec.
 A1v1  A 2 v 2  Av  a constant -------(11)
This is the equation of continuity and represents the conservation of mass in case of moving fluids.
Energy of a flowing fluid
1. Pressure energy
If P is the pressure on the area A of a fluid and the liquid moves through a distance due to this pressure, then the
pressure energy of liquid = work done = force × displacement = P × A × L
PAL
 pressure energy per unit volume = P -------(12)
AL
Kinetic energy
1m 2 1 2
For a volume V of liquid of mass m and velocity v, then KE per unit volume    v  v ----(13)
2 V  2
Potential energy
m
For a liquid of volume V and mass m at a height, PE per unit volume    gh  gh -------(14)
V
Bernoullis Theorem
According to Bernoullis theorem for the steady flow of an incompressible and non-viscous fluid through a tube
of non-uniform cross section, the sum of pressure energy per unit volume, the potential energy per unit volume and
kinetic energy per unit volume is same at every point in the tube. P  gh  ½v 2 = a constant.
Derivation of Bernoullis Equation
Consider a steady flow of a liquid through a tube of non-uniform cross section. If P1 & P2 are the pressure at
the two ends of the tube respectively, the work done in pushing the volume V from end B to end C through the
tube, W  PV   P1  P2  V

294
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

This work done is used for changing the PE and the KE

For a mass of m the change in PE is U  mg  h 2  h1 

for a mass m change in KE  K  ½ m  v 22  v12 

By conservation of mechanical energy, W  U  K -------(15)
m 2 1
 P1  P2  V  mg  h 2  h1  
2
 v 2  v12  ;  P1  P2   g  h 2  h1  
2
  v 22  v12 

1
P  gh  v 2 = constant. -------(16)
2
Application of Bernoullis theorem
Venturimeter

It is used to measure the flow speed of a liquid through a pipe of non-uniform cross section. At the points 1 &
2 applying, Bernoulis equation
P1  ½ v12  P2  ½v 22 since h1 = h2
A1v1
from equation of continuity A1v1  A 2 v 2 ; v2 
A2
 A2 
 P1  P2  ½v12  12  1 = gh is the pressure difference.
 A2 

then v1  2gh
2
 A1 
  1
 A2 

dV 2gh
The volume flow rate  A1v1  A1 2 -------(17)
dt  A1 
  1
 A2 
295
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Toricellis’ Theorem (speed of efflux)

Liquid is flowing out through the orifice B. The pressure at A & B are the same, P0, atmospheric pressure. The
speed at A is very small (vA = 0) compared to speed at B. By Bernoullis’ theorem.
P0  gH  ½v A2  P0  g  H  h   ½v B2 

½v 2B  gh, v B  2gh -------(18)

It is same as the velocity acquired by a liquid when it is freely falling through (h) from the surface to the orifice.

2H  h
For a uniformly accelerated motion in the y-direction, H  h  0  ½gt 2  t -----(19)
g

2H  h
 Horizontal Range R  v  t  2gh   2 h H  h -------(20)
g

d
Range is maximum when R2 is maximum. i.e.,
dh
R2   0
d H
ie, 4
dh
 hH  h 2   0 ; i.e., H – 2 h = 0, h 
2
-------(21)

H H
Rmax = 2  H    H -------(22). So the maximum range a liquid can have is the height of the liquid
2 2
VISCOSITY
Viscosity is the property of the fluid by virtue of which an internal frictional force comes into play when the liquid
is in motion and opposes the relative motion between adjacent layers. Force between the layers opposing the
relative motion is called viscous force.
According to Newton the tangential viscous force F acting on any layer of a fluid is directly proportional to its
dv dv dv
area A and to the velocity gradient at the layer. FA or F  A ------------(1)
dx dx dx
Velocity gradient at a layer of a fluid is the rate of change of speed with distance in a direction perpendicular to
dv
the flow given by ; dv - change in velocity for a distance dx between two layers.  is the coefficient of viscosity..
dx
dv
When  1 ,and A = 1, F   ,  coefficient of viscosity is the viscous force acting between two
dx
layers of a liquid having unit area and unit velocity gradient.

296
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

Dimension is ML–1T–1, and unit is poise (cgs) dyne sec-cm–2 and in SI units Poisenille (Nsm–2). 1 pl = 10 Poise
Note: (1) Viscosity of liquids is much greater than that of gases, L  G (about 100 times or more).
(2) When temperature increases viscosity of liquids decreases, and viscosity of gases increases.
(3) When density increases, viscosity of liquids increases while in gases viscosity decreases.
(4) With increase in pressure, the viscosity of liquids except water increases. While in gases viscosity has no
variation. For water viscosity decrease with pressure.
Poiseuille’s Formula
For the steady flow of a liquid through a capillary tube of length L and radius r, under a pressure difference of
dQ Pr 4
P across it, the volume of the liquid flowing per second is given by  ------------(2)
dt 8 L
This is Poiseuille’s Formula.
Capillaries connected in series
If two capillaries of lengths l1 and l2 and radii r1 and r2 are connected in series across constant pressure
8l1 8l2
difference P, then the fluid resistance R is given by, R  R 1  R 2  r 4  r 4 ------------(3)
1 2

As the volume of the liquid flowing per second is the same through both capillaries.
If P1 and P2 are the pressure differences across individual capillaries then, P = P1 + P2, and same volume Q passes
8l1Q 8l2 Q
through both tubes, P1  r 4 , P2 
r24
1

 8l  8l   P
P  P1  P2  Q  1 4  2 4   Q  R1  R 2  ;  Q
 r1 r2  R1  R 2
Capillaries connected in parallel
If two capillary tubes are connected in parallel across a constant pressure difference P, then the liquid resistance
is given by
1 1 1 R 1R 2 8l1 8l
  or R  R  R ------------(4) where R1  and R 2  42
R R1 R 2 1 2 r14
r2

P
The volume of liquid flowing per second through the capillary of radius r1 is Q1  R ------------(5)
1

P
For capillary of radius r2 we have Q 2  R .
2

Total liquid flowing per second through the tubes Q = Q1 + Q2.------------(6)

Example 1 : A man is rowing a boat with a constant velocity v0 in a river. The contact area of the boat is A and
coefficient of viscosity is  . The depth of the river is D. Find the force required to row the boat.
F – FT = ma; a = 0, since the boat moves with constant velocity.; So F = FT

297
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

F
v0
FT
dv dv v 0  0 v 0 Av 0
D But FT  A but =   F  FT 
dz dz D D D

Stokes Law
When a body moves through a fluid, the fluid opposes the motion of the body due to viscosity. The magnitude
of the viscous force depends on shape and size of the body and also on the velocity of the body and viscosity of the
liquid.
Stokes stated that if a sphere of radius r moving with a velocity v, through a liquid of viscosity  , then the
viscous force opposing the motion of the sphere is F  6rv ------------(7)
4 3
When the liquid is moving down the weight of the body acts downwards W  mg  r g and the upthrust
3
4 3
of the liquid U  r g acting upwards, where  and  are the densities of sphere and liquid respectively..
3
4 3 4 4
Net force acting downwards  r g  r 3g  r 3 g     
3 3 3
At a certain state the viscous force balances the net downward force and after that the body falls with constant
4 3
velocity called Terminal velocity (vT), then 6rv T  r      g
3
2 r2
vT       g )------------(8);  v T  r 2 ------------(9)
9
ie, when radius increases the terminal velocity increases.
Example 2: A spherical ball is moving with terminal velocity inside a liquid. Determine the relationship of rate of loss
of heat with radius of the ball.

 2 r2    
2

2  6r g
Rate of loss = Power = F  v  6rv  v  6rv   Heat loss  r 5 .
9  
Critical velocity and Reynold’s number
During the steady flow of a liquid, if the velocity of the liquid is below a particular value, the motion of the liquid
is streamline. If it crosses this velocity the flow of the liquid becomes Turbulent. Then the fluid particles don’t follow
the path of their preceeding particles. The maximum velocity upto which fluid motion is streamlines is called critical
velocity.
Reynold’s showed that when fluids flow through the tubes, the critical velocity depends on density    Viscosity

  of the fluid and on the radius (r) of the tube.

 
vc    or vc  N R   ------------(10)
 r   r 
NR is the Reynolds number, if the value of NR is less than 2000, the flow is streamline.
298
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

If NR > 3000 the flow is turbulent.

If the value of NR is between 2000 to 3000, the flow can be streamline or turbulent.
Example 3: An air bubble of radius 1 mm is allowed to rise through a column of liquid of radius 5 cm, travels at a
steady rate of 2.1 cm per sec. Density of liquid 1.47 g per cc. find its viscosity g = 980 cm/sec2. neglect density of
air.

2 r 2 g 2 1.47   0.1  980

2
4 3
r g  6rv ;    = 1.524 Poise.
3 9 v 9 2.1
SURFACE TENSION
Intermolecular Force
The force of attraction or repulsion acting between the molecules are known as intermolecular force. The
nature of intermolecular force is electromagnetic.
The intermolecular forces of attraction may be classified into two types.

Cohesive force Adhesive force

The force of attraction between molecules of The force of attraction between the molecules of
same substance is called the force of cohesion. the different substances is called the force of
This force is lesser in liquids and least in gases adhesion.
gases.

Surface Tension
The property of a liquid by which its free surface tends to have minimum surface area and behaves as if it were
under tension acting like a stretched membrane is called surface tension. Due to this liquid drops takes spherical
shape to reduce surface area.
Surface tension of a liquid is the force acting per unit length on an imaginary line, drawn on the free surface of
the liquid. The direction of the force is perpendicular to the line and tangential to the surface of the liquid.

F
Let F is the force acting on a line of length L, then T  . Unit: N/m
L
Factors Affecting Surface Tension
(1) Temperature: The surface tension of liquid decreases with rise of temperature. The surface tension of
liquid is zero at its boiling point and it vanishes at critical temperature.
Example: Hot soup tastes better than the cold soup.
(2) Impurities: The presence of impurities, considerably affect the force of surface tension, depending upon
the degree of contamination. A highly soluble substance like sodium chloride when dissolved in water, increases the
299
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

surface tension of water. But the sparingly soluble substances like phenol when dissolved in water, decreases the
surface tension of water.
Applications of Surface Tension
(1) The oil and grease spots on clothes cannot be removed by pure water because pure water-does not wet oily
clothes. On the other hand, when detergents (like soap) are added in water, the surface tension of water decreases.
As a result of this, wetting power of water increases. Thus, oil, grease and dirt particles get mixed with water
easily. Hence clothes are washed easily.
(2) The antiseptics have very low value of surface tension. Due to low surface tension, the antiseptics spreads
properly over wound.
(3) Surface tension of all lubricating oils and paints are kept low so that they spread over large area.
Molecular Theory of Surface Tension
The maximum distance upto which the force of attraction between two molecules is appreciable is called
molecular range   109 m  . A sphere with a molecule as centre and radius equal to molecular range is called the
sphere of influence. The liquid enclosed between free surface (PQ) of the liquid and an imaginary plane (RS) at a
distance r (equal to molecular range) from the free surface of the liquid form a liquid film.
To understand the tension acting on the free surface of a liquid, let us consider four liquid molecules like A, B,
C and D. Their sphere of influence are shown in the figure. Molecule A is well within the liquid, so it is attracted
equally in all directions. Hence the net force on this molecule is zero and it moves freely inside the liquid. Molecule
B is little below the free surface of the liquid and it is also attracted equally in all directions. Hence the resultant force
on it is also zero.

Molecule C is just below the upper surface of the liquid film and the part of its sphere of influence is outside the
free liquid surface. So the number of molecules in the upper half (attracting the molecules upward) is less than the
number of molecule in the lower half (attracting the molecule downward). Thus the molecule C experiences a net
downward force. Molecule D is just on the free surface of the liquid. The upper half of the sphere of influence has no
liquid molecule. Hence the molecule D experiences a maximum downward force.
Thus all molecules lying in surface film experiences a net downward force. Therefore, free surface of the liquid
behaves like a stretched membrane.
Surface Energy
The molecules on the liquid surface experience net downward force. So to bring a molecule from the interior of
the liquid to the free surface, some work is required to be done against the intermolecular force of attraction, which
will be stored as potential energy of the molecule on the surface. The potential energy of surface molecules per unit
area of the surface is called surface energy.
Unit : Joule / m2 (S.I.) erg / cm2 (C.G.S.); Dimension : [MT–2]

300
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

If a rectangular wire frame ABCD, equipped with a sliding wire LM dipped in soap solution, a film is formed in
the frame. Due to the surface tension, the film will have a tendency to shrink and thereby, the sliding wire LM will be
pulled in the inward direction. However, the sliding wire can be held in this position under a force F, which is equal
and opposite to the force acting on the sliding wire LM all along its length due to surface tension in the soap film.

If T is the force due to surface tension per unit length, then F = T × 2l. ---------(1)
Here, l is length of the sliding wire LM. The length of the sliding wire has been taken as 2l for the reason that the
film has got two free surfaces.
Suppose that the sliding wire LM is moved through a small distance x, so as to take the position L'M'. In this
process, area of the film increases by 2l × x (on the two sides) and to do so, the work done is given by

W  F  x   T  2l   x  T   2lx   T  A

 W  T  A [ A = Total increase in area of the film from both the sides.’

If temperature of the film remains constant in this process, this work done is stored in the film as its surface
energy.

W
From the above expression T  or T  W ---------(2) [If A  1]
A
ie, surface tension may be defined as the amount of work done in increasing the area of the liquid surface by
unity against the force of surface tension at constant temperature.
Work done in Blowing a Liquid Drop or Soap Bubble
(1) If the initial radius of liquid drop is r1 and final radius of liquid drop is r2 then

W = T × Increment in surface area  T  4  r22  r12  ---------(3) [drop has only one free surface]

W  T  8  r22  r12  ---------(4) [Bubble has two free surface]

Splitting of Bigger Drop

When a drop of radius R splits into n smaller drop, (each of radius r) then surface area of liquid increases.
Hence the work is to be done against surface tension.

4 3 4
Since the volume of liquid remains constant therefore R  n r 3  R 3  nr 3 ---------(5)
3 3

Work done = T  A  T  T  n4r 2  4R 2  ---------(6)  4T  nr 2  R 2 

301
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Example 4: A vessel, whose bottom has round holes with diameter of 1 mm is filled with water. Assuming that
surface tension acts only at holes, find the maximum height to which the water can be filled in the vessel without
leakage. Given that surface tension of water is 75 × 10–3 N/m and g = 10 m/s2.
Solution : As shown in figure, here the vertical force due to surface tension at the hole T cos  L  T cos  2r
will balance the weight mg, i.e., r 2 hg ,

2T cos 
i.e., T cos  2r  r 2 hg , h  . Then h will be maximum. when   0
rg

2  75  103
So,  h max   0.03 m  3cm
103  5 104  10

Excess Pressure

Due to the property of surface tension a drop or bubble tries to contract and so compresses the matter
enclosed. This in turn increases the internal pressure which prevents further contraction and equilibrium is achieved.
So in equilibrium the pressure inside a bubble or drop is greater than outside and the difference of pressure between
two sides of the liquid surface is called excess pressure. In case of a drop excess pressure is provided by hydrostatic
pressure of the liquid within the drop while in case of bubble the gauge pressure of the gas confined in the bubble
provides it.

Shape of Liquid Meniscus

A iquid assumes the shape of the vessel in which it is contained.
When a capillary tube is dipped in a liquid, the liquid surface becomes curved near the point of contact. This
curved surface is due to the resultant of two forces i.e. the force of cohesion and the force of adhesion. The curved
surface of the liquid is called meniscus of the liquid.
If liquid molecule A is in contact with the solid (i.e. wall of capillary tube) then forces acting on the molecule A
are
(i) Force of adhesion Fa (acts outwards at right angle to the wall of the tube).
(ii) Force of cohesion Fc (acts at an angle 45o to the vertical).

Resultant force FN depends upon the value of Fa and Fc.

302
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

If resultant force FN make an angle  with Fa.

Fc sin135o Fc
Then tan    --------- (7)
Fa  Fc cos135o 2 Fa  Fc
By knowing the direction of resultant force we can find out the shape of meniscus because the free surface of
the liquid adjust itself at right angle to this resultant force. If Fc  2 Fa ----------(8)

tan       90o
ie, the resultant force acts vertically downards. Hence the liquid meniscus must be horizontal.
Example: Pure water in silver coated capillary tube.

If Fc  2 Fa ----------(9)

tan   positive   is acute angle

ie, the resultant force directed outside the liquid. Hence the liquid meniscus must be concave upward.
Example: Water in glass capillary tube.

If Fc  2 Fa ----------(10) tan   negative   is obtuse angle.

ie, the resultant force is directed inside the liquid. Hence the liquid meniscus must be convex upward
Example: Mercury in glass capillary tube.
Angle of Contact
Angle of contact between a liquid and a solid surface is defined as the angle enclosed between the tangents to
the liquid surface and the solid surface inside the liquid, both the tangents being drawn at the point of contact of the
liquid with the solid.
  90o   90o   90o

Fc F Fc
Fa  Fa  c Fa 
2 2 2
concave meniscus. plane meniscus. convex meniscus.
Liquid wets solid surface. Liquid does not wet solid surface. Liquid does not wet solid surface.
Angle of contact changes with the pair of solid and liquid.
On increasing the temperature, angle of contact decreases.

303
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Capillarity
If a tube of very narrow bore (called capillary) is dipped in a liquid, it is found that the liquid in the capillary
either ascends or descends relative to the surrounding liquid. This phenomenon is called capillarity.
Examples of capillarity :
(i) Ink rises in the fine pores of blotting paper leaving the paper dry.
(ii) A towel soaks water.
(iii) Oil rises in the long narrow spaces between the threads of a wick.
Ascent Formula
When one end of a capillary tube of radius r is immersed into a liquid of density d which wets the sides of the
capillary tube (water and capillary tube of glass), the shape of the liquid meniscus in the tube becomes concave
upwards.
R = radius of curvature of liquid meniscus; T = surface tension of liquid; P = atmospheric pressure

2T
Pressure at point A = P, Pressure at point B  P  .
R

Pressure at points C and D just above and below the plane surface of liquid in the vessel is also P (atmospheric
pressure). The points B and D are in the same horizontal plane in the liquid but the pressures at these points are
different.
In order to maintain the equilibrium the liquid level rises in the capillary tube into height h (Tube 2).
Pressure due to liquid column = pressure difference due to surface tension.
2T 2T 2T cos   r 
 h g  ;  h  -------- (11)  As R  cos  
R Rg rg
Example 5: The lower end of a capillary tube of diameter 2.00 mm is dipped 8.00 cm below the surface of water
in a beaker. What is the pressure required in the tube to blow a bubble at its end in water? Also calculate the excess
pressure. [Surface tension of water = 73 × 10–3 N/m, density of water = 103 kg/m3, 1 atmosphere = 1.01 × 105 Pa
and g = 9.8 m/s2.]
Solution : As the bubble is in water, it has only one surface.
2T 2  7.3  102
So P = Pin – Pout    146 Pa
r 103
Now as bubble is at a depth of 8 cm in water, Pout  Pat  hg
So that Pin  P  Pout  P  Pat  hg

i.e., Pin  146  1.01 105  8  10 2 103  9.8  1.02  105 Pa

304
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

TEMPERATURE
Temperature is defined as the degree of hotness or coldness of a body and its measurement is thermometry.
Temperature is a fundamental quantity. It is a scalar with SI unit kelvin.
Temperature decides the direction of heat flow (Heat flows from a point of higher temperature to a point of
lower temperature.)
When heat is given to a body, temperature rises and when heat is taken, temperature falls.
Temperature of a body is a measure of average translational KE of a molecule. Tk   KE molecule
Scales of temperature
The SI unit of temperature is kelvin which is defined as (1/273.16)th part of thermodynamic temperature of
triple point of water (ice, water and water vapour co-exist in dynamic equilibrium at this temperature.)
Celsius scale or centigrade scale is also common.
Conversion between different scales.

TC  0 T  32 TK  273.15
 F  --------(1)
100  0 212  32 373.15  273.15
The change in temperature in different scales will be

TC TF TK

 
100 180 100
Now a days in new thermometry triple point of water 273.16 K is taken as the reference point.
Triple point of water is 0.01oC in Celsius scale and 273.16 K in Kelvin scale.
THERMOMETERS
A thermometer is used to measure the temperature of a body. The variation of some physical property of a
substance is used to measure temperature.
Liquid Thermometer
Thermal expansion of a liquid, in a narrow tube is used to measure temperature. Mercury is preferred as the
liquid, because of its uniform and large expansion and high thermal conductivity and low specific heat capacity. The
range of such thermometer is –50oC to 350oC.

L  L0 1   TC  ; L0 is the length of the liquid column; L is the new length

 is coeff. of expansion; TC is the temperature

Gas Thermometer
An ideal gas at constant volume or at constant pressure can be used for measuring temperature.
For constant volume gas thermometer

P  P0 P
TC   100o C or TK  273.16  K --------(2)
P100  P0 PTr

305
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

P0, P100 and PTr are Pressure at 0oC, Pressure at 100oC and Pressure at triple point of water respectively
keeping the volume constant. Normal range is from –200oC to 500oC. Gas thermometers are more sensitive and
accurate.
Resistance Thermometer
Variation of resistance of metals with temperature is used to measure temperature. Usually platinum is used to
measure temperature. Since it has high melting point and expansion coeffecient is large

R  R0 R
TK   100o C or TK  273.16  K ----------(3)
R100  R 0 R Tk

Usual range is from –200oC to 1200oC. It should be used in connection with a bridge circuit.
Thermoelectric Thermometer
Thermocouples which apply Seebeck effect is used to measure temperature. Thermo-emf generated at a
temperature is given by e  aTC  bTC2 , a & b are constants.

The variation of thermo-e.m.f. with temperature is shown in figure. emf is measured by a potential measuring
device such as ‘potentiometer.’

Thermocouple is used to measure temperature in the linear part of EMF versus temperature curve and has a
normal range –200oC to 1600oC. It has low thermal capacity and high thermal conductivity, so can be used to
measure quickly changing temperature and temperature of tiny objects.
Pyrometers
As the word ‘pyro’ means fire, pyrometers are used to measure very high temperature such as of a furnace or
glowing filament. These are primarily based on ‘Stefan’s law’ of thermal radiations, viz., R  eATK4

In these thermometers intensity of radiations is measured and using the above formula the temperature of the
body is determined. These thermometers are usually employed to measure temperature higher than 1000oC (~MP
of gold). The temperature of sun is measured by ‘pyro-helio-meter.’

THERMAL EXPANSION
When matter is heated the energy of atoms increases, the distance between the atoms increases, and the matter
as a whole expands. Inter molecular forces for solids are maximum and least for gases. So thermal expansion for
solids are minimum and gases are maximum.

306
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

Solids have linear expansion, superficial expansion and volume expansion while liquids and gases have only
volume expansion.
Change in dimension 1
The coefficients of expansion is defined as the Original dimension  rise of temeprature

L
For eg. coefficient of linear expansion  
L  T
A
Coefficient of superficial expansion  
A  T
V
Coefficient of volume expansion  
V  T
,  &  are constants for a material.
L A V
 1  T ;  1  T  ;  1  T
L A V
A V
 1  T   1  2T ;  1  T   1  3T
2 3

A V
Comparing these equations
  
2   ; 3   ;  :  :   1: 2 : 3 ;   or 6  3  2  ----------(4)
1 2 3
Application of thermal expansion in solids
1. Bimetallic strip
It is used in a thermostat. Two strips of equal length but different expansions are joined together. When heated
the strip will bend with metal of greater  on the outer side.

This type of arrangement is used in electrical heating circuits.

2. A Scale gives correct reading at a temperature  , at a different temperature    , the scale expands and the
reading will be less than actual length.

True value = scale reading, SR 1          SR 1  

However, if    , due to contraction of scale, scale reading will be more than true value. So true value will be
lesser than scale reading and is given by True Value, TV  SR 1   
3. A pendulum clock gives correct time at a temperature  . At a temperature    , due to linear expansion the
length of the pendulum increases and hence the time period will increase. Due to this time interval measured will be
less.
307
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Loss of time due to expansion

If T is the actual period of a pendulum, and T ' is the new period of pendulum due to expansion (T  T) the
t t
pendulam will execute oscillations instead of in a time interval t.
T T

t t 1 1  1 1   T
So, number of oscillations lost    t  ; t  t    T  t 1  
T T  T T   T T   T 
1/ 2
T L
1/ 2
 L  1   1  1
     1    t  t 1  1       .t --------(5)
T  L   L 1     2   2  2
So the clock loses time, it will become slow.
If    , the clock gains time, i.e., it will become fast. The gain or loss of time is independant of period but
depends on time interval.
4. The ends of a rod is rigidly fixed to prevent expansion or contraction, when undergoes a change of temperature,
a stress is developed on the rod. Due to this stress, the rod will exert a large force on the supports.
For a rod of length L undergoes a change in temperature   Co .

L
Thermal strain =   ; Thermal stress = Y and force F  YA ---------(6)
L
5. Thermal Expansion of an isotropic object.
If there is a cavity in a plate, and when it is heated, the size of the cavity increases as well as the size of the plate.

plate

cavity

Precautions taken for expansion or contraction

1. When rails are laid down on the ground, space is left between two rails.
2. The transmission cables are not tightly fixed to the poles.
3. Materials of low value of coefficient of expansion is used to make test tubes, beakers etc.
4. The iron rim to be put on a wheel is always of slightly smaller diameter than that of the wheel.
Thermal Expansion in Liquids
Liquids have only volume expansion. When a liquid is heated in a container, the container also expands with
liquid. Due to this the level of the liquid falls initially and later when the liquid expands faster, the level of the liquid
rises.
The actual increase in volume of liquid
= The apparent increase in volume of liquid + The increase in the volume of the vessel.

308
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

Apparant Expansion in Volume V

Coefficient of apparent expansion of liquid   s   Initial Volume  rise of temperature  V  

Re al increase in volume V
Coefficient of Real expansion of liquid   r   Initial volume  rise in temperature  V  

Vvessel
Coefficient of expansion of vessel   V 
V  
 r   v  s
Apparant change in volume of liquid relative to vessel is Vapp  V   r   v    V   r  3  

If  r   v , Vapp  0 (positive)
So the level of liquid rise in the vessel on heating.
If  r   v , Vapp  0 (negative), the level of liquid fall in the vessel on heating.

m
If  r   v , the level of the liquid remain unchanged. Density of a liquid  
V

When temperature increases by  , mass remains same. But volume increases V  V 1   

m m 
   
V V 1    1  
 temperature rises, density decreases.
Thrust due to a liquid of volume V is given by, T  Vg (  is density)


When temperature rises   1     , density decreases. Volume of body increases V  V 1   v  
r

 New thrust T  Vg

T Vg V 1   v 
   ; If  v   r , T  T
T Vg V 1   r 
With rise in temperature, thrust will decrease.
This implies that when a body is weighed in a liquid at different temperatures, when temperature increases the
weight of the body decreases.

 1   V  
W  Vg  V 1   V   g  Vg  
1   r    1   r  

 W0 1   V  1   r     W0 1   V  1   r     W0 1   r    V    V  r 2 

1 1
   

Since  V and  r are small,  V  r is very small, so that it is neglected.  W  W0 1    V   r    -----(7)

309
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Anomolous expansion in liquids

Normally matter expands on heating and contracts on cooling. For water it expands on heating if its temperature
is greater than 4oC. In the range of 0oC to 4oC water contracts on heating and expands on cooling (coefficient of
volume expansion in this range is negative). This behaviour of water in the range 0oC to 4oC is called anomolous
expansion. At 4oC density of water is maximum and specific volume is minimum.

TRANSMISSION OF HEAT
Heat is transferred from a body at a higher temperature to a body at lower temperature.
The transfer of heat from one body to another takes place by conduction, convection or radiation.
Conduction
Conduction is the process of transfer of heat from particle to particle without the actual movement of the
particles. In solids heat is transferred by conduction.
At the hot end of a solid the atoms and electrons have higher vibrational amplitudes due to the high temperature.
These increased amplitudes are transfered to the nearby atoms during collision between atoms. In this way heat is
transferred from one region to another of low temperature.
Consider a slab of face Area A, and lateral thickness L, whose face have temperatures TH & TC, (TH > TC)

L
TC

A
TH
Q2
Q1
x
dx

Consider a small cross section of the slab separated by a distance dx. Let T & T + dT are the temperatures of
Q dT
two faces of small slab. If Q is the heat crossing through the area A, for a time t, then   KA , where K is
t dx
dT
the thermal conductivity. is the temperature gradient.
dx
K is a measure of how quickly heat energy can conduct through a substance. The minus sign in the equation
shows heat flows from high to low temperature.
dT
Q = K when A = 1,  1 and t = 1
dx

310
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

Q
K  Js 1m 1K 1 or Wm 1K 1
 dT 
A 
 dx 

Q  KA
 TH  TC  t
---------(8)
L
Q is the heat flowing through a slab of area A and length L for a time t.
Thermal Resistance to conduction
L
The resistance to heat conduction is R 
KA
where L is the length of conductor, A is the Area of the conductor and K is the thermal conductivity. The amount
of heat flowing in a time t

Q T1  T2 Q
 ; is considered as thermal current IT
t R t

Q T T
then  IT  1 2 . Here temperature acts like as electric potential in electrical current.
t R
Thermal Resistance is similar to electrical resistance
The thermal conductivity of a composite slab can be determined by a similar equation.

V Potential difference
Electrical resistance = R  I  Rate flow of charge

Temperature difference T1  T2  T1  T2  L L
Thermal resistance  R  Rate of flow of heat  Q / L  KA T  T  KA
 1 2
a) Two slabs joined in series

L1 L2

A A L1 L2
; Req = R1 + R2  K A  K A
1 2
K1 K2

L1  L2 L1K 2  L 2 K1 K1K 2  L1  L 2 
 K eq 
K eq A K1K 2 A ;  L1K 2  L 2 K1  -----------(9)

 1  2 
In series the total heat conducted H1  H 2  H   R 
 eq. 

311
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

b) When they are in parallel

K2 A2

K1 A1

1

1

1 K eq  A1  A 2  K1A1 K 2 A 2 K1A1  K 2 A 2
  K eq 
R eq R1 R 2 ; L L L
; A1  A 2

1  2
In parallel the heat conducted H  H1  H 2  R
eq.

Convection
When heat is transferred from one place to another by actual movement of heated substance (fluids) is called
convection. Convection requires a medium. Convection can be due to natural movement called natural convection
and forced convection due to forced movement. The rate of heat convection is proportional to the temperature
difference between the object and convective medium and the area of contact A.
Due to convection (a) Land and Sea breeze occur, b) Trade winds are formed,
c) Monsoons are originating, d) Ventillation becomes possible
Radiation
Thermal radiation is the transfer of heat by means of electromagnetic radiation, generated by the thermal motion
of particles in matter. The energy is usually transferred in the infrared region. For radiative transfer it does not require
a material medium.
a) Radiant energy Travels in straight lines. b) It is reflected and refracted as in the case of light.
c) Intensity of radiation obeys inverse square law. d) Every body above absolute zero emits radiations.
Thermal radiation falling on a surface exerts pressure on the surface, called radiation pressure. When radiation
passes through a medium it absorbs radiation and due to this the temperature of the medium increases. Bolometer is
used to measure radiation intensity.
A perfect Black body is one which completely absorbs radiations falling on it.
A good absorber is a good emitter of radiation. A black body when heated to required temperature will emit
radiation absorbed by it
Emissive power (e) : The amount of heat energy emitted by unit area of the surface in one second at a particular
temperature is called emissive power. Unit J/m2s = W/m2
Absorptive power (Coefficient of absorption)
The absorptive power of a body is the ratio of radiant energy absorbed by it to the total amount of radiant
Qa
energy incident on it, a  ; For a black body a =1, since Qa = Q; If has no unit
Q

312
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

Relative Emissivity or Emissivity (er)

It is the ratio of energy emitted by a body to the energy emitted by a black body in the same conditions.
Q energy emitted by a body
er  
Q BB energy emitted by black body ; 0 < er < 1

Prevost’s theory of energy exchange

Above absolute zero of temperature there is a continuous exchange of heat energy between a body and its
surroundings. Heating or cooling of a body takes place depending on its temperature difference with the surroundings.
When temperatures are equal, there is no cooling or heating, the temperature remains the same.
Kirchhoff’s Law
The ratio of the emissive power to the absorptive power of all bodies at any given temperature and wavelength
is a constant and it is equal to the emissive power of a black body at the same temperature.
e
 a constant = E (E is the emissive power of a black body at the same temperature).
a
Good absorbers are good emitters.
Stefans’ Law
The amount of radiation emitted per second per unit area by an ideal black body is directly proportional to
fourth power of its absolute temperature.
Amount of radiation emitted per sec,
E  T4 where T = temperature of ideal black body in Kelvin.
E  T 4 ,  = Stefan’s constant = 5.67 × 10 w/m k ; Unit of E = watts/m .
–8 2 4 2

The total energy radiated by a surface of area A in a time t by a black body is Q BB  AT 4 t
For any other body the total energy radiated by an area A in a time t
Q GB  eAT 4 t (e - emissive power) ---------(10)
When a black body at a temperature T Kelvin surrounded by another body at a temperature. T0 Kelvin (where
To < T),

Heat lost by black body per unit area E    T 4  T04  . This is Stefan - Boltzmann law..

If the body is not a perfect black body, then E  e  T 4  T04  (e - is the emissivity)

For a body of area A, the heat energy radiated by the body in time t, is  eA  T 4  T04  t
Applications of Stefan’s law
Cooling by Radiation
If a body at temperature T is in an environment of temperature T0 (< T), the body is losing energy by emitting
radiations at a rate., P1  eAT 4

and is receiving energy by absorbing radiations at a rate P2  eAT04

So, net rate of loss of energy by the body through radiation,
313
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

P  P1  P2  eA  T 4  T04  --------(11)

Let m is the mass of the body and c its specific heat, the rate of loss of heat at temeprature T,
dQ dT
 mc ---------(12)
dt dt
and if the body is cooling by radiation, Eqns. (11) and (12) must represent the same,
dT dT eA 4
ie, mc  eA  T 4  T04  ; or   T  T04  ----------(13)
dt dt mc 
i.e., when a body cools by radiation the rate of cooling depends on:
1) Nature of radiating surface, ie, greater the emissivity, faster will be cooling.
2) Area of radiating surface, ie, greater the area of radiating surface, faster will be the cooling.
3) Mass of radiating body, ie, greater the mass of radiating body slower will be the cooling.
4) Specific heat of radiating body, ie, greater the specific heat of radiating body slower will be the cooling.
5) Temperature of radiating body, ie, greater the temperature of radiating body faster will be the cooling.
6) Temperature of surrounidngs, ie, greater the temperature of surrounindgs slower will be the cooling.
Newton’s Law of cooling
If in case of cooling by radiation the temperature T of body is not very different from that of surroundings,

i.e., T  T0  T ; Then T  T0   T0  T   T0 

4 4 4 4

 T  4 
4  T 
or T  T  T 1  T   1 ; or T  T0  T0 1  4
4 4 4
0 0
4 4
 1 (using Binomial theorem)
 0    T0 
or T 4  T04  4T03 T

dT eA 3
So, in the light of the above, Eqn. (13) reduces to  4T0 T
dt mc

d  eA 3 
But T       0  C ;
o
So,  K    0  ---------(14); K  4T0 
dt  mc 
i.e., the rate of cooling is proportional to temperature difference between the body and its surroundings
provided the temperature of the body is not very different from the surroundings. This law is called Newton’s law of
cooling and is a particular case of Stefan’s law.

314
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

From Newton’s law of cooling it is clear that:

(1) Greater the temperature difference between the body and its surroundings greater will be the rate of cooling.
 d 
(2) If   0 ,    0
 dt 

i.e., a body can never be cooled to a temperature lesser than its surroundings by radiation.

(3) Newton’s law of cooling can be used to compare the specific heats of two liquids as : if equal masses of two
liquids having same surface area and finish cool from same initial temperature 1 to same final temperature 2 with
same temperature of surroundings, ie, 0 in time intervals t1 and t2 respectively, then according to Eqn. (14),

t1 K 2 c t 1
 or 1  1 ---------(15) [ K ]
t 2 K1 c2 t 2 c
Wein’s Displacement Law
Wiens displacement law states that the black body radiation curve for different temperatures peaks at a wavelength
inversely proportional to the temperature. The shift of the peak is a direct consequence of planck radiation law
which describes the spectral brightness of black body radiation as a function of wavelength at any given temperature.

 m T  b  a constant.---------(16)

 m is the wavelength at which maximum emission takes place at a Temperature T Kelvin.

1
The value of b = 2.89 × 10–3 mK or  m 
T

Planck’s law
In order to explain the distribution of energy in the spectrum of black body radiation, Max planck assumed that
e.m. radiations are not emitted or absorbed continuously by a body but in discrete bundles or packets of energy
called quanta. Later these quanta of energy were called photons. The energy assocaited with a photon is given by
E = hv, where v is the frequency of radiation and h is the plancks constant. On the basis of quantum theory of
radiation, the energy distribution in the spectrum of black body radiation is given by
315
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

2hc2  1 
E   hc/ kT
 1
 e
5

Distribution of energy in the spectrum of black body.
Based on experiments the spectrum of a black body for different temperatures are examined and found that
(1) At a given temperature energy is not uniformly distributed among different wavelengths.
(2) At a given temperature the intensity of heat radiation increases with wavelength to a maximum value at a
temperature and then decreases.

(3) With increase in temperature the wavelength  m corresponding to most intense radiation decreases such a
way that  m  T  a constant. (Weins law).

(4) An increase in temperature increases intensity for all wavelengths.

(5) The area under the curve   R  d will represent the total intensity of radiation at a particular temperature.

i.e., R   R  d and it is found that it is proportional to fourth power of absolute temperature of the body..

i.e., R  T 4 (Weins law)

T5

R T4
T5 > T 4 > T3 > T 2 > T1

T3

T2
T1

5m 1m 
2m
Solar Constant
Only a small portion of the energy emitted by the sun reaches the earth. The solar radiant energy received per
unit area per unit time by a black surface held at right angles to the suns rays and placed at the mean distance of the
earth is called solar constant. Solar constant is taken as 1340 watts/m2.
Temperature of sun
Let R be the radius of the sun and d be the radius of the Earth’s orbit around the sun, E is the energy emitted by
the sun per second per unit area.
Total energy emitted in one sec = EA  E  4R 2
This energy is falling on the sphere of surface area 4d 2 , where d is the radius of earths orbit.

316
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

The energy falling per unit area of earth per unit time,

4R 2 E ER 2
S  2 ; R  7  108 m , d  1.5 10 m,
11
  5.7  10 8 Wm 2 K 4
4d 2 d

T 4 R 2
By Stefans law, E  T 4  S ---------(17)
d2
1/ 4

 S d2 
1/4  1340  1.5  1011 2 
T 2 
 
= 5732 K -----------(18)
 R   5.7  108  7  108 2 
 

CALORIMETERY
Heat
Heat is a form of energy. SI unit of heat is Joule. Also heat can be measured in calories. 1 cal = 4.18 J
Calorie: It is defined as the amount of heat required to raise the temperature of 1g of water by 1oC.
International Calorie : It is the heat required to raise the temperature of 1 g of water from 14.5oC to 15.5oC at a
pressure of 1 atm.
work done
When heat is given to a body work is done. The ratio of heat produced  4.18 J per cal
is called mechanical equivalent of heat.
Specific heat capacity: It is the amount of heat required to raise the temperature of a unit mass of the substance
through unit degree.
1 dQ
The specific heat of a substance s 
m dT
where m is the mass of a substance, when dQ heat is given, raises its temperature by dT.
s = dQ, when m = 1, dT = 1.
SI Unit - J/kg-K CGS unit: cal/oC
The amount of heat required to raise the temperature of mass m of the substance by an amount  is
Q  ms -------(19)
Molar heat capacity (C)
The molar heat capacity of a substance is the amount of heat required to raise the temperature of one mole of
a substance through 1oC.
Molar heat capacity C = Molecular Weight (M) × specific heat capacity (s)
Let molecular mass of the substance is (M) and mass of the substance is (m), the number of moles in the
m
substance 
M
1 dQ M  dQ 
C    -------(20)
 dT m  dT 
SI unit : - J/mole - K

317
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

A gas has two specific heat capacities depending on whether the gas is expanding at constant volume or at
constant pressure. (specific heat at constant volume CV and specific heat at constant pressure Cp).
Thermal Capacity
The quantity of heat required to raise the temperature of the whole body through 1oK is known as its thermal
capacity.
Thermal capacity = mass × specific heat capacity. Unit - Cal/K
Water equivalent of a body
Mass of water having the same thermal capacity as the body is called its water equivalent.
Water equivalent = mass of body × sp. heat of the material (w = ms)
Latent heat
The heat energy to be supplied to a substance to change its state without change of temperature is called latent
heat.
Latent heat of vapourisation
The heat energy required to convert unit mass of a liquid to the vapour state without change of temperature is
latent heat of vapourisation. For water it is 2.26 × 106 Jkg–1 or 536 cal/g.
Latent heat of Fusion
It is the heat energy required to convert unit mass of a solid into the liquid state without change of temperature.
L.H. of fusion of ice is 3.36 × 105 Jkg–1 or 80 cal/g
Change of state
Melting: Conversion of a solid into liquid at constant temperature is called melting.
Evaporation: Conversion of liquid into vapours at all temperature is called evaporation.
Boiling : A liquid boils when its saturated vapour pressure is equal to the atmospheric pressure. During boiling
temperature does not rise.
Sublimation
Direct conversion of a solid into vapour is called sublimation.
Heat required to change unit mass of solid directly into vapour at a given temperature is called heat of sublimation
at that temperature.
Camphor and Ammonium chloride sublimates on heating at normal conditions.
Condensation
The process of conversion from vapour state to liquid is known as condensation.
Hoarfrost
Direct conversion of vapours into solid is called hoarfrost. It is the reverse of sublimation.
Regelation
It is the process of melting of ice by applying pressure and its resolidification when pressure is removed.
Variation of melting point and boiling point with pressure applied.
Increase of pressure lowers melting point of water. Increase of pressure increases the boiling point of water.

318
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

Phase diagram
A phase diagram is a graph drawn between Temperature and pressure of a substance. A phase of a substance
is a region of a material that is chemically uniform, physically distinct and mechanically separable. ice, water and
steam are different phases of water.
Phase diagram for water

On each part of the curve the substance is in a particular phase and all the three phases co-exist at a point called
triple point where the solid, liquid and gaseous states co-exists. The ice line, steam line or sublimation line separates
the two states of matter.
The triple point of water is at 6.03 × 10–3 atm and a temperature of 273.16 K.
Triple point of water is a unique condition and it is used to define the absolute temperature. One kelvin is
1
defined as fraction of the temperature of triple point of water..
273.16
Principle of calorimetry
When two bodies, one being a liquid and the other being a solid or both being liquid, at different temperatures
are mixed, heat will be transferred from body at a higher temperature to the body at a lower temperature till both
acquire the same temperature, so that Heat lost = Heat gained.
Conservation of heat energy is applied in the principle of calorimetry.
Temperature of the mixture will be always between the lower temperature and higher temperature.
The heat released or absorbed by a body of mass m is given by
Q  mcT , where c is the specific heat capacity and T is change in temperature.

319
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

QUESTIONS
LEVEL - I
1. Two wires A and B are of same materials. Their lengths are in the ratio 1 : 2 and diameters are in the ratio 2 : 1
when stretched by force FA and FB respectively they get equal increase in their lengths. Then the ratio FA/FB
should be
1) 1 : 2 2) 1 : 1 3) 2 : 1 4) 8 : 1
2. Three blocks, each of same mass m, are connected with wires W1 and W2 of same cross-sectional area ‘a’ and
Young’s modulus Y. Neglecting friction the strain developed in wire W2 is

2 mg 3 mg 1 mg 3mg
1) 2) 3) 4)
3 aY 2 aY 3 aY aY
3. A wire elongates by 1.0 mm when a load W is hanged from it. If this wire goes over a pulley and two weights
W each are hung at the two ends, the elongation of the wire will be

1) 0.5 m 2) 1.0 mm 3) 2.0 mm 4) 4.0 mm

4. When a 4 kg mass is hung vertically on a light spring that obeys Hooke’s law, the spring stretches by 2 cm. The
work required to be done by an external agent in the stretching this spring by 5 cm will be (g = 9.8 m/s2)
1) 4.900 J 2) 2.450 J 3) 0.495 J 4) 0.245 J
5. A wire of diameter 1 mm breaks under a tension of 1000 N. Another wire of same material as that of the first
one, but of diameter 2 mm breaks under a tension of
1) 500 N 2) 1000 N 3) 10000 N 4) 4000 N
6. Two blocks of masses 1 kg and 4 kg are connected by a metal wire going over a smooth pulley as shown in the figure.
The breaking stress of the metal is 3.18 × 1010 N/m2. The minimum radius of the wire so it will not break is

1) 1 × 10–5 m 2) 2 × 10–5 m 3) 3 × 10–5 m 4) 4 × 10–5 m

320
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

7. A gas undergoes a change according to the law P  P0 eV . The bulk modulus of the gas is
PV
1) P 2) PV 3) P 4)

8. The pressure applied from all directions on a cube is P. How much its temperature should be raised to maintain
the original volume? The volume elasticity of the cube is  and the coefficient of volume expansion is 

P P P 
1) 2) 3) 4)
   P
9. The upper end of a wire of radius 4 mm and length 100 cm is clamped and its other end is twisted through an
angle of 30o. Then angle of shear is
1) 12o 2) 0.12o 3) 1.2o 4) 0.012o
10. Two wires A and B of same length and of the same material have the respective radii r1 and r2. Their one end is
fixed with a rigid support, and at the other end equal twisting couple is applied. Then the ratio of the angle of
twist at the end of A and the angle of twist at the end of B will be

r12 r22 r24 r14

1) 2 2) 2 3) 4 4) 4
r2 r1 r1 r2

11. The work done in twisting a steel wire of length 25 cm and radius 2 mm through 45o will be    8 1010 N / m 2 
1) 2.48 J 2) 3.1 J 3) 15.47 J 4) 18.79 J
12. A two metre long rod is suspended with the help of two wires of equal length. One wire is steel and its cross-
sectional area is 0.1 cm2 and another wire of brass and its cross-section area is 0.2 cm2. If a load W is
suspended from the rod and stress produced in both the wires is same then the ratio of tensions in them will be

1) Will depend on the position of W 2) T1 / T2 = 2

3) T1 / T2 = 1 4) T1 / T2 = 0.5
13. A wooden cube just floats inside water when a 0.2 kg mass is placed on it. When the mass is removed, cube
is 2 cm above the water level. What is the length of the cube?
1) 0.5 cm 2) 12.4 cm 3) 10 cm 4) 12 cm
14. An ice cube floats in water. What percentage of volume is outside water. Density of water = 1 g/cc, density of
ice = 0.9 g/cc.

1) 10% 2) 90% 3) 1% 4) 15%

321
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

15. A height H of water    1000 kg m 3  column which can produce the same pressure as that of a mercury

column    1300 kg m 3  of height 1 m at the bottom of a vessel is

1) 0.136 m 2) 1.36 m 3) 13.6 m 4) 136 m

16. When a crown of mass 14.7 kg is submerged in water, an accurate scale reads only 13.4 kg. The specific
gravity of the material of the crown is
1) 5.8 2) 8.6 3) 9.8 4) 11.3
17. The gate of a canal is 8 m wide. The level of water on one side is 30 m and on the other side is 15 m. The
resultant force on the gate is
1) 270 × 105 N 2) 270 × 106 N 3) 540 × 105 N 4) 540 × 106 N
18. A uniform glass U-tube is partially filled with a liquid. Horizontal length of the tube is 1 m. Tube is accelerating
horizontally with constant acceleration of 6 ms–2. The difference in the heights of the liquid in the two arms of
U-tube is

6 5 2
1) m 2) m 3) m 4) 6 m
10 3 3
19. The reading of a manometer fitted to a closed tap is 3.5 × 105 Pa. If the valve is opened, the reading of the
manometer falls to 3 × 105 Pa. The velocity of water is
1) 1 ms–1 2) 10 ms–1 3) 100 ms–1 4) 0.1 ms–1
20. A tank has a square shaped hole of side L at a depth y from the top of the tank and circular hole of radius R at
a depth 9y from the top. The quantities of water flowing out per second from both the holes are same when
tank is completely filled. Then R is equal to

L L
1) 8L 2) 3) 4) 8 L
3 3
21. An inverted (bell) lying at the bottom of a lake 47.6 m deep has 50 cm3 of air trapped in it. The bell is brought
to the surface of the lake. The volume of the trapped air will be (atmospheric pressure = 70 cm of Hg and
density of Hg = 13.6 g/cm3):
1) 350 cm3 2) 300 cm3 3) 250 cm3 4) 22 cm3
22. A cylindrical, tank is filled with water to a level of 3 m. A hole is opened at a height of 52.5 cm from bottom. The
ratio of the area of the hole to that of cross section area of the cylinder is 0.1. Find the square of the velocity
with which water is coming out: (g = 10 m/sec2)
1) 50 m2/sec2 2) 40 m2/sec2 3) 51.5 m2/sec2 4) 50.5 m2/sec2
23. A cylindrical vessel filled with water upto the height H becomes empty in time t0 due to a small hole at the
bottom of the vessel. If water is filled in the same vessel to a height 4H it will flow out in time:
1) 8 t0 2) 4 t0 3) 2 t0 4) t0
24. A piece of work of density 250 kg m–3 is immersed in water to a depth of 1 m and released. If viscous forces
due to water and air are neglected, the piece of cork will jump to what height above the surface of water?
1) 1 m 2) 2 m 3) 3 m 4) 4 m
322
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

1
25. Two blocks A and B are made of different kinds of wood. Block A floats in water with th of its above the
4
2
surface of water. Block B floats in water with rds of its volume below the surface of water. The ratio of the
3
densities of A and B is
1) 3 : 2 2) 5 : 3 3) 9 : 8 4) 4 : 3
26. In the figure shown, the heavy cylinder (radius R) resting on a smooth surface separates two liquids of densities
2 and 3 . Find the height ‘h’ for the equilibrium of cylinder..

3 2 2 3
1) R 2) R 3) R 4) R
2 3 3 2
27. The ratio of radii of two spehrical drops is 1 : 2. The ratio of terminal velocities of these drops will be
1) 4 : 1 2) 1 : 2 3) 2 : 1 4) 1 : 4
28. Liquid flows through a capillary tube, under a constant pressure, at a rate Q. If the liquid flows through another
tube of double the length and half the radius, the rate of flow of liquid will be
Q Q
1) 16 Q 2) 32 Q 3) 4)
16 32
29. Water rises to height of 2 cm in a capillary tube. The angle of contact is zero. The tube is now depressed further
so that its length above the surface of water is only 1 cm. The apparent angle of contact now is
1) 0o 2) 30o 3) 60o 4) 90o
30. Eight identical drops of water are falling through air with a steady velocity of 10 cm s–1. All the drops merge into
one bigger drop. Calculate the terminal velocity of bigger drop.
1) 40 2) 20 3) 4 4) 10
31. X and Y are two capillary tubes with lengths lX and lY and with radii rX and rY respectively. When a pressure
difference P is maintained between the ends of X, the rate of flow of water through X is 10 cc/sec. X and Y are
now connected in series and the same pressure difference P is maintained across the combination. If lX = 2lY
and rX = rY, rate of flow of water through the combination will be:
52 20 9
1) 3 cc/sec 2) cc/sec 3) cc/sec 4) cc/sec
7 3 4
32. Sixty four spherical rain drops of equal size are falling vertically through air with a terminal velocity 1.5 ms–1. If
these drops coalesce to form a big spherical drop, then terminal velocity of big drop is:
1) 8 ms 1 2) 16 ms 1 3) 24 ms 1 4) 32 ms 1
33. A metal plate of area 103 cm2 rests on a layer of oil 6 mm thick. A tangential force of 10–2 N is applied on it to
move it with a constant velocity of 6 cm s–1. The coefficient of viscosity of the liquid is
1) 0.1 poise 2) 0.5 poise 3) 0.7 poise 4) 0.9 poise
323
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

34. Two small drops of mercury, each of radius R, coalesce to form a single large drop. The ratio of the total
surface energies before and after the change is
1) 1 : 21/3 2) 21/3 : 1 3) 2 : 1 4) 1 : 2
35. Several spherical drops of a liquid of radius r coalesce to form a single drop of radius R. If T is surface tension
and V is volume under consideration, then the release of energy is

1 1  1 1  1 1  1 1 
1) 3VT    2) 3VT    3) VT    4) VT  2  2 
r R r R r R r R 
36. Pressure inside two soap bubbles are 1.01 and 1.02 atmospheres. Ratio between their volumes is
1) 102 : 101 2) (102)3 : (101)3 3) 8 : 1 4) 2 : 1
37. A drop of water of volume V is pressed between the two glass plates so as to spread to an area A. If T is the
surface tension, the normal force required to separate the glass plate is

TA 2 2TA 2 4TA 2 TA 2
1) 2) 3) 4)
V V V 2V
38. The largest average velocity of blood flow in an artery of radius 2 × 10–3 m if the flow must remain laminar is
(Take viscosity of blood to be 2.084 × 10–3 Pa s and  blood  1.06  103 kg m 3 )
1) 2.12 ms–1 2) 0.98 ms–1 3) 1.72 ms–1 4) 0.62–1
39. A spherical small ball of density  is gently released in a liquid of density       . The initial acceleration of
the free fall of the ball will be
  
1)  g 2)  g 3)  g 4) g
        
40. Two litres of water at initial temperature of 27oC is heated by a heat of power 1 kW in a kettle. If the lid of the
kettle is open, then heat energy is lost at a constant rate of 160 J/s. The time in which the temperature will rise
from 27oC to 77oC is (specific heat of water = 4.2 kJ/kg)
1) 5 min 20 s 2) 8 min 20 s 3) 10 min 40 s 4) 12 min 50 s
41. Minimum amount of steam at 100oC required to melt 12 gm ice completely will be
1) 1.5 gm 2) 1 gm 3) 2 gm 4) 5 gm
42. At what temperature will the resistance of a copper wire become three times its value at 0oC (Temperature
coefficient of resistance for copper = 4 × 10–3/oC
1) 400oC 2) 450oC 3) 500oC 4) 550oC
43. Three rods made of the same material and having the same cross-section have been joined as shown in Fig.
Each rod is of the same length. The left and right ends are kept at 0oC and 90oC, respectively. The temperature
of the junction of the three rods will be

1) 45oC 2) 60oC 3) 30oC 4) 20oC

324
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

44. If two rods of length L and 2L having coefficients of linear expansion  and 2  respectively are connected so
that total length becomes 3L, the average coefficient of linear expansion of the composite rod equals

3 5 5
1)  2)  3)  4) None of these
2 2 3
45. A metal wire of length l and radius r is fixed between rigid supports. Initially it is just taut. Now, due to decrease
in temperature, the tension developed in the wire:

l 1
1)  l 2)  3)  r 2 4) 
l r2
46. A piece of ice of mass 50 kg is pushed with a velocity of 5 m/s along a horizontal surface. As a result of friction
between the piece and the surface, the piece stops after travelling 25 m; the ice melted in this process is:
1) 50 kg 2) 50 g 3) 7.86 g 4) 1.86 g
47. Steam is passed into 54 g of water at 30oC till the temperature of the mixture becomes 90oC. If the latent heat
of steam is 536 cal/g, the mass of the mixture will be:
1) 80 g 2) 60 g 3) 50 g 4) 24 g
48. A 10 kg iron bar (specific heat 0.11 cal/gm–oC) at 80oC is placed on a block of ice. How much ice melts?
1) 1.1 kg 2) 10 kg 3) 16 kg 4) 60 kg
49. Two rods of equal length and area of cross-section are kept parallel and placed between temperatures 20oC
and 80oC. The ratio of the effective thermal conductivity to that of the first rod is: [the ratio (K1/K2) = 3 : 4]
1) 7 : 4 2) 7 : 6 3) 7 : 9 4) 7 : 8
50. If the temperature of the sun is doubled, then:
1) emission of energy will be doubled 2) emission of energy will become four times
3) mostly ultraviolet radiation will be emitted 4) mostly infrared radiation will be emitted
51. The rate of emission of radiation of a black body at temperature 27oC is E1. If its temperature is increased to
327oC, the rate of emission of radiation is E2. The relation between E1 and E2 is.
1) E2 = 24E1 2) E2 = 16E1 3) E2 = 8E1 4) E2 = 4E1

LEVEL - II
1. A beam of metal supported at the two ends is loaded at the centre. The depression at the centre is proportional to

1 1
1) 2) 3) Y 4) Y2
Y Y2
2. To break a wire, a stress of 106 newton/m2 is required. If the density of material is 3 × 103 kg/m3 then the length
of the wire which will break by its own weight will be (g = 9.8 m/sec2)
1) 30 m 2) 34 m 3) 98 m 4) 9.8 m
–5
3. The compressibility of water is 4 × 10 per unit atmospheric pressure. The decrease in volume of 100 cc of
water under a pressure of 100 atmospheres will be
1) 0.1 cc 2) 0.4 cc 3) 4.0 cc 4) 40 cc
325
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

kgwt
A bridge can bear 4 × 104 kg wt. If breaking stress is 5  10
4
4. and factor of safety is 5, the area of cross-
cm 2
section of the rod is
1) 4 cm2 2) 5 cm2 3) 8 cm2 4) 12 cm2
5. A uniform wire (Young’s modulus 2 × 1011 Nm–2) is subjected to a longitudinal tensile stress of 5 × 107 Nm–2.
If the overall volume change in the wire is 0.02%, the fractional decrease in the radius of the wire is
1) 1.5 × 10–4 2) 1.0 × 10–4 3) 0.5 × 10–4 4) 0.25 × 10–4
6. The area of cross-section of railway track is 0.01 m2. The temperature variation is 10oC. Coefficient of linear
expansion of steel = 10–5/oC. Young’s modulus of steel = 1011 Nm–2 . The energy stored per meter in the track is
1) 5 J 2) 10 J 3) 15 J 4) 20 J
A B
7. If the potential energy between two atoms is U  12  6 then the binding energy in equilibrium position is
r r
B2 B2 3B2 B2
1) 2) 3) 4)
4A 2A 2A A
1
8. Two wires of same material but radii r1 and r2 support a mass M in between. If a force F  Mg is applied then
3

1) for r1 = r2, 2 should break before 1 2) for r1 less than 2r2, 2 should break before 1
3) data is insufficient 4) for r1 = 2r2, any of the two may break
9. If the elastic limit of a typical rock is 3 × 10 Nm and its mean density 3 × 103 kgm–3, estimate the maximum
8 –2

height of a mountain on earth. Take g as 10 ms–2.

1) 6 km 2) 12 km 3) 8 km 4) 10 km
10. A stone of 0.5 kg mass is attached to one end of a 0.8 m long aluminium wire of 0.7 mm diameter and suspended
vertically. The stone is now rotated in a horizontal plane at a rate such that wire makes an angle of 85o with the
vertical. If Y = 7 × 1010 Nm–2, sin 85o = 0.9962 and cos85o = 0.0872, the increase in length of wire is

R mg

1) 1.67 × 10–3 m 2) 6.17 × 10–3 m 3) 1.76 × 10–3 m 4) 7.16 × 10–3 m

326
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

11. A composite wire of a uniform cross-section 5.5 × 10–5m2 consists of a steel wire of length 1.5 m and a copper
wire of length 2.0 m. The amount of stretch when it is loaded with a mass of 200 kg is [Young’s modulus of steel
is 2 × 1011 Nm–2 and that of copper is 1 × 1011 N m–2. Take g = 10 ms–2]
1) 1 mm 2) 2 mm 3) 3 mm 4) 4 mm
12. To break a wire of 1 m length a minimum weight of 40 kg is required. Then the wire of the same material of
double radius and 6 m length will require a breaking weight of
1) 80 kg weight 2) 240 kg weight 3) 200 kg weight 4) 160 kg weight
13. A force of 6 × 106 Nm–2 is required for breaking a material. The density  of the material is 3 × 103 kgm–3. If the
wire is to break under its own weight, the length of the wire made of that material should be (Take g = 10 ms–2)
1) 20 m 2) 200 m 3) 100 m 4) 2000 m
14. Fig shows a wire of length l and of slightly non-uniform cross-section. Its radius at one end is R1 and at the
other, it is R2.

The wire is stretched by forces F and F applied along the length in opposite directions and normal to the ends.
Y being the Young’s modulus, extension caused in the wire is nearly:

Fl FlY FlY FY
1) YR R 2) R R 3) R 2 R 2 4) l R R
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2

15. A weighing scale reads 10 kg when a bucket of water is placed on it. What will be the reading of the balance
when an iron piece of mass 7.2 kg suspended by a string is immersed with half its volume inside the water in the
bucket? Relative density of iron is 7.2
1) 10 kg 2) 10.5 kg 3) 13.6 kg 4) 17.2 kg
16. Fig. shows a venturimeter, through which water is flowing. The speed of water at X is 2 cm/s. The speed of
water at Y (taking g = 10 ms–2) is

1) 0.23 ms–1 2) 0.32 ms–1 3) 1.01 ms–1 4) 10.24 ms–1

17. Water is flowing continuously from a tap having an internal diameter 8 × 10–3 m. The water velocity as it leaves
the tap is 0.4 ms–1. The diameter of the water stream at a distance 2 × 10–1 m below the tap is close to
1) 7.5 × 10–3 m 2) 9.6 × 10–3 m 3) 3.6 × 10–3 m 4) 5.0 × 10–3 m

327
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

18. A thin uniform cylindrical shell, closed at both ends is partially filled with water. It is floating vertically in water
in half-submerged state. If c is the relative density of the material of the shell, then the correct statement is that
the shell is
1) more than half-filled if c is less than 0.5 2) more than half-filled if c is less than 1.0

3) less than half-filled if c is less than 0.5 4) less than half-filled if c is less than 0.5
19. A large tank is filled with water to a height H. A small hole is made at the base of the tank. It takes T1 time to
H
decrease the height of water of    1 ; and it takes T2 time to take out the rest of water. If T1 = T2, then the

value of  is
1) 2 2) 3 3) 4 4) 2 2
20. A cylindrical vessel is filled with a liquid of density  to a height h such that the force exerted by the liquid on the
bottom is equal to the force exerted on the walls of the vessel. Then h should be
1) equal to radius 2) more than the radius 3) less than the radius 4) two times the radius
21. An iceberg floats on sea water with a portion of it being submerged. If the relative density of ice is 0.9 and
that of sea water is 1.125, the fraction of the whole volume of the iceberg that appears on the surface of sea
water is
2 3 1 4
1) 2) 3) 4)
5 5 5 5
22. A large block of ice of thickness l and density  has a large vertical hole along its axis. This block is floating in
a lake. The length of rope required to raise a bucket of water through the hole is

1)    l  2) 1   l 3) l 4) l 1  
23. A balloon filled with hydrogen has a volume of 1 m3 and its mass is 1 kg. What would be the volume of the
block of a very light material which it can just lift? [Density of material of block is 91.3 kg m–3 and that of air
is 1.3 kg m–3]
1 3 1 1 1
1) m 2) m3 3) m3 4) m3
100 200 300 400
24. A container having a hole at the bottom is free to move on a horizontal surface. As the liquid comes out, the
container moves in backward direction with an acceleration  and finally acquires a velocity v (when all the
liquid has drained out). Neglect the mass of container. The correction option out of the following is:

1) only v depends on h 2) only  depends on h

3) both v and  depend on h 4) neither v nor  depends on h

328
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

25. A capillary tube is immersed vertically in water and the height of the water column is x. When this arrangement
x
is taken into a mine of depth d, the height of the water column is y. If R is the radius of the earth, the ratio is
y

 d  d  R d  R d
1) 1   2)  1   3)   4)  
 R  R R d  R d 
26. When an air bubble of radius r rises from the bottom to the surface of a lake, its radius becomes 5r/4, the
atmospheric pressure being equal to 10 m height of water column. If the temperature remains constant and the
surface tension is neglected, the depth of the lake is
1) 3.53 m 2) 6.53 m 3) 9.53 m 4) 12.53 m
27. A body of relative density 5.0 is released from rest on the surface water filled to a height of 1.0 m in a tall
cylinder. If viscous force is neglected, find the time taken by the body to reach the bottom of the cylinder. Take
g = 10 ms–2.
1) 0.25 2) 0.5 3) 0.125 4) 1
28. A hemispherical bowl of radius R is placed upside down on a flat horizontal surface. There is a small hole at the
top of the inverted bowl. Through the hole, a liquid of density  is poured in. Exactly when the container gets
full, water starts leaking from between the table and the edge of the container. Find the mass (m) of the
container.

R 2 R 3 R 3 2R 3
1) 2) 3) 4)
3 3 2 3
29. A capillary tube of radius r is immersed in water and water rises in it to a height h. The mass of water in the
capillary tube is 5 g. Another capillary tube of radius 2r is immersed in water. The mass of water that will rise in
this tube is
1) 2.5 g 2) 5.0 g 3) 10 g 4) 20 g
30. When a capillary tube of radius r is immersed in a liquid of density  , the liquid rises to a height h in it. If m is
the mass of the liquid in the capillary tube, the potential energy of this mass of the liquid in the tube is
mgh mgh
1) 2) 3) mgh 4) 2mgh
4 2
31. A capillary tube is attached horizontally to a constant head arrangement. If the radius of the capillary tube is
increased by 10%, then the rate of flow of liquid will change nearly by:
1) + 10% 2) + 46% 3) –10% 4) –40%
32. A solid ball of volume V experiences a viscous force F when falling with a speed v in a liquid. If another ball of
volume 8 V with the same velocity v is allowed to fall in the same liquid it experiences a force:
1) F 2) 16 F 3) 4 F 4) 2 F

329
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

33. The lower end of a capillary tube of radius r is placed vertically in water. Then, with the rise of water in the
capillary, heat evolved is:

2 r 2 h 2 r 2 h 2 dg r 2 h 2dg r 2 h 2dg
1)  dg 2)  3)  4) 
J 2J 2J J
34. A thin square plate of side 5 cm is suspended vertically from a balance so that the lower side just dips into water
with side parallel to the surface. When the plate is clean (angle of contact = 0o) it appears to weigh 4400 dyne
and when the plate is greasy (angle of contact = 180o), it appears to weigh 3000 dyne. Then, the surface
tension of water is:
1) 35 dyne per cm 2) 70 dyne per cm 3) 140 dyne per cm 4) 1080 dyne per cm
35. A hemispherical bowl just floats without sinking in a liquid of density 1.2 × 103 kg m–3. If outer diamter and the
density of the bowl are 1 m and 2 × 104 kg m–3 respectively, then the inner diameter of the bowl will be
1) 0.94 m 2) 0.96 m 3) 0.98 m 4) 0.99 m
36. A frame made of metallic wire enclosing a surface are a is covered with a soap film. If the area of the frame of
metallic wire is reduced by 50%, the energy of the soap film will be changed by
1) 100% 2) 75% 3) 50% 4) 25%
37. The lower end of a capillary tube is dipped in water. Water rises to a height of 8 cm. The tube is then broken
at a height of 6 cm. The height of water column and angle of contact will be

1  3  1  3  1  1  1  1 
1) 6cm, sin   2) 6 cm, cos   3) 4 cm, sin   4) 4 cm, cos  
4 4 2 2
38. A rectangular film of liquid is extended from (4 cm × 2 cm) to (5 cm × 4 cm). If the work done is 3 × 10–4 J, the
value of the surface tension of the liquid is
1) 0.250 N m–1 2) 0.125 N m–1 3) 0.2 N m–1 4) 8.0 N m–1
39. Two spherical bubbles coalesce. V is the consequent change in volume and S is the total change in surface area
then
1) 3 P0V + 4 ST = 0 2) 4 P0V + 3 ST = 0 3) 2 P0V + 3 ST = 0 4) 3 P0V + 2 ST = 0
40. Calculate the force of attraction between two parallel plates separated by a distance 0.2 mm after a water drop
of mass 80 mg is inrodued between them. The wetting is assumed to be complete. (surface tension of water is
0.07 Nm–1)
1) 0.14 N 2) 0.28 N 3) 0.42 N 4) 0.56 N
41. If the work done in blowing a bubble of volume V is W, then the work done in blowing the bubble of volume
2 V from the same soap solution will be
W
1) 2) 2 W 3) 3 2W 4) 3 4 W
2
42. In a resistance thermometer the resistances at 0oC and 100oC are 6.74 and 7.74 ohm respectively. The
temperature corresponding to 6.53 ohm resistance is:
1) 53oC 2) 21oC 3) –53oC 4) –21oC
43. A pendulum clock is 5 sec fast at temperature of 15oC and 10 seconds slow at a temperature of 30oC. At what
temperature does it give the correct time?
1) 18oC 2) 20oC 3) 22oC 4) 25oC

330
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

44. The pressure that has to be applied to the ends of a steel wire of length 10 cm to keep its length constant when
its temperature is raised by 100oC is: (For steel Young’s modulus is 2 × 1011 N m–2 and coefficient of thermal
expansion is 1.1 × 10–5 K–1)
1) 2.2 × 106 Pa 2) 2.2 × 108 Pa 3) 2.2 × 109 Pa 4) 2.2 × 107 Pa
45. 310 J of heat is required to raise the temperature of 2 mole of an ideal gas at constant pressure from 25oC to
35oC. The amount of heat required to raise the temperature of the gas through the same range at constant
volume is
1) 384 J 2) 144 J 3) 276 J 4) 452 J
46. An experiment takes 10 min for an electric kettle to heat a certain quantity of water from 0oC to 100oC. If it
takes 54 min to convert this water at 100oC into steam, then latent heat of steam is
1) 80 cal/gm 2) 540 cal/kg 3) 540 cal/gm 4) 80 cal/kg
47. The temperature of the two outer surfaces of a composite slab, consisting of two materials having coefficients
of thermal conductivity K and 2 K and thickness x and 4x respectively are T2 and T1 (T2 > T1). The rate of heat
 A  T2  T1  K 
transfer through the slab, in a steady state is   f , with f equal to:
 x 
x 4x

K 2K T1
T2

1 2 1
1) 1 2) 3) 4)
2 3 3
48. A planet is at an average distance d from the sun and its average surface temperature is T. Assume that the
planet receives energy only from the sun and losses energy only through radiation from its surface. Neglect
atmospheric effects. If T  d  n , the value of n is
1 1
1) 2 2) 1 3) 4)
2 4
49. A metal rod of length 2 m has cross-sectional areas 2 A and A as shown in the following figure. The two ends
are maintained at temperatures 100oC and 70oC. The temperature of middle point C is:

1) 80oC 2) 85oC 3) 90oC 4) 95oC

50. Four identical rods of same material are joined end to end to form a square. If the temperature difference between
the ends of a diagonal is 100oC then the temperature difference between the ends of other diagonal will be
100 o
1) 0oC 2) C; where l is the length of each rod
l
100 o
3) C 4) 100oC
2l

331
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

KEY WITH HINTS

LEVEL - I
FL l
1. 4 Y  F  Yr 2
r 2l L
2 2
FA YA  rA   lA  L B  2 2
       1    1     8
FB YB  rB   lB  L A  1 1
2. 1 If the system moves with acceleration a and T is the tension in the string W2 then by comparing this
m1m 2
condition from standard case T  m  m g
1 2

2 T 2 2 mg
m1  2m, m 2  m, T  mg ; Stress   mg ; Strain 
3 a 3a 3 aY

3. 2 Elongation in the wire  Tension in the wire.

2W  W
In first case T1 = W and in second case T2  W
WW

T1 l1
As T  1 
l2
 1  l2  l1  1.0 mm
2

F 4  9.8
4. 2  k   1960 N / m
x 2  102
1 2
Now work done in stretching this spring by 5 cm U kx  2.45 J
2

5. 4 Breaking force  area of cross-section  r 2   d 2

2 2
F2  d 2  F  2mm 
   2    F2  1000  4  4000 N
F1  d1  1000  1mm 

2m1m 2
6. 4 Tension in the wire T  m  m g  T  16N
1 2

Breaking force = Breaking stress × Area of cross-section

Tension = 3.18 × 1010 × r 2
16  3.18  1010  r 2  r  4  10 5 m

332
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

dP dP
7. 2 P  P0 eV   P0e V   P ;  P V  K  P V
dV  dV / V 
8. 1 Change in volume due to rise in temperature V  V  

V stress P P
 volumetric strain     ; But bulk modulus       
v strain  

r 4  103  30o
9. 2 L  r     0.12o
L 1
4
r14 1 r24 2  r 
10. 3 1  2    1  2 
2l1 2l2 2  r1 

1 2 r 4 2
11. 1 W  C   2.48 J
2 4l
Tension T1 A1 1
12. 4 Stress  = constant     0.5
Area of cross-section T2 A 2 2

13. 3 Mg + 0.2g =  w L3g and Mg   w  L  0.02  L2g ;  0.02 L2 w  0.2

0.2
 L  0.1 m  10 cm
0.02 1000

14. 1 In equilibrium FB = W;  Vin g  ice Vg

Vin ice 0.9 v

  Volume outside water  1  in  0.1 i.e., 10%
V  1 v
15. 3 At same height pressures are same. Therefore,  w gH  m gh m  H  13.6 m
16. 4 The apparent weight of the submerged object W' equals its actual weight W (=mg) minus the buoyant
force B as shown.

W 14.7
 Specific gravity    11.3
W  W  14.7  13.4

333
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

17. 1 F  g  h1A1  h 2 A 2   270 105 N

18. 1

Let P1 and P2 be the perssure at two ends.

6
Force  P1A  P2 A ; P1  P2  1  6  hg h m;
10

1 1 1
19. 2 p1  12  p2  22 , since v1 = 0, 22   p1  p 2 
2 2 2

2  p1  p 2 
or 2  = 10 ms–1


L
20. 3 A11  A 2 2 ; L2 2gy  R 2 2g  9y  L2  R 2  3  R 
3

 hdg   4760  1 g 
21. 2  01  hdg  V0  P0 V ; V  1   V0  1    50  300 cm3
 P0   70  13.6  g 

2gh
22. 1 The velocity of efflux is    50 m / sec or 2  50 m 2 / sec 2
1  a 2 / A2

A 2h t 4H
23. 3 t  t h   2
A0 g t0 H

m
24. 3 Let m be the mass of piece and V its volume. Then V 


When the piece is released, its upward acceleration is:

upthrust  weight V w g  Vg

a   3g
mass V

 Velocity of the piece when it reaches the surface of water is   2ah  2  3g 1  6g .

2 6g
It will jump to a height H above the surface of water, H   3 m
2g 2g

334
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

25. 3 Let V1 be the volume of block A and 1 is density. Then, from the principle of flotation, we have

 1 3
1V1g  1   V1    g or 1 
 4 4
where  is the density of water. Similarly for block B we have

2V2 2 1 3 3 9
2 V2 g  g or 2     
3 3 2 4 2 8
26. 4 Horizontal force on the cylinder due to two liquids must cancel out. L Length of cylinder.

Force from left = force from right. P avg Left hL   Pavg right RL

1 1 3
 2gh .hL  3gR .RL ; h R
2 2 2

2 r 2g v1 r12 r2 1 v 1
27. 4 Terminal velocity = v  . ;  2    1 
9  v 2 r2  2r  2
4 v2 4

4
pr 4 p  r  1 pr 4 1 Q
28. 4 Q ; Q    .   
8l 8  2  2l 8l 32 32

2Scos 1 2Scos 2 h 2 cos 2

29. 3 Now, h1  and h 2  ;    2  60o
rg rg h1 cos 1

4 3 4
30. 1 R and r are radii of bigger and smaller drop, R  8  r 3 , R = 2r
3 3
2
Velocity of bigger drop R 2 V  2r 
 ;     4; v = 40 m/s
Velocity of smaller drop r 2 10  r 

r 4 r 4
31. 3 Let lx = l,  ly  l / 2 ; V and V 
8l 8l 

l  l  2 20
 V    V    V V c.c.
 l   3l / 2  3 3
2
V R R3 R
32. 3 Terminal velocity  (velocity) 2
   ; 3
 64   4
v  r r r

From eqn. (i), V   4  v  16v  16  1.5  24 ms 1

2

dv 6
33. 1 F  A ; 102  105  103  ;   0.1 poise
dx 0.6

335
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Initial surface energy 2  4r T 

2
r2 2/3   21/3
As R  n r  2 r  2  2 ;
1/3 1/3
34. 2
R Final surface energy  4R T 
2

4 4 r 3V 3V
35. 2 n  r 3  R 3 ; but 4r
2
 V ; Ai = ; Af 
3 3 3 r R
 3V 3V  1 1 
Energy released E  T. A  T     3VT   
 r R  r R 
36. 3 Excess pressure P  Pin  Pout  P1  0.01 and similarly P2  0.02 atm
3
1 V  P   2  8
3
Vr  3
 1  2    
 P 
3
V2  P1   1  1

2TA 2 2TA 2
37. 2 Normal force required will be F  2  surface tension   Area 
2  
A  t V
38. 2 The maximum value of Reynolds number for flow to be laminar is 2000. If Vc is the average velocity of
 vc D R
flow, then R c  
 vC 
  2r 
 0.98 m / s

39. 3 The weight of the ball, w = mg = Vg , The volume of the liquid displaced = V..
Fu  Vg ;  The net downward force acting on the body is F  W  Fu       Vg

F 
 The initial acceleration, a   g
m   
40. 2 Heat gained by water = Heat supplied – Heat loss; ms  1000t  160t ; t = 8 min. 20 sec.
12  80
41. 1 Heat required = Heat supplied, x .Lf  y  L v  c. T  ; m  1.5 gm
640

42. 3 By using R t  R 0 1  t 

3  R 0  R 0 1  4  10 3 t   t  500 o C

2KA KA
43. 2 Let  be the temperature of the junction  90        60o C
l l
5
44. 3  3L   eff   L  2L  2     eff  
3
L
45. 3 T  YA  YA    Y  r 2    T  r 2
L
1 1 625
mv 2  m  L  ;  50   5   m  336  ;
2
46. 4 m   1.86 g
2 2 336

336
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

54  60
47. 2 Let m gm of steam is passed. Then, 54 1 60  m  536  m 10  ; m 
546
 Mass of mixture = 54 + 6 = 60 g
48. 1 Iron bar will release heat till its temperature falls to 0oC. After that thermal equilibrium will be reached
and ice will not melt further. If m gm be the mass of ice melted, then
m × 80 = 10 × 103 × 0.11 × 80  m = 1.1 kg
49. 2 For a parallel combination of two rods of equal length and equal area of cross-section:

4K1
K1  K 7
K  K2 3  7K1 ; Hence, K  6
K 1 
2 2 6 1

50. 3 According to Wien’s law,  m T  b .

As temperature is increased,  m is decreased, ie, mostly ultraviolet radiation is emitted.

4 4
E1 T14  T1   300 
51. 2 By Stefan’s law,       E 2  16E1
E 2 T24  T2   600 

LEVEL - II
1. 1 Depression produced in a beam at its centre when beam is supported at two ends and loaded at the
Wl 3
middle    ; Where IG = geometrical moment of inertia.
48 . [Link]
2. 2 Weight of wire = mass of wire × g = volume × density × g

force  area  length  g stress

Stress   ;  length  ;
area area  g

106
Length   34 m
3  103  9.8

5 Volume strain
3. 2 Compressibility = 4×10   Volume strain  4 103
100

Change in volume
 4  10 3  Change in volume = 0.4 c.c.
Original volume

Breaking stress Breaking stress

4. 1 Factor of safety  Working stress  Force / area

Factor of safety  force 5  4 10 4

Area of cross section =   4 cm 2
Breaking stress 5  10 4

337
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

L Stress V
5. 4   2.5  10 4 . Given  2  104 ; V  r 2 L .
L Y V

V  r 2 L  r L 2r V L
  2   2  ; or    2  104  2.5  104  0.5  10 4
V  r L  r L r V L

r
or  0.25  104 ; –4
 Fractional decrease in r = 0.25 × 10 .
r

1
6. 1 Let  = coefficient of linear expansion.  Elastic energy  × Stress × Strain × Volume
2

1 Y   strain   Volume
2
l strain
U ;   ; strain = t
2 L t t

Y   2 t 2   Area  length  1011  105   10   0.01 1

2 2

 U or U  5 J
2 2

7. 2 Let UB = Binding energy in equilibrium position. U B  U1  U 2 where U1  from r to 

1/6
 2A 
since U1 ( from r to  ) = 0 and r0   
 B 

A B B2 B2
 UB  0    UB   Binding energy required
 2A 
2
 2A  2A 2A
   
 B   B 

Mg 4Mg Mg
8. 4 Tension in wire 1 is Mg   , Tension in wire 2 =
3 3 3

4Mg Mg
Stress for wire 1, S1  and stress for wire 2, S2 
3  r12 3r22

For r1  r2 , S1  4S2  wire 1 will break before wire 2; For r1  2r2 , S1  S2

 Any of the two wires may break because stress is same.

K 3  108
9. 4 h max    10 km
g 3 103  9.8

10. 1 Here T cos   mg and T sin   mR2

T l mgl
Using Y  we get l  2  1.67  10 3 m
A l r Y cos 

338
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

11. 1 Since the steel and copper parts of the wire are of the same cross-sectional area (A) and are loaded
F
with the same weight F = Mg, they are under the same stress   .
A

Ys ls Yclc F Mg
Therefore, L  L  A  A
s c

Mg  Ls Lc 
 extension of the composite wire is l  ls  lc  A  Y  Y  ; l = 10 m = 1 mm
–3

 s c 

12. 4 Breaking force = Breaking stress × area of cross-section of wire.

Breaking force  r 2 (If ‘r’ is doubled, breaking force = 40 × 4 = 160 kg-wt.

Force mg LAg
13. 2 Stress     Stress  Lg
Area A A
stress
L  2  102  200 m
g

YAl Fl Fl
14. 1 F l  
l Y A1A 2 YR1R 2

15. 2 Buoyant force on the iron piece,

V mg  w 7.2  10
Fb   w g    0.5 kg wt.
2 2 i 2  7.2

An equal reaction of this buoyant force shall act on water in downwards direction.
Hence, the reading of the balance is 10 + 0.5 = 10.5 kg
16. 2 Let h1 = height of water at X
h2 = height of water at Y

1 2
By Bernoulli’s equation, v  P  gh1  const. , where h1 = h2.
2

v22  v12  2g  h1  h 2  ;  v 2  0.32 m/s

339
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

1 1
17. 3 P0   v12  gh  P0  v 22  0  v 2  v12  2gh  2 m/s
2 2

d12 d 2
From equation of continuity, A1v1  A 2 v 2  v1  2 v 2
4 4

v1 0.4
 d 2  d1  8 103  –3
v2 2 = 3.6 × 10 m

18. 1 Density of material of shell is c w ; Let Vm = volume occupied by metal in water.

Vw = volume occupied by water in the shell. Va = volume occupied by air in the shell.

Vm  Vw  Va
Then, Vm c w g  Vw w g  w g
2

 2Vm c  2Vw  Vm  Vw  Va ;  Vw  Vm 1  2 c   Va

Therefore, if c  0.5, Vw  Va

19. 3 Time in which height of liquid falls from H1 to H2.

H 1
H 1
T1   2

t  
H1  H 2 ; T2 H
0
;
1
1 ;

1   4
 

20. 1 Force exerted by the liquid on the bottom; F1 = pressure × area = gh  r 2

h
The force exerted on the walls of the vessel. F2  g    2r  h
2

But F1  F2  gh r 2  gh 2 r  h  r

21. 3 Weight of iceberg = weight of the liquid displaced by the submerged part of the ice berg mg = m'g

V ice
 
V  water , where V' is the volume of the submerged portion of the ice berg and V is the total
volume of the ice berg.

V 0.9 V
 , where is the fraction of the volume submerged. Fraction of the whole volume that
V 1.125 V
V V 0.9 V 1
appears above the sea water is  1  1 ; 
V V 1.125 V 5
340
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

22. 4 Let the block has height h above the surface of water and l is the thickness of ice block.
l  h   
; h  l  l ; h  l   l
l
23. 3 For lifting upward, thrust > w. If V is the volume of balloon and V' that of load and  is the density of
air, then from the above condition.

 V  V   A g   M  m  g ;  V  V  A   M  VL   m  VL 
V A  M 0.3 1
V  ; Vmax   m3
 L   A  90 300
24. 1 The reaction of outflowing liquid = mass coming out per sec × velocity of container.
2ag
  Ah    av . v  a .2gh .    and the time taken for the tank to be empty..
A

A 2h
t ;  v  t  2gh
a g

xrg
25. 1 On earth’s surface,  
2

 d
yrg d g 1  
In the mine,   ; Dividing, we get x  g d   R   1  d
2 y g g R
26. 3 Let the depth of the lake be h metre. Since the temperature remains constant, we have, from Boyle’s
law. P1V1  P2 V2
3
4 3 4  5r  125
or  h  10   r  10     or  h  10   10  ; h = 9.53 m.
3 3 4 64

27. 2 Weight of the body (W)  mg  Vg

Upthrust on the body  U   Vg  Net downward force F  W  U       Vg

F F      Vg     
 Acceleration a  m  V   g
V   

1 2 1 2
From the relation s  ut  at , we have h  0  at
2 2
1/2 1/ 2
2h  2h   2  1.0  5000 
 t      = 0.5 s
a     g    5000  1000   10 

341
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

28. 2 Pressure at the horizontal surface is P  g .R .

Force by liquid on the horizontal surface    = Force by the surface on the liquid    .

F  P. R 2   .g. R 3
The bowl will lose contact with the surface when, F = Weight of (liquid + bowl)
2 R 3
 .g . R 3   . R 3g  mg  m
3 3
29. 3 Mass of water in first tube is m  r 2 h

hgr h gr
Now, surface tension T  
2 2
h
where h' is the height to which water rises in the second tube and r' its radius. Since r  2r, h   ,
2
h
the mass of water in the second capillary tube is m  r  h     2r 
2
2

2
 2r 2 h  2m  2  5  10 g
30. 2 The mass of the liquid in a column between x and x + d is dm  r 2 dx
Therefore, the potential energy of the liquid in a column of height h is
h 2
h mgh
  r   gdx  r g 2   r h  m 
2 2 2

0
2 ;

8l
31. 2 Initial resistance of the liquid column R  ; Initial liquid current = C
r 4
Pressure difference P = CR------(i)
Let resistance after increasing the radius by 10% = R'
4 4
8l  100  8l  100  R  110 
4
 R     1.1  1.4641 ------(ii)
4
  .R   
 110r   110  r
4 4
 110  R   100 
 
 100 
Final liquid current = C'; Pressure = C'R' ------(iii)
C R
From eqns. (ii) and (iii), we get; C'R' = CR or   1.4641  1.46
C R
C  C
 Percentage increase in the liquid current   100
C
 C 
   1  100  1.46  1  100  46%
C 
342
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

32. 4 Let r and r' be the radii of the ball of volume V and V' ( = 8 V) respectively. Then
3
4 4 V  r  
V  r 3 and V  r 3   
3 3 V r
3
8V  r   r
  or 2 (i)
V r r
According to Stoke’s law; Viscous force, F  6 rv
Since  and v are same for both balls,  Fr

F r 
 2 [Using (i)] or F' = 2F
F r
2T cos 
33. 2 When the tube is placed vertically in water, water rises through height h 
rdg
Upward force  2r  T cos 
Work done by this force in raising water column through height h is given by:

 rhdg 
W   2rT cos   h   2rh cos      r h dg
2 2

 2 cos  

h
The increase in potential energy E p of the raised water column  mg
2

r 2 hd gh r 2 h 2dg
 m  r hd
2
So, E p  ; W  e p 
2 2

The part  W  E p  is used in doing work against viscous forces and frictional forces between

W  E p r 2 h 2 dg
water and glass surface and apepars as heat. So, Heat released  
J 2J

34. 2 W + 10 T = 4400 ------(1) at   0o

W – 10 T = 3000 ------(2) at   180o
From (1) & (2), 20 T = 1400 ; T = 70
35. 3 Let D1 be the inner diameter of the hemispherical bowl. As bowl is just floating so

4  1   D1  
3 3 3
4 1
    1.2  10           2  104 
3

3 2 3  2   2  

1/3 1/3
1.2  103  1.2   18.8 
or  1  D13  D1   1     ; D1 = 0.98 m
2  10 4
 20   20 

343
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

A
36. 3 Surface energy = surface tension × surface area or U = S × 2A; U1  S  2    S  A
2

U  U1 2SA  SA
% decrease in surface energy   100%  100%  50%
U 2SA

37. 2 r 6 3 ; cos   r  cos   3    cos 1

3
hr  HR ; 8r  6R;   R 4 4
R 8 4
38. 2 Workdone = Surface tension of film × Change in area of the film. W  T  A

W 3  104 1
Here, A1  8cm 2 ; A 2  20 cm 2 ; A  24  10 4 m 2 ;  T     0.125 Nm 1
A 24  104 8

 4T   4 3   4T   4 3 
39. 1 P1V1  P2 V2  P3 V3 or  P0    r1    P0    r2 
 r1   3   r2   3 

 4T  4 3 
  P0   r  or 4T  r12  r22  r 2    P0  r13  r23  r 3 
 r  3 

S 3
4T  P0 V  0 or 4TS  3P0 V  0
4 4 
40. 2 Let A be the circular area over which the liquid wets the plate and d be the distance between two plates.
Mass of liquid drop, m = Ad . If S is the force of surface tension of water, then excess of pressure
inside the liquid film in excess of atmospheric pressure is given by

S S 2S
p  
r d/2 d

2S
; Force of attraction between the plates, F  A
d

2S 2 Sm 2  0.07   80  106 
F  2  Ad  ;   0.28 N
d d 2 103   4  108 

1/3
4 3  3 
41. 4 As volume of the bubble V  R  R    V1/3  R 2  V 2/3
3  4 

Work done in blowing a soap bubble W  8R 2 T  W  R 2  V 2/3

2/3 2/3
W V   2V 
  2   4
2/3 1/3
 2  2     W2  3 4 W
W1  V1   V 

344
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

R  R0 0.21
42. 4 T  100   100  21o C
R100  R 0 1

1 1 1
43. 2 t    t or 5      15   86400 ; and 10      30   86400
2 2 2

  30
  2 ; 3  60,   20o C
  15
44. 2 Thermal strain in the wire = T
Thermal stress in rod is the pressure due to the thermal strain.
Required pressure = YT = 2 × 1011 × 1.1 × 10–5 × 100 = 2.2 × 108 Pa

45. 2 Cp  Cv  R ; At constant pressure, Heat = nC p 

310
or 310  2  Cp   35  25  20 Cp or Cp   15.50
20

 Q v  nC v   n  C p  R   = 2 × 7.2 × 10 = 144 J
46. 3 Let m be the mass of water.
Quantity of heat of absorbed by water in 10 min  msT  100 m

100m  54
 Quantity of heat absorbed by water in 54 min =
10
Quantity of heat required to convert water into steam = mL

100m  54
Hence,  mL or L  540 cal / gm
10

5x 4x x 5K
47. 4 For slabs in series, we have, R eq.  R 1  R 2 ; i.e., K A  2KA  KA ; K eq. 
eq. 3
Now, in steady state, rate of heat transfer through the slab

K eq.A  T2  T1   A  T2  T1  K  1
  f ; f
5x  x  3
48. 3 Let P be the power radiated by the sun and R be the radius of planet.

Energy radiated by planet = 4R 2  T 4 

P
For thermal equilibrium,  R 2  4R 2  T 4 
4d 2
1 1
 T4  or T  d 1/ 2 ; Hence, n 
d2 2
345
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

49. 3 Here, K1 = K2, l1 = l2 = 1 m

A1 = 2A, A2 = A; T1 = 100oC, T2 = 70oC

Q K2A 100  T  KA  T  70 
 Temperature at C be T, then   ; or T = 90o C
t 1 1
50. 1 Suppose temperature difference between A and B is 100oC and A  B

Heat current will flow from A to B via path ACB and ADB.

Since, all the rods are identical, so   AC     AD

  A  C   A   D ;  C  D
ie, temperature difference between C and D will be zero.

346
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

CHAPTER - 08
THERMODYNAMICS

Thermodynamics deals with the conversion of heat energy into other forms of energy.
Thermodynamic system
Thermodynamic system is the name given to an assembly of extremely large number of particles (atoms or
molecules). The thermodynamic system may exist in the form of solid, liquid, gas or a combination of two or more
states.
A system whose state is completely defined by the variables called thermodynamic variables. Pressure (P),
volume (V), Temperature (T) and internal energy (U) are called a thermodynamic variables. They are connected by
3
relations such as PV  RT, U  RT etc.
2
Pressure and volume can be taken as two independent variables, other variables can be determined from the
knowledge of P and V.
If the system undergoes a series of changes and comes back to the initial state, then the process is called a
cyclic process.
A reversible process is one which can be reversed in such a way that all changes taking place in the direct
process are replaced when the conditions are reversed.
Zeroth law of thermodynamics
If two systems A and B are separately in thermal equilibrium with a system C, then A & B are in thermal
equilibrium with each other. It means that they are at the same temperature. When the temperature of a body is
measured, the thermometer will be in thermal equilibrium with the body.
Internal energy
Internal energy of a system is the energy possessed by the system due to molecular motion and molecular
configuration. Due to molecular motion it posses internal KE (Uk) and due to molecular configuration it possess
internal PE (Up). Then the change in energy, dU = dUk + dUp
If there is no inter molecular force dUp = 0, then dU = dUk = mCv dT
For  moles of an ideal gas, dU  C v dT ie, the internal energy in the absence of inter molecular force is the
function of temperature and state only.
The change in internal energy depends only on the initial and final states of the system. U  F  I
Change in internal energy in a cyclic process is zero, ie UF = UI; U  F  I  0 --------(1)
First law of Thermodynamics
Ist law of thermodynamics is equivalent to law of conservation of energy.
It states that the heat energy given to a system  Q  is used for increasing the internal energy  U  of the

system and for doing the work  W  by the system against its surroundings.
Q  U  W -------(2)
347
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Indicator diagram
A graph representing the variation of any one of the quantity (P, V, T) against another is called an indicator
diagram. Every point on the indicator diagrams represent a unique value for (P, V or T) of gases.

P P1 A (P1, V1)

P2 B (P2, V2)

V1 V2

Work done by a gas

Let P and V represent the pressure and volume of a gas taken in a cylinder closed by a piston of area A. Force
exerted on the piston F = P × A.

P
area enclosed
A
dx
P, V, T
V

Let the piston move through a small distance dx, when the gas expands. Work done during expansion
dW  F  dx  PAdx  PdV

 Work done = W   dW   PdV ----------- (3)

The area enclosed by the curve gives work done during the process.
Application of first law
(1) Cyclic process
If the system undergoes a series of changes and comes back to the initial state then it is a cyclic process. Let UF
and UI are the final and initial internal energies.

P
In the case of cyclic process UF = UI

 change in internal energy U  U F  U I  0

From eqn. (2), Q  W ---------(4) ie, heat supplied is equal to the work done.

348
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

(2) Isochoric process

P V

T P

For a thermodynamic process, the volume remains constant during isochoric process. So the gas cannot do
any work. W  0

P
The equation of state for isochoric process is   = constnt. To vary pressure of a gas at constant volume the
T
temperature must be varied accordingly. For isochoric process Q  C V T .

RT p 2 V2  p1V1
 Q  U , U  C v T     1     1 ----------- (5)

The energy supplied at constant volume will be increasing the internal energy of the gas and thereby temperature
increases.
(3) Isothermal process

T
P

V P

In any thermodynamic process, the temperature remains constant during isothermal process. Consequently the
internal energy remains constant.
The equation of state for the gas is PV = a constant. Isothermal expansion increases volume and pressure
decreases. Isothermal compression volume decreases and pressure increases. The slope of the isothermal curve
 dP  P
     .  Q  0   W
 dV  V

V2 P
W  R T log  R T log 1 ---------- (6). Energy supplied is used to do external work.
V1 P2
(4) Adiabatic Process
It is a process in which the system is thermally insulated, so that no heat enters or leaves the system. Q  0
R  T1  T2  1
0  U  W , W   R  P1V1  P2 V2  ---------- (7)
   1  1
 dP  P
The equation of state for adiabatic process, PV  = constant. The slope of the adiabatic curve      
 dV  V
349
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

If the gas expands W is +ve, hence internal energy and temperature decreases and the gas will be cooled.
If gas is compressed W is –ve, hence internal energy increases and the gas gets heated up.
(5) Isobaric process
V
It is a process in which pressure remains constant. The equation of state for the process  constant. the
T
amount of heat transferred  Q  C P T . The slope of the P-V curve for isobaric curve is zero. For isobaric
expansion Vt = V0 (1 +  0 t)

W   PdV  P  V2  V1   R  T2  T1  -----------(8)

P dP/dV = 0

dQ  dU  PV  V  V2  V1 
V
At this time heat energy supplied is used for increasing the internal energy of the gas as well as external work
done. So the gas requires more heat to change its temperature at constant pressure than at constant volume.
Adiabatic process
Adiabatic process is taking place if there is no exchange of heat between the system and surroundings. For this
the system is thermally insulated from surroundings.
For an adiabatic process Q  0 .  U  W  0
dU  dW  0 , dU  C v dT , dW = PdV
C v dT  PdV  0 ------------(9)
But for a gas PV  RT , PdV  VdP  RdT ------------(10)

C v  PdV  VdP 
Eliminating dT and using eqn. (9),  PdV  0
R

R PdV  VdP
But C v  ;   PdV  0
 1    1
dV dP
PdV  VdP  0 ,    0 ;  log e V  log e P  C
V P

log  PV    constant ,  PV  = a constant



The equation is called the equation of state for an adiabatic change.

This can be rewritten as TV 1  constant , T  P1 = constant
For an adiabatic change, PV  = a constant.; dPV   p  V 1dV  0
350
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

1
 dP  PV P
Slope of adiabatic curve    
   
 dV  V V

dP P
For an isothermal, PV = a constant., PdV  VdP  0 ,   
dV V

P
  
slope of adiabtic V
  
slope of isothermal P ----------(11)
 
V

CP
but   C  1  Slope of adiabatic is steeper than isothermal.
V

Adiabatic is a fast process. Isothermal is a slow process.

stress P VP
Elasticity of gas  strain    V / V    V

 P
Adiabatic elasticity =  V     P ----------(12)
 V

 P
Isothermal elasticity   V      P ----------(13)
 V

P C
Ratio of adiabatic to isothermal elasticity     p 1
P Cv

eg: Bursting of a cycle tube is an adiabatic process.

Example 1 : Two samples of a gas at same temperature and pressure are compressed isothermally and adiabatically
V
from volume V to each. In which sample the pressure is greater?
2

V
Initial volume = V, Initial pressure = P1; Final volume = , Final pressure = P2
2

PV
For isothermal compression P2V2 = P1V1; P2   2P
V/2

 V 
For adiabatic P2  P 

  2 P; Since  > 1, P2  P2
 V / 2 
Pressure during adiabatic compression is greater than isothermal.

351
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Second Law of Thermodynamics

Clausius statement
It is impossible for a self acting machine unaided by an external agency to transfer heat from a cold body to a
hot reservoir.
Kelvins statement
It is not possible to get a continuous supply of work from a body by cooling it to temperature lower than that of
the surroundings.
Reversible and irreversible process
A thermodynamical process taking a system from initial to final state is reversible if the process can be turned
back such that both the system and surroundings return to their original states, when the conditions are reversed.
For a system to be reversible it should be free from dissipative forces such as friction, viscosity etc. Also it
should be a slow process.
Any process which cannot be reversed by reversing the conditions is called an irreversible process. It is also
called the natural process because all the process occuring in nature are irreversible.
eg. current flow from high potential to low potential. Heat flow between two bodies having a temperature gradient
between them etc.
Heat engine
It is a device which converts heat into work continuously through a cyclic process. It consists of three parts-
source, working substance and sink. The working substance take heat from the source, which is at a higher temperature
T1 and converts a part of it to useful work and rejecting the rest to the sink, which at a lower temperature. The cycle
repeats and a continuous work is derived.

o
T1 K Source
Q1

T1 > T2 Working
substance
Q2
o
Sink T2

The performance of a heat engine is expressed as efficiency   which is the ratio of useful work obtained
from the engine to the heat supplied to it.
work done W
  For cyclic process,  U  0  ,  Q  W ;
heat input Q1 ; W = Q1 – Q2

Q1  Q 2 Q
   1  2 ------------(14)
Q1 Q1

for a perfect heat engine   1, W  Q1 , so that Q2 = 0

Q1 is the heat taken from source and Q2 is the heat rejected to the sink.
A perfect heat engine is the one which converts all heat supplied into work.
352
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

Refrigerator
A refrigerator is a heat engine running in reverse direction. In this the working substance (refrigerant) takes a
heat Q2 from a body at a low temperature T2, and transfers the heat Q1 to the body at a higher temperature T1 with
the help of an external agent (compressor). Thus with the help of mechanical work the working substances transfers
heat from a cold body to a hot body, so that the cold body is cooled more and more.
The performance of a refrigerator is expressed by coefficient of performance (K)
Heat extracted Q 2 Q2
K  
work done W Q1  Q 2 ---------(15)
A perfect refrigerator is one which transfers heat from cold body to hot body without doing work.
ie, W = 0, so that Q1 = Q2, hence K  
Carnot Heat Engine
1) It consists of a cylinder with perfectly non-conducting walls with a perfectly conducting base. It encloses a
perfect gas as the working substance with the help of a non-conducting frictionless piston.
2) A source of infinite thermal capacity maintained at constant higher temperature T1.
3) A sink of infinite thermal capacity maintained at constant low temperature T2,
4) A perfectly non-conducting platform (stand).

ideal gas

source sink
stand T2
T1
A carnot engine is an ideal heat engine in which the working substance passes through carnot cycle.
Working of the engine (carnot cycle)

Y
PRESSURE (P)

A(V1, P1)
Q1
T1 B(V2, P2)

D(V4, P4)

Q2 C(V3, P3)
T2

X
O K L M N
VOLUME (V)

353
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

The working substance in carnot engine passes through a reversible cycle in four steps.
1. The cylinder with ideal gas is placed on the source and the gas is allowed to expand slowly at a constant
temperature T1, during which it absorbs a heat Q1. This isothermal change is represented by AB in the indicator
diagram.
2. The cylinder is now placed on the platform and the gas is allowed to expand adiabatically till the temperature
falls from T1 to T2. It is represented by a adiabatic BC.
3. The cylinder is now placed on the sink and compressed at constant temperature T2 along the path CD transferring
a certain quantity of heat Q2 to the sink.
4. Finally the cylinder is placed on the platform and compressed adiabatically so that the gas returns to its initial
state along DA.
The closed path ABCDA represents the carnot cycle.
Efficiency of the engine
work done W Q1  Q 2 Q
Efficiency of the engine,   heat input  Q ; 
Q1
 1  2 ---------(16)
Q1
1

V 
RT2 log  3 
V2 V3 Q2
  V4 
Q1  W1  RT1 log and Q 2  W3  RT2 log  V  ---------(17)
V1 V4 ; Q1
RT1 log  2 
 V1 

The points B and C lie on same adiabatic.  T1V21  T2 V31 ---------(18)

Also A and D lie on the same adiabatic.  T1V11  T2 V41 ---------(19)

1 1
 V2  V  V2 V3
from (18) and (19),    3  ;  ------(20)
 V1   V4  V1 V4

Q 2 T2 T2
Applying (20) in (17),     1
Q1 T1 T1 ---------(21)
It is seen that efficiency of a heat engine depends only on temperatures of source and sink.
All heat engines working between the same temperatures are equally efficient.
Efficiency of a heat engine is always less than unity or in otherwords whole heat can never be converted into
work.
Entropy
All naturally occuring process proceed in one-way.
For eg. A stone falling from a height reach the ground but it never goes back. When conditions are reversed the
stone cannot go back. Heat flows from a point of high temperature to a point of low temperature.
Entropy is a measure of a systems thermal energy per unit temperature that is unavailable for doing useful work.
Work is obtained from ordered molecular motion, entropy is a measure of the molecular disorder or randomness of
a system. If an irreversible process occurs in a closed system, the entropy of the system increases. It never decreases.
Unlike energy conservation entropy is never conserved, it always increases. The change of entropy for a reversible
process is
354
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

dQ
S   --------(22) where dQ is the change in heat energy at a temperature T.
T
Q
For an isothermal process. S 
T
For an ideal gas entropy is a state property.
First law is written as dQ = dU + dW = nCVdT + PdV
nRT dQ nRT dV C dT dV dT
P ;   n v  nR  nC v
V T T V T V T
Integrating this equation from initial to final state.

V  T 
S  nR log e  2   nCv log e  2  ----------(23)
 V1   T1 
Thus the change in entropy of an ideal gas depends only on the initial and final values of T & V. Thus entropy is
a characteristic of the particular state of a system and not dependant on how the system arrived at that state.
The unit of entropy is J/K.
Example 2 : An insulating vessel containing 1.8 kg of water is placed on a hot plate, initially water and hot plate are
at 20oC. The temperature of the hot plate is raised slowly to 100oC, and the water begins to boil. What is the change
in entropy of the water during the process.
Water and hot plate are in thermal equilibrium and the process is reversible.
Heat energy required to raise the temperature of water by an amount dT is,
dQ = mcdT
T2 T2
dT dT T2
S   mc  mc  = mc log
T1
T T1
T e T
1

373
= 1.8 × 4190 × loge = 1820 J/K
293
During all real processes entropy increases. It never decreases. Once entropy is created it remains in the
universe.
The second law of thermodynamics may be stated in terms of entropy as
“It is not possible to have a process in which entropy of an isolated system is decreased.”
In an adiabatic reversible process entropy remains a constant since, no heat transfer takes place in such a
process.
Entropy of a system is a measure of non-availability of energy, it increases disorder. During all irreversible
process change in entropy is greater than zero. When disorder increases available energy for work decreases. At a
certain state there is no available energy for doing work. This condition is referred as heat death of the universe.

355
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

QUESTIONS
LEVEL - 1
1. During adiabatic expansion of 2 moles of a gas, the internal energy of the gas is found to decrease by 2 J, the
work done during the process on the gas will be equal to
1) –2 J 2) 2 J 3) –1 J 4) 1 J
2. One mole of an ideal monoatomic gas is heated at a constant pressure of one atmosphere from 0oC to 100oC.
The change in the internal energy is
1) 12.46 × 102 J 2) 20.80 J 3) 25 × 102 J 4) 50 J
3. If the ratio of specific heats of a gas at constant pressure to that at constant volume is  , the change in internal
energy of a mass of gas, when the volume changes from V to 2 V at constant pressure P is

 V  1 PV P V
1) 2)    1 3) V    1 4) P    1
PV

4. If Q and W represent the heat supplied to a system and the work done on the system respectively, the
first law of thermodynamics can be written as
1) Q  U  W 2) Q  W  U 3) Q  U  W 4) Q  2W  U
5. Two kilograms of water is converted into steam by boiling at atmospheric pressure. The volume changes from
2 × 10–3 m3 to 3.34 m3. The work done by the system is approximately equal to
1) 200 kJ 2) 234 kJ 3) 340 kJ 4) 468 kJ
6. Starting with the same initial conditions, an ideal gas expands from volume V1 to V2 in three different ways.
The work done by the gas is W1 if process is purely isothermal, W2 if purely isobaric and W3 if purely
adiabatic. Then
1) W1 > W2 > W3 2) W2 > W3 > W1 3) W2 > W1 > W3 4) W1 > W3 > W2
7. For one complete cycle of a thermodynamic process on a gas as shown in the P – V diagram, which of the
following is correct?

1) E int  0, Q  0 2) Eint  0, Q  0 3) E int  0, Q  0 4) E int  0, Q  0

 5
8. When an ideal gas     is heated under constant pressure, then the percentage of given heat energy
 3
utilised in doing work will be
1) 60% 2) 50% 3) 40% 4) 30%

356
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

8 5
9. An ideal gas at 27oC is compressed adiabatically to of its original volume. If   , then the rise of
27 3
temperature is
1) 450 K 2) 375 K 3) 225 K 4) 175 K
10. The amount of work done in an adiabatic expansion from temperature T to T1 is

R  T  T1  R  T  T1 
1) 2) 3) R  T  T1   4) R  T  T1    1
  1

11. For adiabatic process, the slope of indicator P - V diagram is

P V
1) 2) 3) PV 4) zero
V P
12. The isochoric modulus of elasticity is
1) Infinity 2) Unity 3) Zero 4) None of these
13. The volume of air increases by 5% in its adiabatic expansion. The percentage decrease in its pressure will be
1) 1% 2) 3% 3) 5% 4) 7%
14. If  denotes the ratio of two specific heats of a gas, the ratio of slopes of adiabatic and isothermal P-V curves
at their point of intersection is
1)   2 2)   2 3)   2 4) 
15. If a gas is heated at constant pressure, its isothermal compressibility
1) Increases 2) Decreases 3) Becomes zero 4) Remains constant

16. The pressure and density of a diatomic gas    1.4  change adiabatically from  P1 , d1  to  P2 , d 2  . If
d2 P
 32 , then 2 should be
d1 P1

1) 256 2) 128 3) 64 4) 32
17. A thermodynamical system absorbs 100 calorie of heat and performs 30 joule of work. If J = 4.2 joule per
calories, the change in its internal energy will be
1) 14 J 2) 140 J 3) 390 J 4) 450 J
18. An ideal monoatomic gas is at 27oC expands adiabatically from a volume V to volume 27 V. The change in
internal energy, for 1 mole of gas is
1) 3320 J 2) – 3320 J 3) 6640 J 4) – 6640 J
19. Unit mass of a liquid of volume V1 completely turns into a gas of volume V2 at constant atmospheric pressure
P0 and temperature T. The latent heat of vaporization is L. Then the change in internal energy of the gas is
1) L 2) L + P0 (V2 – V1) 3) L – P0(V2 – V1) 4) zero

357
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

20. One gram of water at 105 pascal is converted into steam at 100oC. Volume of 1 gram of steam is 1671 cc. If
latent heat of evaporation is 540 cal, change in internal energy due to evaporation is
1) 450 cal 2) 540 cal 3) 500 cal 4) 100 cal
21. A refrigerator works between temperature of melting ice and room temperature 27.3oC. The amount of
energy, in kWh, that must be supplied to freeze 1 kg of water at 0oC is
1) 0.009 kWh 2) 3.36 kWh 3) 27.3 kWh 4) 0.9 kWh
22. A refrigerator has a coefficient of performance 5, absorbs 400 cal of heat from ice trays. Then workdone by
the motor is
1) 80 J 2) 336 J 3) 800 J 4) 3360 J
23. In a thermodynamic process, workdone by the system equals decrease in its internal energy. The process is
1) Isothermal 2) Isobaric 3) Adiabatic 4) Isochoric
24. The pressure and volume of a given mass of gas are related as VP  = constant. The bulk modulus for the gas
in this process is
 P
4)  P 
1
1) 2) 3) P
P 
25. In the cyclic process ABCDA shown in the figure, consider the following statements.

I. Area ABCD = Work done on the gas

II. Area ABCD = Net heat absorbed
III. Change in the internal energy in cycle = 0
Which of these are correct?
1) I only 2) II only 3) II and III 4) I, II and III
26. When a system is taken from state i to a state f along path iaf, Q = 50 J and W = 20 J. If W = – 13 J for the
curved return path fi, Q in this path is

1) 33 J 2) 23 J 3) – 7 J 4) –43 J

358
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

27. A and B are two adiabatic curves for two different gases. Then A and B corresponds to

1) Ar and He respectively 2) He and H2 respectively

3) O2 and H2 respectively 4) H2 and He respectively
28. An ideal gas at a pressure of 1 atm and temperature of 27oC is compressed adiabatically until its pressure
 3
becomes 8 times the initial pressure, then the final temperature is    
 2
1) 627oC 2) 527oC 3) 427oC 4) 327oC
29. A monoatomic gas is supplied the heat Q very slowly keeping the pressure constant. The work done by the gas
will be
2 3 2 1
1) Q 2) Q 3) Q 4) Q
3 5 5 5
30. Two identical containers joined by a small pipe initially contain the same gas at pressure P0 and absolute
temperature T0. One container is now maintained at the same temperature while the other is heated to 2T0. The
common pressure of the gases will be
3 4 5
1) P0 2) P0 3) P0 4) 2P0
2 3 3
31. Two different masses of a gas m and 2m are heated separately in vessels of equal volume. The T-P curve for
mass 2m makes angle  with T-axis and that for mass m takes angle  with T-axis then
1) tan   tan  2) tan   2 tan  3) tan   2 tan  4) None of these
32. P-V diagram of a diatomic gas is a straight line passing through the origin. The molar heat capacity of the gas
in the process will be
4R
1) 4 R 2) 2.5 R 3) 3 R 4)
3
33. A closed system undergoes a change of state by process 1  2 for which Q12 = 10 J and W12 = –5 J. The
system is now returned to its initial state by a different path 2  1 for which Q21 is –3 J. The work done by the
gas in the process 2  1 is
1) 8 J 2) zero 3) –2 J 4) + 5 J
34. An ideal monoatomic gas undergoes a process in which the gas volume relates to temperature as VT = constant.
Then molar specific heat of gas in this process is
R 3R
1) 2) R 3) 4) None of these
2 2

359
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

35. Find the work required to compress adiabatically 1 g of air initially at NTP to half its volume. Density of air at
Cp
NTP = 0.001129 gcm–3 and  1.4
Cv

1) 62.64 J 2) 32.64 J 3) –32.64 J 4) –62.64 J

36. A Carnot engine has efficiency 40% (heat sink 27oC). To increase efficiency by 10%, the temperature be
increased by
1) 15.7 K 2) 25.7 K 3) 50.7 K 4) 35.7 K
37. An ideal gas expands according to the law PV3/2 = constant. We conclude
1) The adiabatic exponent of the gas K = 1.5
2) The molar heat capacity C = Cv – 2R
3) Temperature increases during the process
4) Such a process is not feasible
38. 3 moles of an ideal monoatomic gas perform a cycle shown in figure. The gas temperature TA = 400 K,
TB = 800 K, TC = 2400 K, TD = 1200 K. Find the work done by the gas

1) 20 kJ 2) 1200 R 3) 400 KJ 4) 800 R

1
39. A diatomic ideal gas is compressed adiabatically to of its initial volume. In the initial temperature of the gas
32
is Tf (in kelvin) and the final temperature is Tf, the value of a is
1) 4 2) 6 3) 5 4) 9
40. The volume of an ideal diatomic gas is doubled isothermally, the internal energy
1) is doubled 2) is halved 3) is increased four times 4) remains unchanged
41. 1 mm3 of gas is compressed at 1 atm pressure and temperature 27oC to 627oC. What is the final pressure
under adiabatic condition? (  for the gas is 1.5)
1) 27 × 105 Nm–2 2) 12 × 105 Nm–2 3) 15 × 105 Nm–2 4) 23 × 103 Nm–2
42. A monoatomic gas is suddenly compressed to (1/8)th of its initial volume adiabatically. The ratio of its final
5
pressure to the initial pressure is (Given the ratio of the specific heats of the given gas to be )
3

40 24
1) 32 2) 3) 4) 8
3 5

360
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

LEVEL - II

CP
1. A gaseous mixture consists of 16 g of helium and 16 g of oxygen. The ratio C of the mixture is
V

1) 1.4 2) 1.54 3) 1.59 4) 1.62

2. Two identical containers A and B with frictionless pistons contain the same ideal gas at the same temperature
and the same volume V. The mass of the gas in A is mA and that in B is mB. The gas in each cylinder is now
allowed to expand isothermally to the same final volume 2V. The changes in the pressure in A and B are found
to be P and 1.5 P respectively. Then:
1) 4 mA = 9 mB 2) 2mA = 3mB 3) 3mA = 2mB 4) 9mA = 4mB
3. An ideal gas is initially at temperature T and volume V. Its volume is increased by V due to an increase in
T
temperature T , pressure remaining constant. The physical quantity   varies with temperature as
V T

4. In an adiabatic process, the root mean square speed of the molecules of a monoatomic gas becomes twice its
initial value. The ratio of the initial volume of the gas to the final volume is
1) 2 2) 23/2 3) 4 4) 8
5. During an adiabatic process, the pressure of a gas is proportional to the cube of its absolute temperature. the
CP
value of C for that gas is
V

3 4 5 3
1) 2) 3) 4)
5 3 3 2
6. A closed hollow insulated cylinder is filled with gas at 0oC and also contains an insulated piston of negligible
weight and negligible thickness at the middle point. The gas on one side is heated to 100oC. If the piston
moves through 5 cm, the length of the hollow cylinder is
1) 13.65 cm 2) 27.3 cm 3) 38.6 cm 4) 64.6 cm
7. Two different adiabatic paths for the same gas intersect two isothermals at T1 and T2 as shown in the P-V
diagram. Then

Va Vb Va T2 Va Vd Va T1
1) V  V 2) V  T 3) V  V 4) V  T
c d b 1 b c d 2

361
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

8. Heat is supplied to a diatomic gas at constant pressure. The ratio of Q : U : W is

1) 5 : 3 : 2 2) 7 : 5 : 2 3) 2 : 3 : 5 4) 2 : 5 : 7

Q
9. The molar heat capacity in a process of a diatomic gas, if it does a work of when heat Q is supplied to it is
4

2 10 5 6
1) R 2) R 3) R 4) R
5 3 3 5
10. A thermodynamical system undergoes cyclic process ABCDA as shown in figure. Work done by the system is

3
1) zero 2) 3P0 V0 3) P0V0 4) P0 V0
2

11. A sample of ideal gas    1.4  is heated at constant pressure. If 100 J of heat is supplied to the gas, the work
done by the gas is
1) 28.57 J 2) 56.54 J 3) 38.92 J 4) 65.48 J
12. In the P-V diagram shown in figure, ABC is a semicircle. The work done in the process ABC is

 
1) zero 2) 4 J 3) J 4)  J
2 2

 3
13. Three samples of the same gas A, B and C     have equal volume initially. Now, the volume of each
 2
sample is doubled. For A, the process is adiabatic; for B, it is isobaric and for C, the process is isothermal. If
the final pressures are equal for all the three samples, the ratio of their initial pressures is:

1) 2 :1: 2 2) 2 2 :1: 2 3) 2 :1: 2 4) 2 : 2 :1

362
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

P
14. One mole of an ideal monoatomic gas at temperature T0 expands slowly according to the law = constant. If
V
the final temperature is 2T0, heat supplied to the gas is
3 1
1) 2RT0 2) RT0 3) RT0 4) RT0
2 2
15. A graph is plotted with (PV/T) on y-axis and mass of the gas along X-axis for different gases. The graph is
1) a straight line || to Y-axis for all gases
2) a straight line || to X-axis for all gases
3) a straight line passing through origin with different slopes for different gases
4) a straight line passing through origin with same slope for different gases
16. A Carnot engine is designed to operate between 480 K and 300 K. If the engine actually produces 1.2 J of
mechanical energy per cal. of heat absorbed, then the ratio of actual efficiency to theoretical efficiency is
3 4 1 3
1) 2) 3) 4)
4 3 3 1
17. What is the amount of heat required to raise the temperature of 10 gram of a liquid from 0o to 10oC when its
specific heat in cal/g = 0.6 t2, where t is the temperature in oC.
1) 2 kcal 2) 2 cals 3) 200 cals 4) 60 cals
18. The P-V diagram of a gas undergoing a cyclic process (ABCDA) is shown in the graph where P is in units of
Nm–2 and V in cm3. Identify the incorrect statement.

1) 0.4 J work is done by the gas from A to B

2) 0.2 J of work is done on the gas from C and D
3) No work is done by the gas from B to C
4) Work is done by the gas in going from B to C and on the gas from D to A
19. A thermodynamical system is changed from state (P1, V1) to (P2, V2) by two different processes, the quantity
which will remain same will be
1) Q 2) Q 3) Q  W 4) Q  W
20. The P-V diagram of 2 g of helium gas for a certain process A  B is shown in the figure. What is the heat
given to the gas during the process A  B ?

1) 4P0V0 2) 6P0V0 3) 4.5 P0V0 4) 2P0V0

363
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

21. A perfect gas goes from a state A to another state B by absorbing 8 × 105 J of heat and doing 6.5 × 105 J of
external work. It is now transferred between the same two states in another process in which it absorbs 105 J
of heat in the second process. Then
1) work done on the gas is 0.5 × 105 J 2) work done by gas is 0.5 × 105 J
3) work done on gas is 105 J 4) work done by gas is 105 J
22. A system is provided with 200 cal of heat and the work done by the system on the surrounding is 40 J. Then its
internal energy.
1) increases by 600 J 2) decreases by 800 J 3) increases by 800 J 4) decreases by 50 J
23. 5.6 L of helium gas at STP is adiabatically compressed to 0.7 L. Taking the initial temperature to be T1, the
work done in the process is

8 3 15 9
1) RT1 2) RT1 3) RT1 4) RT1
9 2 8 2
24. An ideal gas is compressed isothermally until its pressure is doubled and then allowed to expand adiabatically
to regain its original volume. (  = 1.4 and 2–1.4 = 0.38). The ratio of the final to initial pressure is
1) 0.76 : 1 2) 1 : 1 3) 0.66 : 1 4) 0.86 : 1
25. One mole of an ideal gas in initial state A undergoes a cyclic process ABCA, as shown in the figure. Its pressure
at A is P0. Choose the correct option (s) from the following.

1) Internal energies at A and B are different. 2) Work done by the gas in process AB is P0V0 ln 4
P0 T0
3) Pressure at C is 4) Temperature at C is
4 4
26. The work of 146 kJ is performed in order to compress one kilo mole of a gas adiabatically and in this process
the temperature of the gas increases by 7oC. The gas is (R = 8.3 J mol–1 K–1)
1) diatomic 2) triatomic 3) a mixture of monoatomic and diatomic 4) monoatomic
27. During an adiabatic process, the cube of the pressure is found to be inversely proportional to the fourth power
of the volume. Then the ratio of specific heats is
1) 1 2) 1.33 3) 1.67 4) 1.4
28. One mole of an ideal gas at an initial temperature of T kelvin does 6 R joules of work adiabatically. If the ratio
5
of specific heats of this gas at constant pressure and at constant volume is , the final temperature of gas will
3
be
1) (T + 2.4) K 2) (T – 2.4) K 3) (T + 4) K 4) (T – 4) K

364
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

1
29. A t 27oC a gas is suddenly allowed to expand such that its pressure becomes th of original pressure. The
8
 5
temperature of the gas will be     .
 3

1) –142oC 2) 300 K 3) 327o 4) 420 K

30. In an adiabatic change, the pressure and temperature of monoatomic gas are related with the relation P  T C ,
where C is equal to

5 5 5 3
1) 2) 3) 4)
4 3 2 5

31. A given mass of a gas is compressed isothermally until its pressure is doubled. It is then allowed to expand
adiabatically until its original volume is restored and its pressure is then found to be 0.75 of its initial pressure.
The ratio of the specific heats of the gas is approximately.

1) 1.20 2) 1.41 3) 1.67 4) 1.83

 7
32. The pressure and density of a diatomic gas     change adiabatically from  P1 , 1  to  P2 , 2  . If
 5
2 P
 32 , then 2 should be
1 P1

1) 16 2) 32 3) 64 4) 128

3
 T 
33. The specific heat capacity of a metal at low temperature (T) is given as CP  kJK kg   32 
1 1
 . A 100g
 400 
vessel of this metal is to be cooled from 20 K to 4 K by a special refrigerator operating at room temperature
(27oC). The amount of work required to cool the vessel is
1) equal to 0.002 kJ 2) greater than 0.148 kJ
3) between 0.148 kJ and 0.028 kJ 4) less than 0.028 kJ
34. A diatomic ideal gas is used in a car engine as the working substance. If during the adiabatic expansion part of
the cycle, volume of the gas increases from V to 32 V. The efficiency of the engine is
1) 0.5 2) 0.75 3) 0.99 4) 0.25
35. Three designs are proposed for an engine operating between 500 K and 300 K. For 1 kcal of heat input,
design A claims to produce 3000 J of work, design B claims to produce 2000 J of work and design C claims
to produce 1680 J of work. Which design is possible.
1) A only 2) B only 3) C only 4) All of these

365
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

36. A refrigerator works between temperature of melting ice and room temperature (17oC). The amount of energy
in kWh that must be supplied to freeze 1 kg of water at 0oC is
1) 1.4 2) 1.8 3) 0.058 4) 2.5
37. An ideal refrigerator has a freezer at a temperature of –13oC. The coefficient of performance of the engine is 5.
The temperature of the air (to which heat is rejected) will be
1) 325oC 2) 325oK 3) 39oC 4) 320oC

1
38. A Carnot engine, having an efficiency of   as heat engine, is used as a refrigerator. If the work done on
10
the system is 10 J, the amount of energy absorbed from the reservoir at lower temperature is
1) 99 J 2) 90 J 3) 1 J 4) 100 J

1
39. A Carnot reversible engine converts of heat input into work. When the temperature of the sink is reduced by
6
1
62 K, the efficiency of Carnot’s cycle becomes . The temperature of the source and sink will be
3
1) 372 K, 310 K 2) 181 K, 150 K 3) 472 K, 410 K 4) None of these
o
40. A Carnot engine whose low temperature reservoir is at 7 C has an efficiency of 50%. It is desired to increase
the efficiency to 70%. By how many degrees should the temperature of the high temperature reservoir be
increased.
1) 840 K 2) 280 K 3) 560 K 4) 380 K
41. A Carnot engine takes 3 × 106 cal of heat from a reservoir at 627oC and gives it to a sink at 27oC. The work
done by the engine is
1) 4.2 × 106 J 2) 8.4 × 106 J 3) 16.8 × 106 J 4) zero

366
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

KEY WITH HINTS

LEVEL - I
1. 1 dQ = dU + dW or dQ = 0 = –2 + dW

 dW  2J = work done by the gas  Work done on the gas = –2 J

3R 3R
2. 1 dU  C V  dT, CV  ;  dU  100  0   12.46 102 J
2 2

 R  PV P  2V  V  PV
3. 2 U  nCV T  n   T ;  U   
  1     1    1  1

4. 3 Q  U  W, W = work done by the system. When work is done on the system, W is
expressed as negative.

 Q  U   W

5. 3 W  P  V  1.01105  3.34  2 10 3   1.01 3.338 105  3.40 kJ

6. 3 AB is isobaric, AC is isothermal and AD is adiabatic  W2  W1  W3

7. 3 Eint  0 for a complete cycle. Q   E  W

Q = zero + negative work = negative, Q0

dW dU n .C V .dT 3 2 dW
8. 3  1  1  1    0.4 ;  40%
dQ dQ n .C P .dT 5 5 dQ

1 2/3
T2  V2   27 
9. 2    300   ; T2  675 K  T  375 K
T1  V1   8 

10. 2 dW + dU = dQ, d  0 for adiabatic,  dW  dQ

But dU  CV dT  dW  C V dT , CP  CV  R  C V  CV  R

R R  T  T1 
 CV  ; dW  C V .dT 
 1    1

367
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

11. 1 For adiabatic process, PV  = constant.

dP dP dP P
Slope  ; V  PV 1  0 ;  
dV dV dV V
12. 1 For isochoric change, volume remains constant. dV = 0.

dP dP  V dP  V
Modulus of elasticity      Infinity
dV / V dV zero
1 
13. 4 PV  = constant in adiabatic change PV dV  V dP  0
dP dV dP  dV 
  .  100     100  = 1.4 × 5 = 7%
P V P  V 
dP P
14. 4 For isothermal process, PV = constant.    = slope of isothermal curve.
dV V

dP
For adiabatic process, PV  = constant. V  P  0
dV
P

dP P 
 dP / dV  for adiabatic curve
 V 
   for adiabatic curve  dP / dV  for isothermal curve  P
dV V
V
dP dP
15. 4 For isothermal process, temperature is constant.  Modulus of elasticity E     V
dV / V dV
dP P
Since PV = constant, 
dV V

P 1 1
E  V  P Given P = constant  Compressibility  E  P = constant.
V 


m P1m  P2 m  P d 
      321/5    2   128
7
16. 2 V  ;   1.4 ; P1V1  P2 V2  2  2  7

d d1 d2 P1  d1 

17. 3 dQ = 100 cal = 420 J; dW = 30 J  dU  dQ  dW   420  30   390 J

1  5/3 1 2/3

T2  V1   V   1 
18. 2 For adiabatic change, TV 1 = constant.       
T1  V2   27V   27 

2
1 3R
 T2  T1     33.3 K  dU  nCV  T2  T1   1  33.3  300  ; dU = –3320 J
3 2

368
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

19. 3 From first law of thermodynamics U  Q  W ; Here Q  mL  L (m = 1)

and W  P0  Vf  Vi   P0  V2  V1   U  L  P0  V2  V1 

20. 3 dU  Q  W ; or dU  mL  P  V2  V1 

105 1671  1  106

or dU  1 540   or dU = 540 – 40; or dU = 500 cal
4.2

Heat supplied Q 2 T2
21. 1 Coefficient of performance, COP  Work done  W  T  T
1 2

80  1000  4.2 273 336 100

or  ; W = 336 × 100 s; or W  kWh  0.009 kWh = Energy
W 27.3 3.6  106

Q2 Q2 400
22. 2 COP  ; or W  COP  5  80cal ; or W = 80 × 4.2 = 336 J
W  
23. 3 Given : dW = – dU; or dU + dW = 0 or dQ = 0

 No heat is exchanged. Hence the process is adiabatic.

dV dP
24. 2 Given VP  = constant.; 
V P

dP P P
Bulk modulus  dV / V    or  K = Bulk modulus of elastcity..


25. 3 Work is done by the gas (as cyclic process is clockwise)  W  Area ABCD
So from the first law of thermodynamics Q (net heat absorbed) = W = Area ABCD.
As change in internal energy in cycle U  0

26. 4 U , remains same for both path

For path iaf U  Q  W  50  20  30 J
For path fi U  30 J and W  13 J ;  Q  30  13  43 J
27. 4 In adiabatic process as  increase slope of P-V graph increases. Slope of B is more. Therefore  B   A .
B should be monoatomic and A diatomic.
1
T p   3/ 2 1
28. 4 Using relation 2   2   8  3/ 2  2;  T2  2T1 = 600 K = 327oC
T1  p1 

369
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

  U    Cv  2
29. 3 Q  U  W ;  W   Q   U   Q   1  v
   Q  p 
1   Q
  Q p 
p p
 C p  5

P0 V P0 V PV PV 2P0 V 3PV 4
30. 2  n1  n 2 i   n1  n 2 f ; or RT  RT  RT  2RT ; or RT  2RT  p P0
0 0 0 0 0 0 3
31. 2 At constant volume

 nR   mR 
P  T ; or P   V  T   MV  T

i.e., P-T graph is a straight line passing through origin. Slope of this line is proportional to m, mass of gas.
 tan   2 tan 
32. 3 P-V diagram of the gas is a straight line passing through the origin. Hence P  V or PV–1 = constant.
Molar heat capacity in the process PVx = constant is
R R R R
C  ; Here  = 1.4 and x = –1 (For diatomic gas);  C    C  3R
 1 1 x 1.4  1 1  1
33. 1 In a cyclic process U  0  Q total  Wtotal
or 10 – 5 = –3 + W21; or W21 = 8 J
34. 1 VT = constant, V (PV) = constant  PV 2 = constant

R
Molar heat capacity of a gas in the process PV x = constant is C  C v 
1 x
3 R R
Here, x = 2 ; C  R 
2 1 2 2
1
 V1 
 273  2 
0.4
35. 4 T1V11  T2 V21 or T2  T1    360 K
 V2 
We find r for 1 g of air using PV = rT; r = 2.88 × 106
r 2.88  106
W  T1  T2    273  360  = – 62.64 J
 1 0.4

T2 T 3 5
36. 4   40%  0.4  1  or 2  1  0.4   T1  300   500 K
T1 T1 5 3

10 300
new efficiency = 40  40  100  44%; 0.44  1  T or T1  535.7 K
1

370
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

R R
37. 2 Molar heat capacity C  C v   Cv   C v  2R
1 K 3
1
2

38. 1 WBC  3R  TC  TB  ; WAB  WCD  0 (since it is isochoric)

WDA  3R  TA  TD  ;  Total work done

WBC  WDA  3R  TA  TC  TB  TD  = 2400 R = 20 kJ

39. 1 In adiabatic process, TV 1 = constant.  Ti Vi 0.4  Tf Vf 0.4

0.4
 Vi 
or Ti Vi   aTi    ; or a   32   4
0.4 0.4

 32 
40. 4 No change in the internal energy of ideal gas, but for real gas internal energy increases because work is
done against intermolecular forces.

T
41. 1 For adiabatic change, 1  constant
P
 1 1.5 0.5
 T1   P1   300  1
    ;      ; P2 = 27 atm = 2.7 × 105 Nm–2
 T2   P2   900   P2 
42. 1 In an adiabatic process, PV  = constant.
 5/3
P V  P 1 1 P
 1  2  ;  1  3    2  32
P2  V1  P2  2  32 P1

LEVEL - II

16 16 1
1. 4 1   He   4 and  2   H2  
4 32 2

7
20 
C  n1CP1  n 2 CP2 2  47  1.62
   mix   P   
5 29
 C V mix n1CV1  n 2 CV2 12 
2
2. 3 Temperature remains constant during expansion, hence PV = constant.
dV
 PdV + VdP = 0; dP  P P
V
m PA m A P m
But, PV  RT  RT    A
M PB m B ; 1.5P m B or 3mA = 2mB

371
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

3. 3 From ideal gas equation; PV  RT -----(i) or PV  RT ------(ii)

V T V 1 1
Dividing Eq. (ii) by Eq. (i), we get  ;    
V T V T T T
So, the graph between  and T will be rectangular hyperbola.

4. 4 Let T1 be the initial temperature. Since vrms  T , the final temperature T2 = 4T1. For an adiabatic
process
5
1
 V 3 V1
 4  8
3/ 2
T1V1 1
 T2 V2  1
;  1  4 
 V2  V2

5. 4 P  T3 ; PT 3  K ------------(1)

For an adiabatic process. T  P1  K ; PT 1  K ----------(2)
 3
From (1) and (2),  3 ; 2  3  
1  2
6. 4 Let L be the length (in cm) of the hollow cylinder and r its radius. Since the mass of the gas remains
unchanged and the pressure of the gas in both sides are equal, we have, from Charle’s law,

L L
V1 V2 5 5
 2  2
T1 T2 ; 273 373
which gives L = 64.6 cm.

7. 3 Since points a and d lie on the same adiabatic path,

 1
 1  1
 Va  T2
T1Va  T2 Vd or    ----------(1)
 Vd  T1

 1
Since points b and c also lie on the same adiabatic path, T1  Vb   T2 Vc
1

 1
 Vb  T2
or    ----------(2)
 Vc  T1

 1  1
 Va  V  Va Vd
From (1) and (2), we get    b  or V  V
 Vd   Vc  b c

372
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

7  5 
8. 2 Q  nCp T  n  R  T ; U  n C v T  n  R  T
2  2 
7 5
W  Q  U  nR T ;  Q : U : W  : :1 or 7 : 5 : 2
2 2
Q 3Q
9. 2 From first law thermodynamics, dU  dQ  dW  Q   --------(i)
4 4
5   2  2 3Q 3Q
Also, dU  C v dT   R  dT , for diatomic gas  dT    dU   
2   5R  5R 4 10R
dQ Q 10R
Molar heat capacity C   
dT 3Q / 10R 3
P0 V0
10. 1 As is clear from figure, WBCOB  area of BCO  
2
P0 V0 P0 V0 P0 V0
WAODA   area of AOD    Wnet  WBCOB  WAODA     zero
2 2 2

dW n  C p  C v  dT C p C v
11. 1 dW = dQ – dU = n(Cp – Cv) dT;    ,
dQ nC p dT Cp Cp

dW C 1 4 2 2
 1 v  1   ; dW  100 
 28.57 joule
100 Cp 1.4 14 7 7
12. 3 In the part AB, volume of the gas is decreasing and in the part BC, volume of the gas is increasing.
Therefore, WAB is negative and WBC is positive. As |WBC| > |WAB|, therefore, network done is positive.
1 2 1 
r   1  joule
2
Wnet = area of semicircle ABC 
2 2 2
13. 2 Let PA, PB, PC be the initial pressures of the three samples and P be the final pressure of each.
As process for A is adiabatic,  PA  V   P  2V  ; PA = P . 23/2
3/2 3/2

For B, the process is isobaric  PB  P

For C, the process is isothermal.  PC  V   P  2V  ; PC = 2P
Hence PA : PB : PC = 23/2 : 1 : 2
R R
14. 1 In a process PVx = constant, molar heat capacity is given by C  
 1 1 x
P
As the process is = constant, i.e., PV–1 = constant, therefore, x = – 1.
V
5 3 R
For ideal monoatomic gas,   ;  C  R   2R
3 2 2
Q  nC  T   1 2R  2T0  T0   2RT0
373
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

PV m
15. 3 For n moles of an ideal gas, PV = nRT;   nR    R
T M
where m is mass of gas and M is molecular weight of the gas.
PV  R   PV  R
    m = constant × m;   graph is a straight line, slope =   . As molecular mass M
T M  T  M
is different for different gases, therefore, slope of straight line graph is different for different gases.
T2 300 3
16. 1 Theroretical efficiency,   1  T  1  480  8
1

Ideally, an engine should produce 4.2 J of energy per calorie of heat absorbed. And it produces only 1.2
J of energy.
1.2 2  2 / 7 16 3
 Actual efficiency, n    ;    0.76 
4.2 7  3 / 8 21 4
17. 1 As dQ = cm dt = 0.6 t2 m dt
10
10
 t3 
 Q   0.6 t  10 dt  6    2000 cals  2 kcal
2

0  3 0
18. 4 The area under P-V diagram = work done
or W = AD × DC = (2 × 105 – 1 × 105) Nm–2 × (4 – 2) × 10–6 m3 = 0.2 J
19. 4 For all processes, change to internal energy U   Q W does not change. It depends only on initial
and final states.
20. 2 Change in internal energy from A to B is
f f 3 9
U  nRT   Pf Vf  Pi Vi    2P0  2V0  P0  V0   P0 V0
2 2 2 2
Work done in process A to B is equal to the area covered by the graph with volume axis, ie,
1 3
WA  B   P0  2P0    2V0  V0   P0 V0 ; Q  U  W  6P0 V0
2 2

 Change in internal energy U A  Q A  WA  8  10  6.5  10  1.5  10 J

5 5 5
21. 1

In second process Q B  105 J

In both the processes, initial and final states are same, so change in internal energy will be same.
 U A  U B ; 1.5  105  Q B  WB ; WB  0.5  105 J
Work done is negative, so, work done on the gas is 0.5 × 105 J
22. 3 From first law of thermodynamics
dQ = dU + dW; dU = 840 – 40 = 800 J
So, the internal energy of the system increases by 800 J.

374
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

5.6 1
23. 1 At STP, 22.4 L of any gas is 1 mol.  5.6 L   mol  n
22.4 4
1
V 
In adiabatic process, TV 1 = constant. T2  T1  1 
 V2 
5
Cp
5  5.6  3
1
  for monoatomic He gas.  T2  T1    4T1
Cv 3  0.7 
Further in adiabatic process, Q = 0;  W  U  0

 
 R  1 R 
 9
or
W  U   nC v T   n    T2  T1       4T1  T1    RT1
  1  4  5 1  8
3 

V pf
 2  2   2  0.38  0.76

According to question Pf V   2Pi    ;

24. 1 pi
2
25. 2 TA  TB  U A  U B

V   4V0 
WAB  1 R  T0 ln  f   RT0 ln    P0 V0 ln  4 
 Vi   V0 
26. 1 For adiabtic process, dQ = 0. So, dU  W ;  nC v dT  146  103 J
nfR
  7  146  103 [f  Degree of freedom]
2
103  f  8.3  7
  146  103 ; f = 5.02  5; So, it is a diatomic gas.
2
27. 2 For adiabatic, PV = constant.----------(i)
k
Given, P 
3
; P3V4 = k;  PV 4/3  k ---------(ii)
V4
4
Comparing Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get,    1.33
3
28. 4 In an adiabatic process Q  0 . So, from 1st law of thermodynamics
 R 
W  U  nC v T   n    Tf  Ti  --------(i); Ti = T
  1 
R
Substituting given values in Eq. (i) we get  6R   T  Tf 
 5 / 3  1
3R
 6R   T  Tf  ;  T  Tf  4  Tf   T  4  K
2
375
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

29. 1 In adiabatic process, the relation between temperature (T) and pressure (P) is
T
= constant, where  is ratio of specific heats.
P1
5
1 1
3
T1  P1  
T1  8  5/3
    8
0.4
    2.297
T2  P2  T2  1 
T1 300
 T2    130.6K  131 K ;  T2  131  273  142o C
2.297 2.297
30. 3 For adiabatic process, Poisson’s equation is given by PV = constant ---------- (i)
RT
Ideal gas relation is PV = RT;  V ------(ii)
P

 RT 
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get, P   = constant
 P 
T
  = constant --------- (iii); where  is ratio of specific heats of the gas.
P 1

Given, P  TC ------- (iv); On comparing with Eq. (iii), we have C 
 1

5
5 5
For a monoatomic gas   ; We have C  3 
3 5
1 2
3
31. 2 In isothermal proecss, temperature of the gas remains constant, so the gas obeys Boyle’s law.
P2 V 2P V V
     2 -------(i)
P1 V1 ; P V1 ; V1
Now, the gas is expanded adiabatically, so PV = constant
 
P1  V2  2P  2
  ;     (since volume is restored)
P2  V1  0.75P  1 
8
 log     log 2 ;  log 8  log 3   log 2    1.41
 3
32. 4 In an adiabatic process,

P1  V2 
PV = constant; or P   V  ------- (i)

2  1
Mass V1  2
Volume of gas  ;  V    32
Density 2 1

P2
Thus, from Eq. (i), we have P   32    32   2  128
 7/5 7

376
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

33. 3 Heat required to change the temperature of vessel by a small amount dT; dQ  mC p dT
4
100  103  32  T 4 
43
 T 
Total heat required, Q  m  32   dT  4 ;  Q  0.001996 kJ
 400 
3
20  400    20
Work required to maintain the temperature of sink at T2

Q1  Q2 T 
W  Q1  Q2  Q 2   1  1 Q 2
Q2  T2 
300  20
For T2  20 K ; W1   0.001996  0.028 kJ
20
300  4
For T2  4K ; W2   0.001996  0.148 kJ
4
As temperature is changing from 20 K to 4 K, work done required will be more than W1 but less than
W2 .
T2
34. 2 The efficiency of cycle is   1  T ; For adiabatic prcess TV 1 = constant
1

1
V  7
T1V 1
 T2 V2 1
; T1  T2  2  ; T1  T2  32  5 1  T2  4 ; T1  4T2
 V1 
1

 1 3
  1     0.75
 4 4

T2 300 2 W
35. 3 Maximum value of efficiency,   1  T  1  500  5 ; As   Q
1 1

2
W  Q1   1000 cal  400  4.2 J  1680 J
5
As no engine can produce more than 1680 J, disigns A and B are not possible.
Q2 T2 80  1000  4.2 273 273
36. 3 Coefficient of performance  W  T  T ;  
1 2 W 290  273 17

80  1000  4.2  17 33.6  17  104

 W J or W  kWh  0.058 kWh
273 273  3.6  105
T2
37. 3 The coefficient of performance is defined as,   T  T
1 2

260 260
or 5  T  260  T1  260  ; or T1  260  52 ; T1 = 39oC
1 5

377
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

38. 2 Relation between coefficient of performance and efficiency of refrigerator is

1 
 9


Heat absorbed  Q2  Q2
Coefficient of performance,   ; 9 ; 2  90 J
Work done (W) 10

W Q T
39. 1 The coefficiency of heat engine is given by   1 2  1 2
Q Q1 T1
where T1 is temperature of source and T2 is temperature of sink.

1 1 1 T1  T2 1 T1   T2  62 
Given, 1  , 2  ;   ------ (i) and  -------- (ii)
6 3 6 T1 3 T1
Solving Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get, T1 = 372 K and T2 = 310 K
T2
40. 4 Efficiency is defined as   1  T
1

50 273  7 1 280 280 1

 1 ;   1   ;  T  560 K
100 T1 2 T1 ; T1 2 1

70 280 280 3
Let new temperature of high temperature reservoir is T1 ; Then, 100  1  T ;  
T1 10
1

280  10
 T1   933K  Increase in temperature = 933 – 560 = 373 K  380 K
3
41. 2 Given, T1  627  273  900K ; Q1  3  106 cal

Q1 Q 2 T2 300
T2 = 27 + 273 = 300 K  T  T ;  Q2 
T1
 Q1 
900
 3  106  1 106 cal
1 2

Work done = Q1  Q 2  3  10 6  1 106  2  106 cal  2  4.2  106 J  8.4  106 J

378
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

CHAPTER - 09
BEHAVIOUR OF PERFECT GASES AND
KINETIC THEORY OF GASES

A gas does not have fixed shape and size, it takes the shape and size of the vessel it is contained. It exerts
pressure on its surroundings. It expands indefinitely to fill the available space.
The gases whose molecules are point masses and do not attract each other are called ideal or perfect gas. The
gases such as helium, hydrogen or oxygen which cannot be liquified easily are called permanent gases.
Ideal gas
A gas which follows all gas laws and gas equation at every possible temperature and pressure is known as an ideal
or perfect gas.
Volume of gas molecules are negligible as compared to volume of container.
Between gas molecules there is no intermolecular force.
PE of ideal gas is zero, so internal energy of ideal gas is perfectly translational KE of the gas.
Translational KE of a gas is directly proportional to absolute temperature. E trans  T
All real gases behave as ideal gas at high temperature and low pressure.
Volume coefficient of expansion (  ) and pressure coefficient of expansion (  ) is same for an ideal gas and is equal
1 o 1 o
to / C . ie,     / C
273 273
Equation of state for an ideal gas
A relation connecting pressure, temperature and volume of a gas describes the state of the gas. That is physical
condition of the system is called equation of state. The equation of state for an ideal gas is given by
PV  RT ---------(1)

m N
where  = no. of moles of gas.   M  N , where m is the mass of the gas. M is the mass of a molecules.
A

N is no. of molecules in the [Link] is the Avogadros number.

N  R 
PV  RT    NT  NkT
NA  NA 
k - is the Boltzmanns constant = 1.38 × 10–23 J/K R = 8.31 J/mole / K
For 1 mole of a gas   1 ,  PV  RT ---------(2)

379
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Eqn. (1) is called Equation of state for an ideal gas.

Eqn. (2) is the equation of state for 1 mole of ideal gas.
Example 1 : A closed container of volume 0.02 m3 contains a mixture at 1 × 105 Nm–2 at a temperature of 27oC.
The total mass of the mixture is 28 g. If the gram molecular weights of neon and argon are 20 and 40 respectively.
Find the masses of the individual gases in the container, assuming them to be ideal.
Let m is the mass of Neon, then Argon is (28 – m)gm. Total no. of moles of the mixture
m 28  m 28  m PV 28  m
   ;   0.8   0.8 ,
20 40 40 RT 40
m = 4 gm. Mass of Argon = 28 – m = 24 gm
One mole of a gas at any temperature, volume or pressure always contains 6.02 × 1023 molecules, called
Avogadros number (NA)
The volume of 1 mole of a gas at NTP (or STP) is 22400 cc or 22.4 litre.

m
According to gas equation PV    RT
M

 R m R
P    T    T ; where  is the density..
MV M

P R
  = a const. (gas equations in terms of density)
T M

RT N A kT
Also P   where R = NAk
V V

N
P kT where  N A  N
V

N
P = nkT n no. of molecules / unit volume.
V
This is the gas equation for an ideal gas in terms of number of molecules per unit volume.
(1) Zero kelvin is a temperature at which pressure, volume and K.E. of an ideal gas would become zero.
(2) NTP (STP) is Normal Temperature and pressure which is 0oC and 1 atm.
(3) The temperature in gas equation is always K.
(4) The volume of one mole of a gas at NTP is 22.4 litre.
(5) In equilibrium state the ideal gas satisfies the equation PV  RT .

(6) If 1 mole of a gas with P1, V1 and T1 mixed with  2 mole of another gas at P2, V2 and T2, the resultant mixture
is (P, V and T) then 1   2  
P1V1 P2 V2 PV
 
T1 T2 T
380
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

(7) Work done by a gas is given by W   Fds   PdV = Area under the P-V curve.

V2

If P is a constant. W  P  dV  P  V2  V1 
V1

PV2  RT2 and PV1  RT1 , W  R  T2  T1 

If T is a constant.

V 
W  RT log  2  and since P  1 when T = constant.
 V1  V

P 
W  RT log  1 
 P2 
If the volume of the gas is constant or expands against vacuum (free expansion) work done will be zero as for
the Ist case dV = 0, while for the second P = 0.
Work done by the gas is path dependant. It is positive if the gas expands and negative if it is compressed. For
a cyclic process the area of the cycle represents work done and is positive for clockwise cycle and negative for
anticlockwise cycle.

Cyclic process
P B C
Positive
work
A D

V
Gas laws
1) Boyles’ law
For a given mass of an ideal gas at constant temperature, the volume of a gas is inversely proportional to its
pressure.
1
V , where T = a constant and m = a constant
P
Charle’s law
For a given mass of an ideal gas,
Volume of a gas is directly proportional to its absolute temperature, when the pressure is constant.
V  T , when P is a constant, m is a constant.
Gay - Lussac’s law
For a given mass of ideal gas at constant volume, pressure of a gas is directly proportional to its absolute
temperature.
P  T , when m and V are constant.
381
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Avogadro’s Law
Equal volumes of all gases at the same temperature and pressure contains equal number of molecules.
N1 = N2 when P, V and T are the same for two gases.
Dalton’s Law
Pressure exerted by a gaseous mixture is equal to the sum of partial pressure of each component gases in the
mixture.
ie, P = P1 + P2 + ...........
Partial pressures in terms of mole fraction.
Let these gases are ordered in volume V, at a temperature T, exerting partial pressures P1, P2 and P3 respectively.
Then according to ideal gas equation
1RT  2 RT 3 RT
P1  , P2  , P3 
V V V

where 1 ,  2 and 3 are the number of moles of these gases respectively..

RT
 Total pressure Ptotal = P1 + P2 + P3   1  2  3 
V

P1 1 1
Dividing P1 by Ptotal, P          x1 is the mole fraction of the gas.
total 1 2 3

Graham’s law
At constant pressure and temperature the rate of diffusion of a gas is inversely proportional to the square root
of its density.
1
Rate of diffusion   when P and T are constants. -------(3)
Vander Waal’s Equation
The gas equation PV = RT is satisfied only by ideal or perfect gas. Due to finite size of gas molecules and
molecular attraction, actual gases deviates from the ideal behaviour. A graph drawn between pressure and volume of
an actual gas at different temperatures are given below.

The gas equation is corrected taking into consideration the size of the molecule and inter molecular force and is
called Vander Waals Equation.

382
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

  2a 
2 
 p  V  b   RT --------(4); a & b are called Vander Waal’s constants.
 v 
a is the correction for intermolecular force and b is the correction for finite size of the molecules.
Critical temperature
The maximum temperature below which a gas can be liquified by pressure alone is called critical temperature.

8a
Tc  --------(5)
27Rb
The pressure and volume occupied by a gas at critical temperature is called critical pressure and critical volume.
Vc = 3b ----------- (6)
a
and Pc  27 b 2 ----------- (7)

If the temperature of a gas T > Tc, it cannot be liquified however greater the pressure may be.
Example 2 : In a certain region of space there are only 5 molecules per cm3 on an average. The temperature is 3 K.
What is the average pressure of this very dilute gas? (k = 1.38 × 10–23 J/mol K)
Solution : According to ideal gas equation PV  RT ,

P   N A kT / V  [as R = NAk]

or P = (N/V)kT [as N A  N ]
or P = nkT [as n = N/V]
Here n = 5 molecules/cm3 = 5 moelcules/(10–2 m)3 = 5 × 106 molecules/m3
So, P = (5 × 106) (1.38 × 10–23) (3) = 2.07 × 10–16 Pa
Example 3 : Find the temperature of the sun if pressure is 1.4 × 109 atm, density is 1.4 g/cc and average molecular
weight of gases present there is 2 (R = 8.4 × 107 erg/mol K).
Solution : According to ideal gas equation PV  RT .

PV PM  m m
So, T    as   M and   V 
R R

and as 1 atm = 105 N/m2 = 106 dyne/cm2.

 T
1.4 10 9
1.01 106   2

1.01
108  2.4  107 K
1.4  8.4 10 7
4.2
Hygrometry
The science of measurement of moisture present in the atmosphere is known as hygrometry and the amount
of water vapours present in unit volume of air is called absolute humidity. Absolute humidity is usually expressed in
g/m3.

383
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

However, we are more interested to know the degree of saturation instead of actual amount of water vapours
present in the atmosphere which depends not only on the amount of water vapours present but also on the temperature
and pressure of atmosphere. For this we define the term relative humidity (RH) as the ratio of the mass of water
vapours (m) actually present in a certain volume of air at room temperature to the maximum mass of water vapours
(M) required to saturate the same volume of air at the same temperature, i.e.,
m
Relative humidity (RH) = -------- (8)
M
Now as the vapour pressure of a gas at constant volume and temperature is proportional to its mass,
VP at room temperature
RH 
SVP at room temperature -------- (9)
But dew point is defined as the temperature at which the gas at given atmospheric condition becomes saturated,
i.e.,
VP at room temperature = SVP at dew point
SVP at dew point
So, RH  SVP at room temperature -------- (10)

Note: If room temperature = dew point, RH = 100%.

Regarding humidity it is worth noting that:
(1) It is expressed in percent and is measured with hygrometers.
(2) With increase in temperature RH may decrease inspite of increase in absolute humidity.
(3) Greater the humidity lesser will be the rate of evaporation.
(4) Greater the humidity greater will be the velocity of sound in air.
(5) Greater the humidity lesser will be the density of air. This is why humid air is lighter than dry air.
Example 4 : A vessel of water is put in a dry sealed room of volume 76 m3 at a temperature of 17oC. The saturated
vapour pressure of water at 17oC is 15 mm of Hg. How much water will evaporate before the water in the cylinder
is in equilibrium with its vapours assuming that the vapours obeys perfect gas laws? (R = 8.31 J/mol K)
Solution : Water will evaporate till the pressure of vapours becomes equal to saturated vapour pressure. Hence,
from ideal gas equation PV  RT , we have:
MPV  m
m
RT as   M 
Here V = 76 m3; M = 18 g/mol; T = 273 + 17 = 290 K and
 1.5 
  1.01 10  2  10 Pa
5 3
P = 15 mm of Hg = 
 76 

18  2  103  76
So m   1135 g  1.135 kg
8.31 290
Kinetic Theory of Gases
Postulates
• A gas consists of small identical, particles called molecules.
• The molecules are spherical, rigid and elastic point masses.
384
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

• The size of the molecule is negligible in comparison with the intermolecular distance.
• Molecules travel in all directions with all possible velocities.
• The molecules during their travel make collisions among themselves and also with the walls of the container.
• Between molecules there is no attractive or repulsive force.
• When the molecules collides with the walls of the container, their momentum changes and due to this, pressure
is applied on the walls.
• The time of collision is negligible as compared to the interval between collisions.
• The average distance travelled by a molecule between two successive collisions is called its mean free path.
Pressure Exerted by a gas
Consider an ideal gas of N molecules contained in a cubical box of side a.
y

v
a
a
x
a
Consider a molecule travelling with a velocity v from the origin strikes a wall, the velocity v can be resolved
  
into its components v x , v y and v z along x, y and z axis. After collision the molecule retraces the same path.

 Change in momentum along x -direction, p  mv x   mv x   2mv x

2a
The interval between successive collision on the same wall is, t  v .
x

vx
The number of collision made by a single molecule in one sec on the same face is, n  .
2a
2
 vx  mv x
 Change in momentum per sec on one face due to a single molecule   2a   2mv x   a
 

mv 2x m
Change in momentum due to all the molecules striking a face, Fx     v2x
a a

F Fx
Pressure exerted on the wall Px  
A A

1 m m m
2
.  v 2x  3  v 2x   v 2x (V is the volume)
a a a V
Similarly pressure exerted in the y and z direction are
m m
Py =  v 2y and Pz   v 2z
V V

385
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

 Total pressure exerted will be

m
Px  Py  Pz    v 2x  v 2y  v 2z 
V
Let Px  Py  Pz  P and v 2x  v 2y  v z2  v 2

m
3P   v2
V

If  v  is the mean square velocity, then  v 

2 2

v
2
1  v 22  ......v 2N 

v2  3P 
m
N  v2 
N N V

1 1m
PV  mN  v  ; N  v
2 2
or P 
3 3V
1 mN
   v  where
2
  is the density of the gas.
3 V
The root mean square speed of the gas

v12  v 22  .......v 2N
 v
2
v rms  
N
3P
v rms  --------(11)

When pressure remaining a constant.
1
v rms 
 , which is Graham’s law of diffusion. Rate of diffusion is inversely proportional to square root of
density.
Kinetic energy per unit volume.
1 mN 1
 v   v
2 2
E
2 V 2
2
21  2
P     v    E -----------(12)
32  3

2
 Pressure exerted by a gas is equal to times translational Kinetic energy per unit volume.
3
1
Also PV  MN  v 
2

3PV 3PV
vrms  
mN mass of gas

386
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

Let M is molecular mass of the gas, then mass of the gas = M ,

PV  RT

3RT 3RT
v rms   ------------(13)
M M
Further M = N0m, N0 - Avogadros no. and R = N0k, k - Boltzmanns constant.

3N 0 kT 3kT
v rms  
N0m m

(1) For a given gas vrms  T ------------(14), when temperature increases rms speed increases.
(2) When temperature remains constant.
1
vrms  ------------(15), ie when molecular weight increases, rms speed decreases.
M
(3) rms speed is the square root of the mean of the squares of the speed of different molecules.

v 2
 v 22  .....
 v
1 2
v rms  
N

3RT 3kT
v rms  
M m
m - is the mass of a single molecule. M is the molecular weight.

 v1  v2  v3  ......
(4) Average speed vav 
N
1 3 RT 3
m  v 
2
(5) KE   kT ------------(16)
2 2 N 2
ie, average translational KE of a gas molecule depends on its temperature and independent of its nature. Due to
this, molecules of different gases at the same temperature will have the same translational KE.
1 mN
 v  , and  v
2 2
(6) P   T ------------(17)
3 V
(a) If volume and temperature are constants, pressure increases when mass increases.
P  mN (mN = mass of the gas)
(b) If mass and temperature are constant.
1
then P  , volume increases pressure decreases.
V
(c) If mass and volume are constants, pressure is proportional to the temperature.

p   v  T
2

387
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Degrees of freedom
The no. of independent ways in which a molecule or an atom can exhibit motion are called degrees of freedom.
The motion can be translational, rotational or vibrational or a combination of them.
The number of independent co-ordinates required to specify the dynamical state of the system is called degrees
of freedom.
A body moving in space have 3 translational degrees of freedom.
A diatomic gas molecule (H2, O2) can have 3-translational and 2 rotational motions. So the degree of freedom
is 5 for diatomic molecules. In addition to this a diatomic molecule can have two vibrational degrees of freedom.
Such a molecule has 7 degrees of freedom (At high temperatures)
A polyatomic molecule such as CO2, H2O have three translational and 3 rotational degrees of freedom, so it
have six degrees of freedom.
Law of equipartition of energy
The energy of a gas molecule is equally distributed among its various degrees of freedom. Associated with each
degree of freedom, there is an energy of ½ kT, where T is the absolute temperature.
For one molecule of a gas
Let f is the no. of degree of freedom of a molecule.
f
Energy related with all degree of freedom  kT
2

v 2rms
 vx2  v y2  vz2 
3
1 3
mv 2rms  kT --------- (18)
2 2

1 v 2rms 3 kT 1
So energy related to one degree of freedom = m   kT --------- (19)
2 3 2 3 2
3
According to the equipartition theorem the average energy of an ideal gas molecule will be kT . Since it has
2
5 6
three degrees of freedom. For diatomic and polyatomic gases the average energy will be   kT and   kT
2 2
respectively.
If N0 is the Avogadro no. (No. of molecules in one mole of a gas) and if  moles are there,
then the internal energy of the gas will be
3 3
U mono  N 0   kT   RT --------- (20) (N0k = R)
2 2
5
For diatomic gas f = 5, U  RT --------- (21)
2
6
Poly atomic gas f = 6, U  RT --------- (22)
2
388
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

Specific heat capacity

When a gas is heated two types of expansion takes place. Keeping one of them constant the other can be
varied. Under these conditions the gas will take different quantities of heat to raise its temperature by the same
amount. So a gas will be having two specific heat capacities. Specific heat at constant volume and specific heat at
constant pressure.
Specific heat at constant volume (Cv) is defined as the quantity of heat required to raise the temperature of unit
 Q  v
mass of gas through 1 K when its volume is kept constant C v 
mT
Specific heat at constant pressure (Cp) is the quantity of heat required to raise the temperature of unit mass of
gas through 1 K, keeping the pressure constant.

 Q p
Cp =
mT
If we consider 1 mole of a substance, then specific heat capacitances are called molar specific heats or molar
heat capacity.

 Q V
CV  where  is the no. of moles.
T

 Q P
Cp 
T
At constant volume heat supplied.
 Q v  U  Cv T U is the increase in internal energy..

At constant pressure  Q p  C p T
This heat is used for increasing the internal energy and for doing the work done for expansion.
 Q  p  U   W
C p T  C v T  PV

P V
Cp  C v 
T
for an ideal gas PV  RT
Cp – Cv = R ------------(23) This is called the Mayers Relation.
 Molar heat capacity at constant pressure is greater than that of constant volume.
U  ½ RfT
U  ½RfT f is degree of freedom.

U 1
Cv   Rf
T 2

389
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

1  f
Cp  Cv  R  Rf  R  R  1   ----------(24)
2  2

Cp
The ratio of specific heat capacity is  
Cv


RCp
   2 5
For monoatomic gas ----------(25)
Cv 3 R 3
2

7
R
cp 7
For diatomic gas    2  ----------(26)
cv 5 R 5
2

8
R cp
2 4
For polyatomic gas     ----------(27)
cv 6 R 3
2
 decreases with number of atoms in a molecule.
Derivation of gas laws from kinetic theory
Boyles Law
1 mN 2
From kinetic theory, P  v rms ; mN is the mass of the gas - a constant.
3 V
v 2rms is the mean square velocity - which is a constant at constant temperature.
 PV = a constant. (Boyles law)
Charles law
2 N1 2 
V  mv rms 
3 P 2 
2 N3  N 1 3
V  kT   kT  mv 2rms  kT
3 P 2  P 2 2
 V  T when P is a constant.
Gay-Lussac’s Law
1 mN 2
P= v rms
3 V

v 2rms  T

390
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

Avogadro’s law
At a particular temperature for two gases.
1 1
PV  m1 N1v 2rms1 , also PV  m 2 N 2 v rms
2

2 2 2

2
ie, m1 N1v rms1
 m 2 N 2 v rms
2
2

KE of all gases at the same temperature is the same.

1 1
 2
m1v rms  m 2 v rms
2

2 1
2 2

 N1  N 2 ie, equal volumes of all gases at same temperature and pressure contains equal number of
molecules.
Example 5 : One mole of a mono-atomic gas is mixed with 3 moles of a diatomic gas. What is the molecular
specific heat of the mixture at constant volume ? (R = 8.31 J/mol K)
3 5
Solution : For mono-atomic gas C V  R while for diatomic, R , so by conservation of energy,,
2 2

1  C V 1   2  C V  2 1  3 / 2  R  3  5 / 2  R
CV  
1   2 1 3

9 9
i.e., CV  R   8.31  18.7 J / mol K
4 4
Example 6 : The specific heat of argon at constant volume is 0.075 kcal/kg K. Calculate the atomic weight. (R = 2
cal/mol K)
Solution : As argon is mono-atomic, its molar specific heat at constant volume will be

3 3
CV  R   2  3cal / mol K
2 2

Now as CV  M C v with cV = 0.075 cal/g K

CV 3
So, M  c  0.075  40
V

391
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

QUESTIONS
LEVEL - 1
1. The translatory kinetic energy of a gas per gram is

3RT 3RT RT
1) 3RT 2) 3) 4)
M 2M M
2. A jar has a mixture of hydrogen and oxygen gases in the ratio of 1 : 5. The ratio of mean kinetic energies of
hydrogen and oxygen molecules is
1) 1 : 6 2) 1 : 4 3) 1 : 1 4) 2 : 1
3. The temperature of a gas at pressure P and volume V is 27 C. Keeping its volume constant, if its temperature
o

is raised to 927oC, then its pressure will be

1) 2 P 2) 3 P 3) 4 P 4) 6 P
4. If the molecular weights of two gases are M1 and M2, then at a temperature the ratio of root mean square
velocities v1 and v2 will be

M1 M2 M1  M 2 M1  M 2
1) 2) 3) 4)
M2 M1 M1  M 2 M1  M 2

3R
5. At constant volume, the specific heat of a gas is , then the value of  will be
2

3 5 5 4
1) 2) 3) 4)
2 3 2 3
6. The quantity of heat required to raise one mole through one degree Kelvin for a monoatomic gas at constant
volume is

R 3R 5R 7R
1) 2) 3) 4)
2 2 2 2
7. At a given temperature, the ratio of root mean square velocities of hydrogen molecule and helium atom will be

1) 1: 2 2) 2 :1 3) 1 : 2 4) 2 : 1
8. A gas mixture consists of 2 moles of oxygen and 4 moles of argon at temperature T. Neglecting all vibrational
modes, the total internal energy of the system is
1) 15 RT 2) 11 RT 3) 9 RT 4) 7 RT
9. Two spheres made of same substance have diameters in the ratio 1 : 2. Their thermal capacities will be in the
ratio
1) 1 : 2 2) 1 : 4 3) 1 : 8 4) 1 : 16
10. Molar specific heat at constant volume, for a non-linear triatomic gas, is
1) Zero 2) R 3) 2R 4) 3R

392
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

11. Under a constant pressure, one mole of a gas enclosed in a vessel is raised through 1oK. Work done by the
gas during this operation is
1) 3R J 2) 2R J 3) R J 4) Zero
12. For the same rise in temperature of one mole of gas at constant volume, heat required for a non-linear
triatomic gas is K times that required for monoatomic gas. The value of K is
1) 2 2) 3 3) 4 4) 5
13. A gas at 250 K is held in a container. It is heated through 1oC. The percentage increase in its pressure is
1) 1% 2) 0.1% 3) 4% 4) 0.4%
14. In a closed vessel, pressure increases by 0.4% when temperature increases by 1oC. What is the initial
temperature?
1) 250 K 2) 250oC 3) 25 K 4) 25oC
15. An ice cream has a marked value of 700 cal. How many kilowatt-hour of energy will it deliver to the body as
it is digested?
1) 0.81 kWh 2) 0.90 kWh 3) 1.11 kWh 4) 0.71 kWh

16. The volume V of a given mass of gas changes with temperature T according to the relation V  KT 2/3 . The
work done when the temperature changes by 75 K is
1) 50 R 2) 75 R 3) 25 R 4) 60 R
17. Temperature remaining constant, the pressure of gas is decreased by 20%. The percentage change in volume.
1) increases by 20% 2) decreases by 20% 3) increases by 25% 4) decreases by 25%
18. In a certain region of space there are only 5 molecules per cm3 on an average. The temperature there is 3 K.
The pressure of this dilute gas is (k = 1.38 × 10–23 JK–1)
1) 20.7 × 10–17 Nm–2 2) 15.3 × 10–15 Nm–2 3) 5.3 × 10–5 Nm–2 4) 3.5 × 10–8 Nm–2
19. The molecules of a given mass of a gas have a rms velocity of 200 m/s at 27oC and 1.0 × 105 N/m2 pressure.
When the temperature is 127oC and pressure is 0.5 × 105 N/m2, the rms velocity in m/s will be

100 2 400
1) 2) 100 2 3) 4) 100 3
3 3
20. The rms velocity of gas molecules is 300 ms–1. The rms velocity of molecules of gas with twice the molecular
weight and half the absolute temperature is
1) 300 ms–1 2) 600 ms–1 3) 75 ms–1 4) 150 ms–1
21. At what temperature will the rms speed of air molecules be double than that at NTP?
1) 519oC 2) 619oC 3) 719oC 4) 819oC
22. At what temperature the kinetic energy of gas molecule is half of the value at 27oC?
1) 13.5oC 2) 150oC 3) 75 K 4) –123oC

393
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

23. Some gas at 300 K is enclosed in a container. Now, the container is placed on a fast moving train. While the
train is in motion, the temperature of the gas
1) rises above 300 K 2) falls below 300 K 3) reamins unchanged 4) become unsteady
24. Two moles of oxygen is mixed with eight moles of helium. The effective specific heat of the mixture at constant
volume is
1) 1.3 R 2) 1.4 R 3) 1.7 R 4) 1.9 R
25. One mole of monoatomic gas and three moles of diatomic gas are put together in a container. The molar
specific heat (in JK–1 mol–1) at constant volume is (R = 8.3 JK–1 mol–1)
1) 18.7 2) 18.9 3) 19.2 4) 15.4
26. The temperature of 5 moles of a gas at constant volume is changed from 100oC to 120oC. The change in
internal energy is 80 J. The total heat capacity of the gas at constant volume in JK–1 will be
1) 8 2) 4 3) 0.8 4) 0.4.
27. The expansion of an ideal gas of mass m at a constant pressure P is given by the straight line B. Then the
expansion of the same ideal gas of mass 2 m at a pressure 2 P is given by the straight line.

1) C 2) A 3) B 4) None of these
28. Pressure versus temperature graph of an ideal gas of equal number of moles of different volumes are plotted as
shown in figure. Choose the correct alternative

1) V1  V2 , V3  V4 and V2  V3 2) V1  V2 , V3  V4 and V2  V3

3) V1  V2  V3  V4 4) V4  V3  V2  V1
29. At what temperature is the rms velocity of a hydrogen molecule equal to that of an oxygen molecule at 47oC?
1) 80 K 2) –73K 3) 3 K 4) 20 K
30. Two monoatomic ideal gases A and B occupying the same volume V are at the same temperature T and
pressure p. If they are mixed, the resultant mixture has volume V and temperature T. The pressure of the
mixture is

p
1) p 2) 3) 4p 4) 2p
2
394
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

31. Three perfect gases at absolute temperatures T 1, T2 and T3 are mixed. The masses of molecules are m1, m2 and
m3 and the number of molecules are n1, n2 and n3 respectively. Assuming no loss of energy then the final
temperature of the mixture is

 T1  T2  T3  n1T1  n 2T2  n 3T3 n1T12  n 2 T22  n 3T32 n12 T12  n 22 T22  n 32 T32
1) 2)
3  n1  n 2  n 3  3) n1T1  n 2T2  n 3T3 4)  n1T1  n 2 T2  n 3T3 
32. Calculate the root mean square speed of the molecules of hydrogen gas at S.T.P. Density of hydrogen at S.T.P.
is 9 × 10–2 kg m–3.
1) 1835 m/s 2) 8135 m/s 3) 1804 m/s 4) 4180 m/s
33. Find the mean translational kinetic energy of an oxygen molecule at 0oC. Given Avogadro number
N = 6.03 × 10 23 per mole and R = 8.3 JK –1 mol –1 .
1) 5.64  10 21 J 2) 0.564  10 21 J 3) 5.64  10 21 J 4) 5.64  10 20 J
34. The speed of sound in a gas at S.T.P. is 330 ms–1 and the density of the gas is 1.3 kg m–3. Find the number of
degrees of freedom of a molecule of the gas.
1) 5 2) 2 3) 20 4) 50
35. n1 moles of a monoatomic gas are contained in a vessel A of volume V1 at pressure P1 and temperature T1.
n2 moles of the same gas are contained in a vessel B of volume V2 at pressure P2 and temperature T2. The two
vessels are now connected by a tube. Obtain the expression for common temperature T in the Vessels.

n1T2  n 2 T1 n1T1  n 2 T2 n1T1  n 2 T2 n1T1  n 2 T2

1) n1  n 2 2) n1  n 2 3) n1  n 2 4) n1  n 2

36. A vessel contains 1 mole of O2 gas (molar mass 32) at a temperature T. The pressure of the gas is P. An
identical vessel containing one mole of He gas (molar mass 4) at a temperature 2T has a pressure of
P
1) 2) P 3) 2P 4) 8 P
8
37. By what factor the rms velocity will change, if the temperature is raised from 27oC to 327oC ?

1) 2 2) 2 3) 2 2 4) 1
38. If Maxwell distribution is valid and vp denotes the most probable speed, v the average speed and vrms the root-
mean-square speed, then
1) v < vp < vrms 2) v < vrms < vp 3) vp < v < vrms 3) vp < vrms < v
39. 16 g of oxygen, 14 g of nitrogen and 11 g of carbon dioxide are mixed in an enclosure of volume 5 L and
temperature 27oC. The pressure exerted by the mixture is
1) 4 × 105 Nm–2 2) 5 × 105 Nm–2 3) 6 × 105 Nm–2 4) 9 × 105 Nm–2
40. The molecules of a given mass of gas have rms speed 200 ms–1 at 27oC and 105 Nm–2 pressure. When the
absolute temperature doubled and the pressure is halved, the rms speed of the molecules of the same gas is

1) 200 ms–1 2) 400 ms–1 3) 200 2 ms 1 4) 400 2 ms 1

395
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

41. A gas at absolute temperature 300 K has pressure P = 4 × 10–10 N/m2. Boltzmann constant = k = 1.38 × 10–23 J/K.
The number of molecules per cm3 is of the order of
1) 100 2) 105 3) 108 4) 1011
42. P-T diagram was obtained when a given mass of gas was heated. During the heating process from the state 1
to state 2 the volume.
p
2

O T
1) remained constant 2) decreased 3) increased 4) changed erratically
43. Calculate the temperature (in kelvin) at which the root mean square speed of a gas molecule is half its value at
0oC.
1) 62.85 K 2) 68.25 K 3) 65.82 K 4) 6.285 K
44. Find the mean translational kinetic energy of one mole of hydrogen at S.T.P. Density of hydrogen at S.T.P. is
0.09 kg m–3.
1) 3.41 J 2) 3.41 × 102 J 3) 3.41 × 10–3 J 4) 3.41 × 103 J
45. Calculate the average translational kinetic energy of the molecules of an ideal gas at 0oC and at 100oC. Given
Avogadro’s number N = 6.02 ×1023 and Boltzmann’s constant k = 1.38 × 10–23 JK–1.
1) 5.65  1021 ; 7.72  1021 J 2) 5.65  1020 ; 7.72  1020 J

3) 5.65  1021 ; 7.72 1021 J 4) 5.65  1021 ; 7.72 10 20 J

LEVEL - II
1. How much should the pressure be increased in order to decrease the volume of a gas by 5% at a constant
temperature?
1) 5 % 2) 5.26 % 3) 10 % 4) 4.26 %
2. An ideal gas is found to obey a law PV = constant. The gas is initially at temperature T and volume V. Then
2

it expands to a volume 2V, the temperature becomes

T T
1) 2) 2 T 3) 4) 4 T
2 2
3. If cs is the velocity of sound in air and c is the rms velocity, then
1/2

1) cs < c 2) cs = c 3) cs  c   4) None of these
3
4. N molecules, each of mass m, of gas A and 2 N molecules, each of mass 2m, of gas B are contained in the
same vessel which is maintained at a temperature T. The mean square velocity of molecules of B type is
v1
denoted by v2 and the mean square velocity of A type is denoted by v1, then v is
2

1 2
1) 2 2) 1 3) 4)
3 3
396
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

5. An oxygen cylinder of volume 30 L has an initial gauge pressure of 15 atm and a temperature of 27oC. After
some oxygen is withdrawn from the cylinder the gauge pressure drops to 11 atm and its temperature drops to
17oC. The mass of oxygen taken out of the cylinder (R = 8.31 J mol–1K–1), molecular mass of O2 = 32) is
1) 0.14 g 2) 0.02 g 3) 0.14 kg 4) 0.014 kg
th
5
6. The root mean square velocity of the molecules in a sample of helium is   that of the molecules in a
7
sample of hydrogen. If the temperature of the hydrogen is 0 C, that of helium sample is about
o

1) 0oC 2) 4 K 3) 284oC 4) 100oC

7. The average translatory energy and rms speed of molecules in a sample of oxygen gas at 300 K are 6.21 × 10–21 J
and 484 ms–1 respectively. The corresponding values at 600 K are nearly (assuming ideal gas behaviour)
1) 12.42 × 10–21 J, 968 ms–1 2) 7.78 × 10–21 J, 684 ms–1
3) 6.21 × 10–21 J, 968 ms–1 4) 12.42 × 10–21 J, 684 ms–1
8. The average kinetic energy of a gas molecule at 27oC is 6.21 × 10–21 J. Its average kinetic energy at 127oC
will be
1) 12.2 × 10–21 J 2) 8.28 × 10–21 J 3) 10.35 × 10–21 J 4) 11.35 × 10–21 J
9. For a gas, if the ratio of specific heats at constant pressure and constant volume is  , then the value of degrees
of freedom is

 1  1    1 2
1) 2) 3) 4)
 1  1 2  1

10. 22 g of carbon dioxide at 27oC is mixed in a closed container with 16 g of oxygen at 37oC. If both gases are
considered as ideal gases, then the temperature of the mixture is
1) 24.2oC 2) 28.5oC 3) 31.5oC 4) 33.5oC
11. Two chambers containing m1 and m2 gram of a gas at pressures P1 and P2 respectively are put in communication
with each other, temperature remaining constant. The common pressure reached will be

P1P2  m1  m 2  P1P2 m1 m1m 2  P1  P2  m1m 2 P2

1) 2) P m  P m 3) 4) P m  P m
P2 m1  P1m 2 2 1 1 2 P2 m1  P1m 2 2 1 1 2

12. 8 g of O2, 14 g of N2 and 22 g of CO2 are mixed in a container of 10 L capacity at 27oC. The pressure exerted
by the mixture in terms of atmospheric pressure is (R = 0.082 L atm K–1 mol–1)
1) 1.4 atm 2) 2.5 atm 3) 3.07 atm 4) 8.7 atm
13. 1 kg of diatomic gas is at a pressure of 8 × 104 Nm–2. The density of the gas is 4 kg m–3. What is the energy
of the gas due to its thermal motion?
1) 5 × 104 J 2) 6 × 104 J 3) 7 × 104 J 4) 3 × 104 J
14. Six molecules have speeds 2 unit, 5 unit, 3 unit, 6 unit, 3 unit and 5 unit. The rms speed is
1) 4 unit 2) 1.7 unit 3) 4.2 unit 4) 5 unit

397
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

15. An insulated container of gas has two chambers separated by an insulating partition. One of the chambers has
volume V1 and contains ideal gas at pressure P1 and temperature T1. The other chamber has volume V2 and
contains ideal gas at pressure P2 and temperature T2. If the partition is removed without doing any work on
the gas, the final equilibrium temperature of the gas in the container will be
T1T2  P1V1  P2 V2  T1V1T2  P2 V2 T2 T1V1T2  P2 V2 T1 T1T2  P1  P2 V2 
1) 2) P V  P V 3) P V  P V 4)
P1V1T2  P2 V2 T1 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 P1V1T1  P2 V2 T2
16. Two rigid boxes containing ideal gases are placed on a table. Box A contains one mole of nitrogen at temperature
7
T0, while box B contains 1 mole of nitrogen at temperature   T0 . The boxes are then put into thermal
3
contact with each other, and heat flows between them until the gases reach a common final temperature
(Ignore the heat capacity of boxes) then, the final temperature of gases Tf , in terms of T0 is
3 7 3 5
1) Tf  T0 2) Tf  T0 3) Tf  T0 4) Tf  T0
7 3 2 3
17. Two balloons are filled, one with pure helium gas and the other by air, respectively. If the pressure and
temperature of these balloons are same then the number of molecules per unit volume is
1) more in the helium filled balloon 2) same in both balloons
3) more in air filled balloon 4) in the ratio of 1 : 4
18. An ideal gas is allowed to expand freely against a vacuum in a rigid insulated container. The gas undergoes
1) an increase in its internal energy
2) a decrease in its internal energy
3) neither an increase nor a decrease in its temperature or internal energy
4) a decrease in temperature
1
19. At 27oC a gas is suddenly compressed such that its pressure becomes th of original pressure. The temperature
8
 5
of the gas will be     .
 3
o
1) –142 C 2) 300 K 3) 327o 4) 420 K
20. A cylindrical tube of uniform cross-sectional area A is fitted with two air tight frictionless pistons. The pistons
are connected to each other by a metallic wire. Initially the pressure of the gas is P0 and temperature is T0.
Atmospheric pressure is also P0. Now the temperature of the gas is increased to 2T0, the tension in the wire
will be

wire

P0 A
1) 2P0A 2) P0A 3) 4) 4P0A
2
21. Avogadro’s number is approximately 6 × 1023. The number of molecules in 1 cc of water is close to :
1
1) 6 × 1023 2) 22.4 × 1023 3) × 1023 4) 1023
3
398
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

22. If the intermolecular forces vanish away, the volume occupied by the molecules contained in 4.5 kg water at
STP will be:
1) 5.6 m3 2) 4.5 m3 3) 11.2 litre 4) 11.2 m2
23. A perfect gas at 27oC is heated at constant pressure so as to double its volume. The temperature of the gas
will be:
1) 300oC 2) 327oC 3) 600oC 4) 54oC
24. Four particles have speeds 2, 3, 4 and 5 cm/s respectively. Their rms speed is:

 27   54 
1) 3.5 cm/s 2)   cm / s 3) 54 cm / s 4)  2  cm / s
 2   
 R 
25. For a gas    0.67 ; the gas is made up of molecules which are
 CV 
1) monoatomic 2) diatomic 3) polyatomic 4) mixture of gases
26. When an ideal diatomic gas is heated at constant pressure, the fraction of the heat energy supplied which
increases the internal energy of the gas is
2 3 3 5
1) 2) 3) 4)
5 5 7 7
27. A quantity of heat Q is supplied to a monoatomic ideal gas which expands at constat pressure. The fraction of
heat that used for work done by the gas is :
2 3 2
1) 2) 3) 4) 1
5 5 3
28. The root mean square velocity of the molecules of a gas is 1260 m/s. The most probable speed of the
molecules is:
1) 1029 m/s 2) 1161 m/s 3) 1671 m/s 4) 917 m/s
29. A gas is suddenly expanded such that its final volume becomes 3 times its initial volume. If the specific heat at
constant volume of the gas is 2 R, then the ratio of initial to final pressure is nearly equal to
1) 5 2) 6.5 3) 7 4) 3.5
7 5
30. 1 mole of a gas with   is mixed with 1 mole of a gas with   , then the value of  of the following
5 3
mixture is
7 2 3 12
1) 2) 3) 4)
5 5 2 7
31. 1 mole of H2 at 47 C and at pressure 4 atmosphere is mixed with 2 mole of N2 at 127oC and at 5 atmosphere
o

such that the volume of their mixture is the sum of their initial volumes. If the mixture is at temperature 97oC,
pressure of the mixture will be nearly:
1) 2.2 atm 2) 3.4 atm 3) 4.6 atm 4) 1.8 atm
32. 70 calories of heat is required to raise the temperature of 2 moles of an ideal diatomic gas at constant pressure
from 30oC to 35oC. The amount of heat required (in calories) to raise the temperature of the same gas through
the same range (30oC to 35o3) at constant volume is
1) 30 2) 50 3) 70 4) 90
399
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

33. A certain amount of an ideal gas is enclosed in a vessel. It undergoes a process such that pressure varies with
temperature as shown in Fig. Ratio of density of gas at A to that of B is

1) 2 : 1 2) 1 : 2 3) 4 : 1 4) 1 : 4
34. At the top of a mountain a thermometer reads 7 C and a barometer reads 70 cm of mercury. At the foot of
o

the mountain, they read 27oC and 76 cm of mercury respectively. The ratio of density of air at the top to that
at the bottom of the mountain is
1) 0.885 2) 0.987 3) 0.75 4) 1.0
RT 9
35. If pressure of CO2 (real gas) in a container is given by P   2 , then mass of the gas in
2V  b 4b
container is
1) 11 g 2) 22 g 3) 33 g 4) 44 g
36. An enclosure of volume V contains a mixture of 8 g of oxygen, 14 g of nitrogen and 22 g of carbon dioxide at
absolute temperature T. The pressure of the mixture of gas is (R is universal gas constant)
RT 3RT 5RT 7RT
1) 2) 3) 4)
V 2V 4V 5V
37. Air is pumped into an automobile tyre upto pressure of 200 kPa in the morning when the air temperature is
22oC. During the day, temperature rises to 42o C and the tyre expands by 2%. The pressure of the air in tthe
tyre at this temperature, will be approximately
1) 212 kPa 2) 209 kPa 3) 206 kPa 4) 200 kPa
38. 310 J of heat is required to raise the temperature of 2 moles of an ideal gas at constant pressure from 25oC to
35oC. The amount of heat required to raise the temperature of the gas through the same range at constant
volume is
1) 384 J 2) 144 J 3) 276 J 4) 452 J
39. Two cylinders A and B fitted with pistons, contain equal number of moles of an ideal monoatomic gas at 400 K.
The piston of A is free to move while that of B is held fixed. Same amount of heat energy is given to the gas in
 5
each cylinder. If the rise in temperature of the gas in A is 42 K, the rise in temperature of the gas in B is     .
 3
1) 25.2 K 2) 35 K 3) 42 K 4) 70 K
40. If the temperature of a gas varies with its volume as T  T0  v 2 , where T0 and  are positive constant, the
minimum pressure is
1) 2 RT0 2) 2R T0 3) 4R T0 4) 3R T0

400
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

KEY WITH HINTS

LEVEL - I
3 3 RT  R
1. 3 E rT   r  
2 2 M  M

5
  2  2 RT  1
K.E. H
2. 3  K.E. O2 5 RT 1
2

P1 P2
3. 3 By gas equation, T  T , T1  300 K and T2  1200 K
1 2

P1T2 1200
P2   P1   4P ; P2 = 4P
T1 300

3RT v1 M2
4. 2 RMS velocity, c   v RMS ; 
M v2 M1

C P CV  R R 5
5. 2    1 
CV CV 3R / 2 3

3
6. 2 For monoatomic gas, C V  R , mass = 1 mole
2
3R
Heat = mC v T  1 C V 1 
2

3RT v rms of He M of He 4 2
7. 2 v rms  ,   
M v rms of H M of H 2 1

 5 
8. 2 Oxygen is a diatomic gas. Hence its internal energy of two moles   2  RT   5RT
 2 

3 
Argon is a monoatomic gas. Hence its internal energy of 4 moles = 4   RT   6RT
2 
Total internal energy = 5RT + 6RT = 11 RT
9. 3 Thermal capacity = mS where S is same for same material

 Thermal capacity 1 m1S  Volume  density 1  r1   1  1

3 3

      
 Thermal capacity 2 m 2S  Volume  density 2  r2   2  8
10. 4 For non-linear (triangular) triatomic gas, n = 6
2 2 4 R R
  1  1  ; CV    3R
n 6 3  1 4 1
3
401
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

11. 3 Work done during expansion = CP  C V  R joule ; dT = 1

dQ = dU + dW. We know dQ = CP dT, dU = CV dT; dW = (CP – CV) = R
3R
12. 1 For a non-linear triatomic gas, CV = 3R and for a monoatomic gas CV 
2
CV 3R
K 2
CV 3R / 2
R P T 1
13. 4 At fixed volume, P    T = (constant) T;  
V P T 250
1
 % of increase in pressure   100 = 0.4 %
250
R
14. 1 Pressure P    T = constant × T. Take logs and differentiate
V
P T 0.4 1 100
then  or  or T   250 K
P T 100 T 0.4
15. 1 We know, 1 kWh = 3.6 × 106 J
Food calorie is different from heat calorie.
1 Calorie = 1 food Calorie is 1 kcal of heat energy.
 1 food-calorie = 1000 cal  700 food-cal of ice cream = (700 × 1000) cal
 Energy = 700 × 1000 cal or Energy =  7  105   4.2 J

7  105  4.2
or Energy  kWh or Energy = 0.81 kWh
3.6  106
dV
16. 1 dW  PdV  RT --------(i)
V
2K 1/3 dV 2 dT
 dV 
T dT ;  --------(ii)
3 V 3 T
dV 2
dW  RT  RdT
V 3
T
2R 2 2R 2R
Put (ii) in (i).   dW  3  dT  W  T2  T1  or W   75  50 R
T1 3 3
17. 3 According to Boyle’s law P1V1  P2 V2
80
As the pressure is decreased by 20%, so P2  P1
100
80 80
P1V1  P1V2 ; V1  V2
100 100
V2  V1 100  80
Percentage increase in volume  V1
100 
80
100  25%

402
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

18. 1 From ideal gas equation, PV = nkT

n n
P kT ;  5 / cm 3  P   5  106 / m 3 1.38  1023 JK 1   3K = 20.7 × 10–17 Nm–2
V V

19. 3 RMS velocity doesn’t depend upon pressure, it depends upon temperature only, i.e., vrms  T


v1

T1

200

 273  27   300 400
v2  m/s
v2 T2 v2  273  127  400 ; 3

3PV 3RT
20. 4 Root mean square velocity, c  
M M

3R  T / 2  1 3RT c 300
c1      150 ms 1
2M 2 M 2 2

3RT 3RT0
21. 4 We have v rms  ; at T  T0  NTP  ; vrms 
M M

3RT0
But at temperature T, vrms  2 
M

3RT 3RT0
 2 ;  T  4T0 or T = 4T0 = 4 × 273 K = 1092 K = 819o C
M M

3
22. 4 Kinetic energy of a gas molecule E  kT
2

E1 T1 E 300
or  
ET E 2 T2 or  E / 2  T2 or T2 = 150 K = 123oC

23. 1 According to kinetic theory, molecules of a liquid are in a state of continuous random motion. Since the
container is placed in the fast moving train, kinetic energy of molecules increases, hence due to random
motion, the temperature increase. So, random motion of molecules cause rise of temperature.
24. 3 Let for mixture of gases, specific heat at constant volume be CV.

n1  C V 1  n 2  C V 2
CV 
n1  n 2

5R 3R
For oxygen; CV1  , n1  2 mol , For helium; CV2  , n 2  8 mol
2 2

17R
Therefore, CV   1.7 R
10
403
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

5 7
25. 1 Ratio of specific heat for a monoatomic gas is and for diatomic gas is
3 5
Given, n1 = 2, n2 = 3, n = 4
n n n 4 1 3 13
  1  2 ;    9 ; 9  = 13;  
  1 1  1  2  1   1 5 7 9
1 1
3 5
R 8.3  9
Now, CV    1  R ; C v    18.7 J mol1K 1
r 1 4
26. 2 n  5, T1  100o C, T2  120o C, U  80 J, t  20 o C , U  ms t, s  0.8 J
For 5 mol; s = 0.8 × 5 JK–1 = 4 JK–1

 nR   mR 
27. 3 V T   T
 p   Mp 

m m
Slope of V-T graph  ; Since ratio in both cases is same.; Straight line will be B.
p p
28. 1 From ideal gas equation PV  RT

P R 1
 Slope of p-T curve   Slope 
T V V
It means line of smaller slope represent greater volume of gas. In the given problems 1 and 2 are on the
same line so they will represent same volume i.e., V1 = V2.
Similarly points 3 and 4 are on the same line so they will represent same volume, i.e., V3 = V4.
Also slope of line 1-2 is less than 3-4.

Hence  V1  V2    V3  V4 

3RT T T 320
29. 4 We know that c  ;  constant ;   10, T  20 K
M M 2 32

P1V1 Pmix  Vmix

30. 4  ; Here, T1  Tmix  T
T1 Tmix

P  2V Pmix  V
V1  V  V ; Vmix  V   ;  Pmix  2P
T T

f f f f n1T1  n 2 T2  n 3T3
31. 2 As, n1kT1  n 2 kT2  n 3 kT3   n1  n 2  n 3  kT ;  T
2 2 2 2 n1  n 2  n 3

3P
32. 1 P  1.01 105 Pa, P  9 103 kgm 3 ; v rms   1835 ms 1


404
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

1 3 3 RT
33. 3 E mv 2rms  kT   E  5.64  1021 J
2 2 2 N

P v 2  330   1.3
2

34. 1 v     1.4
 P 1.01105

2
If f is the number of degrees of freedom, then f  5
 1
35 2 If f = number of degrees of freedom,
Initial total energy = final total energy
f f f
 n1RT1  n 2 RT2   n1  n 2  RT ---------(1)
2 2 2

n1T1  n 2 T2
Here f = 3 ; T
n1  n 2
36. 3 For a gas, PV = nRT, Hence

1 mole  RT 1 mole  R  2T    P He

 P O  and  P He  ;  2 or  P  He  2  P O
2
V V  P O2
2

37. 1 T1 = 300 K; T2 = 600 K; T2 = 2T1 and vrms  T ;  increase  2

3RT 8RT 2RT

38. 3 v rms  , v and v p 
M M M

 nRT   nRT   nRT 

39. 3 P  P1  P2  P3       
 V 1  V 2  V 3

RT  0.5  0.5  0.25 8.31 300 

  n1  n 2  n 3   3
 6.23 105 N / m 2
V 5  10

200 300 1
40. 3 vrms  T ,  
v rms 600 2

PV
41. 2 PV = nRT;  n   1.6  1019 ; N  6.023  10 23  n  9.65  10 4  105
RT
42. 3 P-T equation from the graph should be like. P = aT + b (a and b are positive constants)
P b
 a
T T

P P T T T

T2  T1       or      or V > V as V 
 T 2  T 1  P  2  P 1 2 1
P
405
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

3kT vrms 1 T
vrms  
v rms 2 273 T  68.25
43. 2 ; ;
m

3P
44. 4 v rms   1.84  103 ms 1


Mass of 1 mole is m  22.4 103 m3  0.09 kg m 3  2.016 10 3 kg

1
 K.E.  mv 2rms  3.41 103 J
2
45. 1 (a) Average translational K.E. of a molecule of an ideal gas is

3
E kT , where At 0oC = 273 K, E = 5.65 × 10–21 J
2
At 100oC, E = 7.72 × 10–21 J
LEVEL - II

5 95V
1. 2 New volume, V1  V  V
100 100

PV PV 100
New pressure, P1  V   95 /100  V  95 P
1

 P1  P   P1   100 
 % increase in pressure   P   100   P  1  100   95  1  100  5.26%
     
2. 3 This process is considered as an adiabatic process for which the below equations are applicable.

PV  = constant and TV 1 = constant. We want to find the change in temperature.

T
Here   2 and V becomes 2V. Then the second equation becomes TV = T'(2V); T' =
2

P 3PV 3P cs  
3. 3 As, cs  and c   ;  or cs  c
 M  c 3 3

1M 2 3Pv 3RT
4. 2 As, P  c or c 2  
3 v M M
3  RT 3RT 3RT
For gas A, v1   ; For gas B, v 2 
2 2

M M M
v12 v1
So, 1  1
v22 v2
406
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

5. 3 A bsolute pressure P1 = (15 + 1) atm = 16 × 1.013 × 105 Pa

PV P1V1  19.48
PV = nRT or n  ;
RT RT1

Final P2  11  1  12 atm  12 1.013  105 Pa

P2 V2
Number of moles  RT  15.12
2

Hence, moles removed = 19.48 – 15.12 = 4.36

Mass removed = 4.36 × 32 g = 0.1396 kg

 c He  H 1 T  cHe t  cHe 0 T 5
6. 3 As,    ;  cHe t   cHe 0   
T0 7 or
 cH  He 2 T0  c H 0  c H  0

5 1 T

7 2 T0 ; T = 557 Ko = 284oC

T2 2T
7. 4 c2  c1 c  c 2  484 2  684 ms 1
T1 T

c 2 
2
2
E2 c
  2
2
 2
2 or E 2  2E1  12.42  10 21 J
E1 c 1 c

E 27  127  273
8. 2 As, KE  T ; E127 
 27  273 = 8.28 × 10 J
–21

2 2 2
9. 4   1 or    1 or n 
n n  1

22 1
10. 3 For CO2, n1 =  ; For CO2, C V1  3R .
44 2

16 1 5R
For O2, n2 =  ; For O2, C V2 
32 2 2
Let T K be the temperature of mixture.

Heat lost by O2 = Heat gained by CO2; n 2 C V2 T2  n1C V1 T1

15  1
 R   310  T     3R  T  300  ; T = 304.54 K = 31.5oC
22  2

407
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

m P k m1 m1 km1 km 2
11. 1 P  k ; or   where k = ; V1    ; V2 
 k m 1 P1 / k P1 P2

m m 
V  V1  V2  k  1  2 
 P1 P2 
Let P be the common pressure and  be the common density of mixture. Then


m1  m 2

m1  m 2 m1  m 2 P1P2  m1  m 2 
 P  k  
V1  V2 m m  m1 m 2  m1P2  m 2 P1 
k 1  2  
 P1 P2  P1 P2

n1RT  n 2 RT  n 3 RT  8 14 22  0.082  300

12. 3 As, P       3.075 atm
V  32 28 44  10
13. 1 For diatomic gas, number of degrees of freedom per molecules is, n = 5
5 5 5 m
Average kinetic energy of diatomic gas, is E   nR  T  PV   P   5 104 J
2 2 2 

c12  c22  .....  c62

14. 3 crms   3 2  4.242 unit
6

PV
15. 1 According to standard gas equation  R
T
As no work is done in removing the partition, total energy remains conserved. Therefore,
3 3 PV  P V
 P1V1  P2 V2   P  V1  V2   P  1 V1  V2 2 --------(ii)
2 2 1 2

For mixture of two gases  1  2  RT  P  V1  V2 

 P1V1 P2 V2 

 P1V1  P2 V2  V1  V2  T
 P1V1  P2 V2  T1T2
  RT  ;
 RT1 RT2   V1  V2   P1V1T2  P2 V2T1 
16. 4 Heat lost by first gas = heat gained by second gas n1CV1  T  T1   n 2CV2  T2  T  ----(1)

n1C V1 T1  n 2 CV2 T2
T -----(2)
n1C V1  n 2CV2

n1T1  n 2 T2
Here the gases are of same type. So C V1  C V2 ;  T  ---- (3)
n1  n 2

7 
1 T0   1 T0 
 Tf  3   5T
0
11 3

408
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

17. 2 Ideal gas equation can be written as PV = nRT -----------(i)

n P
 = constant for all gases
V RT
For same pressure and temperature, equal number of molecules present per unit volume.
18. 3 For vacuum, pressure P = 0, Hence, work done = PV  0
According to first law of thermodynamics Q  U  PV ;  Q  U
Hence the gas undergoes neither an increase nor a decrease in its temperature or internal energy.

T
19. 1 In adiabatic process, the relation between temperature (T) and pressure (P) is 1 = constant.
P
1 5
1
T1  P1 
3

8 T1
    
5/3
 8
0.4
 2.297 ;  T2   131 K ; T2 = –142oC
T2  P2  1 2.297
20. 2 Volume of the gas is constant, V = constant.  P  T

PA P0A

ie, pressure will be doubled if temperature is doubled  P  2P0

Now let F be the tension in the wire. Then equilibrium of any one piston gives
F   P  P0  A   2P0  P0  A  P0 A

m 18
  18 cc ; 1 cc of water contains 6  10  1  1023 molecules
23

21. 3 For water V 

 1 18 3
22. 1 When intermolecular force vanishes, the liquid will behave as gas.
Volume of 18 gm of water (gas) = 0.0224 m3
0.0224  4500
Volume of 4500 gm of water (gas) =  5.6 m3
18
V2 T2 V 
23. 2 At constant pressure, V  T ;  V  T ; T2   2  T1  2  300  600 K  327o C
1 1  V1 
v12  v 22  v 32  v 42 54
24. 4 v rms   cm s 1
4 2
CP R 5
25. 1 CP  C V  R  CP  CV  R    1  1  0.67  1.67 
CV CV 3

Hence, the gas is monoatomic

409
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

V  Q V CV T 1 5
26. 4 f    
 Q P  Q P CP T  7

W  Q P   Q V C 3 2
27. 1 f   1 V  1 
 Q P  Q P CP 5 5

2kT 3kT 2
28. 1 vm.p.  and v rms   v m.p.   v rms  1029 ms 1
m m 3
29. 1 As gas is suddenly expanded so it is an adiabatic process,
i.e., pV  = constant, or p1V1  p 2 V2

Given, V2  3V1 , C v  2R  C p  2R  R  3R

Cp
3R p V 
 1   2    3  5.1  5
1.5
   1.5
C v 2R p 2  V1 

n1CP1  n 2C P2 12 3
30. 3   mixture   
n1CV1  n 2CV2 8 2

V1 
1RT1  RT
 80 R ; V2  2 2  160 R  Pmi x 
 1   2  RT  3  R  370  4.6 atm
31. 3 P1 P2  V1  V2  240R

Q 2 CV 1 Q 70
32. 2 Q1  nC P T ; Q 2  nCV T ;   or Q2  1 
Q1 CP   1.4 = 50 cal.

PA P A  PA   TB   P   4T  2
33. 1  B ;        
A TA B TB B  PB   TA   2P   T  1

P1 70
d1 T1 280
P1m     0.987
34. 2 PV  RT or  RT1 d 2 P2 76
d
T2 300

 RT   2 a
35. 2 From van der Waals’ gas equation for  mole of real gas P   V  b   V 2
 
 RT 9  1
Given equation,   2   P; Comparing two equation  
 2V  b 4b  2

m 1
Hence,    mass of gas, m  M   44  22 g
M 2

410
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

nRT mass RT
36. 3 The pressure exerted by a gas is given by P  V  molecular weight  V

1 RT
Pressure exerted by oxygen P1 
4 V
1 RT 1 RT
Pressure exerted by nitrogen P2  ; Pressure exerted by carbon dioxide P3 
2 V 2 V
From Dalton’s law of partial pressures, the total pressure exerted by the mixture is given by

1 RT 1 RT 1 RT 5RT
P  P1  P2  P3    
4 V 2 V 2 V 4V
37. 2 The ideal gas law is the equation of state of an ideal gas. The state of an amount of gas is determined by
its pressure, volume and temperature. The equation has the form PV = nRT
where, P is pressure, V the volume, n the number of moles, R the gas constant and T the temperature.
P1V1 P2 V2
 
T1 T2
Given P1 = 200 kPa, V1 = V, T1 = 295 K, V2 = V + 0.02 V, T2 = 315 K

200  315
 P2  ; P2 = 209 kPa
295 1.02

310
38. 2 At constant pressure, Heat required = nC p T ; 310  2Cp 10  ;  C p   15.5 J / mol / K
20

Similarly, at constant volume, Heat required  nC v T  2  C p  R    35  25  = 144 J

3R
39. 1 Heat supplied Q  U  W ; Q  n   42  0
2

In second process, when piston is free to move Q  nC p T

3R 5R 126
n  42  n  T  or T   25.2 K
2 2 5

RT
40. 2 Putting V  for n = 1 mole and simplifying the factor, we have
P

dP
P   R T  T  T0 
1/ 2
; For minimum P, 0
dT

We get T = 2T0; Putting in (i) Pmin.  2R T0

411
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

CHAPTER - 10
OSCILLATIONS AND WAVES

SIMPLE HARMONIC MOTION

Periodic Motion
When a body or moving particle repeats its motion along a definite path after a regular interval of time, the
motion is said to be periodic motion. The constant interval of time after which the motion is repeated is called time
period (T). The particle may travel along linear or curved path.
eg: (1) Motion of pendulum of a clock. (2) Motion of planets around the sun
Oscillatory Motion
When a body moves back and forth (to and fro) about a fixed point after a regular interval of time, the motion
is said to be oscillatory. The fixed point about which the body oscillates is called equilibrium position or mean
position.
eg. (1) The movement of a simple pendulum. (2) The vertical movement of a mass suspended on a spring balance.
The force or torque directed towards mean position in oscillatory motion is called restoring force or torque.
Oscillations in which some energy is consumed due to resistive forces are called damped oscillation. In such
oscillations, mechanical energy decreases.
Every oscillatory motion is periodic. But all periodic motions are not oscillatory.
SHM (Simple Harmonic Motion)
An oscillatory motion is said to be simple harmonic if the restoring force acting on the body in oscillatory motion
is directly proportional to the displacement of the body, and is directed towards the equilibrium position.
SHM can be divided into two.
(1) Linear SHM - when a particle moves to and fro about the mean position, along a straight line then the
motion is called linear SHM. eg. Motion of a mass connected to a spring.
O
A B
A and B are extreme position and O is the mean position.
(2) Angular SHM - When a system oscillates angularly with respect to a fixed axis, then its motion is called
angular SHM. eg: Motion of the bob of a simple pendulum.
Equation of SHM
(1) Linear SHM
Restoring force acting on the particle executing linear SHM, F = ma = –kx,
k is a force constant, x is the displacement.

412
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

d2x d2x k d2x k

m 2   kx ; 2  x  0 ; 2
 2 x  0 ; where  
dt dt m dt m

kx dv dv dx dv k k
Also,  a  . ; v  x ; vdv   xdx
m dt dx dt dx m m

k v2 kx 2
 vdv    m
x dx
2

2m
C at x = 0, v = v0

v02 v2 2 x 2 v02
C   v  v 20  2 x 2
2 2 2 2

dx 1 1  x  x
 v  x
2 2 2
  dt 

sin    t  C1
v0
 sin  t  C1 
0  v0 

v0
x sin  t  C1    A sin  t  C1    v 0  A 


If at t = 0, x = 0, C1  0  x  A sin t ---------(1)

Angular SHM
Restoring torque acting,   C . C is a constant called torque per unit angular displacement.
Also I  C where I is the moment of inertia about the axis of rotation and  is the angular acceleration.

d2 d 2 C
I  C  0 ;  0
dt 2 dt 2 I

d 2 C
 2   0 ,     ---------(2)
dt 2
I
Characteristics of SHM
Displacement of a particle in SHM is the distance of the particle from the mean position at that instant,
Displacement y = A sin  t   
Amplitude: The maximum value of displacement of the particle from equilibrium position is called amplitude.
y   A when sin  t      1 ---------(3)
Period of SHM (T)
The smallest time interval after which the oscillatory motion gets repeated is called Time period.
2 m
T  2 ---------(4)
 k
1 
Frequency (v): The number of vibrations completed in unit time interval is called frequency of oscillation,    ,
T 2
unit-Hz. (Hertz)

413
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

2
Angular frequency ():    2 , unit - rad/sec.
T
Phase: The state of a vibrating particle is described by the phase of the particle at an instant y  A sin  t    ,

 t    is the phase. At t = 0,  is called epoch or initial phase.

Velocity (v)
Time rate of change of displacement of a particle at an instant is defined as the velocity in SHM.
dx d
v   A sin t   A cos t
dt dt
x2
v   A 1  sin t   A 1 
2
A2
   A2  x2 ;  x  A sin t 
v 2  2  A 2  x 2 
At mean position x = 0, v   A ; At x   A , then the velocity of particle executing SHM is zero.
The direction of velocity is towards or away from mean position.
Acceleration in SHM
Time rate of change of velocity of a particle at an instant is called acceleration.
dv d
a   A cos t   2 A sin t  2 x
dt dt
The acceleration of the particle executing SHM is always directed towards the mean position. Acceleration is
maximum at extreme position  2 A  and minimum at the mean position (0).
SHM as a projection of circular motion
y
aQ
P

D
R P aC
aR
A
y
 
C x Q x
O B

E
Suppose a particle is moving along the circumference of a circle of radius A with angular speed  . The points
Q and R are foot of the perpendiculars drawn from P to X axis and Y axis.
As the particle P completes one revolution in the anticlockwise direction, the projection R and Q moves in the
X axis and Y axis respectively completing one oscillation. In circular motion the oscillation of the projection in any
axis represents the simple harmonic motion.
Let at t = 0, particle P is on the X axis. After a time t, the point P makes an angle  with the X-axis, then
x  A cos t 
 ---------(5)
y  A sin t 
414
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

Here, x & y are the displacements (OQ and OR from the centre) at time t; They represent displacement
equations of SHM.
So when P is under uniform circular motion, Q and R perform SHM about O, with the same angular speed 
as that of P.
The acceleration of P  a c  2 A towards centre.

a c can be resolved into two components; a R  A2 sin t  2 y and a Q  A2 cos t  2 x
aR and aQ are the accelerations corresponding to R and Q respectively.
Energy of particle in SHM
PE
dU
F   dU    Fdx ; F = –kx for SHM   dU      kx dx
dx
1 2 1 2
U kx  C ; At x = 0, U = U0, therefore C = U0.  U kx  U 0
2 2

1 2
U0 is the PE at equilibrium position. When U0 = 0, U  kx
2

Also x  A sin  t   

1 2 k 1
kx   A sin  t      kA 2 sin 2  t   
2
U
2 2 2

1 1
If   0 , U  kA 2 sin 2 t  m2 A 2 sin 2 t
2 2

PE is minimum at mean position and maximum at extreme position   A 

U Umax = ½ kA
2

–A A

T 3T T 3T 5T
PE is a periodic function of time. It is minimum at t  0, , T, etc. and maximum at , and .
2 2 4 4 4
KE
For a particle in SHM m & v are mass and velocity, then KE at any instant is given by

1 1 1
mv 2  m2  A 2  x 2   k  A 2  x 2  ------------(6)
2 2 2

Also v  A cos  t   
415
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

KE max. KE = ½ m2A2

–A A

1
KE  m2 A 2 cos 2  t   
2

1
If initial phase  is zero.; KE  m2 A 2 cos 2 t ------------(7)
2
1 2
KE is maximum at mean position  kA  and minimum (0) at extreme position.
2 
T 3T 5T T 3T
KE is a periodic function of time. It is minimum at t  , , ......... It is maximum at 0, , T, ........
4 4 4 2 2
Total Energy
1 2 1 1
E = PE + KE  kx  k  A 2  x 2   kA 2  a constant ------------(8)
2 2 2
1 1 1
Also E  kA 2 sin 2 t  kA 2 cos 2 t  kA 2
2 2 2
Example 1 : For SHM what fraction of TE is KE and what fraction is PE when displacement is half that of
amplitude. Also find at what displacement the PE & KE are equal

1 1 2 1
KE  k  A2  x 2  , PE  kx ; TE  kA 2
2 2 2

 A2 
A 2
  
KE A 2  x 2  4  1 3
Fraction of KE   2
 2
 1 
TE A A 4 4

PE x 2 A 2 / 4 1 1 1
Fraction of PE =    ; KU k  A 2  x 2   kx 2
TE A 2 A2 4 2 2

A
2x  A ; x  
2 2
2
416
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

Spring System
When a spring is given a small displacement by stretching or compressing, a restoring force is developed in it.
According to Hook’s law. F   x or F = – kx [k is spring constant]
Spring constant depends on length (l), radius of the wire used and the material used.
For any spring, kl = a constant where l is the natural length of spring.
When a spring is stretched or compressed, work done on it is stored as elastic potential energy.
When the force F is applied on a spring produces a compression or stretching by a distance x,
1 2
then W   Fdx   kx dx ; U  W  kx
2
U

Parabola

O x

1
When the spring is stretched from a length l1 to l2 then work done  W  k  l22  l12  --------(9)
2
Here the spring is considered massless.
Spring Mass System
When a small mass is suspended from a massless spring, then this arrangement is known as spring mass system.
For small displacement the motion of the spring is SHM.

d2x
F   kx  m   kx
dt 2
d2x k k
2
  x  2 x , 2 
dt m m

2 m 1 k
Time period T   2 , Frequency  
 k 2 m
 1 
 
It is seen that T  m and  T 

.
k

If two masses m1 & m2 are connected by a spring and made to oscillate, then time period T  2
k
m1m 2
where,   m  m is called the reduced mass.
1 2

417
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Combination of springs
Series combination

In series combination of springs same restoring force is acting on all the springs but extension depends on the
force constant.
Total displacement in springs x = x1 + x2.

F F F F
Force acting on both springs F   k1x1   k 2 x 2 ; x1   k , x 2   k ; x    
1 2  k1 k 2 

Let ks is the equivalent force constant, then

F F F 1 1 1 kk
F  –k s x    , or   ; k s  1 2 ---------(10)
k s k1 k 2 k s k1 k 2 k1  k 2

m m  k1  k 2 
Time period T  2  2 ---------(11)
ks k1k 2

1 k 1k 2
Frequency   2 m k  k ---------(12)
 1 2

ks k 1k 2
Angular frequency    ---------(13)
m m  k1  k 2 

Parallel combination of springs

418
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

When springs are connected in parallel, the deformation on each spring is the same but restoring force will be
different. kp is the effective spring constant when they are connected in parallel.
F  F1  F2 , F1 = –k1x and F2 = –k2x F   k1 x  k 2 x

F   k p x   k1 x  k 2 x  k p  k1  k 2 ---------(14)

m m
Period T  2 k  2 k  k ---------(15)
p 1 2

1 k1  k 2 k1  k 2
Frequency n  ---------(16); Angular frequency   ---------(17)
2 m m
Note:
Period and frequency of a spring mass system is independent of the acceleration due to gravity whenever they
are making horizontal or vertical oscillations.
Simple Pendulum
An arrangement in which a heavy point mass, suspended by a weightless inextensible string from a rigid support,
is called a simple pendulum.

When a mass m is suspended from a rigid support S by a massless string and the mass is displaced through an
OA y
angle  , then restoring force acting on the pendulum, F   mg sin  . sin   
SA l
y g  y
 ma  mg sin   mg ; a
l l
When y is small, acceleration is proportional to displacement and it is directed towards mean position. So the
motion is SHM.

g 2 l
a  2 y, 2  ; T  2 ---------(18)
l  g
Second’s Pendulum
l
A pendulum whose time period is 2s is called a second’s pendulum. For second’s pendulum T  4  4
2 2
.
g
g
l 1 m .
2
ie, the length of second’s pendulum on the surface of earth is = 1 m

419
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Compound pendulum
A rigid body which is free to oscillate in a vertical plane about a horizontal axis passing through a point on the
body is called a compound pendulum.

Torque acting on a body    mgl sin  , when  is small, sin   

   mgl  also   I .
l - is the distance of the centre of mass from axis of rotation.
I - MI about the axis through point of suspension. m - mass of body.
d 2
 I   mgl  ; I  mgl   0
dt 2

d 2 m d 2 mgl
2
 gl   0 ; 2  2   0 , 2 
dt I dt I

2 I
Period of pendulum   2
 mgl

By parallel axis theorem, I  ICM  ml 2  mk 2  ml 2

where k = radius of gyration.

I mk 2  ml 2 k2 l k2  l2
T  2  2  2   2 ---------(19)
mgl mgl gl g gl

For maximum time period l = 0, and the maximum time period = Tmax   .
dT
For minimum time period  0 , then k = l
dl
k2
k
Time is  T  2 k 2k ---------(20)
 2
g g
Graph of T vs l
T is minimum when l = k

420
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

Torsion pendulum
In a torsion pendulum an inextensible wire is used to suspend an extended object, and the wire is free to twist
about its axis. When the lower end of the wire is rotated by a small amount the wire applies a restoring torque, which
causes, the body to oscillate about a vertical axis.

C
The restoring torque is given by   C I  C  
I

I
Period T  2 ---------(21)
C

C - is the torsional constant.  - is the angle of twist. I is the MI of the body..

Free or undamped vibrations
In the absence of any dissipative force if a body executes SHM, the period of motion is independant of the
amplitude of the vibrating body then the body vibrates indefinitely with constant amplitude. Such oscillations are
called free or undamped oscillations. It will be having a single natural frequency.
Vibrations of a tuning fork, oscillation of a pendulum are examples. Such vibrations can be represented by
d2 y
m   ky , where y  a sin  t   
dt 2
In addition to the linear restoring force if some dissipative forces are acting on the body executing SHM, the
motion of the body gets modified. Such vibrations can be classified into damped vibrations, maintained vibration,
forced vibrations or resonant vibrations.
1. Damped vibrations
When dissipative forces like friction or viscosity acts on a body executing SHM, the forces offer resistance to
the motion and the mechanical energy gradually decreases. Due to this the amplitude decreases gradually and finally
comes to rest. This type of motion is called damped motion.

The motion of a pendulum in a liquid, the motion of the coil of a ballistic galvanometer are examples. In case of
damped vibration, if we assume that the dissipative force is non-periodic and varies linearly with velocity, the motion
can be represented by

421
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

d2 y dy dy
m 2
  ky    - is the damping constant. v
dt dt dt

Take b  , the solution can be written as
2m
2
  
sin  1t    where 1    b    
 bt 2 2 2
y  Ae 0  ---------(22)
0
 2m 
1 2
Ae–bt is the amplitude. For undamped oscillator the mechanical energy is kA ; for damped oscillator, the
2
amplitude decreases.

1 2 m t
So mechanical energy is E  t   kA e ---------(23)
2
Under Damping

 k 
If  ie,  2 . It is heavily damped.
2m m m
Here the oscillation dies out in a short time. Such a motion is called dead beat.

Critical damping
Over damping

Under damping

Critical damping

 k 
When  , or  20 .
2m m m
Here damping rate is much faster as compared to heavily damped. It is used in situations where we desire a
high decay without oscillation. Eg. In pointer type galvanometer, the pointer move immediately to the correct position
without any oscillation immediately.
Over damping

 k 
When  , or  20 slow damping takes place.
2m m m
422
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

Over damped cannot oscillate and instead slowly decays towards equilibrium.
The oscillation dies out after a long time.
Quality factor or Q value in SHM
The rate at which the energy decays in the damped oscillatory systems is measured by the Q value of the
1 k 2 
system. It is given by, Q  ; where 1   2 and
b
2b m 4m 2m

m k 2 m k
Q   ---------(24)
 m 4m 2
 m

Quality factor is defined as the ratio of energy stored in the system in one cycle to the average energy lost in one
cycle.
If energy is supplied to overcome the energy lost due to dissipative forces, the oscillations are maintained and
they vibrate with natural frequency.
Forced vibrations
When a system is subjected to an external periodic force and if the system vibrates according to the frequency
of the force applied it is called forced vibrations.
eg. If we press the stem of a vibrating tuning fork against a table, the table vibrates with the frequency of the tuning
fork.

If a periodic force F  F0 sin t is applied to a body of natural frequency 0 in presence of small damping, the

d2 y dy
differential equation of motion can be written as m 2   ky    F0 sin t
dt dt

On solving y  A sin  t   

F0
A

1/2 ---------(25)
   
2

m  02  2     
2

  m  

  
  tan 1   ---------(26)
 m  0    
2 2

Resonant Vibrations

When the frequency of the external periodic force is equal to the natural frequency of the body,    0  the
amplitude of vibration increases at each step and becomes very large. Such vibrations are called resonant vibrations
and the phenomenon is called resonance.

423
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

When there is no damping the peak is higher and narrower, called sharp resonance.
Example 2: A small spherical ball placed a little away from the centre of a large concave mirror whose radius of
curvature is R = 2.5 cm. When the ball is released it begins to oscillate about the centre. Verify whether the motion
is SHM and find the period of motion (no friction)

x  mg
F  mg sin   mg   kx; k
R R

F kx
a   2 x
m m
Here motion is SHM

2  2 2 R 2.5
T  
 k mg / R = 2  2  0.32 sec
g 980
m m
WAVES ON A STRING

Wave Motion
A wave is a mode of transference of energy from point to point in the direction of propagation of the wave. The
waves are periodic disturbances transmitted through a medium from a point of origin called the [Link] disturbances
from the source are handed over to the particles in the medium. The particles in the medium behave as if they are
connected by some elastic forces. When a particle in the medium is set into vibration, the adjacent particles acquire
a similar kind of vibration.
A wave motion is a form of disturbance which travels through the medium due to the repeated periodic
motion of the particles of the medium about their equilibrium positions, the disturbance being handed over
from particle to particle.
A wave is a disturbance which propagates energy from one place to another without transport of matter.
1. Characteristics of wave motion
(i) It is a sort of disturbance which travels through a medium.
(ii) Material medium is essential for the propagation of mechanical waves.

424
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

(iii) When a wave motion passes through a medium, particles of the medium only vibrate simple harmonically
about their mean position. They do leave their position and move with the dusturbance.
(iv)There is a continuous phase difference amongst successive particles of the medium ie, particle 2 starts
vibrating slightly later than particle 1 and so on.
v) The velocity of the particle during their vibration is different at different position.
vi) The velocity of wave motion through a particular medium is constant. It depends only on the nature of the
medium and not on the frequency, wavelength or intensity.
vii) Energy is propagated along with the wave motion without any net transport of the medium.
2. Mechanical waves: The waves which require medium for their propagation are called mechanical waves.
Example: Waves on string and spring, waves on water surface, sound waves, seismic waves.
3. Non-mechanical waves: The waves which do not require a medium for their propagation are called non-
mechanical or electromagnetic waves.
Examples: Light, heat (Infrared), radio waves,   rays , X-rays etc.
4 Transverse waves: Particles of the medium execute simple harmonic motion about their mean position in a
direction perpendicular to the direction of propagation of wave motion.
(i) It travels in the form of crests and troughs.
(ii) A crest is a portion of the medium which is raised temporarily above the normal position of rest of the
particles of the medium when a transverse wave passes through it.

A C E
Vibration

Crest
Particle Normal level Trough Wave
B D

(iii) A trough is a portion of the medium which is depressed temporarily below the normal position of rest of the
particles of the medium, when transverse wave passes through it.
(iv) Examples of transverse wave motion : Movement of string of a sitar or violin, movement of the membrane
of a Tabla or Dholak, movement of kink on a rope, waves set-up on the surface of water.
(v) Transverse waves can be transmitted through solids, they can be setup on the surface of liquids. But they
can not be transmitted into liquids and gases.

425
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

5. Longitudinal waves : If the particles of a medium vibrate in the direction of wave motion, the wave is called
longitudinal.
(i) It travels in the form of compressions and rarefactions.
(ii) A compression (C) is a region of the medium in which particles are compressed (high density).
(iii) A rarefaction (R) is a region of the medium in which particles are rarefied (low density).

(iv) Sound waves travel through air in the form of longitudinal waves. Vibration of air column in organ pipes ,
Vibration of air column above the surface of water in the tube of a resonance apparatus are longitudinal
waves
Wavelength : Wavelength is the distance between any two nearest particles of the medium, vibrating in the same
phase. Distance between two consecutive crests or troughs is a wavelength. Distance between consecutive
compression or rarefactions is a wavelength.

Frequency : (i) Frequency of vibration of a particle is defined as the number of vibrations completed by particle in
one second.
(ii) It is the number of complete wavelengths traversed by the wave in one second.
(iii) Units of frequency are hertz (Hz) and per second.
Time period : (i) Time period of vibration of particle is defined as the time taken by the particle to complete one
vibration about its mean position.
(ii) It is the time taken by the wave to travel a distance equal to one wavelength.
1
Relation between frequency and time period : Time period = 1/Frequency  T  ---------(1)

Relation between velocity, frequency and wavelength of the wave:
distance s
By definition, velocity   =
time t
In one complete vibration of the particle, distance travelled, s =  and time taken, t  T , From (2),
v    1  ,  - wavelength, v - velocity,,  -frequency..
T T
Using (1), we get v   -------------(2)
Hence velocity of a wave is the product of frequency and wavelength of the wave. This relation holds for
transverse as well as longitudinal waves.
426
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

Some terms related to progressive waves

(i) Wave number (  ) : The number of waves present in unit length is defined as the wave number
1
  -------------(3); Unit = meter–1 ; Dimension = [L–1].

 Phase difference between particles
(ii) Propagation constant (k) : k  x  Distance between them
 Angular velocity 2
k  k  2 ---------(4)
v Wave velocity and 
(iii) Wave velocity ( υ ) : The velocity with which the crests and troughs or compression and rarefaction travel in a
  
medium, is defined as wave velocity v     
k 2 T
(iv) Phase and Phase difference : Phase of the wave is given by the argument of sine or cosine in the equation of
2
wave. It is represented by   x, t    vt  x  ,

(v) At a given position (for fixed value of x) phase changes with time (t)
d 2v 2 2 2
   d  . dt  Phase difference   Time difference.
dt  T T T
(vi) At a given time (for fixed value of t) phase changes with position (x).
d 2  2 2
  d   dx  Phase difference  × Path difference.---------(5)
dx   
T
 Time difference   Path difference ---------(6)

One dimensional Travelling wave
To completely describe a wave on a string, we need a function that gives the shape of the wave. Consider a
sinusoidal wave travelling to the right with constant speed, transverse displacement of the particles of the string is
measured with the coordinate y. Figure (a) represents the shape and position of the pulse at t = 0. At this time, the
shape of the pulse, whatever it may be, can be represented as y = f(x), that is y is some definite function of x. The
maximum displacement ym is called the amplitude of the wave. The pulse travel to the right a distance vt in a time t,
then the transverse displacement y of a string element at position x at time t is given by y = f(x – vt)
Similarly, if the wave pulse travel to the left, the displacement y is given by y = f(x + vt).
One Dimensional Travelling Wave

427
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

The speed of travelling wave

Consider a wave travelling in the direction of increasing x, the entire wave pattern is moving a distance x in
that direction during the interval t . The ratio x / t is the wave speed v..
v = dx / dt

A snapshot of the travelling wave, at t = 0 and a later time t  t . During the time interval t , the entire
curve shifts a distance x to the right.
(1) Speed of transverse wave motion :

T
(i) On a stretched string : v  ---------(7); T = Tension in the string; m = Linear density of the string.
m


(ii) In a solid body : v  ---------(8)  = Modulus of rigidity;  = Density of the material.

(2) Speed of longitudinal wave motion :

4
k 
(i) In a solid medium v  3 ---------(9) k = Bulk modulus;  = Modulus of rigidity;  = Density


Y
When the solid is in the form of long bar v  ---------(10) Y = Young’s modulus of material of rod


k
(ii) In a liquid medium v  ---------(11)


k
(iii) In gases v  ---------(12)


Reflection and transmission of waves

428
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

Consider a travelling pulse of a string whose one end is fixed to a rigid support. When the pulse reached the
fixed wall, it will be reflected.
When the pulse reaches at the end of the string that is fixed at the support, the string produces an upward force
on the support. By Newton’s third law, the support must then exert and equal and opposite reaction force on the
string, which causes the pulse to invert upon reflection.
Let us now suppose that the right end of the string is attached to a light frictionless ring which can freely move
on a vertical rod. Now when the pulse reaches at right end, there is no corresponding restoring force from the right
as the rod does not exert a vertical force on the ring. In this case pulse will be reflected, but this time its displacement
is not inverted. The amplitude is the same as that of the incoming pulse.
Now consider a situation in which the end point is neither completely fixed nor completely free to move. For
example, consider a light string attached to a heavier string as shown in figure. If a wave pulse is produced on the
light string (figure (c)) moving towards the junction, a part of the wave is reflected and a part is transmitted on the
heavier string. The reflected wave is inverted to the original one. If the wave is produced on the heavier string (figure
(d)), which moves towards the junction, a part will be reflected and a part is transmitted but the reflected wave is no
more inverted.
Progressive Wave
(1) These waves propagate in the forward direction of medium with a finite velocity.
(2) Energy and momentum are transmitted in the direction of propagation of waves without actual transportation of
matter.
(3) In progressive waves, equal changes in pressure and density occurs at all points of medium.
(4) Progressive wave can be represented as.

Where y = displacement, A = Amplitude,  = Angular

y  A sin  t  kx or  frequency, = Frequency, k = Propogation constant,

 2        (13) T= Period. = Wave length, v = Wave velocity, t = Time,
y  A sin  t  x  x = Position of the particle from the origin
   

Phase, Phase constant & Phase difference

When a particle oscillates then the displaement of the particle from its equilibrium position and its direction of
motion changes periodically. The quantity, which express, at any instant, the displacement of the particle and its
direction of motion is called the phase of the particle. Suppose, at any instant t, 1 and 2 are the phases of two
particles whose distance from the origin are x1 and x2 respectively.

 t x1   t x2 
Then, 1  2    and 2  2   
T   T  

429
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

2 2
1  2   x 2  x1  or    x ---------(14)
 
This is the phase difference between two particles whose path difference is x .
Phase angle of the particle at t = 0 is called initial phase or epoch. Thus the phase difference between two media
particles having a path different  is 2 , ie, the particles are in the same phase of oscillation.
Intensity of a wave (I)
In a travelling wave, energy is transferred through the medium in the direction in which the wave travels. The
transfer of energy per unit time per unit area along the direction of motion of the wave is called as the intensity of the
wave.
If A is the amplitude, c is the speed,  is the frequency,  is the density of the medium, I is the intensity, then
I  22 c  v 2 A 2 -----------(15)

Note: Intensity is proportional to the square of the amplitude  I  A 2  .

As the wave propagates through the medium, its energy is shared by a larger number of particles and the energy
through unit area per second decreases. Hence, the intensity and amplitude go on decreasing as we move away from
the source of the waves. For a point source giving out wave in all directions (three-dimensional wave), the variation
P
of intensity with distance (r) from the source is given as I  -----------(16)
4r 2
where, P is the power (total energy given out per sec.) of the source.
Combining equations (15) and (16) we can deduce that amplitude at a point is inversely proportional to the
distance of the point from the source of the waves.

1 1
I 2
 A  -----------(17)
r r
Example 1: If x1 = 7 sin 440 t and x2 = 9 sin 484 t. What is the ratio of the maximum and the minimum intensities of
sound. What is the interval between them?
Solution: x1  7 sin 440t  a sin t  a sin 21t  21  440 or 1  70 Hz

Similarly, x 2  9sin 484t  9sin 2 2 t  2 2  484 or  2  77 Hz

I  A1  A 2   9  7   162  64
2 2

 max 
I min  A1  A 2 2  9  7 2 22

1 1 1 1
Time interval between maximum and minimum  × time between two maxima    sec ,
2 2 7 14
The number of beats heard/sec   2  1  77  70  7

1 1
 Time interval between successive maxima   sec
 2  1 7

430
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

Standing Waves on a String

When two waves of identical frequency (of similar kind) travelling from opposite directions meet, the resultant
wave obtained is known as standing waves. Standing waves can either be pure standing waves or partial standing
waves.
Pure Standing Waves
Here the amplitude of the two superposing waves need to be identical too.
Let the two travelling waves be

y1  x, t   A sin  t  kx  ; y 2  x, t   A sin  t  kx 

Due to their superposition, the resultant wave is

y R  x, t   y1  x, t   y 2  x, t   A sin  t  kx   sin  t  kx    2A cos kx  sin t -------- (18)

where (2A cos kx) = Ax is clearly a position dependent function (cosine, hence periodic too) and is a constant for a
particular location and is known as amplitude of oscillation at that location.

While the second term, sin  t  indicates SHM of the particle at position x with amplitude Ax. Therefore, sin  t 
term is common for all particles, hence each particle has same frequency of oscillation.
The amplitude, Ax = 2Acos(kx) as a function of x can be plotted as below.

Energy of a loop
Since each particle executes simple harmonic motion of different amplitude, their energy of oscillation are also
different, clearly maximum at antinodes.
Considering a standing wave in a stretched string as in the strings of a guitar where
T = tension in string ,  = mass per unit length,  = angular frequency of wave
2
k = wave number of wave  We can find the energy confined within a loop.


Ax
x dx


x=0 x
2
1 2 A 2
 dE   dm  2 A 2x ;  E -----------(19)
2 2
431
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Standing waves in a string

Consider a string of length l, tension T and linear density  stretched between two fixed points

The smallest frequency with which standing waves can be set up in any system is said to be fundamental
frequency (  0 ). Frequency  0 , clearly means having largest wavelength so that
v   = constant,
since velocity of wave is only medium dependent. Since both the ends are fixed, they will necessarily form
nodes.
Therefore, to have largest wavelength we will have to insert one antinode between these two nodes.

 v   0 0  0  2l 

v T/
 0   -----------(20)
2l 2l
Overtones are the higher frequencies, with respect to the fundamental frequency with which standing waves
can be set up. For example, 1st overtone is the immediate next higher frequency (hence immediate next lower
wavelength). Therefore we insert one more antinode here.

v
 v  11  1    2  20
 2l 
st nd
 1 overtone = 2  0 = 2 harmonic.
(Note: All integral multiples of fundamental frequency are said to be harmonics of  0 .
Similarly for finding 2nd overtone.

432
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

3v
 v   2 2  2  2  30
2l
 2nd overtone = 3rd harmonic. th
 Generalising, we have, n overtone
v
 n   n  1 harmonic
th
  n  1  0   n  1
2l
If the string oscillates in m loops, the frequency of oscillation is
v T/
 m  m 0  m m
2l 2l
We can easily change the frequency of oscillation by changing T (by increasing/decreasing tension),  (thin/
thick wire) or l (long/short wire). This is the basic of sound production of different frequency in guitar wires. By the
movement of the fingers, on the string one controls the location of nodes whereas by plucking it with the other hand,
we control the location of antinodes.
If the string’s tension is increased/decreased slighly (less than 5%), we can apply error formula to find the
percentage change in frequency of string.
 1 T
ie,  -----------(21)
 2 T
Standing Waves in Composite Strings

A light string is attached to a heavy string, with a common tension T.

 T
If  2  1 , then the velocity of wave  v    , then v1 > v2
 

and as v   , the strings are supposed to oscillate with same frequency, therefore,
1   2 ie, thin string will have larger wavelength and hence lesser loops.
If p and q be the number of loops in the thin and thick strings respectively, the junction obviously being a node.

v1 v T / 1 T / 2
1   2 p q 2 p q
2l1 2l2 l1 l2

p2 q2
 -----------(22)
l121 l22 2
Example 2: A wire of uniform cross-section is stretched between two points 1 m apart. The wire is fixed at one end
and a weight of 9 kg is hung over a pulley at the other end produces fundamental frequency of 750 Hz. (a) What is
the velocity of transverse waves propagating in the wire? (b) If now the suspended weight is submerged in a liquid
of density (5/9) that of the weight, what will be the velocity and frequency of the waves propagating along the wire?

Solution : (a) In case of fundamental vibrations of string    L , i.e.,   2  1  2 m
2
433
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Now as v  f and f = 750 Hz.

v A  2  750  1500 m / s i.e.,   2 m, f  750 Hz and v = 1500 m/s

(b) Now as in case of a wire under tension

T vA T T
v so  A , i.e., v B  1500 B
m vB TB TA

Mg g 1   /      5
or vB  1500  1500 as g  g 1    or vB  1500 1   1000 m / s
Mg g     9

v B 1000
Further as here   constant = 2 m so from v = f , f B    2  500 Hz
B

i.e., in this situation,   2m, f  500 Hz and v  1000 m / s

String free at one end

In this case the free end is an antinode and the fixed end is a node.

 v T/
• For a fundamental mode L  o r   4L ; Fundamental 1  
4 4L 4L

3 4L 3 T
First overtone L  ; Hence   ; so  2  (First overtone)
4 3 4L 

 1
5 T  n   T  2n  1 T
2
Second overtone  3 
4L 
; so n    -----------(23)
2L  4L 

• Only odd harmonics can be generated in a string free at one end and fixed at the other.
• If one end is x = 0 then amplitude at any x is A sin k x where A is max amplitude.

• Equation of wave will be the form y   A sin kx  .sin  t   

434
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

Laws of Transverse Vibrations of String - Sonometer wire

1  L2
(a) Law of length  so 1  ; if T &  are constant.-----------(24)
L 2 L1

1 T
(b) Law of tension   T so  1 ; if L &  are constant.-----------(25)
2 T2

1  2
(c) Law of mass  so 1 
 2 1 ; if T & L are constant.-----------(26)

Melde’s Experiment
Experiment can be used to calculate unknown frequency of tuning fork. String can be set into vibrations in two
different arrangements.
(1) Transverse arrangement: Oscillations of tuning fork are set perpendicular to length of string. Frequency
of tuning fork and of the waves on string are same so if n is number of loops in string then

 n T
L  n   so   -----------(27)
2 2L 

(2) Parallel arrangement: Oscillations of tuning fork are parallel to length of string. The time during which
the tuning fork completes one vibration, the string completes half of its vibration. Frequency of the wave
2n T
is half the frequency of tuning fork. If n is number of loops then   ---------(28)
2L 

435
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

SOUND WAVES

Sound Waves
Sound waves are the most common example of longitudinal waves. They travel through any material medium
with a speed that depends on the properties of the medium. As the waves travel through air, the elements of air
vibrate to produce changes in density and pressure along the direction of motion of the wave. If the source of the
sound waves vibrates sinusoidally, the pressure variations are also sinusoidal.
The mathematical description of sinusoidal sound waves is very similar to that of sinusoidal string waves.
Sound waves are divided into three categories that cover different frequency ranges. (1) Audible waves lie
within the range of sensitivity of the human ear. They can be generated in a variety of ways, such as by musical
instruments, human voices, or loudspeakers. (2) Infrasonic waves have frequencies below the audible range. Elephants
can use infrasonic waves to communicate with each other, even when separated by many kilometers. (3) Ultrasonic
waves have frequencies above the audible range. Ultrasonic waves are also used in medical imaging.
Velocity of Sound in Elastic Medium.
When a sound wave travels through a medium such as air, water or steel, it will set particles of medium into
vibration as it passes through it. For this to happen the medium must possess both inertia (i.e. mass density so that
kinetic energy may be stored) and elasticity (so that PE may be stored). These two properties of matter determine
the velocity of sound.
i.e. velocity of sound is the characteristic of the medium in which wave propagate.

E
v ----------(1) (E = Elasticity of the medium;  = Density of the medium)

Important points
(1) As solids are most elastic while gases least i.e. ES > EL > EG . So the velocity of sound is maximum in solids and
minimum in gases

vsteel  v water  v air

Lesser the velocity, denser is said to be the medium and vice-versa.
(2) Newton’s formula : He assumed that when sound propagates through air temperature remains constant

K P
.(i.e. the process is isothermal) v air   -----------(2)
 

As K = E   P ; E  = Isothermal elasticity; P = Pressure.

By calculation vair = 279 m/sec.

However the experimental value of sound in air is 332 m/sec which is greater than (52 m/s = 15.6%) that given
by Newton’s formula.
(3) Laplace correction : He modified Newton’s formula assuming that propagation of sound in air as adiabatic
process.

436
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

K E
v  ----------(3) (As K  E   P  Adiabatic elasticity)
 

v  1.41  279  331.3 m / s   Air  1.41

P 1
(4) Effect of density : v  
v


P RT
(5) Effect of pressure : v   . -------------(4)
 M
Velocity of sound is independent of the pressure of gas provided the temperature remains constant. ( P   when
T = constant)

RT
(6) Effect of temperature : v  v T (T in K)
M

When the temperature change is small then v t  v 0 1  t 

v 0 = velocity of sound at 0°C, v t = velocity of sound at t°C ,  = temp-coefficient of velocity of sound.

m/s
Value of   0.608 o
 0.61  Approx 
C
Temperature coefficient of velocity of sound is defined as the change in the velocity of sound, when temperature
changes by 1°C.
(7) Effect of humidity : With increase in humidity, density of air decreases. So with rise in humidity, velocity of
sound increases.
This is why sound travels faster in humid air (rainy season) than in dry air (summer) at the same temperature.
(8) Effect of wind velocity : Because wind drifts the medium (air) along its direction of motion therefore the
velocity of sound in a particular direction is the algebraic sum of the velocity of sound and the component of
wind velocity in that direction. Resultant velocity of sound along SL  v  w cos 

(9) Sound of any frequency or wavelength travels through a given medium with the same velocity.
(v = constant) For a given medium velocity remains constant. All other factors like phase, loudness, pitch,
quality etc. have practically no effect on sound velocity.
(10)Relation between velocity of sound and root mean square velocity.

RT 3RT v rms 3

vsound  and v rms   vsound    / 3 v rms ----------(5)
1/2
, so or
M M vsound 
(11) There is no atmosphere on moon, therefore propagation of sound is not possible there. To do conversation on
moon, the astronaut uses an instrument which can transmit and detect electromagnetic waves.

437
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Example 1 : The velocity of sound in hydrogen at 0oC is 1200 m/s. When some amount of oxygen is mixed with
hydrogen, the velocity decreases to 500 m/s. Determine the ratio of H2 to O2 by volume in this mixture, given that the
density of oxygen is 16 times that of hydrogen.
P
Solution : Given that 1200   ---------(i)
H

Let there be x volume of H2 and y volume of O2. Then,  x  y  mix  xH  yO  xH  16yH

 x  16y   P  x  y 
 mix   500 
xy
H
 x  16y  H -------- (ii)
12 x  16y x 2.15
Dividing (2) by (1),  or 
5 xy y 1
Reflection and Refraction of Waves.
When sound waves are incident on a boundary between two media, a part of incident waves returns back into
the initial medium (reflection) while the remaining is partly absorbed and partly transmitted into the second medium
(refraction)

In case of reflection and refraction of sound

(1) frequency of the wave remains unchanged that means
i  r  t    constant
(2) The incident ray, reflected ray, normal and refracted ray all lie in the same plane.
(3) For reflection, The angle of incidence (i) = Angle of reflection (r)
sin i vi
(4) For refraction sin t  v
t

(5) In reflection from a denser medium or rigid support, phase changes by 180° and direction reverses. If incident
wave is y  A1 sin  t  kx  then reflected wave becomes

y  A r sin  t  kx      A r sin  t  kx  .----------(6)

(6) In reflection from a rarer medium or free end, phase does not change and direction reverses. If incident wave is
y  A1 sin  t  kx  then reflected wave becomes y  A r sin  t  kx  .
(7) Echo is an example of reflection.

438
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

If there is a sound reflector at a distance d from the source then time interval between original sound and its echo
2d
at the site of source will be t  ----------(7)
v
Reflection of Mechanical Waves
Reflection of Longitudinal Waves (Sound waves)
At a Boundary of a Denser Medium:

Suppose that longitudinal waves in air (sound waves) are incident normally on a rigid wall. When a compression
strikes the wall, it exerts a force on the wall. But as the wall is rigid, it exerts an equal and opposite force on the layer
of air in compression and thus pushes the compression in the backward direction.
Thus a compression travelling towards the right is reflected as a compression travelling towards left. The
displacement of the particle in reflected wave is in opposite direction to the displacement of the particle in the
incident wave. Thus, there is a phase difference of  radian or 180o between the incident wave and the reflected
wave. Similarly, incident rarefaction is reflected as a rarefaction.
At a Boundary of a Rarer Medium:

Suppose that a longitudinal wave travelling in a denser medium is incident at the boundary of a rarer medium. If
a compression in the incident waves strikes the surface of separation (eg; air at the open end of a pipe), then due to
the high pressure of compression, the surface of separation is pushed back. As the particles of air at the open end of
a pipe are free to move, the surrounding air goes away quickly and a compression is converted into a rarefaction
before the wave is reflected.
Thus, the compression after reflection at a rarer medium returns as a rarefaction. Thus no phase change takes
place when a longitudinal wave is reflected from the surface of a rarer medium. Similarly, incident rarefaction is
reflected as a compression.

439
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Type of wave Boundary of After reflection Change of phase

Compression as compression.
Denser 
Rarefaction as rarefaction.
Longitudinal
Compression as rarefaction.
Rarer 0
Rarefaction as compression.
Crest as a trough.
Denser 
Trough as crest
Transverse
Crest as crest.
Rarer 0
Trough as trough
Example 2: A progressive wave travels in a medium S1 and enters into another medium S2 in which its speed
decreases to 75%. What is the ratio of the amplitude of the (a) reflected and the incident waves, and (b) transmitted
and the incident waves?
Solution: Let Ai, Ar and At be the amplitudes of the incidents, reflected, and transmitted waves. Given that, velocity
in the medium transmitted is 75% of that in the initial medium.

3 v1
v2  v1 ; we know that A i  A r  v A t ------- (i)
4 2

 v v   2v 2 
A r   2 1  Ai and A t    Ai -------(ii)
 v2  v1   v 2  v1 

v2
1 3 1 Ar
A r v 2  v1 v1 1  1: 7
From equation (1) and (2), (a)    4   i.e., the required ratio is
A i v 2  v1 v 2  1 3  1 7 Ai
v1 4

v2
2
At 2v 2 2 3 / 4 6
v1 At
     6:7
(b) A i v 2  v1 v 2 3 7 i.e., the required ratio is
1 1 Ai
v1 4

Energy, Power and Intensity of Sound

If a sound wave given by y  A sin  t  kx  is propagating through a medium, the particle velocity will be

dy
v Pa   A cos  t  kx 
dt
So, if  is the density of the medium, kinetic energy of the wave per unit volume will be
2
1  dy  1
     2 A 2 cos 2  t  kx 
2  dt  2
and its maximum value will be equal to energy per unit volume [as (KE)max = (PE)max = E] ie, energy density U.
440
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

1
 U A 2 2 -------------(8)
2

1
So, the energy associated with a volume S x will be  E  U V  A 2 2S x -------------(9)
2

E 1  x 
So, power (rate of transmission of energy) will be P   v2 A 2S ---------(10) as  v
t 2  t 
Now as intensity is defined as average energy transmitted per unit normal area per sec., ie, power per unit area,

E P 1
I   v2 A 2 -------------(11)
S t S 2
In the case of sound waves, the displacement amplitude is related to pressure amplitude through the relation
P0  vA , so

2
1  P  1 P02
I  v2  0   -------------(12)
2  v  2 v

Eqns.(11) and (12) give intensity of sound in terms of displacement and pressure amplitude respectively. For
a given source and medium

I  A 2  or P02  -------------(13)

[Note: In case of a vibrating string, as S will represent mass per unit length m, so from Eqn. (10) the average rate
of transport of energy, ie, power transmitted by a vibrating string will be

1 mass
P m2 A 2 with m  -------------(14)
2 length
The SI unit of intenstiy is W/m2. As human ear responds to sound intensities over a wide range, ie, from
1012 W / m 2 to 1W / m 2 , so instead of specifying intensity of sound in W/m2, we use a logarithmic scale of intensity
called the sound level defined as
I
SL  10 log   -------------(15)
 I0 
where I0 is the threshold of human ear, ie, 10–12 W/m2. The sound level defined in this way is expressed in decibel
(dB). A sound of intensity I0 (ie. I=I0) has a SL = 10 log (I0/I0) = 0 dB while sound at the upper range of human
hearing called threshold of pain has a intensity of 1 W/m2 or
SL = 10 log (1/10–12) = 120 dB.
We also use dB as a relative measure to compare different sound with one another, rather than with reference
intensity; as for two intensities I1 and I2,
I1 I
SL1  SL 2  10 log  10 log 2
I0 I0

441
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

I1
or SL1  SL 2  10log
I 2 -------------(16)
eg. Two sounds whose intensity ratio is 2 differ in SL by 10 log 2 = 3 dB. Here it must be kept in mind that ratio of
two intensities corresponds to difference in their sound level (and not ratio)
[Note: While solving problems related to intensity of sound along with the above, also remember that:
E E
(i) As intensity, I  while Energy density U 
St V

I E S L  L 
So,    v  as V  S L and  v
U St E  t 
Intensity I (energy flux) = U  v = Energy density × velocity-------------(17)
(ii) With increase in distance from the source the total energy or power transmitted remains the same but intensity
decreases.
For any isotropic point source of power P, intensity I at a distance r from it will be
P P
I  [as S  4r 2 ]-------------(18)
S 4r 2
For a given medium and source,
I  A 2 -------------(19)

So, from Eqns. (18) and (19), A 2  1/ r  , ie, for spherical waves I  1 / r 2  and A  1/ r 
2

(iii) In case of electromagnetic waves (eg, light or radio waves),

1 E 1
I  EB  with  c and c 
0 B  0 0
Characteristics of Sound
Sound is characterised by the following three parameters:
(a) Loudness: It is the sensation received by the ear due to intensity of sound. Experimentally Weber-Fechner
established that
L  K log I
i. e., greater the amplitude of vibration, greater will be the intensity I   A 2  and so louder will be the sound
as in a shout and lesser the intensity, feeble will be the sound as in whispering.
The loudness being the sensation, depends upon the sensitivity of the listener’s ear. Therefore, loudness of a
sound of given intensity may be different for different listeners. Similarly two sounds of equal intensity but different
frequency may not appear to be equally loud even to the same listener because the sensitivity of the ear is different
for different frequencies.

442
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

The unit of loudness is phon which is equal to the intensity level in dB of equally loud sound of 1 kHz [for which
the ear is most sensitive],
(b) Pitch: It is the sensation received by the ear due to frequency and is the characteristic which distinguishes a
shrill (or sharp) sound from a grave (or flat) sound. As pitch depends on frequency, higher the frequency higher will
be the pitch and shriller will be the sound. Regarding pitch it is worth noting that:
(1) The buzzing of a bee or humming of a mosquito has high pitch but low loudness while the roar of a lion has
large loudness but low pitch.
(2) Due to more harmonics usually the pitch of female voice is higher than male.
(c) Quality (or Timbre) : It is the sensation received by the ear due to ‘waveform ’. Two sounds of same intensity
and frequency as shown in Fig. will produce different sensation on the ear if their waveforms are different.
Now as waveform depends on overtones present, quality of sound depends on number of overtones, i.e.,
harmonics present and their relative intensities. The dependence of quality on phase is controversial. Regarding
quality it is worth noting that:

(1) We can recognise a person (without seeing) by listening to his sound as it has a definite quality.
(2) If same note is played on different instruments say sitar and veena at same loudness it produces different
sensation on the ear due to their difference in quality.
Standing Waves in a Closed Organ Pipe.
Organ pipes are the musical instruments which are used for producing musical sound by blowing air into the
pipe. Longitudinal stationary waves are formed on account of superimposition of incident and reflected longitudinal
waves.
2vt 2x
Equation of standing wave y  2a cos sin
 
4L
General formula for wavelength    2n  1

4L v
(1) First normal mode of vibration : n  1  1   4L 1 
 2  1 4L
This is called fundamental frequency. The note so produced is called fundamental note or first harmonic.

443
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

v 3v
(2) Second normal mode of vibration : (n = 2)  2    4L  31
2

This is called third harmonic or first overtone.

5v
(3) Third normal mode of vibration : (n = 3) 3   51
4L
This is called fifth harmonic or second overtone.
Standing Waves in Open Organ Pipes
General formula for wavelength
2L
 where n = 1, 2, 3 ............
n

v v
(1) First normal mode of vibration : n =1, 1  2L  1    2L
1

This is called fundamental frequency and the note so produced is called fundamental note or first harmonic.
v v  v 
(2) Second normal mode of vibration (n = 2)  2    2   21   2  21
2 L  2L 
This is called second harmonic or first overtone.
v 3v
(3) Third normal mode of vibration (n = 3)  3    2L ,  3  31
3

This is called third harmonic or second overtone.

In organ pipe an antinode is not formed exactly at the open end rather it is formed a little distance away from the
open end outside it. The distance of anitnode from the open end of the pipe is konwn as end correction.
444
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

Comparative study of stretched strings, open organ pipe and closed organ pipe.
[Link]. Parameter Stretched Open organ pipe Closed organ pipe
string
1 Fundamental frequency or v v v
1st harmonic 1  1  1 
2l 2l 4l
2 Frequency of 2nd harmonic  2  21  2  21 Missing
3 Frequency of 3rd harmonic  3  31  3  31  3  31
4 Frequency ratio of 2 : 3 : 4 …… 2 : 3 : 4 ….. 3 : 5 : 7 …..
overtones
5 Frequency ratio of 1 : 2 : 3 : 4 …. 1 : 2 : 3 : 4 …. 1 : 3 : 5 : 7 ….
harmonics
6 Nature of waves Transverse Longitudinal Longitudinal
stationary stationary stationary
BEATS
When two sound waves of slightly different frequencies, travelling in a medium along the same direction,
superimpose on each other, the intensity of the resultant sound at a particular position rises and falls regularly with
time. This phenomenon of regular variation in the intensity of sound with time at a particular position, when
two sound waves of nearly equal frequencies superimpose on each other is called beats.
Beat period : The time interval between two successive maxima or minima of sound is called the beat period.
Beat frequency : The number of beats produced per second is called beat frequency.
Persistence of hearing : The impression of sound heard by our ears persist in our mind for 1/10th of a
second. If another sound is heard before 1/10 second is over, the impression of the two sound mix up and our
mind cannot distinguish between the two.
So for the formation of distinct beats, frequencies of two sources of sound should be nearly equal (difference of
frequencies should be less than 10)
FORMATION OF BEATS
(a) Graphical method
Suppose we have two tuning forks A and B. Fig. below shows superimposition of the two waves from forks A
and B and in Fig.(d), we have represented the resultant wave according to the principle of superposition.
t=0 t = T/4 t = T/2 t = 3T/4 t=T

(a)

(c)

P T (d)
Q R S

445
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Determination of Unknown Frequency.

Let v2 is the unknown frequency of tuning fork B, and this tuning fork B produce x beats per second with
another tuning fork A of known frequency v1.
As number of beat/sec is equal to the difference in frequencies of two sources, therefore v2 = v1  x
The positive/negative sign of x can be decided in the following two ways :
By loading By filing
If B is loaded with wax so its frequency If B is filed, its frequency increases
decreases
If number of beats decreases v2 = v1 + x If number of beats decreases v2 = v1 – x
If number of beats increases v2 = v1 – x If number of beats increases v2 = v1 + x
If number of beats remains unchanged v2 = v1 + x If number of beats remains unchanged v2 = v1 – x
If number of beats becomes zero v2 = v1 + x If number of beats becomes zero v2 = v1 – x
If A is loaded with wax its frequency decreases If A is filed, its frequency increases
If number of beats decreases v2 = v1 – x If number of betas decreases v2 = v1 + x
If number of beats increases v2 = v1 + x If number of beats increases v2 = v1 – x
If number of beats remains unchanged v2 = v1– x If number of beats remains unchanged v2 = v1 + x
If number of beats becomes zero v2 = v1 – x If number of beats becomes zero v2 = v1 + x

Example 2 : If two sound waves, y1  0.3sin 596  t  x / 330 and y 2  0.5sin 604  t  x / 330 are
superimposed, what will be the (a) frequency of resultant wave, (b) frequency at which the amplitude of resultant
waves varies, (c) frequency at which beats are produced? Find also the ratio of maximum and minimum intensities
of beats.
Solution : Comparing the given wave equation with
y  A sin  t  kx   A sin   t   x / v   [as k /   1 / v]
We find that here
A1  0.3 and 1  2f1  596 , i.e., f1  298 Hz
and A 2  0.5 and 2  2f 2  604 , i.e., f 2  302 Hz
So, (a) The frequency of the resultant wave
f1  f 2  298  302 
f av    300Hz
2 2
f1 ~ f 2  298 ~ 302 
(b) The frequency at which amplitude of resultant wave varies: f A    2Hz
2 2
(c) The frequency at which beats are produced
f b  2f A  f1 ~ f 2  4Hz
(d) The ratio of maximum to minimum intensities of beat

I max  A1  A 2   0.3  0.5  64  16

2 2

 
Imin  A1 ~ A 2  2
 0.3 ~ 0.5 4
2

446
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

DOPPLER EFFECT
The phenomenon of the apparent change in the frequency of sound produced by a source as heard by a
listener whenever there is relative motion between the source and the listener is called Doppler effect.
General expression for apparent frequency
Consider a source S producing sound of frequency  . Let V be the velocity of sound in the medium and  the
wave-length of sound when the source and the listener are at rest. Then the frequency of sound heard by the listener is

 V   V
 
+ve
V
S L
VS VL

Let the source and the listener be moving with velocities Vs and Vl in the direction of propagation of sound from
source to listener. The direction S to L is taken positive.
Sign convention : All velocities along the direction S to L are taken as positive and all velocities along the direction L
to S are taken as negative.

The relative velocity of sound wave with respect to the source  V  Vs

V  Vs
Apparent wavelength of sound 1 

Since the listener is moving with a velocity Vl , the relative velocity of sound with respect to the listener
V1=V-Vl
Apparent frequency of sound as heard by the listener is given by,
Relative velocity of sound [Link] listener V1
ν1   1
Apparent wavelength 

 V  Vl 
1      -----------(20)
 V  Vs 
Note:
Velocities in the direction in which the sound travels in order to reach the listener are taken positive; while
those in the opposite direction are taken negative.
Case (1) Listener at rest and source in motion
(a) When the source moves towards the stationary listener, Vs is positive and Vl= 0
 
1   V   
 V  Vs

(b) When the source moves away from the stationary listener, Vs is negative and Vl= 0
 
1   V   
 V  Vs 

447
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Case (2) Listener in motion and source at rest

(a) When the listener moves towards the stationary source, Vl is negative and Vs = 0

 V  Vl 
1   
 V 
(b) When the listener moves away from the stationary source, Vl is positive and Vs = 0

 V  Vl 
1   
 V 
Case(3) When both the source and the listener are in motion
(a) When the source and the listener move towards each other, Vs is positive and Vl is negative

 V  Vl 
1   
 V  Vs 
(b) When the source and the listener move away from each other. Vs is negative and Vl is positive

 V  Vl 
1   
 V  Vs 
(c) When the source moves away from the listener and the listener moves towards the source, Vs is
negative and Vl is negative

 V  Vl 
1   
 V  Vs 

(d) When the listener moves away from the source and the source moves towards the lis­tener, Vl is
positive and vs is positive

 V  Vl 
1   
 V  Vs 
Effect of motion of medium
When a wind is blowing with a velocity W in the direction of propagation of sound, the resultant velocity of
sound will be (V + W).

 V  W  Vl 
 1      ----------(21)
 V  W  Vs 
If the wind is blowing in a direction opposite the direction of propagation of sound, the resultant velocity of sound
will be ( V — W).
Limitation of Doppler effect
Doppler effect is applicable as long as the relative velocity between the source and the listener is less than the
velocity of sound. The principle is not applicable if the source moves towards the listener with supersonic velocity.

448
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

Applications of Doppler effect

1 To estimate the speed of a submarine (Sonar)
Ultrasonic waves are transmitted from the ship and their reflected waves obtained by reflection from the submarine
are observed. By finding the difference in frequency of the transmitted wave and the reflected wave, we
can calculate the velocity of the submarine.
2 To estimate the speed of aeroplane, automobile etc.
Short radio waves are emitted from an observation centre. These waves are reflected from the plane (or
automobile) and received by the centre. By measuring the change in frequency of the transmitted and the
reflected waves, the velocity and the direction of motion of the plane (or the automobile) can be calculated.
3 To track artificial satellites
Doppler effect provides a convenient method for tracking an earth satellite. The earth satellite emits radio
signals of constant frequency  . The apparent frequency 1 of the signal as received by the tracking station on
the earth is noted. From this the velocity of the earth satellite can be obtained.
4 To estimate the velocity of rotation of the sun
By the study of Doppler shift from the light received from the western and eastern edges of the sun, it has been
found that the shift is due to a velocity of 2 kms-1. Since no such shift is observed from light received from north
and south edges, it is concluded that sun rotates about north-south axis with a velocity 2 kms-1.
Important points
(i) If the velocity of source and listener is equal to or greater than the sound velocity then Doppler effect is not seen.
(ii) Doppler effect gives information regarding the change in frequency only. It does not say about the intensity of
sound.
Some Typical Features of Doppler’s Effect in Sound
(1) When a source is moving in a direction making an angle  w.r.t the listener: The apparent frequency
heard by the listener L at rest

v
When source is at point A is   v  v cos  -----------(22)
s

As source moves along AB, value of  increases, cos  decreases,  goes on decreasing.
At point C,   90o , cos   cos 90o  0,   
v
At point B, the apparent frequency of sound becomes   v  v cos  ----------(23)
s

(2) When a source of sound approaches a high wall or a hill with a constant velocity vs, the reflected sound
propagates in a direction opposite to that of direct sound. We can assume that the source and observer are
approaching each other with same velocity ie, vs = vL.
 v  vL 
      ---------(24)
 v  v s 

449
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

(3) When source is revovlving in a circle and listener L is on one side

v v
vs  r so  max  v  v and  min  v  v
s s
(4) When listener L is moving in a circle and the source is on one side

v L  r so  max 
 v  vL   and  min 
 v  vL  
v v
(5) There will be no change in frequency of sound heard, if the source is situated at the centre of the circle along
which listener is moving or the listener is at the centre and the source is moving round the circle with constant
speed.

(6) Conditions for no Doppler effect: (i) When source (S) and listener (L) both are at rest.
(ii) When medium alone is moving.
(iii)When S and L move in such a way that distance between S and L remains constant.
(iv)When source S and listener L, are moving in mutually perpendicular directions.
Example 3 : A source S emitting sound of 300 Hz is fixed on block A which is attached to the free end of a spring
SA as shown in the figure. The detector D fixed on block B attached to free end of spring SB detects this sound. The
blocks A and B are simultaneously displaced towards each other through a distance of 1.0 m and then left to vibrate.
Find the maximum and minimum frequency of sound detected by D if the vibrational frequency of each block is 2 Hz.

Solution : Apparent frequency is maximum when both source and detector approach each other
v  vD
v max  v0 --------(i)
v  vS
Frequency is minimum when source and detector both recede from each other.
v  vD
v min  v 0 --------(ii)
v  vS
where v = velocity of sound, vD = velocity of detector, vS = velocity of source; v0 = frequency of source.
Here vS = vD = A
Maximum velocity of A and B  A  4 m / s  12.56 m / s
Now substituting numerical values in Eqns. (i) and (ii)
 340  12.56 
v max    300  323 Hz
 340  12.56 

 340  12.56 
v min     300  278.6 Hz
 340  12.56 

450
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

QUESTIONS
LEVEL - I
1. Acceleration ‘a’ versus time ‘t’ graph of a body in SHM is given by a curve shown below. T is the time period.
Then corresponding graph between kinetic energy KE and time t is correctly represented by

2. Four massless springs whose force constants are 2k, 2k, k and 2k respectively are attached to a mass M kept
on a frictionless plane (as shown in figure). If the mass M is displaced in the horizontal direction, then the
frequency of the system is

1 k 1 4k 1 k 1 7k
1) 2) 3) 4)
2 4M 2 M 2 7M 2 M
3. The oscillations represented by curve 1 in the graph are expressed by equation x  Asin t . The equation for
the oscillations represented by curve 2 is expressed as

   
1) x  2A sin  t   2) x  2A sin  t  
 2  2

 
3) x  2A sin  t   4) None of these
 2
4. An object suspended from a spring exhibits oscillations of period T. Now the spring is cut in two halves and the
same object is suspended with two halves as shown in figure. The new time period of oscillation will become

T T T
1) 2) 2T 3) 4)
2 2 2 2
451
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

5. The potential energy of a harmonic oscillator of mass 2 kg in its mean position is 5 J. If its total energy is 9 J and
its amplitude is 0.01 m, its time period will be
      
1) s 2)   s 3)   s 4)   s
100  50   20   10 
6. A ball of mass 2 kg hanging from a spring oscillates with a time period 2 seconds. Ball is removed when it is
in equilibrium position, then spring shortens by
1) 10 m 2) 5 m 3) 20 m 4) 2 m
7. Two simple harmonic motions y1  A sin t and y 2  A cos t are superimposed on a particle of mass m.
The total mechanical energy of the particle is
1 1
1) m2 A 2 2) m2 A 2 3) m A
2 2
4) zero
2 4
8. Maximum velocity in SHM is vm. The average velocity during motion from one extreme point to the other
extreme point will be
 2 4 
1) vm 2) v m 3) v m 4) v m
2   4
–27
9. A hydrogen atom has mass 1.68 × 10 kg. When attached to a certain massive molecule it oscillates with a
frequency 1014 Hz and with an amplitude 10–9 cm. Find the force acting on the hydrogen atom.
1) 2.21 × 10–9 N 2) 3.31 × 10–9 N 3) 4.42 × 10–9 N 4) 6.63 × 10–9 N
10. The superposition of two SHMs along the same direction results in the oscillation of a point according to the
law x = x0 cos (2.1 t) cos 50 t. Find the angular frequencies of the constituent oscillations and period with which
they beat.
1) 52.1 s 1 , 47.9s 1 , 0.2s 2) 50s 1 , 2.1s 1 , 0.22 s
3) 52.1 s 1 , 47.9 s 1 , 1.5 s 4) none
11. How long after the beginning of motion is the displacement of a harmonically oscillating point equal to one half
its amplitude, if the period is 24 sec and initial phase is zero?
1) 12 sec 2) 2 sec 3) 4 sec 4) 6 sec
12. The KE and PE of a particle executing SHM with amplitude A will be equal when its displacement is:
 A A
1) 2) 3) 4) A 2 / 3
6 2 2
13. The bob of a simple pendulum executes simple harmonic motion in water with a period t, while the period of
oscillation of the bob is t0 in air. Neglect frictional force of water and given that the density of the bob is
4 3
  × 1000 kg/m , what relationship is true between t and t0?
3
t0
1) t = t0 2) t  3) t  2t 0 4) t  4t 0
2
14. A particle at the end of a spring executes simple harmonic motion with a period t1, while the corresponding
period for another spring is t2. If the period of oscillation with the two springs in series is T, then :
1) T = t1 + t2 2) T 2  t12  t 22 3) T 1  t11  t 21 4) T 2  t12  t 22
452
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

15. The equation of a wave is y  2sin   0.5x  200t  where x and y are expressed in cm and t in sec. The wave
velocity is
1) 400 cm/sec 2) 300 cm/sec 3) 200 cm/sec 4) 100 cm/sec

 
16. Equation of a progressive wave is given by y  0.2 cos   0.04t  0.02x   . The distance is expressed in
 6
cm and time in sec. The minimum distance between two particles separated by phase difference  / 2 radian is
1) 25 cm 2) 12.5 cm 3) 8 cm 4) 4 cm
17. The displacement of a particle is given by y  5 104 sin 100t  50x  where x is in metre and t in seconds.
Find out the velocity of the wave.
1) 2 m/s 2) 5000 m/s 3) 0.5 m/s 4) 300 m/s

x 
18. A plane wave is described by the equation y  3cos   10t   . The maximum velocity of the particles of
4 2
the medium due to this wave is
3 3
1) m/s 2) 30 m/s 3) m/s 4) 40 m/s
2 4
19. A string is stretched by a weight of 10 kg. (Take g = 10 ms–2). The mass of one metre of string is 10 g. The
velocity of transverse wave in the string is
1) 10 km s–1 2) 1 km s–1 3) 100 ms–1 4) 10 ms–1
20. In case of two strings vibrating transversally, the lengths are as 1 : 2, the diameters are as 2 : 1and the densities
are as 4 : 1. When stretched by same load, the ratio of the two frequencies will be
1) 1 : 16 2) 1 : 4 3) 1 : 2 4) 1: 2
21. If you set up the ninth harmonic on a string fixed at both ends, its frequency compared to the seventh harmonic
will be
1) Equal 2) Half 3) Lower than half 4) Higher than one
22. In stationary waves, distance between a node and its nearest antinode is 20 cm. The phase difference between
two particles having a separation of 60 cm will be
1) zero rad 2)  / 2 rad 3)  rad 4) 3 / 2 rad
23. If the ratio of amplitudes of two waves is 4 : 3, then the ratio of maximum and minimum intensities during
interference will be
1) 16 : 18 2) 49 : 1 3) 18 : 16 4) 1 : 49
24. Two periodic waves meet at the same point in the same direction. Their individual intensities are I1 and I2. The
sum of maximum intensity and minimum intensity is

1) I12  I22 2)  I1  I2  / 2 3) 2  I1  I 2  4)  I1  I 2 
25. A loaded sonometer wire is in unison with a fork of frequency 200 Hz. The number of beats produced per
second when the tension is increased by 1% is
1) 4 2) 3 3) 2 4) 1

453
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

26. A stretched string is vibrating according to equation

x
y  5sin cos 40t
3
where y and x are in cm and t is in sec. The distance between two consecutive nodes on the string is
1) 5 cm 2) 4 cm 3) 3 cm 4) 1 cm
27. If a wave returns after reflection from a wall, the distance of the point of maximum reflection of particle from the
wall will be (wave velocity = 360 m/s, frequency = 120 Hz)
1) 25 cm 2) 50 cm 3) 75 cm 4) 100 cm
28. To increase the frequency from 100 Hz to 400 Hz, the tension in the string has to be changed by
1) 4 times 2) 16 times 3) 20 times 4) None of these
29. Two wires are in unison. If the tension in one of the wires is increased by 2%, 5 beats are produced per second.
The initial frequency of each wire is
1) 200 Hz 2) 400 Hz 3) 500 Hz 4) 1000 Hz

30. In a plane progressive wave given by equation y  25cos  2t  x  , the amplitude and frequency are
respectively
1) 25 and 100 2) 25 and 1 3) 25 and 2 4) 50 and 2
31. Two strings A and B, made of same material, are stretched by same tension. The radius of string A is double of
the radius of B. A transverse wave travels on A with speed vA and on B with speed vB. The ratio vA/vB is
1 1
1) 2) 2 3) 4) 4
2 4
32. When a guitar string is sounded with a 440 Hz tuning fork, a beat frequency of 5 Hz is heard. If the experiment
is repeated with a tuning fork of 437 Hz, the beat frequency is 8 Hz. The string frequency (Hz) is
1) 445 2) 435 3) 429 4) 448
33. A transverse sinusoidal wave moves along a string in the positive x-direction at a speed of 10 cm/s. The
wavelength of the wave is 0.5 m and its amplitude is 10 cm. At a particular time t, the snap-shot of the wave is
shown in figure. The velocity of point P when its displacement is 5 cm is

3 3 3 3
1) ĵm / s 2)  ĵm / s 3) î m / s 4)  î m / s
50 50 50 50
34. A vibrating string of certain length l under a tension T resonates with a mode corresponding to the first overtone
(third harmonic) of an air column of length 75 cm inside a tube closed at one end. The string also generates 4
beats per second when excited along with a tuning fork of frequency n. Now when the tension of the string is
slightly increased the number of beats reduces to 2 per second. Assuming the velocity of sound in air to be 340
m/s, the frequency n of the tuning fork in Hz is
1) 344 2) 336 3) 117.3 4) 109.3
454
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

35. If the amplitude of two sound waves are a1 and a2 and the waves are in opposite phases, the resultant amplitude
will be
1)  a1  a 2  2)  a1  a 2  3) a12  a 22 4) a12  a 22
36. Two tuning forks when sounded together produce 4 beats/sec. The frequency of one fork is 256 Hz. The
number of beats heard increases when the fork of frequency 256 Hz is loaded with wax. The frequency of the
other fork is
1) 260 Hz 2) 252 Hz 3) 520 Hz 4) 504 Hz
37. An observer approaches a stationary source such that the pitch is halved. If velocity of sound is denoted by v,
velocity of observer will be
v v
1) 2v 2) v 3) 4)
2 4
38. An observer moves towards a stationary source of sound of frequency n. The apparent frequency heard by him
is 2 n. If the velocity of sound in air is 332 m/s, then the velocity of observer is
1) 166 m/s 2) 664 m/s 3) 332 m/s 4) 1328 m/s
39. A source of sound is travelling towards a stationary observer. The frequency of sound heard by the observer is
three times the original frequency. The velocity of sound is v. The speed of source will be
3v 2v
1) v 2) 3v 3) 4)
2 3
40. Beats are produced with the help of the sound waves of amplitudes 3 and 5 units. The ratio of maximum to
minimum intensities in the beats is
1) 4 : 1 2) 5 : 3 3) 16 : 1 4) 2 : 1
41. A closed pipe and an open pipe have their first overtones identical in frequency. Their lengths are in the ratio
1) 3 : 4 2) 1 : 2 3) 2 : 3 4) 4 : 5
42. If the density of oxygen is 16 times that of hydrogen, what will be the ratio of velocities of sound waves in them?
1) 4 : 1 2) 1 : 4 3) 16 : 1 4) 1 : 16
43. If for 1 C rise in temperature, speed of sound in air increase by 0.61 m/s then for 1oF rise in temperature, the
o

speed increases by
1) 0.61 m/s 2) 1.22 m/s 3) 0.34 m/s 4) 0.17 m/s
44. An open and a closed organ pipe have the same length. The ratio of frequencies, in the pth mode of vibration
of the pipes is
2p
1) unity 2) p (2p – 1) 3) 2p (2p + 1) 4)  2p  1
45. A table is rotating about its axis at the rate of 5 rotations per second. A source of sound of frequency 1000 Hz
is fixed at a distance of 0.7 m from its axis. If the velocity of sound is 352 m/s, the difference of apparent
frequencies heard by an observer, standing in front of the table will be
1) 125 Hz 2) 250 Hz 3) 375 Hz 4) 500 Hz
46. S1 and S2 are two sound sources of frequencies 320 Hz and 324 Hz respectively placed at a large distance
apart. The velocity, with which an observer should walk along S1 S2, so that he may hear no beats, will be
nearly
1) 1 m/s 2) 2 m/s 3) 3 m/s 4) 4 m/s
455
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

47. When a closed pipe is suddenly opened, then the second overtone of closed pipe and first overtone of open
pipe differ by 100 Hz. The fundamental frequency of closed pipe will be
1) 200 Hz 2) 100 Hz 3) 300 Hz 4) 400 Hz
48. If the pressure amplitude of a sound wave is doubled, the percentage increase in intensity will be
1) 400% 2) 300% 3) 600% 4) 800%
49. If the sound level in a room is increased from 50 dB to 60 dB, by what factor level is the pressure amplitude
increased?
1) 10 2) 10 3) 2 4) 5
LEVEL - II
1. When a particle oscillates simple harmonically, its kinetic energy varies periodically. If frequency of the particle
is f, the frequency of the kinetic energy is:

f
1) 2) f 3) 2f 4) 4f
2
2. A simple pendulum has time period T. The bob is given negative charge and surface below it is given positive
charge. The new time period will be:
1) less than T 2) greater than T 3) equal to T 4) infinite
3. A uniform circular disc of mass 12 kg is held by two identical springs as shown in the figure. When the disc is
pressed down slightly and released, it executes SHM with a time period of 2 sec. The force constant of each
spring is

1) 236 Nm 1 2) 118.3 Nm 1 3) 59.15 Nm 1 4) None of the above

4. If a pendulum, which gives correct time beats seconds on ground at a certain place, is moved to the top of a
tower 320 m high, the loss of time of the pendulum clock in one day is:
1) 2.16 sec 2) 1.08 sec 3) 0.54 sec 4) 4.32 sec
5. A simple pendulum oscillates in a vertical plane. When it passes through the mean position, the tension in the
string is 3 times the weight of the pendulum bob. What is the maximum displacement of the string of the
pendulum with respect to the vertical?
1) 30o 2) 45o 3) 60o 4) 90o
6. Frequency of a particle executing SHM is 10 Hz. The particle is suspended from a vertical spring. At the
highest point of its oscillation the spring is unstretched. Maximum speed of the particle is  g  10m / s 2 

1 1
1) 2 m / s 2)  m / s 3) m/s 4) m/s
 2
456
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

7. A mass M is suspended from a spring of negligible mass. The spring is pulled a little and then released, so that
5T
the mass executes SHM of time period T. If the mass is increased by m, the time period becomes . The
3
m
ratio of is
M
5 3 16 25
1) 2) 3) 4)
3 5 9 9
8. When a spring is extended by 2 cm, the energy stored is 100 J. When extended by further 2 cm, the energy
increases by:
1) 400 J 2) 300 J 3) 200 J 4) 100 J
9. The velocity-time graph of a particle executing SHM is shown. What is the maximum acceleration of the
particle (in SI unit)?

1) 5 2) 25 3) 10 4) 20

10. A particle oscillates simple harmonically with a period of 8 s. One second after crossing the extreme position its
speed becomes 2 ms–1. The amplitude of oscillation is

4 8 4 2 8 2
1) m 2) m 3) m 4) m
   
 
11. The position of a particle executing SHM is given by x  A sin  t   A sin  t   . The maximum speed
 3
of the particle is
A A 3
1) A 2) 3) A 3 4)
2 2
12. A particle of mass 0.02 kg moves simple harmonically with amplitude 0.12 m and frequency of oscillation 1 Hz.
At t = 0, the particle is at x = 0.24 m (the mean position) then the acceleration of the particle at t = 0.5 s is
1) zero 2) maximum
1
3) 2 time of the maximum 4) Half of the maximum
13. A body of mass 200 g executing SHM has a velocity of 3 cm s–1 when its displacement is 4 cm and a velocity
of 4 cm s–1 when its displacement is 3 cm. The total energy of the oscillator is
1) 2.5 × 10–4 J 2) 2.5 × 10–2 J 3) 2.5 J 4) 250 J
14. The time taken by a particle executing simple harmonic motion of time period T to move from the mean position
to half the maximum displacement is
T T T T
1) 2) 3) 4)
2 4 8 12

457
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

15. A simple pendulum attached to the ceiling of a stationary lift has a time period T. The distance y covered by the
lift moving upwards varies with time t as y = t2 where y is in metre and t in second. If g = 10 ms–2, the time
period of the pendulum will be
4 5 5 6
1) T 2) T 3) T 4) T
5 6 4 5
16. The mass M shown in fig. oscillates in simple harmonic motion with amplitude A. The amplitude of the point P is

k 1A k 2A k1A k 2A
1) k 2) k 3) k  k 4) k  k
2 1 1 2 1 2

17. A clock pendulum made of invar has a period of 0.5 s at 20o. If the clock is used in a climate where the
temperature averages 30oC, how much time does the clock lose in each oscillation?
(for invar   9 107 / o C and g = constant)
1) 2.25 × 10–6 s 2) 2.5 × 10–7 s 3) 5 × 10–7 s 4) 1.125 × 10–6 g
18. The length of the wire shown in figure between the pulleys is 1.5 m and its mass is 12.0 g. The frequency of
vibration with which the wire vibrates in two loops leaving the middle point of the wire between the pulleys at
rest is

1) 10 Hz 2) 30 Hz 3) 40 Hz 4) 70 Hz
19. Two vibrating strings of the same material but lengths L and 2L have radii 2r and r respectively. They are
stretched under the same tension. Both the strings vibrate in their fundamental modes, the one of length L with
frequency 1 and the other with frequency  2 . The ratio 1 /  2 is given by
1) 2 2) 4 3) 8 4) 1
20. Figure shows a string stretched by a block going over a pulley. The string vibrates in its tenth harmonic in unison
with a particular tuning fork. When a beaker containing water is brought under the block so that the block is
completely dipped into the beaker, the string vibrates in its eleventh harmonic. The density of the material of the
block is

1) 1.0  103 kgm 3 2) 3.0  103 kgm 3 3) 5.0  103 kgm 3 4) 5.8  103 kgm 3

458
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

21. A heavy string is tied at one end to a movable support and to a light thread at the other end as shown in figure

The thread goes over a fixed pulley and supports a weight to produce a tension. The lowest freqeuncy with
which the heavy string resonates is 120 Hz. If the movable support is pushed to the right by 10 cm so that the
joint is placed on the pulley, then the minimum frequency at which the heavy string can resonate is

1) 120 Hz 2) 60 Hz 3) 240 Hz 4) 480 Hz

22. A transverse wave is travelling along a string from left to right. The figure given below represents the shape of
the string at a given instant. At this instant,

1) points D, E, F have upwards positive velocity

2) points, A, B and H have downwards negative velocity
3) points C and G have zero velocity
4) all of these
23. A stone is hung in air from a wire which is stretched over a sonometer. The bridges of the sonometer are L cm
apart when the wire is in unison with a tuning fork of frequency  . When the stone is compeltely immersed in
water; the length between the bridges is l cm for re-establishing unison, the specific gravity of the material of the
stone is

L2 L2  l 2 L2 L2  l 2
1) 2) 3) 4)
L2  l 2 L2 L2  l 2 L2
24. Two string with masses per unit length of 25 g cm–1 and 9 gcm–1 are joined together in series. The reflection
coefficient for the vibration waves is

9 3 1 9
1) 2) 3) 4)
25 5 16 16
25. A string of length 0.4 m and mass 10–2 kg is tightly clamped at its end. The tension in the string is 1.6 N.
Identical wave pulses are produced at one end at equal intervals of time t . The minimum value of t which
allows constructive interference between successive pulses is
1) 0.05 s 2) 0.1 s 3) 0.2 s 4) 0.4 s
459
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

26. A wave represented by the equation y  a cos  kx  t  is superposed with another wave to form as stationary
wave such that the point x = 0 is a node. The equation for the other wave is
1) a sin  kx  t  2) a cos  kx  t 

3) a cos  kx  t  4) a sin  kx  t 

 x
27. Equation of a plane progressive wave is given by y  0.6sin 2  t   . On reflection from a denser medium
 2
its amplitude becomes 2/3 of the amplitude of the incident wave. The equation of the reflected wave is

 x  x
1) y  0.6sin 2  t   2) y  0.4sin 2  t  
 2  2

 x  x
3) y  0.4sin 2  t   4) y  0.4 sin 2  t  
 2  2
28. For the wave shown in figure, the equation for the wave, travelling along +x axis with velocity 350 ms–1 when
its position at t = 0 is as shown

1) 0.05 sin (78.5 x – 27500 t) 2) 0.05 sin (75.8 x – 27000 t)

3) 1 sin (78.5 x – 27500 t) 4) 0.05 sin (57.8 x + 25700 t)
29. Length of a sonometer wire is 1.21 m. The three segments for fundamental frequencies in the ratio 1 : 2 : 3

1) 0.66 m, 0.33 m, 0.22 m 2) 0.22 m, 0.33 m, 0.66 m

3) 0.77 m, 0.33 m, 0.11 m 4) 0.11 m, 0.33 m, 0.77 m
30. String of a musical instrument is 90 cm long and has a fundamental frequency of 124 Hz. The distance x from
one end of the string where it should be pressed to produce a fundamental frequency of 186 Hz.

1) 60 cm 2) 50 cm 3) 45 cm 4) 75 cm
31. A string vibrates with one loop between the fixed points A and B. The ratio of maximum velocities of P and Q is

1) 1 : 1 2) 1 : 2 3) 1 : 2 4) 1 : 3

460
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

32. Two waves 1 and 2 are shown at a time t = t1, say in two identical strings having same tensions. Then, the ratio
of (1 and 2):

1) amplitudes is 1 : 2 2) frequencies is 2 : 1 3) intensities is 1 : 1 4) phases is 1 : 1

33. The phase difference between two corks A and B on the water wave is:

1) zero 2) 3 3) 6 4) 7
34. A source of sound S and a detector D are placed at some distance from one another. A big cardboard is
placed near the detector and perpendicular to the line SD as shown in figure. It is gradually moved away and it
is found that the intensity changes from a maximum to a minimum as the board is moved through a distance of
20 cm. The frequency of the sound emitted will be
(Velocity of sound in air is 336 m/s.)

1) 200 Hz 2) 300 Hz 3) 420 Hz 4) 500 Hz

35. In a resonance tube experiment to determine the speed of sound in air, a pipe of diameter 5 cm is used. The air
column in pipe resonates with a tuning fork of frequency 480 Hz, when minimum length of air column in 16 cm.
The speed of sound in air at room temperature is
1) 280 m/s 2) 300 m/s 3) 336 m/s 4) 500 m/s
36. A sample of oxygen at NTP has volume V and a sample of hydrogen at NTP has volume 4 V. Both the gases
are mixed and the mixture is maintained at NTP. If the speed of sound in hydrogen at NTP is 1270 m/s, then
that in the mixture will be
1) 317 m/s 2) 635 m/s 3) 830 m/s 4) 950 m/s
37. A person speaking normally produces a sound intensity of 40 dB at a distance of 1 m. If the threshold intensity
for reasonable audibility is 20 dB, the maximum distance at which he can be heard clearly is
1) 4 m 2) 5 m 3) 10 m 4) 20 m
38. An engine approaches a hill with a constant speed. When it is at a distance of 0.9 km it blows a whistle, whose
echo is heard by the driver after 5 s. If the speed of sound in air is 330 m/s, the speed of engine is
1) 10 m/s 2) 20 m/s 3) 30 m/s 4) 40 m/s
39. A man stands between two parallel cliffs (not in middle). When he claps his hands, he hears two echoes one
after 1 second and the other after 2 second. If the velocity of sound in air is 330 ms–1, the width of the valley is
1) 330 m 2) 495 m 3) 660 m 4) 990 m

461
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

40. In a hall, a person receives direct sound waves from a source 120 m away. He also receives waves from the
same source which reach him after being reflected from the 25 m high ceiling at a point halfway between them.
The two waves interfere constructively for wavelengths (in metres)
10 10 20 20
1) 10, m 2) 20, m 3) 30, 20, 10, .... 4) 35, 25, 15, .....
2 3 3 5
41. Two vibrating tuning forks produce progressive waves given by y1  4sin 500t and y 2  2sin 506t . Number
of beats produced per minute is
1) 360 2) 180 3) 3 4) 60
42. Two wires are fixed in a sonometer. Their tensions are in the ratio 8 : 1. The lengths are in the ratio 36:35. The
diameters are in the ratio 4 : 1. Densities of the materials are in the ratio 1 : 2. If the lower frequency in the setting
is 360 Hz, the beat frequency when the two wires are sounded together is
1) 5 2) 8 3) 6 4) 10
43. For a certain organ pipe, three successive resonance frequencies are observed at 425, 595 and 765 Hz. The
speed of sound in air is 340 m/s. The pipe is
1) closed pipe of length 1 m 2) closed pipe of length 2 m
3) open pipe of length 1 m 4) open pipe of length 2 m
44. A column of air at 51oC and a tuning fork produce 4 beats/s when sounded together. As the temperature of the
air column is decreased, the number of beat tends to decrease and when the temperature is 16oC, the two
produce 1 beat/s. The frequency of the fork is
i) 50 Hz ii) 86 Hz iii) 100 Hz iv) 150 Hz
1) (i), (iv) 2) (i), (ii) 3) (iii), (iv) 4) (ii), (iii)
45. An air column, closed at one end and open at the other end, resonates with tuning fork of frequency f when its
length is 45 cm, 99 cm and at two other length in between these values. The wavelength of sound in the air
column is
1) 180 cm 2) 108 cm 3) 54 cm 4) 36 cm
46. A tuning fork of frequency 340 Hz is vibrated just above a cylindrical tube of length 120 cm. Water is slowly
poured in the tube. If the speed of sound in air is 340 m/s, then the minimum height of water required for
resonance is
1) 25 cm 2) 45 cm 3) 75 cm 4) 95 cm
v
47. A source and a listener are both moving towards each other with speed , where v is the speed of sound. If
10
the frequency of the note emitted by the source is f, the frequency heard by the listener would be nearly
1) 1.11 f 2) 1.22 f 3) 1.27 f 4) f
48. A whistle revolves in a circle with an angular speed of 20 rad/s using a string of length 50 cm. If the frequency
of sound from the whistle is 385 Hz, then what is the minimum frequency heard by an observer, which is far
away from the centre in the same plane? (v = 340 m/s)
1) 333 Hz 2) 374 Hz 3) 385 Hz 4) 394 Hz

462
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

KEY WITH HINTS

LEVEL - I
1. 1 Acceleration is 2 x . If is maximum when x = Amplitude. So at extreme position, x is maximum and
this happens when t = 0, so at t = 0 acceleration is maximum.
At t = 0, | a | = maximum. Therefore the particle is at extreme position, where
v=0 or KE = 0
Further, in one time period (of x, v, or a), kinetic energy oscillates two times. Therefore the correct
graph is (A)

k eq 
 2k  2k   2k  k  4k 1 k eq
f 
1 4k
2. 2 ;
2k  2k 2 M 2 M
3. 1 Time period of both simple harmonic motions are same. Therefore  is same.
   
At t = 0, x = – 2 A  x  2A cos  t   2A sin   t   2A sin  t  
2   2
1
4. 3 Force constant of a spring  length of spring

ie, the force constant of two halves will become 2 k each.

(k = force constant of complete spring)  k eff  2k  2k  4k
1 T
As, T  ie, T 
k 2

1 8 8
5. 1 kA 2   9  5   4J  k   8  104 N / m
 0.01
2 2
2 A

m 2 
T  2  2  s
k 8 10 4
100

42 m  4   2 
2
m  k  2 N/m
6. 1 T  2
 2 
2
k T2

mg 2  g
Now mg = k x0   x0 
= g metre = 10 m
k 2
7. 2 Phase difference between the two SHM is 90o.

Therefore, resultant amplitude is

1 1
 
2
A R  2A ; E m2 A R2  m2 2A  m 2 A 2
2 2

463
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

2A
8. 2 v m  A  ------(1)
T
2A 4A total displacement
 v   (Average velocity = )
T/2 T total time
A vm v  2
but ,  from Eq. 1   v  4  m   v m
T 2  2  
k
9. 4 2  or 42 f 2 m  k
m
–9
or F  kx 0  4 2 f 2 mx 0 or F  4   2  10 28  1.68  10 27  1011 = 6.63 × 10 N
x0
10. 3 x 0 cos  2.1 t  cos 50 t  cos 52.1 t  cos 47.9 t 

2
–1 –1
 Constituent - frequencies are 52.1 s and 47.9 s .
1  2 2 2 
f or T   1.5 s
2 2  1 4.2

A  2t  T
11. 2 y  A sin  t    , here   0 , T = 24 sec.; Then,  A sin   or t  2s
2  T  12

1 1 A
m2  A 2  y 2  , U  m2 y 2 ;  2y  A y
2 2
12. 3 K or
2 2 2
Buoyant force d g
13. 3 In air: geff. = g; In water: g eff .  g  mass
g w g 
db 4
l
Now, t  2 , hence 2t0 = t.
g eff .
m m m
14. 2 t1  2  , t 2  2 and T  2
k1 k2 k eff .
1 1 1
When springs are connected in series, k  k  k or T 2  t12  t 22
eff . 1 2

2 2
15. 1 y  a sin  kx  t  ; k   0.5 ;    4 cm ;   2f  200 ; f = 100
 0.5
v  f  100  4  400 cm / sec
2  
16. 1 Standard equation y  a cos  vt  x    , Given y  0.2 cos   0.04t  0.02x  6 
  
2
Compare coefficients of x  0.02  ;   100

Phase difference 2 = path difference  .
  100
 Phase difference of = Path difference   25 cm
2 4 4
464
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

17. 1 Standard wave eqn. is y  a sin  t  kx  , comparing coeff. of t, with y  5 104 sin 100t  50x 

100 50
  100  2f ; f 
2 
2 2 
Again, compare coefficients of x; k = 50;  50 ;  
 50 25
50 
Velocity v  f    2 m/s
 25

 x 
18. 2 Maximum velocity of particle = a ; ie, v m  a ; y  3cos  10t   
 4 2

Hence   10, a  3  vm  3  10  30 m / s

T 10 10
19. 3 v   10, 000  100m / s
m 10 / 1000

1 T f1 D 2 l2 d2  2   2  1 2 f2 1
20. 3 For a string, f  T is same       ; 
Dl d f 2 D1 l1 d1  1   1  4 1 f1 2

1 2 2 3 3 4 4
21. 4 In case of a string, length l is broken up into , , , etc. in successive harmonoics.
2 2 2 2

1 2 2 3 3 4 4 f  v  9v 7v  f9  9v  2l  9  1
Thus l  or or or ; 9  2l ; f7 
f 7 2l 7v 7
2 2 2 2 9 2l

 2 3
22. 4 In a stationary wave, N  A   20 cm ;   80 cm ;     x  radian
4  2
2
I1  4a  3a  49
23. 2 Let the amplitudes be 4a and 3a; Intensity  (amplitude)  2
 
I 2  4a  3a  1

24. 3 I max  I1  I 2  2 I1I 2 cos 0    0 

I min.  I1  I 2  2 I1I 2 cos180o    180  ; o
I max.  I min.  2  I1  I2 

1/ 2
n2 T2 T2 101 n 2 101  1 
25. 4  , given n1 = 200 Hz;  ;   1  
n1 T1 T1 100 n1 100  100 

 1  n1 n1 200
n 2  n1  1    n1   n 2  n1   1
 200  200 200 200

465
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

26. 3

x
For stationary wave y  5sin cos 40t
3

2x 2vt
Standard eqn. y  2a sin cos
 

2x x 
  or 6   3 cm
 3 2
27. 3 Let distance of antinode from the wall = d; Amplitude is maximum at antinode.
 v 360
d    0.75 m  d  75 cm
4 4n 4  120
2
n1 T1 100 T1 T1  1  1 T
28. 2 For strings, n  T  400  T       2  16
2 2 2 T2  4  16 T1

1 df 1 dT
29. 3 For vibrating string, frequency f  k T ; log f  log k  log T ;  .
2 f 2 T

dT 5 1 2
Given df  5  2% ;   ; f = 500 Hz.
T f 2 100

30. 2 y  25cos  2t  x   a cos  t  kx  ; By comparison, a = 25,   2 ; 2f  2 ; f = 1

T
Velocity of a transverse wave in a stretched string v 
   r 
31. 1 ; 2

1 T 1 v A rB r 1
 v since, T,  are constant.  v  ;   B 
r  r v B rA 2rB 2
32. 1

; f – 5 = 440 Hz; f – 8 = 437 Hz  f  445 Hz by both methods.

33. 1

Particle velocity vp is related to the displacement of the particles from the mean position as
v 2 3
 0.1  0.1   0.05 
2 2
vp  2f A 2  y 2 ; v p  2 A 2  y2    ĵm / s
 0.5 50

466
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

34. 1

; As the string and the tube are in resonance n1 = n2.

Also |n1 – n| = 4 Hz; When T increases, n1 also increases.

It is given that beat frequency decreases to 2Hz.
n – n1 = 4; n = 4 + n1; As n1 = n2, n = 4 + n2
3v 3  340
Now n 2    340 Hz  n  4  n 2  344 Hz
4l 4  3 / 4
35. 1 A 2  a12  a 22  2a 1a 2 cos  ; when   180o , cos180o  1

A 2  a12  a 22  2a 1a 2 ; A = (a1 – a2)

36. 1 n1 –256 = +4 or n1 – 256 = –4
These are two answers. 256 is loaded with wax. It means frequency becomes less than 256. As per
question beats / sec increases after loading.
 n1  256  4 or n1  256  4  260 Hz
 v  v0 
37. 3 In Doppler’s effect, generally, n   v  v n . Here v, v0 and vs are in same direction.
 s

n n  v  v0  n v
vs  0, n     ; v  2v  2v 0 ; 2v0  v ; v 0 
2 2 v 2

n  n
 v  v0 
38. 3
 v  vs  under Doppler’s effect.
n  v  v0 
n' = 2n, v = 332, vs = 0; 2n  ; 2v = v + v0; v0 = v
v
The observer is moving towards source.; v0 = v = 332 m/sec.
 v  v0  nv
39. 4 In Doppler’s effect n   n v  v ; Given v0 = 0, n' = 3n 3n 
 s v  vs

2
3  v  vs   v ; 3v  3vs  v ; 3vs  2v ; vs  v
3

I max  a1  a 2   3  5   8   16
2 2 2

40. 3 Intensity  (amplitude2);    

Imin  a1  a 2  2
 3  5   2  1
2

41. 1 Frequency of 1st over tone of closed pipe = frequency at 3rd harmonic of closed pipe.
Frequency of 1st overtone of open pipe = frequency of 2nd harmonic of open pipe
      lc 3
2   3 ; 
 2l0   4lc  l0 4

467
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

p  v0  D H  D H  1  1 v 0  1
42. 2 v ;
D vH D0 16D H 16 4 v H 4

5 5
43. 3 1o F  C ;  Temperature coefficient of speed of sound in air = 0.61
9 9
Speed increased by 0.34 m/s.
v v
44. 4 For pth mode, For open pipe, n  p and closed pipe, n    2p  1
2l 4l
n v 2l n 2p
  2p  1  ; 
n 4l pv n  2p  1

2nvs 2nr 2  1000   2  3.14  5   0.7

45. 1 n  ; n  ; n  ; n  125 Hz
v v 352

 v  v0   v  v0 
46. 2 For no beat, the observer should walk towards s,    n1    n2
 v   v 

 v  v0  n 2 332  v 0 324 332

or   or 332  v  320 ; v 0   2 m/s
 v  v 0  n1 0 161

v v
47. 2 Second overtone of closed pipe = 5   ; First overtone of open pipe  2  
 4l   2l 

5v 2v v
   100 ;  Fundamental frequency of closed pipe =  4l   100 Hz
4l 2l  

2 2
I p  I  2p  4
48. 2 We know intensity I  p 2 ;  2   2   2   1   ; I 2  4I1
I1  p1  I1  p1  1

I 2  I1  4I  I 
 Percentage increase in intensity  I1
 100 =  1 1 100  300
 I1 

 Increase in intensity = 300%

I  I  I  I2
49. 2 L 2  L1  10log10  2  ; 60  50  10 log10  2   log10  2   1 ;  10
 I1   I1   I1  I1

I2   p0 2   p0 2
2

I  p 02 ;    10 ;  10
I1   p0 2 
 1 
 p0 1

468
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

LEVEL - II
1 1 1
1. 3 K m2  A 2  y 2   m2 A 2 cos 2 t  m2 A 2 1  cos 2t 
2 2 4

1
 E 1  cos t  ie,   2 or f   2f
2
2. 1 When negatively charged bob pendulum is moved over positively charged surface, the force acting on
pendulum is not only mg but also an electrical force Fe. Because of which restoring force is changed
 Fe  1
from  mg sin  to  mg sin  ,where g  g    ; As, T  g , hence T  T
m
2
 22 
2    12
m m 4 2 m  7 
3. 3 T  2  2 or T2  or k = 59.15 Nm–1
k eff . 2k 2k 4

1  GM  1
4. 4 T R  g ; T1   R  h
g  R2  g1

T1 R  h T1  T h T  h 2  320
  or   T1  T    104 sec ,
T R T R R 6.4  10 6

Loss of time in one day = 10–4 × 43200 = 4.32 sec.

mv 2 1
5. 4 T  3mg ; T  mg   2mg or   2gl , KE  m2  mgl 1  cos  
l 2
or   90o
mg
6. 4 Mean position of the particle is distance below the unstretched position of spring. Therefore,
k
mg k
amplitude of oscillation is A ;   2f  20 (f = 10 Hz)
k m

m 1 g 1
   v max  A   20   m/s
k 4002 400 2
2

5T
7. 3 m1  M, T1  T ; m 2  M  m, T2 
3
2
T1 2 m1 / k
2
m1 M M  m  T2   5T / 3  25
   or     
T2 2 m 2 / k m2 Mm M  T1   T  9

m 16
 
M 9

469
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

8. 2 Potential energy stored in the spring is given by

100  2 
2 2
1 U1  x 1 
U  kx 2 ;    or U  2 or U 2  400J ; U – U = 300 J
2 U2  x2  2  4 2 1

2 2 10 5
9. 2    (from figure). Also v max  A  10 (from figure)
T 8 2

5
 a max  A2  10.  25
2

2 
10. 4 As T  8   ; At t = 1 s, v = 2 m/s
 4


as x  A cos t  v  A sin t  At t = 1 s,  A sin 2
4

 1 8 2
  A. . 2  A
4 2 

    2t   / 3    
11. 3 x  A sin t  A sin  t   ;  A 2sin   .cos    
 3   2   6 

    3   
 A 2sin  t     x  3 A sin  t    v max  A 3
  6  2   6

12. 1 m = 0.05 kg, A = 0.12 m, v = 1 Hz; At t = 0, x0 = 0.24  x  x 0  A sin t

 x  0.24   0.12  sin  2  t  a    0.12  2  sin  2  t

2

 At t  0.5 s , a    0.12   4 2  sin  2  0.5   a0

13. 1 v 2  2  A 2  x 2  ;  9  2  A 2  16  .........(1)

and 16  2  A 2  9  .........(2)

Solving Eqs. (1) and (2), we get A = 5 cm and   1rad s 1

1 1
mA 2 2    200  10 3    5  102   1  2.5  10 4 J
2 2
E
2 2

470
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

 2t 
14. 4 Let the displacement of the particle be given by x  A sin t  A sin  
 T 

A A  2t1 
ie, when x= 0, t0 = 0. When x = ,  A sin  
2 2  T 

2t1  T T T
or  or t1   t1  t 0  0 
T 6 12 12 12

dy dv
15. 2 Given y = t2. The velocity of the lift varies with t as v   2t , a   2ms 2
dt dt

l l T g 5
T  2 and T  2 ;   
ga g T ga 6

16. 4 If a force F is applied to M, say to the right, let A be the distance moved by M. If the system is released,
it executes simple harmonic motion of amplitude A. If A1 and A2 are the extensions in springs k1 and k2
then A = (A1 + A2) and

F F 1 1 
F = k1 A1 = k2 A2  A1 
k1
and A 2 
k2 ; A  A1  A 2  F   
 k1 k 2 

F1 k2A
The amplitude of point P = amplitude of oscillations of spring k1 which is A1  k   k  k 
1 1 2

l T 1 l
17. 1 Time period of a simple pendulum, T  2  
g T 2 l

But at temperature o C , increase in length of pendulum.

l T 1 1
       9 107   30  20  = 4.5 × 10–6; or T  2.25 106 s
l T 2 2


18. 4 The string vibrates in two loops; L  2    ;   L  1.5 m
2

v 1 T 1 9  9.8  1.5
    70 Hz
   1.5 12 103

1 T 1 1 L 2 r2  2L  r 
19. 4  ; Here,   ;      1
L.r.  L.r  2 L1r1  L  2r 

471
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

10 Vg
20. 4 For tenth harmonic of a sonometer  
2l 

11 V     
For eleventh - harmonic of the sonometer   g  10   11    ; 21  121
2l 

  103 kg/m3 ;   5.8  103 kgm 3

21. 3 In the first case, the end of the heavy string connected to the movable support is node and the other end
v
is [Link] fundamental frequency, /4l or   4l ; 
4l
In the second case, both ends become node, and for fundamental frequency

 v
l;   2l ;   ;   2  2 120Hz   240Hz
2 2l
22. 4 Particle velocity = – wave velocity × gradient of displacement curve.
Based on the above equation, all the statements are correct.

1 V g
23. 3  where  is the density of the stone.
2L 

1 V    g   l2   L2  l 2
 ;  2 ;  1 ;  = specific gravity of stone.
2l  L2 l L2
  L2

24. 3 Suppose Ii and Ir are intensities of incident and reflected waves.

2
Ir    1 
Reflection coefficient   
Ii    1 

2
5 
v1 T / m1 m2 25 5   1
3   1
where,        Reflection coefficient 
v2 T / m2 m1 9 3 2
 5  16
  1
3 

T T
25. 2 v We get v 
 m/l
Minimum time interval between two consecutive pulses is
2l m/l 102 / 0.4
t   2l  2  0.4  0.1 sec
v T 1.6

472
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

26. 3 For a stationary wave, the other constituent wave should travel in the opposite direction so here
y  a cos  kx  t   a cos  kx  t 

 a  cos kx cos t  sin kx sin t   cos kx cos t  sin kx sin t   2a sin  kx  sin  t 

Which is an equation for stationary wave.

o
27. 2 On reflection from a denser medium, there is a phase reversal of 180 .

2
New amplitude   0.6  0.4  Equation of reflected wave is
3

 x   x
y  0.4 sin 2  t   180o   0.4sin 2  t  
 2   2
28. 1 Here A = 0.05 m and 2.5  20
v 350
 = 8 cm = 0.08 m;    4375 Hz
 0.08

2
  2  2 4375 = 27500 rad/s; k  78.5


Using y  A sin  kx  t  we get y = 0.05 sin (78.5 x – 27500 t) m

1 1 1 1 1 1
29. 1 We get 1l1   2l2   3l3 ; ie,  :  :   l1 : l2 : l3 or l1 : l2 : l3  : :  6 : 3 : 2
1 2 3 1 2 3

6 3 2
Hence l1  1.21  0.66 m ; l2  1.21  0.33 m ; l3  1.21  0.22 m
11 11 11
30. 1 Fundamental frequency of a musical string

1 F 1 L 2 124
   or L2   90  60 cm
2L   2 L1 186

 2  
31. 3 vmax  a a1  2A sin k  2A sin   2A sin  2 A
8  8 4
v1 a1 2A 1 2 
   a 2  2A sin  2A
v2 a 2 2A 2  4
2 2 2 2
I1  A1   1   1   2   1   1 
32. 3               1:1
I 2  A 2   2   2   1   2   1 

2 2
33. 4  x where x  3.5 ;   3.5  7 
 

473
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

34. 3


x   SDP  PD   SD  n ------(i); x    SDP  2x  PD   SD   2n  1 ------(ii)
2

 v v 336
(ii) – (i)  2x   ; f   420 Hz
2 2f 4x 4  0.2
35. 3 D = 5 cm


;  l  e  l  0.6r  l  0.3 D ;
4

  4  l  0.3D   4 16  0.3  5 = 70 cm = 0.7 m; v  f  480  0.7  336 m / s

O2 VO2  H 2 VH 2 16  V  1 4V v mix H 2 1 1

36. 2 mix  ; ;   
VO2  VH2 V  4V v H2 mix 4 2

 H2 1270
vmix    635 m / s
2 2
2
I   r2  r 
37. 3 L1  L 2  10 log10  1   10log10  22  ; 40  20  10 log10  2 
 I2   r1   r1 

r  r  r
20  20 log10  2  ; log10  2   1  2  10 ; r2  10r1  10 m
 r1   r1  r1

38. 3

900  900  ut
 t; 1800 = (u + v) t = (u + 330) × 5; u = 30 m/s
v

474
 [Study Package - Physics - Part- I]

39. 2

2x1 v 330 2x 2
 1  x1    165 m ;  2  x 2  v  330m
v 2 2 v

d  x1  x 2  165  330  495 m

40. 1

 60   25
2 2
Path difference x  SPO  SO  2  120  10 m
For constructive interference
10 10 10 10
x  n  10  n ;  m;   10, , , .... m
n 2 3 4
41. 2 y1  4sin 500t  A1 sin 2f1t ; f1  250 Hz

y 2  2 sin 506t  A 2 sin 2f 2 t ; f 2  253 Hz

Beat frequency ie, number of beat/s = f1 – f2 = 3; Number of beats/min = 3 × 60 = 180

T1 8 l1 36 r1 4 1 1
42. 4  ,  ,  , 
T2 1 l2 35 r2 1 2 2

f1 l1 T1 2 r22 36 360  36
 .  ; f1 > f2 , f2 = 360; f1   370
f 2 l2 T2 1 r12 35 35

Beat frequency  f1  f 2  10 Hz

v
43. 1 The difference in successive frequencies of pipe (Closed or open) =
2l

v 340
 595  425  170 ;  170  l  1 m
2l 2l
Ratio of frequencies; 425 : 595 : 765 : = 5 : 7 : 9 ie, odd numbers; ie, closed pipe.

475
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

44. 2 
As temperature decreases, frequency of air column decreases f  v  T . 
Beat frequency decreases ie, frequency of air column is greater than tuning fork.
Let n : frequency of tuning fork
f 273  51 324 18
At 51oC, f = n + 4; At 16oC, f' = n + 1;   
f 273  16 289 17
n  4 18
  n  50 Hz
n  1 17
It may be that at 16oC, frequency of air column goes below n.
n4 273  51 18
At 51oC, f = n + 4; At 16oC, f' = n – 1;   ; n = 86 Hz
n 1 273  16 17
45. 4 Resonance will occur at lengths
 3 5 7 7  3
, , , , ........ ;   99  45 ;  54    36 cm
4 4 4 4 4 4 2
v 340
46. 2    1m
f 340
 3 5
Resonance lengths are , , , .... = 25 cm, 75 cm, 125 cm; 125 cm is not possible.
4 4 4

h = 120 – 75 = 45 cm

 v 
 v  v0   v  10 
47. 2 ; f  f  f   1.22 f
 v  vs   v v 
 10 

48. 2

vs  R  0.5  20  10 m / s ; Minimum frequency will be heard when source is at B

 v   340 
f min  f    385    374 Hz
 v  v s   340  10 

476